Category Archives: Interior

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

If your PS4 doesn’t have enough space to install a game, you can use an extended storage device to add more storage.

What you need to get started

When you format a storage device for use as extended storage, you can use it to install your applications. You can also move applications from PS4™ system storage to extended storage.

  1. PS4 system with system software version 4.50 or later.
  2. External hard disk drive (HDD)*.
  • SuperSpeed USB 5Gbps or later.
  • 250 GB minimum, 8 TB maximum capacity.

*Proper operation is not guaranteed for all external hard disc drive models.

The following SuperSpeed USB connections are supported on PS4 consoles:

  • SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.0/USB 3.1 Gen1/USB 3.2 Gen1)
  • SuperSpeed USB 10 Gbps (USB 3.1 Gen2/USB 3.2 Gen2/USB 3.2 Gen1x2)
  • SuperSpeed USB 20 Gbps (USB 3.2 Gen2x2).

What you can store on the formatted extended storage device

  • You can only install applications and add-ons on extended storage.
  • You can download add-ons to extended storage, even if the related application is installed in system storage.
  • Updates are downloaded to where their corresponding applications are installed.
  • You cannot save application saved data, themes or screenshot/video clips to extended storage.
  • Applications installed on extended storage appear in the content area as normal.
  • Applications installed on extended storage do not disappear from the content area when you disconnect the extended storage device.

An error message will appear if you start an application installed on extended storage when the extended storage device is disconnected.

  • You can only use one device for extended storage at a time. Even if you have connected two devices that are formatted for use as extended storage, only one can be active as extended storage.
  • You can connect a second HDD for use with Media player, but you can’t connect two HDDs for Games, apps and add-ons.
  • Connection via a USB hub is not supported. You’ll need to connect the extended storage device directly to your PS4™ system.
  • Make sure you do not disconnect during the shutdown process or when putting the PS4™ into rest mode.

How to format the HDD as PS4 extended storage

  1. Go to Settings > Devices > USB Storage Devices.
  2. Select the USB storage device to format and choose Format as Extended Storage .

To change the install location of your applications, you need to choose where you would like to save them. You cannot change the application install location during a download.

  1. Select Settings > Storage, and then press the OPTIONS button.
  1. Select Application Install Location > Extended Storage.
  1. Applications will now be set to install on extended storage.

You can move saved applications between the PS4™ system storage and extended storage.

Reminders: If an application is found both in system storage and on extended storage, you’ll need to delete it from either system storage or extended storage to use the extended storage device. You can install add-ons on extended storage, even if the related application is installed in system storage.

Find out how to make the most of PlayStation®Plus online storage on PlayStation®4 consoles.

What is PlayStation Plus online storage?

PlayStation Plus online storage lets you save your game progress to the cloud and pick up your adventures on any other console with that game installed.

  • You can save up to 100 GB of PS4 saved data and 100 GB of PS5 saved data. The number of PS4 saved data files you can store is limited to 1000.

How to set up PS4 console auto-uploads

Automatic uploads add saved data from your primary PS4 console to online storage:

  1. Select your local user* and go to Settings > Power Saving Settings > Set Features Available in Rest Mode > tick the check box next to Stay Connected to the Internet.
  2. Next, go to Settings > Application Data Management > Auto-Upload > tick the check box next to Enable Automatic Uploads.

*Your saves won’t auto-upload from a PS4 console that is temporarily activated on your account. Always remember to manually upload your saves when playing on a friend’s console.

How to manage PlayStation Plus online storage

PS4 console: upload to online storage

If automatic uploads aren’t set up, or you want to upload a save from a friend’s PS4 console, you will need to start uploads manually:

  1. Select your local user and go to Settings > Application Data Management > Saved Data in System Storage > Upload to Online Storage.
  2. Select the title and then the file you would like to upload and select Yes to overwriting the cloud file.
  1. Select your local user and go to Settings > Application Data Management > Saved data in Online Storage > Download to System Storage.
  2. Select the title and then the file you would like to download and select Yes to overwriting the system storage file.
  1. Select your local user and go to Settings > Application Data Management > Saved data in Online Storage > Delete.
  2. Select the title and then the file you would like to delete and select Yes.

When should I use online storage?

  • Pick up play on a friend’s system

If you sign in to PSN on a friend’s PS4 console or PS5 console, you can pick up from the last save on your online storage. Don’t forget to manually upload your saves as they won’t upload automatically from your friend’s PlayStation console.

  • Upgrade/replacement

If you get a new PlayStation console, just sign in to PlayStation Network and download your saved data.

  • Crossplay games

These games can be downloaded and played on more than one type of PlayStation console. For example, if a game is compatible with both PS4 consoles and PS Vita, you can start playing at home, upload your save and continue later on your PS Vita.

  • PlayStation Now

If you subscribe to PlayStation Now and pick up a game that you previously played on a PS4 console, you can start from the last point you saved to online storage.

Внешние жесткие диски, флеш-накопители, USB-накопители, флеш-карты памяти и другие устройства, такие как iPod, можно подключать к Mac с помощью кабеля Thunderbolt, USB или USB-C или беспроводным способом с помощью Bluetooth.

Кроме того, устройства хранения данных (например, внешние жесткие диски) могут быть доступны в сети. Дополнительно Вы можете вставлять карты флэш-памяти из камеры или другого устройства в слот для карт SDXC Вашего компьютера Mac. Если Ваш Mac не оснащен слотом для карт памяти, Вы можете получить доступ к данным на карте флэш-памяти с помощью подключенного устройства считывания карт.

После подключения устройства хранения данных можно перемещать файлы с компьютера Mac на устройство хранения данных или обратно.

Если Ваш Mac оборудован портом USB-C, см. раздел Использование кабелей USB‑C с компьютером Mac.

Подключение устройства хранения данных

Подключите устройство к Mac через прилагаемый к устройству кабель, затем просмотрите содержимое подключенного устройства в Finder.

Если разъем на кабеле не подходит к компьютеру Mac, используйте адаптер. См. документацию, прилагаемую к устройству.

Перемещение файлов на внешнее устройство хранения данных или обратно

Убедитесь, что Mac подключен к внешнему устройству хранения данных (например, через USB-кабель или по сети).

Нажмите значок Finder в панели Dock, чтобы открыть окно Finder. Затем выполните одно из следующих действий для переноса файлов.

Перемещение файлов на устройство хранения данных. Выберите один или несколько файлов на рабочем столе или в папке, затем перетяните их на устройство хранения данных в списке «Места» в боковом меню Finder.

Перемещение файлов с устройства хранения данных. Выберите устройство хранения из списка «Места» в боковом меню Finder, затем перетяните файлы в нужное место на Mac.

Получение прав на просмотр или работу с файлами в устройстве хранения данных

Если Вы являетесь администратором компьютера Mac, выполните одно из следующих действий.

Пройдите аутентификацию, как администратор. В зависимости от способа доступа к файлу Вам может быть предложено войти в систему в качестве администратора.

Измените настройки общего доступа и права доступа для файла. Инструкции см. в разделе Настройка общего доступа к файлам на Mac.

Если Вы не являетесь администратором компьютера Mac, попросите администратора предоставить Вам доступ к нужным файлам.

Извлечение устройства хранения данных

На компьютере Mac выполните одно из следующих действий.

Выберите объект для извлечения и выберите «Файл» > «Извлечь».

В боковом меню Finder нажмите кнопку «Извлечь» рядом с именем объекта.

На рабочем столе перетяните в Корзину объект, который нужно извлечь.

Если не удается извлечь устройство хранения данных, возможно, один или несколько файлов на устройстве хранения данных используются другим приложением или другим пользователем. См. разделы Невозможность извлечения диска из Mac по причине использования его приложением и Невозможность извлечения диска по причине использования его другим пользователем.

Recently, when I plug any USB memory stick into my PC, it shows as a Local Disk rather than a USB Drive. This means that certain programmes do not recognise that I have a removable device plugged into the PC.

However, if I plug the memory sticks into my laptop, then they show as USB Drives.

How do I correct this so that USB memory stick are properly identified as USB Drives?

  • Subscribe
  • Subscribe to RSS feed

Report abuse

Replies (5) 

Thank you for reaching out. I am Harun an Independent Advisor and Microsoft User. I will gladly help you out.

This issue your are facing is unfortunately caused by the USB Flash drive for some reason the device is registering itself as a Mass Storage device, not a Removable Storage device.

To Solve the issue there is a small application called BootIt hard to find in most cases you can download it from the following link:

Don’t be frighted that the page is Russian the app is normal English.

to download it you will See

СКАЧАТЬ \ DOWNLOAD written in blue and bellow it

BootIt v1.07 ; BootIt_v107.rar; size: 361 419 bytes

Click on BootIt_v107.rar

a small zip file will be downloaded. Extract it and start the exe.

Select the Drive Letter of the USB make sure its the right one you don’t wanna end up formatting C: Drive,

After you have selected the USB drivers letter click ” Flip Removable Bit “,

Un plug and replug the usb afterwards.

Please feel free to ask for more Information and let me know if this helps.

Independent Advisor
Harun

Report abuse

1 person found this reply helpful

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn't help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

Thanks for the response. Whilst I have not had a chance to try the tool that you suggested, I am not convinced that this is the correct approach. The underlying assumption seems to be that the issue is with the USB flash drive itself, which I do not think is the case.

I only have an issue with USB flash drives on the PC. On my laptop, USB flash drives are correctly identified as USB Drives. In fact, I have the same problem for the 3 flash drives that I tried on both the PC and laptop.

On the PC, USB flash drives are identified as Local Disk. On my laptop, the same USB flash drives are identified as USB Drives.

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn't help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

Unfortunately your assumption on this matter is still wrong.

Windows recognizes USB flash drives as removable devices due to the presence of a special descriptor bit RMB (removable media bit) on each of the devices. If the system determines that RMB=1 when polling the connected device using StorageDeviceProperty function, it concludes that this device is a removable drive. Thus, in order to convert the USB-flash to the hard disk it is enough to modify this descriptor. You can do this directly (which is quite risky because of the differences in the device-specific hardware implementations, and not always possible), or indirectly – by replacing the response of a USB device using a special driver, which allows to filter out the information in the device response.

Of course you got a point by evaluating it comparing it with two Different Pc’s. But to pass specific certifications from Windows 8 onwards usb flash drives received some inbuilt changes by their manufacturers. These can cause the USB drive to be recognized as HDD on 1 pc while being a removable on another.

Independent Advisor
Harun

Report abuse

1 person found this reply helpful

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn't help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

Thank you for the additional information. I have been thinking about this further and doing a little searching for any similar problems.

The reasons that I do not think that the issue is with the USB Flash Drives but rather with the PC are:

  • The USB Flash Drive was successfully recognised on the PC as a USB Drive by an application on 16th May
  • On 3rd June, I noticed that the application did not recognise that a USB Drive was inserted and that the USB Drive was being shown as Local Disk.
  • I have since sampled

The only changes to the PC between 16th May and 3rd June are the updating of several drivers through Auslogics Driver Updater (including update of driver for USB Mass Storage Device; reverting to previous version of this drive made no difference) and disconnecting the PC to move to another room.

I also noticed that under events for the USB Drives, there were “Device . was not migrated due to partial or ambiguous match” events.

Searching, I found an entry on the Microsoft Forum:

Devices “not migrated” after Nov. update: https://answers.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/forum/all/devices-not-migrated-after-nov-update/9839fc24-ad4f-4000-b235-b2eae437c97b.

A Microsoft agent suggested that this could be due to the chipset drivers having problems and to try uninstalling and re-installing the chipset drivers. However, the originator of the question did not try this suggestion.

PlayStation 4 Pro allows players to transfer data and saves from their original PS4 or PS4 Slim to the PS 4 Pro.

Want to transfer data from your PS4 to your new PS4 Pro? You'll be able to transfer your user settings, games, saved data, screen shots, and video clips.

Method 1: Wired Transfer

By connecting both PS4's to the same home network, you can transfer your data via a wired LAN. To do this, you'll need a router and two Ethernet cables. Before proceeding, make sure both PS4's are detected, powered on, and configured on your local network.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Turn both units on with your PS4 Pro connected to your television and log in to your PS4 Pro. The transfer option is located under System, then Transfer Data From Another PS4.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Once the other PS4 is detected, wait for the prompt to hold down the power button on the original PS4. Do so when prompted. Then confirm when prompted.

You'll be given a lits of options to transfer. Choose what you want then click Next.

Begin the transfer when prompted. Note that transfers can take quite a long time!

Method 2: Cloud

If you have PS Plus, you've likely got some extra Sony Cloud storage laying around. You can move your saves by navigating to Settings, then Application Data Management, then Saved Data in System, then Upload to Online Storage.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

What about your videos and screenshots? You can easily transfer these using an external hard drive or USB stick.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

These combined methods don't actually transfer your games, relying on you to redownload from PSN, or reinstall from discs.

Method 3: Backup/Restore

Have a larger or SSD drive in your orginal PS4? Need to transfer the data and preserve your copy of P.T.? Maybe you just want to sell the old PS4 first so you can afford the Pro. The Backup/Restore feature works when using between all 3 models of the PS4.

Note: you will need an external drive large enough for your games and formated to fat32. Larger drives can only be formated to fat32 using a 3rd party tool like "guiformat". If your external is not large enough consider deleting some of the games to make it fit (except for P.T. of course).

On your orignal PS4 plug in your external drive and go to Settings -> System -> Backup/Restore -> Backup. You will have the option to backup everything or just your saves and game captures. Note: if you don't backup the games you will have to redownload them on the Pro. The process will start, depending on how much data this will take anyware from 2-8 hours. After that you will have a backup of your orginal PS4 on the external drive. Note: The backup does not contain your trophies, you will have to sync those to the network. The PS4 will give you a warrning if you havn't done this.

When ready, plug your external into your Pro and go to Settings -> System -> Backup/Restore -> Restore. Select the backup file. The restore will roughly take the same amount of time as the backup.

В этой статье рассказывается, как использовать жесткий диск Seagate Expansion.Жесткие диски Seagate Expansion поставляются без программного обеспечения для резервного копирования и отформатированы для использования с ОС Windows. Для начала работы на компьютере с ОС Windows просто включите питание и подключите кабель USB. Значок жесткого диска будет отображен в окне My Computer/This PC (Мой компьютер/Этот компьютер) или Windows Explorer/File Explorer (Проводник Windows/Проводник).

Для использования с компьютерами Mac диск необходимо отформатировать, иначе он будет доступен только для чтения (то есть на него нельзя будет записывать данные). Дополнительные сведения см. в разделе с инструкциями для Mac.

Использование жесткого диска с ОС Windows

  1. Перетаскивание.
  2. Копирование и вставка.

Перенос данных на жесткий диск с компьютера Windows вручную

Перетаскивание

  1. Откройте первое нужное окно, дважды щелкнув значок My Computer/This PC (Мой компьютер/Этот компьютер).
  2. Если в верхнем правом углу окна отображается символ ( ), щелкните его.
    Вместо него появится следующий символ: .
  3. Теперь можно изменить размер окна. Переместите курсор мыши в угол окна.
  4. Щелкните и удерживайте нажатой кнопку мыши в углу окна.
  5. Переместите мышь, удерживая кнопку нажатой, и угол окна последует за курсором. Измените размер окна таким образом, чтобы оно занимало только часть экрана.
  6. Найдите значок диска Seagate Expansion в папке My Computer/This PC (Мой компьютер/Компьютер/Этот компьютер). Он должен отображаться с буквой диска, например «E:» или «F:» (если вы не изменили эти настройки). Откройте папку My Documents (Мои документы), дважды щелкнув ее значок.
  7. Измените размер окна описанным выше способом, чтобы каждое из окон занимало только часть экрана.
  8. Теперь на экране два окна. Одно окно — источник, а второе — пункт назначения.
    (Щелкните, чтобы развернуть изображение.)
    How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro
  9. Щелкните документ, который требуется переместить, и удерживайте нажатой кнопку мыши. Он будет выделен, и его полупрозрачное изображение будет перемещаться вместе с курсором.
  10. Перетащите это полупрозрачное изображение на значок внешнего диска (в данном примере это диск «V:»).
    (Щелкните, чтобы развернуть изображение.)
    How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro
  11. Отпустите кнопку мыши, и файл будет автоматически скопирован на внешний диск.
  12. Дважды щелкните букву внешнего диска.
  13. В окне отобразится содержимое внешнего диска.
    (Щелкните, чтобы развернуть изображение.)
  14. Задача выполнена. Описанное действие называется перетаскиванием.
  1. Дважды щелкните, чтобы открыть каталог, в котором хранится файл для копирования. Например, это может быть папка My Documents (Мои документы).
  2. Найдите и щелкните правой кнопкой файл или папку, которую необходимо скопировать.
  3. Отобразится контекстное меню. Выберите пункт Copy (Копировать).
    (Щелкните, чтобы развернуть изображение).
    How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro
  4. Теперь файл или папка скопирована в оперативную память компьютера.
  5. Дважды щелкните значок папки My Computer/This PC (Мой компьютер/Этот компьютер), чтобы открыть ее.
  6. Найдите значок диска Seagate Expansion в папке My Computer/This PC (Мой компьютер/Этот компьютер). Он должен отображаться с буквой диска, например «E:» или «F:» (если вы не изменили эти настройки). Дважды щелкните внешний диск.
  7. Окно изменится, и в нем отобразится содержимое внешнего диска.
  8. На панели в верхней части окна выберите пункт Edit (Правка).
    В качестве альтернативы можно щелкнуть правой кнопкой пустое место в окне, чтобы отобразилось контекстное меню.
  9. Выберите пункт Paste (Вставить).
    (Щелкните, чтобы развернуть изображение.)
    How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro
  10. В окне отобразится скопированный файл или папка. Копирование завершено.
  11. Задача выполнена. Это действие называется копированием и вставкой.

Для использования с компьютерами Mac диск необходимо отформатировать. После этого система начнет его распознавать, и диск можно будет использовать для переноса данных вручную и автоматического резервного копирования с помощью ПО Time Machine.

Перенос данных на жесткий диск с компьютера Mac вручную

Файлы на жесткий диск Expansion можно копировать различными способами: с помощью команд Copy/Paste (Копировать/Вставить) в меню File (Файл) или в контекстном меню, перетаскиванием, а также с помощью клавиатурных команд. Обратите внимание: во всех этих случаях операцию контролирует Mac OS. Подробное описание методов копирования и вставки см. в документации к компьютеру Macintosh или в инструкциях ниже.

Вырезание и вставка — это перемещение файлов или папок из одного местоположения в другое в пределах тома.
Копирование и вставка — это дублирование файлов или папок в другом местоположении (папке, каталоге, томе и т. д.).

Seagate's new officially licensed external 2TB hard drive lets you download, play, and store more of your favorite games.

Today, we’re excited to introduce the officially licensed Seagate Game Drive for PlayStation 4 systems. The new Game Drive gives PS4 gamers an extra boost in storage, with amazingly simple portability that allows you to carry your games with you.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or proHow to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Our new Game Drive for PS4 has been rigorously tested and is optimized for PS4 systems. It features a small sleek design and branding that pairs well with your PS4. Most of all, the large increase in storage capacity lets you hang on to your favorite older titles and add-ons while still leaving room for new games. With a hefty 2TB capacity, you can free up space on your PS4 system’s internal drive and consolidate approximately 50* games into a single location. (Do note, once content is stored on the drive, the content can only be accessed by the account that transferred the content.)

The Seagate Game Drive enhances the players’ gaming experience with easy installation, and direct connection via USB cable. Setup is easy, since the PS4 automatically recognizes your Game Drive and helps get it up and running in approximately three minutes.

Here are some of my favorite benefits of the Seagate Game Drive for PS4:

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

  • Instantly adds 2TB for approximately 50 more games*
  • Full-speed gaming, just like playing from the PS4 system’s internal drive
  • Optimized to work with every model of PS4 (requires system software version 4.50 or greater)
  • Easy to bring to a friend’s place to play your games on another PS4 system (do note, once content is stored on the drive, the content can only be accessed by the account that transferred the content)
  • Truly plug-and-play; doesn’t require additional cables
  • Doesn’t need to plug into the wall — USB powered

The new Game Drive for PS4 is available next week in North America for $89.99 USD (MSRP) / $119.99 CAD (MSRP) — look for it at your favorite retailers and online. Check out Seagate.com for more details.

*Based on an average storage requirement of 39GB for PS4 games published on or before June 2018.

Four valid & simple ways about how to rename external hard drive will be demonstrated in this post. Read it and you can choose one way to change its volume label.

By Bryce / Last Updated March 10, 2022

How to rename external hard drive without data loss?

I have an 500GB WD external hard drive connected to my Windows 10 PC and I plan to take it as a backup device for important data. Thus, I want to rename it as backup, so that I can recognized it easier. I know that I can change its volume label during formatting. But I don’t want to lose the data stored on it. Is there a way to change volume label without formatting? If is, how to rename external hard drive partition without formatting?

Four effective ways to rename external hard drive in Windows

Volume label is an optional name that assigned to a drive and you can label a drive to find out the drive more effectively. Actually, you can easily change the volume label for your external hard drive partition in Windows 10/8.1/8/7. Here are listed four methods on how to rename external hard drive safely and quickly. You can pick up one based on your preference.

Method 1. Rename external hard drive partition in File Explorer

Firstly, double click This PC in Windows 10 to open Windows Explorer. If you are running Windows 7, double click My Computer. Then, you can follow the steps given below:

1. Locate the partition on the external hard drive that you want to rename, right-click it and choose “Rename”.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

2. In the pop-up window, you can type the label that you want to give to the drive and click Enter. Here I input “backup”.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Method 2. Change label for external hard drive in Disk Management

Press Windows + X and choose Disk Management in Windows 10 to open Disk Management. Then, do as the following steps:

1. Right-click the drive that you need to rename and choose “Properties

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

2. Here you can type the name that you want to add to your external drive.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

3. Then click “OK”.

Method 3. Rename external hard drive using CMD

First of all, type “cmd” in the Search box, right click the program and choose “Run as administrator”.

Then, type “label e: backup” in the pop-up window and click Enter to change the label for the drive.

Notes:

“e” refers to the drive letter assigned to the external hard drive partition that you want to rename.

You can replace “backup” with the label that you want to give to the partition on the external hard drive.

Method 4. Change the name of external hard dive via third party freeware

You can also turn to third-party partition freeware for Windows PCs, AOMEI Partition Assistant Standard to change the label of a partition without reformatting. It can work with Windows 10/8.1/8/7, XP, and Vista. Free download it and follow the listed steps.

1. Install and run AOMEI Partition Assistant Standard. In the main interface, right-click the external hard drive partition whose name needs changing and choose Change Label.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

2. In the small pop-up window, enter a new label in the Input Box field and click OK.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

3. You’ll be the main interface where you can preview the operation result. Click Apply and Proceed to commit it.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Notes:

For FAT/FAT32 partition, the label can be set up to 11 characters; for NTFS partition, it is up to 32 characters.

If you change the label for system partition (Usually it is C: drive), operations need to enter in reboot mode to complete.

Wrap things up

Now, surely you have realized how to rename external hard drive without formatting and data loss in Windows 10/8.1/8/7.

In fact, apart from changing label for a drive, AOMEI Partition Assistant Standard allows you to clone external hard drive, format large partition to FAT32, convert NTFS into FAT32 for external hard drive, etc. If you upgrade to its Professional version, you can enjoy more functions, such as migrating OS to GPT disk, converting system disk from MBR into GPT without data loss and so on.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro How to transfer files from a Mac desktop to an external hard drive

Transferring files from your Mac desktop to a USB flash drive or an external hard disk seems to be a simple task, right? Well, that might not be as easy as you think, especially if you are more familiar with Windows. As you probably know, external drives come pre-formatted using the NTFS file system, which Mac OS X can successfully read, but cannot write on.

How to deal with this problem

So, if you are unable to copy files to your external hard disk or USB stick, the problem is that you’re dealing with an NTFS-formatted drive. Luckily, all you have to do is re-format your drive using the HFS+ file system to turn it into a standard drive for Mac OS X. Moreover, you won’t even have to search for other applications to do that, because your operating system comes with a tool called “Disk Utility” that can help you perform this task.

All you have to do is connect your external drive to your Mac, launch the app, click on the icon of the disk you want to format, navigate to the “Erase” tab and click on the “Erase” button while having “Mac OS X Extended” selected as the volume format, as seen in the image below. If you like, you can also add a name for your future volume.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro Volume Format

Simple, right? After the process if complete, you should be able to freely transfer your files to your extended drive without any problems whatsoever, either by using the copy/paste method or by dragging and dropping your items onto the drive’s window.

While Mac OS X can read NTFS drives and write on HFS+ ones, Windows’ behaviour is quite the opposite, as it is able to read HTF+ drives, but writes on NTFS ones. However, if you want to use an external hard drive or any other type of external storage device on both systems, you can do that by formatting it using the FAT32 file system. However, you should know that it is not as reliable as the other options.

Transfer the files from your Mac to an external drive

The process of transferring files from your Mac to an external drive is simple, but if you are not sure how to do it, then following these steps will get you through it.

Step 1

Connect your external drive to your Mac and wait for the icon of the plugged-in drive to appear

Step 2

Double-click the icon of the drive in order to open it (its window).

Step 3

Either drag-and-drop the files to the opened drive’s window or copy and paste the data you want to transfer

Step 4

After the copy process is completed, safely eject the drive either by dragging its icon to the Trash bin or hold the “Ctrl” key and click on the drive’s icon to access the eject option.

Step 5

Now you can safely disconnect your drive, without causing any damage to it.

Conclusion

As you can see, transferring files from your Mac system to your external hard drives is quite a simple process. Now you can safely back up important files to an USB drive or simply transfer data between computers with just a few clicks of a mouse.

If you have any questions or comments about this topic, feel free to leave me a message in the section below.

Technically speaking, there’s no reason why you couldn’t use the same hard drive for backing up your internal drive and storing overflow data that don’t fit on your internal drive. But doing so is a really bad idea.

[Have a tech question? Ask PCWorld Contributing Editor Lincoln Spector. Send your query to [email protected].]

First of all, if there are files you’re storing exclusively on the external hard drive, those files need to be backed up. Remember the two primary rules of backup:

  1. You should never have only one copy of anything.
  2. The original and the copy should not be on the same drive–or even in the same computer.

There’s another issue: A backup drive should only be plugged in when you’re backing up or restoring from a backup. Why? Because the same fire, flood, burglary or malware that destroys your main, internal storage could also destroy the backup.

Ideally, your internal storage should be large enough for all of your files. If it isn’t, consider one of these options:

Install a second internal drive. Once it’s installed, copy the overflow files now on the external drive to their new home. Use the external drive exclusively to backup both internal drives.

You’ll find this considerably faster and more convenient than storing files externally.

But you’ll need a PC with a spare drive bay. That’s common in desktops, but rare in laptops.

Replace your internal drive with a bigger one. This is also fast and convenient, and it solves the drive bay problem. But it takes more work to set up. Luckily, I’ve already provided instructions.

Use two external hard drives. Use one external drive for overflow files, and the other for backup. This is the best option if you’re nervous about installing internal drives, or if your Windows 8 tablet won’t allow you to upgrade them.

For better speed, I strongly recommend a USB 3.0 connection for the overflow drive. Also, make sure the backup drive is large enough to back up the data on both your internal and external drives.

Pick the hard drive or flash drive you want to use – you can use external or portable hard drives, too – anything with a USB connection. For this, I am using a Linksys E4200 Dual-Band Wi-Fi router and a 64GB flash drive.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Pop it into the USB port on the back of your Wi-Fi router, and then you’ll need admin access to your router. From a computer on your network, open the browser, enter your router’s IP into a browser and enter your password; these will be the IP and password you used when initially setting up your Wi-Fi router.

Router Settings

Then in the router’s settings, look for drive storage, file sharing, or something similar. You can see in my example below that the drive is recognized, and there are different options for the drive available, including creating a share.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

You can use your Wi-Fi router to create a network share of the folder if that function is available, but I prefer to use Windows. The steps in this article will work for everyone, no matter what brand of router or computer experience level.

Open the Network folder and clear the path in File Explorer and replace it with “\\routerip For example, I would type in: \\192.168.1.1 and hit Enter.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

After hitting Enter, your drive will show up in the File Explorer as a shared folder with the name you gave it earlier. From here, you might want to pin it to Start in Windows 8.x or just create a shortcut to it on the desktop.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

If you want to access that drive from other computers on your network, you’ll want to map it as a network drive. That’s what I am doing with the shot below – mapping it as a drive on a Windows 7 system.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

You can use the drive connected to your Wi-Fi router just like you would any drive. This process is a good solution if you have a family situation and want to share music, videos, and photos with everyone else.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Do keep in mind that this drive will be open to everyone in your household, so you don’t want to store any confidential or otherwise sensitive files on it.

Summing Up

The performance will vary based on several factors: your router, network traffic, file size, etc. If you have a new router with a USB 3.0 port, you’ll want to use a USB 3.0 compatible as well for best performance.

If you’re looking for a new Gigabit router that has USB 3.0 capability, here are a couple of affordable ones you might want to consider:

  • ASUS RT-AC87U Wireless-AC2400 Dual-Band Gigabit Router, which has 2.0 and 3.0 ports built-in and includes the latest 802.11ac standard as well as b/g/n.
  • NETGEAR AC1600 Dual Band Wi-Fi Gigabit Router, which contains a USB 3.0 port.

Or, if you’re comfortable with USB 2.0 speeds, check out the ASUS RT-N66U Dual-Band Wireless-N900 Gigabit Router, which is more affordable at around $100.

There are several makes and models to choose from, but when purchasing a new router, make sure to have at least a USB 2.0 port onboard to make sharing files at home easy.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or proWesley Hilliard | Oct 02, 2020

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

AppleInsider is supported by its audience and may earn commission as an Amazon Associate and affiliate partner on qualifying purchases. These affiliate partnerships do not influence our editorial content.

Thanks to iPadOS there are more ways than ever to connect to external media drives and networks from your iPad and iPad Pro. Here’s how to get it done.

The iPad Pro and the new iPad Air 4 both have USB-C ports which make connecting external drives and accessories easier than ever. Other iPads still use Lightning connectors, but using the right dongle can get your external storage connected too.

The USB-C port found on iPads is using USB 3.1 gen 2 — which is different from Thunderbolt 3. While Thunderbolt 3 drives use USB-C connectors, most will not work with an iPad.

How to connect external storage to the iPad in iPadOS 14

Regardless of which iPad you have, the process is the same:

  1. Have a properly formatted drive with APFS or FAT, as NTFS is not compatible with Apple products
  2. Connect the device to a hub or dongle that is connected to the iPad
  3. Open the Files app
  4. The external storage is shown in the left side column

You can have any number of external storage devices connected to the iPad and they will all be recognized. As long as the storage is properly formatted, you can connect and view any storage device to your iPad as if it were a Mac. If it is not properly formatted, the iPad will not see the storage and you must connect the storage to a Mac to format it properly.

Drive formats supported by iPadOS 14

  • ExFAT
  • FAT32
  • HFS+
  • APFS

Once connected to a properly formatted drive, users can drag and drop files and manage the storage as if it were native to the system as expected.

Additionally, the Files app on iPadOS and iOS is capable of connecting to network storage. Just like with external storage, network storage can be manipulated on the device with ease once connected. Devices like network attached storage already have SMB networking configured and ready to go, but the files you need may be on your Mac instead.

How to set up an SMB share on Mac

First you need to set up the SMB server:

  1. On your Mac open the System Preferences application
  2. Select “Sharing” near the bottom of the window
  3. Select “File Sharing” in the service menu and ensure the check mark is selected on the left side

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro Network sharing menu on macOS Big Sur

How to connect to a SMB server on iPadOS

Now that you have an SMB server, you can connect to it on your iPad or even your iPhone running iOS 14.

  1. Open the Files app
  2. Select the menu in top of the sidebar
  3. Select “Connect to Server” from the menu

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro Select the drop down menu in the sidebar, then select “Connect to Server”
How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro Enter the name of the server to connect
How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro Access local Mac files from your device at any time

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Historically, Sony have locked down PlayStation hard drives tighter than Fort Knox, with encryption that prevents users from swapping them between devices without losing all of their data. However, with the release of system software update 4.50, it is now possible to use an external hard drive to transfer games between PS4s.

First, you’ll need to attach a USB 3.0 HDD to your console and set it up – full instructions for doing this can be found in our guide for how to use an external hard drive for extended storage on your PS4. Here’s advice on where to find a good PS4 external hard drive. When it’s ready, either download some games onto the external drive, or transfer them from the internal drive using the Move to Extended Storage option found under Settings > Storage > System Storage > Applications.

With the games now stored on the external hard drive, you can take it and plug it into a different PS4, where the games should appear on the home menu screen. As long as you’re logged in on the PSN account which owns the games and are signed in online, you can then launch them and start playing immediately. This means that you can store a game on your external drive, then take it over to a friend’s house and play it on their console without having to download it all over again – very handy for those 50GB+ installs.

One thing to note – game saved data cannot be stored on an external hard drive being used for extended storage, so if you want to continue your progress then you’ll need to transfer your saved data between consoles using either PlayStation Plus online storage or a separate USB device.

As part of the PS4 system software 4.50 which went live this week, you’ll see that we’ve added the much-requested ability to download and store your games and apps on an external HDD storage device. It’s super easy to set up and use an external HDD with your PS4 or PS4 Pro, but before you get started, this guide may come in useful.

Minimum HDD spec

The most important thing to remember before you buy a new storage device – or try to use one you already own – is to make sure it meets the minimum requirements for use with your PS4:

Connection: USB 3.0 or later

Storage: 250GB (min) – 8TB (max)

Note: There is no guarantee that all USB storage devices are compatible with your system.

Format your external HDD

Most storage devices will be a specific format out-of-the-box (usually FAT32/exFAT/NTFS/HFS). To prepare it for use with your PS4 you’ll need to format it to a special type to ensure it will work:

  • Go to the Settings menu from your PS4 home screen.
  • Scroll down to the Devices menu.
  • Choose ‘USB Storage Devices’.
  • Select your external HDD, then choose “Format as extended storage”.

You’ll see a number of warnings that formatting your device will remove any previously installed data, so before you hit ‘OK’, make sure that there’s nothing stored on the device that you don’t want to lose.

It’s also important to note that once you’ve formatted your external HDD to this specific PS4 format, you can only use it for PS4 games and apps – you won’t be able to store screenshots and video clips, saved data, Themes or any other types of media, documents, pictures on it, without re-formatting to its original state.

Once formatting is complete, you’ll see a message confirming that it’s been successful and a small green light will appear next to the device’s name, letting you know it’s activated as the main storage location.

Installing games and apps (and adds-on) to your external HDD/internal storage

Once formatted, your external HDD will be set as the default download location as long as it remains plugged in.

If you want to switch back to your PS4 internal storage for downloads (and back again to the external HDD), that’s easy too:

  • Go to the Settings menu from your PS4 home screen.
  • Scroll down to ‘Storage’.
  • Choose which location you want to download to – either System Storage or your external HDD.
  • Press the ‘Options’ button and select ‘Application install location’ to set the target download location – either ‘System Storage’ or ‘Extended Storage’.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Moving games and apps onto your external HDD device

If you want to organise the games and apps that are currently installed on your PS4 internal storage, you can easily move them over to the external storage device:

  • Go to the Settings menu from your PS4 home screen.
  • Scroll down to the ‘Storage’.
  • Select ‘System Storage’, then ‘Applications’.
  • Press the ‘Options’ button, then choose ‘Move to Extended Storage’.
  • Choose which games and apps you want to move by ticking the boxes that appear next to their names. You can select as many as you like, providing your external HDD has enough free space to store them.
  • Select ‘Move’ then hit ‘OK’ to begin the transfer.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Removing your external HDD device

It’s very important not to remove your USB storage device when your PS4 is switched on without properly disconnecting it.

To remove the external HDD, access the Quick Menu by holding down the PS button on your controller, then choose ‘Sound/Devices’ then ‘Stop using extended storage’. Once that’s done, you’ll see a message that it’s safe to disconnect the device from the USB port.

Anything else?

  • When your external HDD is plugged in, games and apps will display as normal on your PS4 Home Screen, with the most recently played games appearing first.
  • If you don’t have your external HDD connected, the games you’ve played from it will still appear in your Home Screen list and Library – however, they’ll display a ‘!’ symbol to show that they can’t be played until the device is re-connected
  • You need to connect the HDD directly to your PS4. A USB Hub cannot be used in between.

So that’s it – no more agonising choices of which games to delete when that hot new title hits PlayStation Store. With up to 8TB supported for external storage, even the most avid trophy hunter should have plenty to keep themselves busy. Enjoy!

This article explains how to add an external drive to an Xbox Series X|S, and outlines compatibility requirements.

How to Add an External Drive to an Xbox Series X or S

If you have a drive you use with your Xbox One, you can just plug it in and use it. If you have a new drive, or a drive that has been used for other things in the past, you'll need to format it first so that it can work with your Xbox.

Here's how to add an external drive to an Xbox Series X or S:

Turn your Xbox Series X or S on.

Plug an external HDD or SSD into one of the USB ports. If the console recognizes your drive, the message seen in the following step will appear on the screen.

Select FORMAT STORAGE DEVICE.

Name your drive, and select the arrow icon or press the menu button to continue.

Select KEEP CURRENT LOCATION.

Select FORMAT STORAGE DEVICE.

Your new drive is now available for use.

How to Move Games to an External Drive on Xbox Series X or S

When you connected and set up your drive, you probably chose to keep your current install location, because Series X or S games won’t play when installed on a USB drive. If that’s the case, you’ll need to move games to the drive from time to time to free up space for new games. Here’s how to accomplish that.

Press the Xbox button to open the Guide, then select My games & apps.

Highlight the game you want to move, and press the view button (two stacked boxes) on your controller.

Highlight the game, select it, and select Move or copy.

Select the game you want to move, and verify you are transferring from internal storage to your external drive. You can use the Select all option if there are multiple items on this screen.

If you select an Xbox Series X or S game, you'll see a warning on this screen that your external drive is too slow to play the game unless you have the Seagate expansion drive. You can still move the game to free up storage, you just won't be able to play it until you move it back.

Select Move selected.

Wait for the game to move.

You can do other things while the game is moving, but it may proceed more slowly.

When it finishes, your game will be on your external drive. You can move it back at any time, or play it directly from the drive if it's an Xbox, Xbox 360, or Xbox One game.

What Drives Work With Xbox Series X or S?

The Xbox Series X and S both come with lightning-fast NVME SSDs that reduce load times dramatically, but neither one has all that much storage. The Series X ships with a 1TB drive, and the Series S with a 512GB drive, and a decent amount of that space is taken up or reserved by the operating system.

You can only play Xbox Series X or S games if they are installed on the internal NVME SSD drive, or installed on the optional expansion drive. The expansion drive fits into a slot on the back of the Xbox Series X and S, and it provides transfer speed just as fast as the internal drive.

We tried a super fast USB 3.1 NAND drive with transfer speeds of 520 MB/s and write speeds of 420 MB/s, and that wasn’t even fast enough. The Series X or S will only play games from the internal SSD or expansion card SSD that provide 2.4 GB/s of raw I/O throughput.

Xbox One External Drive Compatibility

If you own an Xbox One and currently have an external drive with Xbox One games on it, you can plug it directly into your Xbox Series X or S and it will work. As long as it’s a USB 3.1 drive that worked with your Xbox One, you’ll be able to play your old Xbox One, Xbox 360, and original Xbox games directly from the drive. You can also move Xbox Series X or S games to a drive like this to free up space, but you won’t be able to play them from that drive until you move them back.

Drive Comparison Chart

Here’s a rundown of what you can do with what type of drive:

USB 3.1 HDD or SSD Seagate Expansion Card
Store any Xbox game Yes Yes
Play Xbox One, Xbox 360, and original Xbox games Yes Yes
Store Series X|S games and games optimized for Series X|S Yes Yes
Play Series X|S games and games optimized for Series X|S No Yes

While only the Seagate expansion drive can play Series X or S games at launch, Microsoft may offer alternatives at a later date.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

This is a no-brainer. Since Apple doesn’t bring you any file-management goody to your iPhone and since you can’t just use the iPhone like you would use any other smartphone (notably, Android), it is virtually impossible to convert an iPhone into a flash drive.

Interestingly though, there are apps on the App Store that let you turn your iPhone into a flash drive for mass storage.

How to Use Your iPhone As a USB Flash Drive

Before we dive into it, let’s understand what Apple lets you do with the smartphone:

  • You can use an app to store upload/store/edit files on the iPhone
  • You cannot access the file system without breaking into the phone (via jailbreak/SSH)
  • You cannot create “drives” per se without resorting to jailbreak apps
  • You can make use of the space as a pseudo-drive

We’re talking about using your iPhone as a flash drive to store data.

If you are looking to do this, precisely, we’ve got plenty of apps on the App Store that’ll get it done. For instance:

What you do is:

Step #1. Install the app on your iPhone.

Step #2. Connect your iPhone to iTunes.

Step #3. Now, in iTunes, select your device from the top (or sidebar if you’ve got the sidebar pane visible.)

Step #4. Click on “Apps.”

Step #5. Click on “File Sharing” and then on “Flash Drive.”

Step #6. Now, you can click on ‘Add Files…’ to begin adding files that you want to go into the iPhone.

The app mentioned above is quite powerful. To me, though, this is overkill because I just want to use the iPhone as a storage device.

That’s all, folks! Isn’t it as easy as 1 2 3? Do share your feedback with us in the comment below.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

iGeeksBlog has affiliate and sponsored partnerships. We may earn commissions on purchases made using our links. However, this doesn’t affect the recommendations our writers make. You can read more about our review and editorial process here.

Have you ever wondered what that USB port on your Wi-Fi router is for? Most modern routers have at least one or maybe two, and today we’ll take a look at how Windows users can set it up with a hard or flash drive to share content across a local network.

Note: For this article I’m using a Cisco Linksys E4200 Wi-Fi router. The interface for each router manufacturer will, of course, vary, and have different options for sharing the drive. Here’s a look at using Windows to access the drive, which is the same process for any router with a connected USB drive, despite its internal software features.

Choose a hard or flash drive to share

The first thing you’ll want to do is find a hard drive or flash drive that you want to use to hold data that you’re going to share with everyone. One thing to consider before selecting a drive is to check your router’s documentation to see if there are any storage limitations – certain routers do have a storage cap.Of course you’ll be able to get more data at a cheaper price if you use an external hard drive. But if you only have a few things to share, then a flash drive will do. In this example I’m using a Centon 64 GB DataStick Pro.

After settling on a drive, I recommend formatting it using Windows. Some routers offer the ability to format the drive using built-in software, but I’ve had the best luck formatting it with Windows.

To format the drive in Windows, connect it to an open USB port on your PC, find it in Computer (called This PC in Windows 8), right-click on the drive, and select Format. A quick format should do in most cases, and while you’re at it, give the drive a memorable name so you know what it contains. This step isn’t entirely necessary, but if you can, it’s nice to start with clean gear.

Format to give it a new name and start before using it

Access the routerTo get to the router settings, open any browser on a computer connected to your Wi-Fi network. Then type in the appropriate IP address of the router to get into it. Usually it will be something like 192.168.1.1 – again, if you’re not sure, check the router’s documentation.

Then you should be asked for the router’s login information. If you’re still using the default settings like “admin” for both the username and password, take this opportunity to set it to something more secure. You don’t want just anyone being able to access your network or the drive you add to it.

Now, in the router’s settings, look for a heading called drive storage, file sharing, or something similar. There you will see the information on the drive that you connected to your router.

The connected drive will be displayed in the router

Access the drive connected to router

To be able to read and write to the attached drive, open the Network folder on Windows. Then clear the path at the top of Windows Explorer and enter \\ followed by the router’s IP address. For example: \\192.168.1.1 as shown below. The drive will show up in Windows Explorer as a shared folder with the name you gave it. You will need to enter the router path for each computer you want to connect to the drive. If you’re prompted for a username and password, use the same credentials you used to log into the router.

The drive connected to the router will appear as a shared folder

You’ll be able to use the drive exactly like one connected to your PC. You can create folders, copy videos, music, documents, and more. And you can do this from any computer as long as you open Network and type in the router path address that you did in the step above.

Use the drive connected to the router like you would any drive connected to your computer

If you’re going to keep the drive attached to your router and continue to use it, you’re not going to want to enter in the router path each time. To make things much easier, just map it as a network drive – it’s not as complex as it sounds.

Right-click the drive and select “Map network drive” and give it a drive letter that isn’t already being used, make sure “Reconnect at sign-in” is checked, then click Finish. After that, any time you restart and connect your desktop or laptop computer to the network, the drive connected to the router will appear.

Map the drive connected to the router

Also, if you want easier access to the drive, you can create a shortcut on the desktop.

Create a shortcut to the drive for easy access

Remember that everyone connected to your Wi-Fi network will be able to access that drive (provided you’ve mapped it on all systems), so make sure you aren’t putting anything too sensitive on it. This is a great solution for families who want to share music, videos, and photos among all computers in the house. It provides yet another way to back up your data, too.

When you turn an internal hard drive into an external drive, you can connect it to your PC using a standard USB connection.

How to Connect an Internal Hard Drive Externally

Follow these steps to use an internal hard drive externally.

Choose an internal hard drive. You can mix and match almost any hard drive and enclosure, but check the manufacturers’ websites to make sure the drive and enclosure are compatible, just in case.

Mount the drive into the enclosure. Inside the enclosure, there may be a place to mount the internal hard drive into the enclosure, either by screws or fasteners (some slot into the connector).​ If you’re installing older drives such as EIDE or IDE, you may see several wires to connect the hard drive. For SATA or mSATA drives, you should see a single SATA connection like those inside the PC.

Plug in the connections. The connections you need to make differ depending on the type of hard drive connector you have. For most modern drives that use SATA or mSATA, there is a single 7-pin connector that is the interface connection and provides power. For PATA drives (EIDE or IDE), there’s a 40-pin connector and a 4-pin power connector.

Both types of connectors are keyed to be plugged in one way only.

Seal the hard drive enclosure. After it’s connected, seal the enclosure tight once again, with the internal hard drive inside. Most hard drive enclosures have screws or simple fasteners that you can use to seal up the drive. You now have an internal hard drive acting as a portable external storage device. All that remains is to connect the enclosure to the PC.

Connect the enclosure. The enclosure comes with whatever cords are necessary to connect it to a PC. Usually, it’s a USB cable, which provides both connectivity and power to the drive.

Connect the enclosure to the PC. Connect the USB cable to the PC, and allow the drive to come on. If it has a power switch, turn it on.

Plug and play the hard drive. Once you plug it in and turn it on, your Windows machine should recognize that you added new hardware and let you "plug and play" it. You can browse to the drive, open it, drag files and folders into it, or set it up for receiving security backups and recovery files.

If your PC does not recognize the drive, there may be a formatting problem. You’ll need to format the drive properly to suit your computer. Learning how to format a hard drive is easy.

Why Consider Using an Internal Drive Externally?

Because of availability and a lack of general consumer knowledge, internal hard drives can be somewhat cheaper than standalone external hard drives. You can take advantage of this by plugging a new or extra internal drive into a hard drive enclosure.

Original Title: Ive purchased a extended hard drive and would like to know how to install my games purchased on the internet as well as my dvd collection to my hard drive. Its connected properly system ok’d it

Please help trying to install my games on the extended hard drive Ive purchased on line as well as my dvd collectrion also

  • Subscribe
  • Subscribe to RSS feed

Report abuse

Let us consider the following scenarios

Scenario 1: Your extended hard drive is internal

If your extended hard drive is internal, you can go ahead and install games or movie collections on to it like you do normally on a system drive except that the program allows you to choose your extended drive as the destination drive.

Scenario 2: Your extended hard drive is external

If your extended hard drive is external where you want to install games then there will be slight problem.

Now, many external drives are removable. USB drives, for example, can be removed from your computer either while it’s not running, or after clicking a “safely remove hardware” for the device. In the later case, if a program on your removable drive is running, “safely remove” may fail. All files on the external drive must not be in use, and a program running from the drive is definitely “in use”. You’ll need to make sure that all programs installed on the external drive are shut down before attempting to remove the drive.

Now, that sounds simple enough but more complex packages often install software that runs automatically when you start your machine, either in the form of explicit start-up menu items, or as system services. You may not think you’re running any software that’s installed on that external drive, but in reality it may have installed something that is. You’ll need to figure out what that is, and take steps to disable it, or shut it down before you remove the drive.

Along those same lines, if the drive is not installed when you boot your system, you may get error messages on start up if a prior installation of software onto that drive also added startup items. Without the drive installed, those startup items may not be found, and errors may result. Menu items and shortcuts relating to the software installed on the external drive may also revert to Windows defaults until sometime after the drive is reinstalled.

Finally, don’t expect application portability by installing it to an external drive. By that I mean that installing an application to an external drive, and then taking that drive to a different computer and expecting the application to work on that machine. This may work for simpler applications, but setting up a complex application is as much about setting up the Windows registry as it is about just placing files. The registry will have only been set up on the first machine.

So there are a number of issues related to removable media, but if you’re just installing your software to a second hard drive, and it just happens to be an external drive, I wouldn’t expect that scenario to be an issue for you.

Additional information:

Install a program

Hope this information is helpful and let me know if you need any further assistance

Mouneshwar R – Microsoft Support

Visit our Microsoft Answers Feedback Forum and let us know what you think

[If this post helps to resolve your issue, please click the “Mark as Answer” or “Helpful” button at the top of this message. By marking a post as Answered, or Helpful you help others find the answer faster.]

When you plug your iPhone into your PC and look under My Computer, you’ll see it show up under Scanners and Cameras in Windows, but if you want to drag and drop other types of files to and from your device you’re out of luck. Android phones, on the other hand, let you treat them just like USB drives. (Note that this procedure is not identical for all Android phones.)

  1. Connect your Android phone to your PC.
  2. On your Android device, slide down the notification drawer and tap where it says “USB connected: Select to copy files to/from your computer.”
  3. On the next screen select Turn on USB storage, then tap OK.
  4. On your PC, an AutoPlay box should appear. Click Open folder to view files.
  5. Drag the item(s) you want to transfer from your PC’s hard drive to your phone by moving them to the appropriate folder under Removable Disk. (In our case, we moved an album’s worth of songs from our Music folder to the Media folder on our Android phone.)
  6. Press Stop on your Android phone to end the storage session before disconnecting the cable.

The files should now be easily accessible on your phone. For instance, once we opened the Music player, our album was ready to play. If it’s a different kind of file you’re looking to open, try downloading the Astro File Manager app to locate it.

We’ve been impressed by Drobo’s innovative approach to RAID in the past, and its new 5D carries on the good work. It’s the first multibay DAS appliance we’ve come across with both USB 3 and dual Thunderbolt ports, and it’s aimed at professional Mac users who want high-performance local storage with fault tolerance.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

The 5D has an internal lithium ion battery to protect against power cuts, and it supports Drobo’s data-tiering system, so it can move regularly accessed data onto an optional mSATA SSD for increased read speeds. Up to six 5Ds can be daisy-chained together with Thunderbolt cables.

Drobo’s mantra has always been to simplify RAID for those who want all its benefits but none of the hassle. The 5D adheres to the same philosophy: simply slip five SATA hard disks of any size into the appliance and Drobo’s BeyondRAID will automatically add them to a single virtual storage pool with redundancy configured at the block level.

The 5D’s front panel tells you everything you need to know about storage status. The drive indicators change from green to yellow or red if any drives need to be swapped out for larger ones, or if they’ve failed, and a line of blue LEDs below acts as a capacity gauge.
Similar to RAID5 and 6, BeyondRAID supports single and dual parity. Either can be selected on the fly, and Drobo remains the only vendor to allow you to return from dual to single parity.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

We tested using a 13in MacBook Pro with a 2.3GHz Intel Core i5, 4GB of DDR3 memory and OS X 10.8.2. Installation was simple: once the Dashboard utility is downloaded, the 5D can be connected via Thunderbolt or USB, where it’s spotted immediately.

Thin provisioning is standard, so, during virtual volume creation, capacity can be set between 1TB and 16TB regardless of the number or sizes of the physical drives. Initially, we loaded the 5D with a pair of 3TB WD SATA drives and chose a single, 16TB HFS+ formatted volume.

Thin provisioning dynamically allocates blocks as they’re used, and increasing physical space is a cinch. We added two 4TB WD SATA drives in succession; each time, the Dashboard acknowledged their presence and added them to the array without the need for intervention.

For performance testing, we used Intech’s QuickBench 4 software. We ran it first on the MacBook’s internal drive, and saw sequential read and write speeds of around 80MB/sec for 1,024KB blocks of data. Running the same test on the 5D over a Thunderbolt link saw a big hike in throughput, with QuickBench reporting average random read and write speeds of 275MB/sec and 206MB/sec. Sequential read and write rates were even higher, averaging 343MB/sec and 225MB/sec.

We also tested data tiering by installing a 60GB OCZ mSATA SSD in the small hatch in the 5D’s base. Write speeds remained in the same ballpark, but average random and sequential read speeds increased to 311MB/sec and 366MB/sec.

The 5D takes all the strain out of RAID configuration and, with a diskless unit costing a shade over £500, it’s good value as well. Mac users looking for a high-performance Thunderbolt DAS appliance should fetch their credit card.

From its massive powder-coated black outer chassis to the fearsome roar from its fans when you switch it on, the OWC ThunderBay 4 exudes a sense of power. It’s a four-bay, 3.5-inch drive RAID enclosure with dual Thunderbolt 2 interfaces. Unlike most drives on test it has the power supply built-in. Also read: Out of disk space? Storage options for your media

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

It’s an extremely solid unit, and while it does emit an audible whir when it’s running, it isn’t uncomfortably noisy. Drives need to be fitted within a tough metal caddy, which then slides into place inside the enclosure. The caddies are then screwed into place, before the enclosure itself is locked with a key behind the steel-mesh front-panel. Combine all that with the Kensington lock slot on the rear, and the OWC has a strong sense of security surrounding it.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

In the US, OWC’s parent company, MacSales, offers the ThunderBay 4 in a variety of ready-made configurations. Our review sample came with four Toshiba 7,200rpm 2TB drives in a RAID5 configuration; in the UK the drive is normally sold diskless. To buy the four drives separately would normally set you back an additional £240, although at less than £750 for the whole shebang, that’s still excellent value.

Unlike its OWC stablemate, the Mercury Elite Pro Dual, The ThunderBay 4 doesn’t have a hardware RAID controller. It uses SoftRAID5 to create and manage RAID configurations in OS X. This is easy to use, and has a simple, wizard-based approach, so it isn’t difficult to create a RAID0 or new RAID5 array if you need to. On Windows you can use the standard utilities, although we had to rename two Apple system files on our Bootcamp partition to prevent the Mac Pro crashing after startup.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

When it comes to performance, the ThunderBay 4 is an absolute beast. It produced extremely fast read speeds in our tests, hitting peaks of 510MB/sec and 518MB/sec while copy across a selection of RAW photo files and 4K video files, with sequential read speeds in excess of 760MB/sec in CrystalDiskMark on Windows.

Write speeds aren’t quite so awesome, although the ThunderBay is still quicker in our tests than most drives we’ve seen. With such stellar sequential read and write speeds, the ThunderBay 4 would be a valuable asset in any 4K video-editing workflow.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

It’s size and noise mean the ThunderBay 4 won’t be a natural fit for every studio, but it’s a great option if those aren’t concerns, and fitting you own drives makes it flexible and cost-effective.

The balanced performance, simple plug-and-play operation and lower profile of the CalDigit T3 make it our RAID system of choice, but if you want to save a little cash and pick out your own drives, then the ThunderBay 4 is a brilliant alternative.

The PS5 supports all media formats as the PS4, and lets you watch and listen to custom music/video. Here’s how to do it.

Just like the PS4, Sony’s next-gen PS5 lets you watch and listen to custom videos and music from a USB drive. Here’s a quick primer on how to do it.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

The PS5 can easily play back custom media saved on a USB stick. The PS5 doesn’t support all file formats, but it does play back the most common ones like MP4, MP3, and MKV. It’s worth noting the PS5 supports all of the same formats as the PS4 family. The PS5 supports video in max resolutions of 3840 x 2160 so don’t try to watch 8K videos just yet (the PS5 doesn’t support 8K video output right now).

First things first: Make sure all your videos and music are in folders. The PS5 will automatically make a playlist out of the files a specific folder, so you’ll have to do some manual sorting if you want to listen to/watch tracks in a specific group.

To play back video and audio from a USB stick you’ll have navigate to separate sections. Don’t go to the Media section, though. That’s only for streaming/content you bought on the PS Store.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or proHow to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

To watch video, long-press the PS Button and select Media Gallery from the main list. Then click USB on the far right. You can only access video this way.

The path looks like this:

PS5 Home -> Media Gallery -> USB

Once again, any files stored in the folder are arranged in a kind of playlist. You can press R1 or L1 to skip back and forth. Press right and left on the D-Pad to skip ahead in small chapter-style skips.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

To play audio, simply press the PS Button once to open up the Control Center quick bar. Then select the Music icon. It’s pretty barebones right now, but it’s functional.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Music can be played in the background as you do other things/play games. Once music is playing, you can pause it and change tracks right from the Command Center.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Supported video file formats:

  • Video: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC High Profile Level 4.2
  • Audio: MP3, AAC LC, AC-3 (Dolby Digital)
  • Video: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC High Profile Level 5.2
  • Audio: AAC LC, AC-3 (Dolby Digital)

Audio

  • FLAC
  • MP3
  • AAC

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Derek joined the TweakTown team in 2015 and has since reviewed and played 1000s of hours of new games. Derek is absorbed with the intersection of technology and gaming, and is always looking forward to new advancements. With over six years in games journalism under his belt, Derek aims to further engage the gaming sector while taking a peek under the tech that powers it. He hopes to one day explore the stars in No Man’s Sky with the magic of VR.

Insert your USB storage device into the router’s USB port and then access files stored there locally or remotely.

• If the USB storage device requires using bundled external power, make sure the external power has been connected.

• If you use a USB hard drive, we recommend its file system is NTFS, FAT32.

• Before you physically disconnect a USB device from the router, safely remove it to avoid data damage: Go to Advanced > USB Settings > Device Settings and click.

Access the USB Device Locally

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Access the USB Device Remotely

You can access your USB disk outside the local area network. For example, you can:

• Share photos and other large files with your friends without logging in to (and paying for) a photo-sharing site or email system.

• Get a safe backup for the materials for a presentation.

• Remove the files on your camera’s memory card from time to time during the journey.

Note: If your ISP assigns a private WAN IP address (such as 192.168.x.x or 10.x.x.x), you cannot use this feature because private addresses are not routed on the Internet.

Follow the steps below to configure remote access settings.

1. Log in to the web-based interface of the router. If you don’t know how to do that, please refer to

2. Go to Advanced > USB Settings > Sharing Access page.

3. Tick the FTP(via Internet) checkbox, and then click Save.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

4. Refer to the following table to access your USB disk remotely.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Customize the Access Settings

By default, all the network clients can access all folders on your USB disk. You can customize your sharing settings by setting a sharing account, sharing specific content, and setting a new sharing address on the router’s web management page.

1. Log in to the web-based interface of the router. If you don’t know how to do that, please refer to

2. Go to Advanced > USB Settings > Sharing Access page.

  • To Customize the Address of the USB Disk

You can customize the server name and use the name to access your USB disk.

1. On the Sharing Settings part, make sure Network Neighborhood is ticked, and enter a Network/Media Server Name as you like, such as MyShare, then click Save.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

2. Now you can access the USB disk by visiting \\MyShare (for Windows) or smb:// MyShare (for Mac).

  • To Only Share Specific Content

1. Focus on the Folder Sharing section. Click the button to disable Share All, then click Add to add a new sharing folder.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

2. Select the Volume Name and Folder Path, then enter a Folder Name as you like.

3. Decide the way you share the folder:

Enable Authentication: Tick to enable authentication for this folder sharing, and you will be required to log in to the Sharing Account to access the USB disk.

Enable Write Access: If you tick this checkbox, network clients can modify this folder.

Enable Media Sharing: Tick to enable media sharing for this folder, and you can view photos, play music and watch movies stored on the USB disk directly from DLNA-supported devices.

4. Click OK.

Tips: The router can share 32 volumes at most. You can click on the page to detach the corresponding volume you do not need to share.

  • To Set up Authentication for Data Security

You can set up authentication for your USB device so that network clients will be required to enter username and password when accessing the USB disk.

1. On the Sharing Account part, choose Use Default Account or Use New Account. The username and password are both admin for default account. If you choose Use New Account, you have to customize the username and a password.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Note:

For Windows users, do not set the sharing username the same as the Windows username. Otherwise, Windows credential mechanism may cause the following problems:

• If the sharing password is also the same as the Windows password, authentication will not work since the Windows will automatically use its account information for USB access.

• If the sharing password is different from the Windows password, the Windows will be unable to remember your credentials and you will always be required to enter the sharing password for USB access.

2. Enable Authentication to apply the account you just set.

• If you leave Share All enabled, click the button to enable Authentication for all folders.

• If Share All is disabled, enable Authentication for specific folders.

How to use an external drive as local storage on the playstation 4 or pro

Note: Due to Windows credential mechanism, you might be unable to access the USB disk after changing Authentication settings. Please log out from the Windows and try to access it again. Or you can change the address of the USB disk.

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Noen ganger må du få ting fra datamaskinen til telefonen din, bilder, filer, koblinger, tekst, etc. Og det meste er en smerte enn det det burde være. Hvis du er lei av å laste opp filer til Dropbox eller Drive, sender du koblinger til deg selv, eller verste av alt, kobler telefonen til datamaskinen din bare for å få ting fra punkt A til B, Stoppe. Det er en enklere måte. Faktisk har vi tre enklere måter. La oss komme til det.

Det beste allround-alternativet: Pushbullet

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Hvis du har brukt Android for en viss tid, så har du sannsynligvis hørt om Pushbullet. Hvis du fortsatt ikke har gitt det et skudd, kan jeg fortelle deg nå: du går glipp av det. Pushbullet er enkelt en av de mest kraftige og nyttige applikasjonene som er tilgjengelige for Android, spesielt når det gjelder å få ting til telefonen uten å berøre det. Her er bare noen få ting som Pushbullet kan gjøre:

  • SMS fra et ekte tastatur: Send SMS direkte fra datamaskinen uten å røre telefonen.
  • Speilvarsler på datamaskinen: Aldri savner et annet varsel – Pushbullet vil sende alle varsler fra telefonen til PCen.
  • Send linker direkte til telefonen din: Hopp over e-postkoblinger til deg selv, bare skyv den direkte til telefonen.

Og det går uten å nevne ting som Universal Copy and Paste-en funksjon som lar deg kopiere tekst på datamaskinen din og lime den inn på telefonen din.

Selvfølgelig kommer all denne funksjonaliteten med en kostnad. Selv om den grunnleggende versjonen av Pushbullet tilbyr noen funksjonalitet, nok for mange brukere, er de beste funksjonene alle tucked bak en paywall. For eksempel kan du bare sende filer opptil 25 MB i størrelse med den gratis versjonen, der Pushbullet Pro tillater filer med opptil 1 GB å bli presset. På samme måte tillater Pro at ubegrenset SMS-melding, hvor den frie versjonen er begrenset til 100 per måned. For noen brukere kan denne grunnleggende funksjonaliteten være mer enn nok, og for andre kan det ikke. Den fine delen er at du i det minste kan sjekke ut hva Pushbullet har å tilby for å måle om det er verdt $ 4,99 per måned (eller $ 39,99 per år) for dine spesifikke behov.

For å komme i gang med Pusbullet, må du laste ned Android-appen, og nettleserutvidelsen eller skrivebordsprogrammet.

Det mest robuste alternativet: AirDroid

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Hva ville en liste om fjernstyring av telefonen være uten AirDroid? En liste jeg ikke vil ha en del av, og absolutt ikke en jeg ville lage! Av programmene på denne listen er AirDroid uten tvil det mektigste. I utgangspunktet kobler den eksternt til Android-enheten din, og tilbyr et skrivebordsbasert grensesnitt på PC-en din i nettleseren din. Listen over ting AirDroid kan gjøre er massiv, og det inkluderer:

  • Administrer anrop og SMS: Du trenger ikke å ta telefonen din for å svare på en melding, bare gjør det fra datamaskinen.
  • Speilvarsler: Se alle telefonens varsler direkte på skrivebordet.
  • Send og motta filer: Ikke bare kan du sende filer til telefonen din med AirDroid, men du kan også trekke filer fra den. Det er brilliant.
  • Rediger kontakter: Administrer kontakter fra et tastatur og en mus.
  • Behandle musikk og videoer: Du trenger ikke å plugge opp for å administrere musikk.
  • Sett ringetoner: Endre tonene dine uten å røre telefonen.
  • Utklippstavle dele: Kopier på datamaskinen, lim inn på telefonen.
  • Fjerntilgang kameraet: Du kan se begge kameraene på skjermen. Det er pent.

Den beste delen er at nesten all denne funksjonaliteten tilbys for gratis, om enn i en begrenset mengde. For eksempel er gratis brukere begrenset til 200 MB dataoverføringer per måned, hvor Premium-brukere ikke har noen restriksjoner på filoverføringer. På samme måte kan gratisbrukere bare ha to tilkoblinger til enhver tid, med Premium-kontoen som tilbyr støtte for opptil seks enheter.

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Når det er sagt, kan du få litt mer ut av AirDroid gratis bare ved å dele den på dine sosiale kontoer. Det er et alternativ kalt "Bonus" som fjerner filoverføringskvoten (vanligvis 200 MB), gjør det mulig å overføre filer på opptil 200 MB, og tilbyr andre avanserte funksjoner som vanligvis er forbeholdt Premium-brukere, som ekstern kameratilgang, en annonsefri erfaring og muligheten til å få AirDroid til å ta bilder når noen prøver å låse opp telefonen. Og alt du trenger å gjøre er å dele den på Facebook, Twitter eller Google+ ved hjelp av "Bonus" -metoden som finnes i appen. Det er ganske enkelt.

Hvis selv bonusfunksjonene ikke er nok for deg, er AirDroid Premium veldig rimelig priset på $ 1,99 i måneden, $ 19,99 i året eller $ 38,99 i to år.

Det enkleste alternativet: Portal

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Så, du liker ideen om Pushbullets enkle måte å dele filer på, men vil egentlig ikke ha den ekstra fluffen? Gode ​​nyheter: Portal er svaret. Det er laget av de samme gutta som laget Pushbullet, og er egentlig bare en super strippet ned versjon av deres navnefil-app.Det er egentlig bare en rask og enkel måte å få ting fra PCen til telefonen.

Du kan bruke Portal til å overføre en fil, noen få filer eller hele mapper på en gang, og til og med bla gjennom filene og mappene du har overført til telefonen din. Portalen er enkel, men så kraftig. Og best av alt: det er gratis. Hvis du ikke er en Pushbullet-bruker, er det absolutt verdt et skudd.

Android er kjempebra, og det er en av de tingene som gjør det så bra å kunne styre filer, meldinger og mer fra PCen eksternt. Avhengig av hvor mye funksjonalitet du leter etter, bør du kunne dekke stort sett alle basene dine med en (eller til og med to!) Av disse tre. Ha det gøy.

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Někdy je třeba dostat věci z počítače do telefonu – obrázky, soubory, odkazy, text atd. A většinou je to spíš bolest, než by mělo být. Pokud jste unavení při nahrávání souborů do Dropbox nebo Drive, posílejte e-maily na sebe, nebo – nejhorší ze všech – zapojte telefon do počítače, abyste získali své věci z bodu A do B, stop . Je to snadnější způsob. Ve skutečnosti máme tři snadnější způsoby. Pojďme se k tomu.

Nejlepší alternativa: Pushbullet

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Používáte-li Android na nějaký čas, pak jste pravděpodobně slyšeli o Pushbulletovi. Pokud vám to ještě neudělil výstřel, mohu vám to říct teď: chybíte. Pushbullet je snadno jedním z nejsilnějších a nejužitečnějších aplikací dostupných pro Android, zejména pokud jde o získání věci do telefonu, aniž byste se ho dotýkali. Zde je jen několik věcí, které může Pushbullet udělat:

  • SMS ze skutečné klávesnice : Odeslání SMS přímo z vašeho počítače, aniž byste se dotýkali telefonu
  • Zrcadlové oznámení v počítači upozornění – Pushbullet pošle všechna oznámení z vašeho telefonu do vašeho počítače.
  • Odeslání odkazů přímo do telefonu : Přeskočte odkazy na e-mail sami, stačí je přitlačit přímo k telefonu

jako je například univerzální kopírování a vkládání – funkce, která umožňuje kopírovat text na vašem počítači a vložit jej do telefonu.

Samozřejmě, všechny tyto funkce přicházejí s cenou. Zatímco základní verze Pushbulletu nabízí určitou funkcionalitu – je to dost pro mnoho uživatelů, ve skutečnosti – nejlepší funkce jsou zastrčeny za plátnem. Můžete například posílat soubory s velikostí až 25 MB pouze s bezplatnou verzí, kde Pushbullet Pro umožňuje tisknout soubory až do velikosti 1 GB. Stejně tak Pro umožňuje neomezené SMS zprávy, kde je bezplatná verze omezena na 100 za měsíc. U některých uživatelů může být tato základní funkce více než dostatečná a pro ostatní nemusí být. Krásná část je, že můžete alespoň zkontrolovat, co Pushbullet nabízí k tomu, aby zjistil, zda stojí nebo nehodí 4,99 dolarů za měsíc (nebo 39,99 dolarů za rok) pro vaše specifické potřeby.

Chcete-li začít s Pusbullet, budete potřebovat stáhnout aplikaci pro Android, rozšíření prohlížeče nebo desktopovou aplikaci.

Nejsilnější volba: AirDroid

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Co by mohl být seznam dálkového ovládání telefonu bez AirDroid? Seznam, ze kterého nechci žádnou část a určitě ne, kterou bych vytvořil! Z aplikací na tomto seznamu je AirDroid pravděpodobně nejsilnější. V podstatě se vzdáleně připojí k vašemu zařízení Android a nabízí desktopové rozhraní v počítači přímo v prohlížeči. Seznam věcí, které společnost AirDroid může udělat, je masivní a obsahuje :

  • Správa hovorů a SMS : Není potřeba, aby váš telefon reagoval na zprávu,
  • Odeslání a příjem souborů : Můžete nejen poslat soubory do telefonu s AirDroidem, ale můžete také stáhnout soubory z něj.
  • Upravit kontakty: Správa kontaktů z pohodlí klávesnice a myši
  • Správa hudby a videozáznamů : Není nutné připojovat hudbu
  • Nastavit vyzváněcí tóny
  • Vzdálený přístup k fotoaparátu: Na obrazovce počítače můžete vidět obě kamery:
  • . Nejlepší je, že téměř všechny tyto funkce jsou nabízeny zdarma,
  • , ačkoli v omezeném množství. Například zdarma uživatelé jsou omezeni na 200 MB datových přenosů za měsíc, kde Premium uživatelé nemají žádné omezení přenosu souborů. Stejně tak mohou mít volní uživatelé k dispozici pouze dvě připojení k zařízení v daném okamžiku, přičemž Premium účet nabízí podporu až pro šest zařízení. To znamená, že můžete získat trochu více AirDroid zdarma tím, že ji sdílíte na vašem sociálním účty. K dispozici je volba “Bonus”, která odstraňuje kvótu přenosu souborů (obvykle 200 MB), umožňuje přenos souborů až do velikosti 200 MB a nabízí další pokročilé funkce, které jsou zpravidla vyhrazeny pro prémiové uživatele, jako je vzdálený přístup k fotoaparátu, zkušenosti a možnost, aby přístroj AirDroid fotografoval, když se někdo pokusí odemknout telefon. A vše, co musíte udělat, je sdílet na Facebooku, Twitteru nebo Google+ pomocí metody “Bonus” v aplikaci. Je to docela jednoduché.

Pokud ani bonusové funkce pro vás nestačí, AirDroid Premium má za rozumnou cenu 1,99 dolarů měsíčně, 19,99 dolarů ročně nebo 38,99 dolarů za dva roky. Nejjednodušší volba: Portál Takže se vám líbí myšlenka na Pushbulletův snadný způsob sdílení souborů, ale opravdu nechtějí extra chmýří? Dobrá zpráva: Portál je odpovědí. to je vyrobeno stejnými kluky, kteří vyrobili Pushbullet, a je v podstatě jen super odizolovaná verze jejich jmenovkové aplikace. Je to v podstatě jen rychlý a snadný způsob, jak získat věci z vašeho počítače do telefonu.

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Portál můžete použít k přenosu jednoho souboru, několika souborů nebo celých složek najednou a dokonce procházet soubory a složky, které jste do telefonu. Portál je jednoduchý, ale mocný. A nejlepší ze všech: je to zdarma. Pokud nejste uživatel Pushbullet, určitě to stojí za to.

Android je úžasný a schopnost vzdáleného spravování souborů, zpráv a dalších funkcí z vašeho počítače je jedna z věcí, která je tak skvělá. V závislosti na tom, kolik funkčností hledáte, měli byste být schopni pokrýt skoro všechny vaše základny s jedním (nebo dokonce dvěma!) Z těchto tří. Bavte se.

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Pokud jste jako většina uživatelů systému Windows, máte spoustu velkých nástrojů, které se spouštějí při spuštění systému Windows. Zatímco to funguje skvěle pro většinu aplikací, existují některé, které by bylo hezké začít ještě před tím, než se uživatel přihlásí k počítači. Chcete-li to provést, musíte spustit aplikaci jako službu Windows.

How to unify your pc and android phone for seamless notifications sharing and more

Když přenesete počítač do režimu spánku, normálně čeká, dokud nestisknete tlačítko, než se probudí ze spánku – ale můžete mít počítač automaticky se probudí ze spánku v určitou dobu. To může být zvlášť užitečné, pokud chcete, aby se vaše PC probudilo a provedlo stahování mimo špičku nebo zahájilo další akce předtím, než se probudíte ráno – bez běhu celé noci.

With a little work, it is possible to use an Android phone and an iPad together. Here are some of the things you need to do.

If you have an Android phone and an iPad, you would naturally want to have easy access to all your data no matter what device you're using.

However, Google and Apple don't make it easy since they want you to stay with their respective platforms. Luckily, there's a way around these limitations.

Check out the solutions below to syncing your data and more across iOS and Android platforms.

Sync Your Photos and Videos in the Cloud

Most people take photos on their smartphones. That's because it's what they typically have in their pocket, plus the camera quality of these devices is usually much better.

However, it's probably better to view and edit your images on your iPad. Its bigger screen and Apple Pencil compatibility make photo touch-ups a breeze. And if you're working with video, the unprecedented power of the M1 iPad will definitely make editing far more convenient.

One of the easiest ways to share your photos from your Android smartphone to your iPad is via cloud storage. Services like Google Photos, OneDrive, and Dropbox are available on both the Google Play Store and the Apple App Store.

By installing these apps on both of your devices and activating their camera upload feature, you can view the images you take with your smartphone on your iPad and vice versa. The only requirement is that both devices are connected online to access the service's server.

Download: Google Photos for Android | iOS (Free, in-app purchases available)

Download: Microsoft OneDrive for Android | iOS (Free, in-app purchases available)

Download: Dropbox for Android | iOS (Free, in-app purchases available)

Unify Your Browsing Experience

While it's practical to browse the net on your smartphone when you're on the road, you may want to switch to your tablet when you're stationary. The iPad's bigger screen lends well to loading web pages designed for desktop computers.

However, if you have a lot of tabs and bookmarks open, you may find it inconvenient to go around typing each page's URL individually on your tablet. So instead of doing that, you can instead use a browser that's available both on your phone and tablet.

Some browsers, like Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge, or Mozilla Firefox, let you log in with your respective account on both of your devices. Once you've done so, you can send your open tabs via the Recent tabs, Send to devices, or Share function.

Download: Google Chrome for Android | iOS (Free)

Download: Microsoft Edge for Android | iOS (Free)

Download: Firefox for Android | iOS (Free)

Saving Your Notes on Both Devices

Note-taking apps are handy little things that can help you get through your tasks. If ever there's something that you need to remember later, or if an idea pops in your head, then apps like these will help you out.

One good use case is if you're listing your to-do on your note app using your iPad. You can then synchronize your notes to your smartphone, so you don't miss a task as you go through the day.

And if you use your iPad to take class or meeting notes, you can then use your smartphone quickly to check these notes if you're reviewing while on the road or giving instructions to your executive assistant.

However, while Apple's Note app is a powerful tool, it, unfortunately, isn't available on Android. That's why you have to use apps available to both operating systems.

For example, you can download the popular Evernote app from both the Play Store and App Store, so you'll have access to whatever you jot down on whatever device. Microsoft's OneNote is also a viable alternative, especially if you have an active 365 subscription.

Sending Files From One Device to Another

While using cloud services is an excellent way to keep your files available on both devices, there are times where this isn't practical. If you don't have fast internet access or are transferring gigabytes of data, it's sometimes much better to transfer files directly between devices.

Unfortunately, it can be challenging to connect an Android smartphone to an iOS device. Apple's AirDrop function doesn't work with non-Apple devices, so it's not a viable option. Good thing there are several substitute apps for that.

One of the more popular file-sharing apps for both Android and iOS is SHAREit. This app makes it convenient to share files between devices by connecting them via a direct Wi-Fi connection. And instead of manually connecting your smartphone and tablet, you can do it automatically via a QR code that the app generates.

Alternatively, you can connect your iPad directly to your smartphone via a Lightning/USB-C flash drive or through a USB-C to Lightning or USB-C to USB-C cable, depending on your iPad model. The latest iPadOS update has since made it easier to move files between devices.

Download: SHAREit for Android | iOS (Free, in-app purchases available)

Use Apps That Are Available on Both iOS and Android

The power and flexibility of both the Android smartphone and iPad mean that we've barely scratched the surface of their capabilities. So if you're using your gadgets for specific uses, like office productivity, artistic pursuit, or even gaming and leisure, ensure that the apps you're using are available on both Google Play Store and the Apple App Store.

For example, the Adobe Photography Plan, which includes Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Lightroom, utilizes Adobe's cloud servers to ensure you can continue your work on whatever device you're using—PC, Mac, iPadOS, Android, and even iOS.

Productivity apps like Microsoft 365 and Google Workspace also have great interoperability features, allowing you to seamlessly switch between devices, so you can keep your train of thought on the document you're working on.

This is true of many types of app—calendar apps, music streaming apps, navigation apps, and so on. Use the same app and log in with the same account, and your data should be available on both devices.

Use an iPad With Android

Both Android and iOS have their own pros and cons. Some users prefer Android because it's easier to customize and offers more advanced functionalities. Others prefer Apple devices because of their ease of use, better software optimization, and enhanced security.

While both companies strive hard to keep you tied to their ecosystem, there are several ways around the limitations they set. As long as both ecosystems have an ever-growing userbase, software developers have the incentive to develop apps for both operating systems.

And as governments increasingly step in to prevent monopolies and protect the consumer, then we can reliably use both Android smartphones and Apple iPads for our workflows in the foreseeable future.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Harry Guinness
How to turn off comments on your instagram postsHarry Guinness
Writer

Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero. Read more.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Instagram, for the most part, is a pretty lovely social network. People tend to post the good things that are happening in their lives, rather than rants about everything that’s wrong with the world. It keeps things positive.

Even still, there are times when you might want to post something and make it so people can’t comment. Maybe you’re announcing something and just don’t want unsolicited opinions. Whatever the case, here’s how to do it.

For a New Post

When you’re posting a new photo to Instagram, at the screen where you add a caption, tap the “Advanced Settings” option.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Toggle the “Turn Off Commenting” to the on position.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

And then tap the back arrow and continue to post as normal.

For an Old Post

If you want to turn off comments for something you’ve already posted, head to that post and tap the three little dots.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Tap the “Turn Off Commenting” option.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Now comments are off. To turn them back on, just reverse the process.

  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Available Now
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts Harry Guinness
Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero.
Read Full Bio »

Do you want to share a post without having people leave their comments on it?

Wondering how you turn off Instagram comments?

Maybe you want to share a post on Instagram without having people judge your post or maybe you’ve been receiving a lot of hate and complaints lately.

Either way, inside of the Instagram app, there’s a feature which allows you to turn off Instagram comments for your posts so that people can’t leave their comments on them. The purpose of this feature was to protect users from hate, yet still, allow them to share posts on the platform, but there are also a number of other ways in which the feature can be used.

It’s no secret that there’s a lot of hate and mean comments being thrown around on social media, and Instagram is working hard to prevent that and do their part. Instagram is striving towards a safe community with a warm and welcoming atmosphere, and the feature which allows you to turn off Instagram comments is a step in the right direction.

Especially for those individuals who are repeatedly getting attacked with mean comments and hate, which are often times celebrities. Instagram is mainly a visual platform, which means that text on the platform is being shared and exchanged to a smaller extent on the platform than, for example, Facebook. However, the text that is exchanged normally takes place in the comments of posts. Here, people might discuss, argue, and, of course, some might leave mean and inappropriate comments.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Before the feature to turn off Instagram comments, the only possibility to weed out inappropriate comments was to activate a ”hide inappropriate comments” option which blocked and prevented people from leaving comments including certain phrases or words.

This feature was a step in the right direction in Instagram’s journey to make the platform more welcoming, however, the new update has streamlined the process and made it much easier to control your post’s comments is so much easier by having the power to decide whether or not you want people to be able to leave a comment on your post or not.

How to turn off Instagram comments

Turning off comments for your Instagram post is super easy, and can be done in just a few steps.

The feature to turn off Instagram comments is good for a number of areas, and it is especially used when people share personal posts because frankly, that’s posts where most of the vicious and mean comments are left. This feature was first released as a trial, only dedicated for celebrities and large, certified accounts, because these are the accounts which receive the most hate on the platform.

Instagram added the ability to block specific words from your comments – keywords that you yourself select, as opposed to turning them off completely, before the update to turn off comments. Before that, You could activate a feature which made Instagram do the job for you by sorting out comments that included certain words which are often used in a negative sense.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

“Our goal is to make Instagram a friendly, fun and, most importantly, safe place for self-expression,” Nicky Jackson Colaco, Instagram’s head of public policy, told The Washington Post.

Turning off comments for a new post

To turn off the comments for a new post that you’re sharing:

1. Select an image and start preparing your post just like you normally would when uploading a post on Instagram.

2. When you are in the section where you write your caption, look at the very bottom of your screen where you see ”Advanced settings”. Tap it.

3. Here, you’ll see ”turn off comments”. Toggle on the switch. Now, you have turned off Instagram comments for that specific post, and no-one will be able to leave their comments on it. The good news is that whenever you feel like you want to enable the comments, or if you change your mind, you don’t have to upload the post again, but can, instead, just flip the switch again.

How to turn off comments for an existing post

If you’ve shared a post already, and want to turn off Instagram comments for it, you can do so.

1. Tap the three dots in the top right corner of your post.

2. In the list of options, tap ”Turn off Commenting”.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

When you turn off commenting, the comment icon (speech bubble) will disappear from your post, and when people go to comment on your post, they’ll notice that it’s impossible.

The people who aren’t trying to comment, however, won’t notice a thing.

How to reactive comments again

If you’ve turned off Instagram comments for a post that you’ve shared on Instagram, but now want to reactivate the comment feature, you can do so.

To turn commenting on for a post again, go to the post and tap the icon in the top-right corner. Now, select Turn On Commenting.

If you have problems with trolls leaving nasty comments on your Instagram posts, then it might be music to your ears to hear that you can disable commenting, a step that can prevent trolls from leaving hurtful comments on your posts while allowing you to maintain a presence on the popular media-sharing social network.

While the workaround certainly isn’t perfect, it can be effective if used correctly. We’ll show you how to disable comments on your Instagram posts in this tutorial.

Turning off comments in Instagram

When you disable commenting for a post in Instagram, nobody will be able to leave a comment on it and all existing comments will be hidden; this includes comments from yourself and your friends.

Here in lies the biggest caveat, in that while it’s effective at blocking trolls from leaving nasty comments, it keeps everyone else from participating as well, which brings about a double-edged sword.

There are two ways to turn off commenting on Instagram: 1) during the process of sharing a post to Instagram, or 2) after a post has already been shared to Instagram. Both methods will be shown in this piece for your convenience.

Another thing you should note is that comment settings aren’t remembered for future postings, so you will have to manually turn off comment blocking on every post that you don’t wish to receive comments on going forward.

It’s also important to know that you can reverse your settings and enable comments on any post that you’ve previously disabled them on, and we’ll show you how to do that too.

How to disable Instagram comments

If you’ve made the decision to turn off commenting on Instagram, there are a couple of ways you can go about it. We’ll show you both methods below.

Disable Instagram comments before publishing a new photo or video

If you haven’t shared a post yet, but are planning to, then follow these steps to disable commenting on it before it’s even posted.

2) Tap on the plus sign to take a photo or select an image from your Photo Library that you wish to share.

3) After picking your filter settings, tap Next.

4) Next, tap on Advanced Settings at the bottom of the page.

5) Toggle on the Turn Off Commenting switch.

6) Tap on the Back button at the top left of the app.

7) Tap on the blue Share button at the top right of the app.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Now when you look at your post in your Instagram feed, the comment button will be missing from the post.

Disable Instagram comments for existing photos or videos

You can also disable comments on existing posts from your Instagram feed or profile. To do that, follow these steps.

1) Open the Instagram app.

2) Tap on the Profile tab at the bottom of the app and find a post of yours that you want to disable Instagram comments for.

3) Tap on the Ellipsis button at the top right of the post.

4) Tap on the blue Turn Off Commenting option from the pop-up menu.

Now the comment button should be missing from the post, which keeps people from leaving comments.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

That’s all there is to it!

Turn commenting back on for a post

If you’ve turned commenting off using either of the methods above, it’s simple to turn commenting back on again.

Follow the same steps as above to select the post and tap the Ellipsis button. Then, select Turn On Commenting option from the pop-up menu.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Wrapping up

Unfortunately, trolls aren’t going anywhere. People always think they’re right even when they’re completely wrong. Fortunately, these simple moderation tools are built into Instagram to help you manage them more efficiently. Worst case scenario, you can always block a user from seeing your profile. Another option is to automatically hide comments containing specific words.

You’ll find there are other ways to dealing with trolls too, such as by blocking or hiding comments with specific keywords…

Also read:

If you found this tutorial helpful, let us know in the comments section below!

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Facebook-owned photo and video sharing app Instagram allows you to turn the comments on/off on your post. Here’s how you can do it.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

The photo and video sharing app Instagram comes with a plethora of features. Right from uploading pictures to videos to stories, facebook-owned Instagram has them all and has become one of the widely used social media apps. Instagram has always taken care of the privacy of the users and has been updating its features from time to time.

Instagram filters and challenges are already a great hit among the users. It also allows you to upload music on your stories. The music feature is liked and used by all. You can share a post on Instagram where you can add captions and also enter the location to help people know about the whereabouts. Users can also post comments on your Instagram posts as well.

However, many times, some comments don’t go well with you and you may want to delete it. Also, if you are a famous personality, your every move is noticed and your followers comment on each and every post. Sometimes, many comments may be inappropriate and you may want to stay away from such negativity.

In order to do so, the photo and video sharing app allows you to turn off comments where your followers can only see your post and not comment on your post. Turning comments off will hide all the comments on your post and also if you turn on the comments again for a post, all your previous comments will be restored and people will hence be able to comment again. Here’s how you can turn the comments on/off for a post.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Budding photographers and social media mavens are waking up to exciting news this week: Instagram has announced its latest update, giving users more control over their posts than ever before. With the newest features update, learning how to turn off comments for a post on Instagram is easier than ever — and that’s not all! In their quest to create a safe and positive community, Instagram has beefed up security measures across the board. Faithful ‘grammers now have the ability to like worthy comments (just like on Facebook) and remove followers from private accounts without the drama of blocking them.

Since Instagram is primarily a visual community, rather than a messaging platform, discussions typically happen in post comments. While many of these comments are wonderful and supportive, occasionally — and sometimes distressingly more than occasionally — there are a few bad apples in the bunch. (This is the internet, after all — here there be trolls.) In order to weed out negative comments in the past and protect themselves from further abuse, users had to toggle on the "hide inappropriate comments" option, which would block comments with offensive keywords or phrases. With the new update, however, controlling your post’s comments is so much easier. Instead of a convoluted word search, all users have the ability to simply turn on or off the commenting feature at any time — ’cause sometimes you don’t need all that feedback on personal posts, ya know?

There are two super easy ways to stop comments. Here’s a step-by-step guide on how to make your feed an even more welcoming place for self-expression and sharing.

Turning Off Commenting For A New Post:

1. Update Your App

Before attempting to alter your comment settings, head over to the ol’ app store to make sure you are using the latest version of ‘gram. The new comment control features are rolling out Monday, Dec. 6, so once you update, you can finally let your images stand alone.

2. Open "Advanced Settings"

In order to turn off commenting before you post an image, simply tap on the "advanced settings" option at the bottom of your screen.

3. Select "Turn Off Commenting"

Toggle on the switch and commenting will be disabled for the new post. If you change your mind, don’t sweat it! This feature is quite flexible and commenting can be turned back on at any time!

Turning Off Commenting For An Existing Post:

1. Select The "…" Menu On The Post

Say you have a post that has been getting a lot of attention, but not the kind you want. In the past, you may have been temped to delete your personal post or change your account to private — but now there’s a better option! In order to retroactively turn off commenting for a public post, open your Instagram profile, select the post you want to alter, and tap on the ". " icon in the upper right hand corner of the screen.

2. Tap "Turn Off Commenting"

To disable commenting, tap the "Turn Off Commenting" option. The little speech bubble icon that is typically seen between the "heart" and the "sharing" icons will disappear. It’s a fairly subtle change so most viewers won’t even realize that comments are disabled on the post until they try to write something. Ah, silence!

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Instagram is constantly experimenting with new features, and the latest among these is the ability to hide like, and view counts on your posts. This information may be helpful to know how well your content is resonating with your followers, but it can also be a vanity metric hampering your mental health.

I can attest to how constantly comparing likes and views on my posts with others makes me feel pressured and, over time, damages my self-worth. So I’m glad Instagram has rolled out this feature to reduce the stress caused by online social comparison.

  • This feature is currently not for Reels or IGTV videos. View and like counts on Reels and IGTV will still be visible to your followers.
  • If you are looking to learn how to hide likes on Facebook, this is notpossible at present but might be in the coming months. We’ll keep you updated.

Let’s find out how to hide likes and view on yours and others’ Instagram posts.

How to hide likes and video views on new Instagram posts

When you use this feature, Instagram will no longer show the number of likes under your post. Instead, it will show the username of a follower who has liked your post with the text “and others.”

  1. Create your new Instagram post as usual until you get to the caption writing screen.
  2. At the bottom, tap Advanced Settings.
  3. Toggle on Hide Like and View Counts.
  4. Return to the previous page and tap Share to post.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Note: There is no way to set this as the default for all your new posts. So you have to enable the option each time you create a new post:

Hide the number of likes on existing Instagram posts

You can turn off like count on any of your older posts in just two simple steps:

  1. Go to the post you want to hide the like count for and tap the three-dots icon at the top right.
  2. Tap Hide Like Count on the pop-up menu.
  3. Now, the number of likes will no longer be visible.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

As for hiding video views on Instagram, the method explained above works for regular video posts on your feed but not for Instagram Reels or IGTV videos. It is not currently possible to hide likes or views on Reels and IGTV.

How to turn off likes on other’s Instagram posts

In addition to hiding likes on your posts, you should know how to hide the number of likes on Instagram as a whole so that you don’t see them on other users’ posts too. This can help you fully focus on appreciating the content rather than getting distracted by the numbers.

  1. Open Instagram and tap your profile picture at the bottom.
  2. Tap the three-lined menu icon in the top-right corner
  3. Tap Settings in the pop-up options and go to Privacy.

Of course, you can turn this off at any time to go back to see the like and view counts on others’ posts.

Unhide the like and view count on Instagram

You may have removed likes on an Instagram post, but what if you want to undo it? Well, you can go back to displaying the counts on any post in two easy steps.

  1. Go to the specific post and tap the three-dots at its top corner.
  2. Tap Unhide Like Count. That’s it!

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

This is a personal choice. If you find that likes make you feel anxious or compare yourself with others, it might be good for your mental health to turn it off. But if you run a business account, these metrics probably matter to you and help you know how your content resonates with followers. Try it for yourself and see how you feel about it.

Yes. With the “Hide Likes” feature, the number of likes or views on a post will not be publicly visible, but you can still check by clicking the text that shows you who liked it. Of course, you can also choose to unhide like counts anytime you want.

Yes, you can hide your Activity Status on Instagram. This means preventing others from seeing when you are active/online on the platform. Go to SettingsPrivacyActivity Status and toggle OFF Show Activity Status.

Well, now you know how to turn off likes and view counts on Instagram. What are your thoughts about this new feature, and have you tried it yet? Let me know in the comments below!

Read more:

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

iGeeksBlog has affiliate and sponsored partnerships. We may earn commissions on purchases made using our links. However, this doesn’t affect the recommendations our writers make. You can read more about our review and editorial process here.

As an Amazon Associate and affiliate of other programs, I earn from qualifying purchases.

Instagram Live has gained a lot of popularity since the feature to share the live video as Story for re-watching was launched. In this tutorial, we will tell you how to how to hide comments on Instagram Live. You will be able to disable comments when streaming Instagram Live if you are going live (owner) and to hide comments when watching Instagram Live in real-time (viewer or owner).

Hide Comments When Streaming Instagram Live

If you are streaming a live video, you have total control over whether your audience can leave comments on Instagram Live or not. You can also switch between these two modes during the live streaming as well.

Hiding Comments On Your Live Video

Here is how to prevent viewers from commenting on your Instagram Live:

  1. In the Instagram app, start a live video by going to the Stories section and selecting the Live option.
  2. As soon as the video starts, tap on the three vertical dots to the right of the comment box.
  3. Select Turn Off Commenting.

This is how it looks on the screenshots:

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

With this, users won’t have the option to comment on your video. Sigh! You can always enable them during the live broadcast if you decide to in the same video.

You can also watch this video to see the same steps:

  1. As it starts showing the Live, you will get the option to Hide comments at the top on the right-hand side, select it and all the comments and emojis will disappear.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

  1. To bring the comments back, just tap on Show comments and that’s it.

The good thing about this extension is that you can watch the Live video with both the audios and videos at once.

With this, Instagram Live will play without any comments in the new tab to keep you from getting distracted. Currently, you cannot hide comments on Instagram Live from the app. But this method enables you to do it from a computer and this is definitely the best shot you got right now.

Wrapping Up

Now you know how to disable comments on Instagram Live whether you are an observer or the content maker!

It’s a lifesaver since you don’t have to manage comments while watching or streaming. Poor, abusive, trolling or offensive comments can be taken care of automatically.

If you want to do the same for your Instagram posts, read this post about how to turn off comments on Instagram.

Did you find this tutorial helpful? If so, don’t forget to share it on social media.

Usually, you won’t have any problems seeing and receiving comments. Yet, it can be frustrating when sometimes you cannot see the comment you posted or are unable to see the comments on someone else’s post. If you are experiencing this problem, here are some reasons and solutions for why you can’t see comments on Instagram.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

No Comments Under Someone’s Posts on Instagram

If you don’t see any comments under a friend’s pic, there are several reasons. The account owner may have blocked the comments on that particular post. Instagram users can disable the option to receive comments on their pictures. It is by going to the post options and turning the comments off. You will be able to post a comment if they open their comment section again.

If you are on the explore page and can’t see the comments on a post, you have to click on the comment box to view them. Comments on the explore page won’t be visible unless you open the comment box.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Can’t See the Comment You Left on Someone’s Post

The most common reason you can’t see the comment you posted on Instagram is that you have a poor internet connection. If your internet connection is weak or your it breaks a lot, the likes and comments you post on Instagram don’t get through instantly. Switching to better wifi or using mobile data can be the solution.

Another reason for not seeing your comments may be that the account owner has hidden offensive comments or filtered out some words that if they are used in the comments section, the comment will be filtered out.

Instagram enables users to monitor their comment section by giving the option to “hide offensive comments.” If someone leaves a comment deemed offensive by Instagram, the system will hide the comment. The same goes for the “manual filter,” which allows you to choose specific words that Instagram recognizes in order to hide the comment.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Instagram reels are the most favorite feature of Instagram. It is a highly entertaining pastime activity and a medium to communicate with your friends.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Since Instagram launched the story feature, people have been obsessing over creating dazzling content. With various filters, numerous stickers, and co.

If you are sure none of the above are the problem, there may be a glitch on the app that causes the comments not to appear. You can try to restart the app to check if the problem is fixed.

In Conclusion: Why You Can’t See Comments on Instagram?

Instagram is a social media platform where you can give or receive comments and likes to your pictures and videos. We have gone through various technical reasons that can cause you not to see a comment you left on a post. Also, Instagram comment filtering tools can cause your comment to be filtered out so that the comment gets hidden.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Sometimes feedback in the form of comments is welcome on Facebook posts. Other times, not so much. For those moments you may be wondering how to turn off commenting on your Facebook posts, the short answer is: You can’t. Facebook states: “Unfortunately, the functionality to disable comments on your posts is not currently available. Anyone included in the privacy setting of your post will be able to view, like, and comment on your post.”

You can, however, stop commenting on posts in a Facebook group page. Bear in mind, you must be a group admin or a moderator of the group to turn off commenting on a post in a group.

How to turn off comments on a Facebook group post

It’s a quick and simple job to turn off comments on a Facebook group post. Simply click on the three dots icon at the top right of the post.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

From the options that pop up, tap on “Turn off commenting.” Comments will now be disabled.

How to hide posts from a certain person or people

While you can’t turn off comments outright in non-group posts, there are some other workarounds. If you have a particular person, or people, who regularly make annoying comments on your posts, it is possible to hide your posts from them. Here’s what to do:

When you create a post, look for the “Friends” dropdown menu underneath your name.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Click this. In the window that pops up, look for the “Friends except…” option.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Click this, and select the person or people you want to hide the post from.

How to hide comments containing certain words from your profile

Another thing you can do for your personal Facebook profile is to hide comments containing certain words. You can generate a personalized list of up to 1,000 words which, if someone uses one or more of them in a comment, will result in the comment automatically being hidden.

To set this up, click on the triangular icon at the top right of your Facebook and select “Settings and privacy.”

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

In the “Settings and privacy” menu, select “Settings.” Now look to the left of your screen and select “Profile and tagging.” In the “Viewing and sharing” section, look for the option to “Hide comments containing certain words from your profile.” Click “Edit.”

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

This gives you the option to “choose a list of words, phrases, or emojis that you want to hide from your profile.” Enter your undesirable words in the text box, and click “Save.”

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Now, if anyone comments on any of your Facebook posts and uses one of those words or phrases, the comment will automatically be hidden from you and everyone else. Only the person who posted the comment will still be able to see it.

The obvious hack here: If you enter a ton of commonly used words as your words that mean the comment gets hidden, it’s unlikely that many comments will pass your filter.

Instagram has recently added new features for users concerned about likes on their news feed. They can now decide whether they want to turn them off or not. This way, people have more control over the content they see and can choose what works best for them.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

If you want to turn off likes on Instagram, you’ve come to the right spot. This article provides detailed instructions on how to do it on an iPhone, Android, iPad, and PC.

How to Turn Off Likes in Instagram on iOS

There are many reasons a person might want to hide Instagram likes. Privacy concerns, pressure, anxiety, or simply wanting to try something new. All users with the latest version of Instagram on their iPhones can turn off likes for specific posts on their profiles. They can also turn off likes from their followers’ posts.

Follow the steps below for detailed instructions on how to turn off Instagram likes on an iPhone:

Hide Instagram Likes Before Sharing a Post

Maybe you decided to share a post on Instagram without people seeing how many likes it gets. You can do so by following the steps below:

  1. Add a post as you normally do. When you’re about to share the post, scroll to “Advanced Settings” on the “Share Screen” page.

Note that you can change this setting anytime in the three-dotted menu at the top of the post.

Hide Instagram Likes After Sharing a Post

Maybe you shared a post and forgot to hide the likes for it or simply want to turn off likes for some of your previous posts. You can easily change this setting by tweaking that specific post options:

    Navigate to the post and press the three-dotted menu from the top right-hand of the post.

You’ll now see a message saying “Liked by [username] and others” below that post. There is no bulk hide feature available yet, so you have to apply these steps for each post you want to edit.

Turn Off Likes on Others’ Posts

Do you want to turn off likes from your followers’ posts? You can do so by following the steps below:

  1. Tap on your “Profile” tab from the bottom right-hand and navigate to the menu.

That’s it! You have successfully turned off likes from others’ posts on Instagram. You can always toggle off the “Hide Like and View Counts” button to go back to the previous settings. Also, note that this still allows you to see the list of people who liked a particular post. When you see a “Liked by [username] and others” message under the picture, tapping on “others” will open up the list.

How to Turn Off Likes in Instagram on an Android Device

Users concerned about the “like” culture taking a toll on their mental health welcomed Instagram’s latest feature allowing them to hide likes. Android users can decide whether they want to hide likes from their posts or their followers’ posts. If you belong to this category, simply follow the instructions below.

Hide Instagram Likes Before Sharing a Post

  1. Create a post as you normally would, but don’t send it just yet. Instead, scroll down to the “Advanced Settings”
    How to turn off comments on your instagram posts
  2. Then toggle the “Hide Like and View Counts on This Post.”
    How to turn off comments on your instagram posts
  3. Publish the post.

You will be the only one to see likes and views for that post. If you change your mind and decide to change back the settings, just tap on the three-dotted menu for that post and tap “Unhide Like and View Counts.”

Hide Instagram Likes After Sharing a Post

You can also turn off likes for the posts you already published. Just navigate to that specific post and turn on the hide feature. Unfortunately, there is still no feature that allows bulk hiding, so you have to do so manually for each post. Here’s how:

  1. Find the Instagram post from which you want to hide likes.

It will now say “Liked by [username] and others” below that post. You can still see who liked the post by tapping on “others.”

Turn Off Likes on Others’ Posts

If you want to get rid of the likes altogether, you can also turn off the like and view count feature for your followers’ posts.

    Tap on your “Profile” tab from the bottom right-hand and navigate to the menu.

You have now turned off likes from others’ posts on Instagram. If you change your mind, you can undo the action by toggling the “Hide Like and View Counts” option off.

Can I Turn Off Likes in Instagram on a PC?

Instagram does its best to promote mobile application use. This means many features are disabled for PCs, including the option to turn off Instagram likes. If turning off the likes is really important to you, you may use the Instagram app for iOS or Android devices. Just follow the instructions for your device in its respective section above.

Your Instagram Privacy Is in Your Hands

Users want different things from their Instagram experience. While some need to follow likes to see what’s trending, others want to manage the pressure online by turning them off. Whether you’re feeling anxious or simply want to focus on the content rather than the likes, you can easily turn them off for your or your followers’ posts.

Why did you decide it’s time to turn off likes on Instagram? Do you think the like feature can negatively affect someone’s mental health? Share your thoughts and experiences in the comments section below.

Instagram has released a number of new features to control cyberbullying on its platform. Here's how you can delete comments in bulk.

Instagram introduced new features to stop cyberbullying. (Image: Bloomberg)

Instagram recently announced a number of new features to combat cyberbullying on its platform. These features let users choose who can tag them in a post, highlight positive comments, restrict comments from certain accounts, and deleting comments in bulk.

Trolls coming over to your post to roast you can be really inconvenient when you do not want to turn off the comments on your post on. Earlier, you could only remove comments one by one, which was a gruesome task. Thanks to the new features, you can now delete up to 25 comments at once that you do not want to appear on your post. Here’s how to use it:

How to delete comments in bulk

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

How to delete comments in bulk on an Instagram post. (Image: Instagram)

To delete comments in bulk, first, you need to go to the comments section of your Instagram post. Then tap on the three dots icon located on the top right corner of the screen and select the option to manage comments. Now all you need to do is tap on the comments that you wish to remove and delete them in bulk.

The feature has been added to the iOS version of the app. For Android, it was available for quite some time now. Apart from deleting comments in bulk, you can also block or restrict accounts in bulk to stop yourself from the menace of cyberbullying. Once you are in the comments sections and have selected to manage comments, select ‘More Options’ and select to bock or restrict multiple accounts.

Best of Express Premium

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Express Tech is now on Telegram. Click here to join our channel (@expresstechnology) and stay updated with the latest tech news

It will allow you to not only delete comments but also restrict or block the accounts that made those comments. Alternatively, you can choose the words to hide from your comments box.

Want to receive the best of our blog every single month?

With over 500 million eager people logging in every single day, Instagram attracts users, marketers, and brands from every corner of the internet. But as the platform’s popularity continues to grow so does the number of not so humble trolls on Instagram.

Troll posts can detract from your brand’s message and make your followers feel uncomfortable. They lurk in the shadows, waiting for the perfect moment to spark controversy and throw insults out just because.

How do you prevent trolls from running wild, taking over your Instagram account and insulting your audience? You’ve got a number of options.

Fight them through the keywords

Kevin Systrom, Instagram’s CEO, is eager to make the platform safer for its users.

Over the last year, he oversaw a number of changes that make it easier to filter out mean-spirited, inflammatory comments from your content.

Manage your Instagram comments

You can’t always stop the trolls from doing their thing but you can take away the one thing they crave: attention.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Instagram now allows users to hide inappropriate comments. This feature uses Instagram’s Spam, Scam or Abusive Content flagging system and machine learning to hide comments that use language others have frequently reported as offensive.

To activate this feature, head over to Settings and then scroll down to Comments. Check the box on the left-hand side and watch the troll comments disappear.

If you want to go even further, Instagram offers a second option.

You can create your own list of custom keywords commonly used by trolls in your field. This can help separate genuine customer complaints from the trolls.

Related Post: Instagram 101

Use moderation rules

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Not all the trolls on Instagram are created equal. If you set up moderation rules with Agorapulse’s Inbox Assistant, you can track different strains of trolls on your business profiles by focusing on specific keywords.

You can use Agorapulse to craft custom moderation rules that make managing Instagram accounts easier.

Once you’ve picked the keywords to watch out for you’ve got a few different options.

Create rules that let you review, assign, bookmark, label or straight out delete comments based on specific keywords and phrases.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

This gives you the freedom to spend your time creating engaging content and talking to your followers instead of babysitting trolls.

Turn off the comments

As an Instagram account holder, you can block users from commenting on your content and suspend comments on specific posts altogether. With great power comes a big question: If you are getting hounded by trolls, should you turn off the comments or does that play right into their hand?

There’s no one size fits all answer to this question.

Comments are an essential part of what makes social media social. They are the obvious ingredient to success.

Replying to comments from your community is a fantastic way to increase engagement and grow your audience. But is there a time when suspending them can be a smart move?

If the Instagram account you are managing is under constant attack and the other methods aren’t doing enough, turning off the comments on a specific post for a set period of time can help you wait out the attack.

This presents an opportunity to be upfront and honest with your followers. Let them know why you are turning the comments off and encourage other means of communication.

Turning the comments on and off is pretty simple.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

You can disable comments for a new post when you are first uploading it by selecting the Advanced Settings option tucked away at the bottom of the menu and then turn comments off.

You can also turn comments on and off on an existing photo. Just click on the photo, tap the three dots in the right-hand corner and click on Turn Off Commenting.

This is a pretty extreme preventative solution but it’s a handy thing to have in your arsenal in case you ever need to deploy it.

Public Instagram accounts

Managing a public Instagram account? In September, Instagram released a new comment managing feature for public accounts that give you a bit more control.

Public account holders can decide who gets to comment. For example, they can make commenting available just to followers or to followers and friends, giving managers a bit more power.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Create a code of conduct

While it’s impossible to avoid troll attacks on Instagram altogether, being upfront about what’s acceptable on your page (and what isn’t) can help you handle trolls better.

Instagram has community guidelines that outline the type of behavior it tolerates. Creating a wider code of conduct for your brand’s social media interactions and community can set down clear expectations. Then, if you block specific trolls you can let them know exactly why that’s happening.

Let your community know what kind of behavior and language is accepted on your Instagram page and what isn’t. Be transparent and stick to the rules you create. If someone breaks the code, take action.

There’s a difference between a negative review , comment or feedback that’s actually based on a real customer experience and a disgruntled troll and it’s important to distinguish between the two. However, when the troll’s been identified don’t take the bait, take action.

Report trolls to Instagram

Troll accounts deserve the same treatment as spam accounts — block them. Not only do they add zero value to the conversation, they can make the rest of your audience uncomfortable.

Don’t feed the trolls on Instagram

Trolls aren’t hanging out on your brand page to have an actual conversation or give your constructive feedback. They are there to hijack the conversation then feed off the emotional outpour that follows. Don’t let them.

As the lines between Facebook and Instagram continue to blur, Instagram account holders can now 'Like' other people's comments on posts, block offensive and spam comments automatically, and may soon be able to see them in a Facebook-style thread.

After you've updated to the latest version of the app, on iOS and Android, you will see a small 'heart' symbol next to each comment that can be used to 'like' a post; similar to Facebook's thumbs-up option (and identical to Twitter's 'Like' button.)

Instagram is also boosting safety features on the app to make it easier for people to block abusive comments, or limit who can see their posts. Following the update, you will be able to remove followers on private accounts as well as turn comments off for individual posts.

The app is also reportedly testing a feature that will make it easier for you to track comments by adding them to a thread, in a similar way to how comments appear on Facebook. Currently, when you reply to a comment, the person only sees a notification for it if you explicitly tag them in it. This thread option will go some way to solving this, making sure comments aren't missed.

Select a post. Alternatively, you can expand the comments section in your feed using the 'View [X] comments' or the 'more' option. Next to each comment, you'll see a greyed-out heart icon. Press the heart and this heart icon will change to pink to register your Like. The graphic and animation is identical to how it appears when you 'Like' a post.

These hearts only appear when you expand the comments section. They are small and positioned to the right of the initial comment. It is not currently possible to like an Instagram Story in this way, however, you can send the person who created the story a direct message on each post. To do this, scroll up from the bottom of the screen where a typing box will appear. Type your message and hit send.

Only the person who posted the Story can see your comment.

You can switch off comments on posts either before you post, or retrospectively.

To do the former, upload a photo or video in the standard way – add filters, edit, tag people, add a location, and so on. Below the list of external platforms on the final share page, you will now see an 'Advanced sharing' option.

Enter this menu and select 'Turn off comments'.

To make this change retrospectively, find the post in your feed and press the three dots in the top right-hand corner of the individual post. Select 'Advanced sharing' and toggle the feature off.

As part of its latest update, Instagram added the ability to block offensive comments on posts and in live video as well as a spam filter, available in nine languages. In the Comment Settings menu you will now (or soon) see an option to Hide Offensive Comments using the Automatic Filter. This can be enabled or disable at any time. It's also possible to add a manual filter based on certain keywords.

The spam filter will look for obvious spam in comments and live videos. The filter will remove spam written in English, Spanish, Portuguese, Arabic, French, German, Russian, Japanese and Chinese.

This tool can only be used if you have a private Instagram account. To make your account private, go to your profile, click the cog icon in the top right-hand corner of the screen and toggle 'Private account' to enabled.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

With Instagram being at the core of businesses that want to increase their visibility and engagement, it’s no surprise people get randomly tagged left and right without their prior consent or ever having shown interest in that particular brand or product previously.

And then there are those “friends” who tag you in stupid contests you want nothing to do with or share silly jokes or information you’re not interested in, so it’s no wonder you want to know how to untag yourself from an Instagram comment or photo.

Which kind of leads us to the first question:

Who can tag me on Instagram?

It all depends on your privacy settings. You can choose who can tag or mention you in their Instagram comments, photos, and videos very easily in the Tag settings section of your privacy settings.

But judging by the fact that you’ve stumbled upon this article on how to remove Instagram tags — and are justifiably annoyed by all the unrequested ones — your privacy settings are most likely a free-for-all right now.

So how can you change that and remove a mention on Instagram?

How to choose who can tag me on Instagram and how to stop someone from tagging me on Instagram

To stop people from tagging you on Instagram comments, do the following:

1. Go to your profile picture and tap on the triple horizontal line icon in the top right corner.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

2. Go to Settings.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

3. Go to Privacy.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

4. Go to Tags, and then Mentions.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

5. In both sections, choose “People You Follow” or “No One” depending on your tagging and mention preferences. In the Tags section, you can also choose to manually approve tags. This option is especially great if you aren’t tagged in as many things, but you want to make sure whatever you’re tagged in represents you and what you stand for.

How to stop getting notifications from tagged photos on Instagram

If you don’t care whether you’re tagged or not, but just don’t want to get notifications about it, you can go to Settings -> Notifications -> Posts, Stories and Comments and choose “Off” or “From People I Follow” in the Photos of You sections.

But as a side note, if you own a business, or even if you’re just a regular Instagram user, you should generally care what people tag you in because it speaks to your image. You wouldn’t want to have your brand misrepresented in any way or have it associated with shady accounts or inflammatory content.

However, if you receive hundreds or thousands of tags, it is totally understandable that you won’t be able to keep up with them and you need to work out whatever is the most convenient for you.

Ok, so now that we’ve figured out how to stop being tagged on Instagram or at least how to stop being notified of useless tags and mentions, what can you do about the existing ones?

How to untag yourself from an Instagram comment or photo

Let’s take them one by one.

How to remove a tag on an Instagram comment or, more correctly put, how to unmention yourself on Instagram

Once you are mentioned in a comment and you’re not happy about the post or about being exposed and associated with a certain situation or product, the only thing you can do is ask the commenter to remove their comment, and perhaps not mention or tag you in future comments either.

If this person has been constantly tagging and harassing you, you can also choose to block or report them. Go to Notifications (the heart icon in the top right corner), choose their profile and tap on Block, Restrict, or Report. Blocking someone restricts their entire access to your account, meaning they won’t be able to find your profile, posts, or stories, while choosing the Restrict option still allows them to see your content and interact, without you or anyone else seeing their comments.

How to untag yourself from an Instagram photo

This is easier than having to remove a tag on an Instagram comment, as you can do it yourself, without having to solicit the help of the person who tagged you.

Here’s what you need to do in order to remove a tag on an Instagram photo:

1. Go to Notifications.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

2. Choose the tagged post.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

3. Click on the image and find your tag or tap the 3 dots at the top right corner if there are many tags on the image and tap on Tag Options.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

4. Choose “Remove Me From Post” and confirm.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Bonus Questions Answered:

Where can I see tagged photos on Instagram?

Tap on your profile picture in the bottom right corner and then on the portrait icon next to the grid icon.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Who can see photos I’ve been tagged in on Instagram?

This depends on the privacy of your account. If you own a private account, your posts are private and only your followers will be able to see photos and videos that you’re tagged in. If your profile is public, so are your posts, including the ones you’re tagged in.

How do I hide tags on Instagram?

To hide a photo or video you’ve been tagged in on Instagram, tap it, then tap your username and choose “Hide From My Profile”.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

I hope this article was helpful and you’ve learned a few tricks on how to remove yourself from a comment tag on Instagram and untag yourself from an Instagram photo. Don’t forget to share it so that others can learn as well!

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Everyone has those people they follow on Instagram that when they come up in your feed, you can’t help but roll your eyes or scroll even faster (Don’t lie: a certain someone just popped up in your head, didn’t they… ?)

Maybe they’re guilty of being multi-posters (someone who posts more than once a day on Instagram), maybe their Stories are way too much and way too frequent, or maybe the content their posting has shifted from fun and interesting to constant selfies and “deep”, motivational quotes.

Regardless of your reasons for getting sick of your co-worker, friend, or family member on Instagram, sometimes hitting the Unfollow button can cause a lot more problems than you’d expect: some people have apps that track who unfollows them and they’ll know the second you say bye-bye to their profile, and that could make things a wee bit awkward during your next work meeting, birthday party, or family gathering (ever have someone come up to you and ask why you unfollowed them? Yeah. It’s really awkward).

Now Instagram has released a feature that allows users to merely mute a profile rather than unfollow altogether, and while this option has existed for IG Stories for a while, it is a brand new option for full profiles and posts.

Instagram said that it added this feature to make your feed more personalized, but it acknowledges there was clearly user demand. “We’ve also heard it may be a useful tool for managing complex social dynamics,” said a rep for the company. (BuzzFeed)

Sound useful? Well here’s how you can mute Instagram Stories and Instagram posts!

How to mute Instagram Stories

  1. Launch Instagram from your Home screen.
  2. Press and hold the Instagram Story you would like to mute. You might need to go to the person’s profile if they don’t automatically appear at the top of your screen.

Tap Mute.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

The Instagram Stories from that particular profile will no longer appear in your newsfeed. The only way to watch them is to physically go to that particular profile and watch stories from there.

How to hide your Instagram Stories from certain people

  1. Launch Instagram from your homepage.
  2. Tap on your Profile in the lower right corner.

Tap Settings. It looks like a gear in a box.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Tap The profile you would like to hide from seeing your stories.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

When you’re happy with the list of people you have, tap Done in the upper right corner to hide them from your Stories.

You can unhide someone from your Stories by going back and deselecting them.

How to mute Instagram posts

  1. Launch Instagram from your homepage.
  2. Tap the three dots to the upper left of the person’s post you would like to mute.
  3. Tap Mute Posts.

If you want to mute both Stories and posts from a person, tap on the Mute Posts and Stories option instead.

Do you mute or unfollow?

Are you someone who cares about social media dynamics, especially when it comes to following and unfollowing? Or do you really not care if someone unfollows you rather than mutes you?

Let me know if you’ll be taking advantage of the new mute features in the comments down below!

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

These are the 10 best Kirby games of all time

Kirby has been around for over 30 years now and he’s been in over 30 video games as well. After analyzing his adventures, we’ve determined which ones are the best of the best.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Betas never stop: The third beta for watchOS 8.6 is out now!

The third beta of watchOS 8.6 is now available to developers.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Review: Twelve South’s Curve Riser elevates your iMac a bit too much

If you’re looking for a monitor riser for your iMac or Apple Studio Display, the Twelve South Curve Riser is likely one to avoid.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Shine a light in all the right places with these webcam lighting options

You need a different type of lighting for webcam work than you do for still or mobile photography. We’re picky, so we only go for the best webcam lighting available. Want to step up your game? These are our top picks this year.

Instagram is launching a handful of new tools today to combat harassment and help its community members.

The first of those is much requested: the ability to limit who can comment on your photos. Instagram now gives everyone with a public account the ability to limit comments to only people they follow, only their followers, or both their followers and people they follow. Public and private accounts will continue to have the ability to turn off comments entirely, but it appears to still be on a post-by-post basis.

Instagram is also expanding its offensive comment filter to four other languages: Arabic, French, German, and Portuguese. The tool launched in English in June, and is supposed to use AI and machine learning to improve over time and take into account both the wording of a comment and the context it’s being written in.

For live videos, Instagram is also adding the ability for viewers to send mental health resources to the broadcaster mid-stream. This could be a really meaningful addition for the platform, particularly since the launch of Facebook Live, there have been occasional news stories about people broadcasting self-harm and death. Giving viewers a way to present help line information and assistance to the streamer could avert some of these tragic incidents.

BuzzFeed News reports that Instagram already allowed its users to report posts for including references to self-harm and suicide and would present reported posters with resources to get assistance; but it says the difference now is that Instagram will actively pop up its information in the middle of a live stream, rather than waiting until it’s ended to offer help to the streamer. A stream won’t stop just because the information has popped up, so streamers will be able to ignore it or read it and then return to their broadcast.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Instagram has rolled out more granular controls to reduce negative interactions and improve the experience for everyone on the platform. Read along for how to block Instagram mentions and tags in comments, captions, and Story.

Instagram has been consistent with its ongoing efforts to combat online bullying, and some of the latest examples include being able to bulk delete comments as well as control who can tag and mention you in comments, Story, and captions.

The new features are rolling out now (if you don’t seem them try updating Instagram). You’ll find the new settings (when available) in the Settings > Privacy section inside Instagram for iPhone.

iPhone: How to block Instagram mentions and tags

  1. Open Instagram and head to your profile (bottom right corner of the app)
  2. Tap the three-line icon, then choose Settings
  3. Now tap Privacy
  4. At the top you can choose from Comments, Tags, Mentions, and Story
  5. Choose to allow, tags, mentions, or Story replies from “Everyone,” “People You Follow,” or “No One.”
  6. Tags, Story, and Comments privacy settings feature even more controls like manual approval and more

Here’s how these steps look on iPhone:

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

After choosing which settings you’d like to customize, pick who you’d like to be able to tag or mention you.

In the Tags section, you can opt to manually approve them and in the Comment settings, you can block individual users.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Read more 9to5Mac tutorials:

FTC: We use income earning auto affiliate links. More.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

iPhone

Introduced in 2007 by Steve Jobs, iPhone is Apple's flagship iOS device and easily its most popular product around the world. The iPhone runs iOS and includes a large collection of mobile apps through the App Store.

How To

A collection of tutorials, tips, and tricks from the 9to5Mac team helping you fix and get the most out of your favorite gear.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

While we all enjoy getting a notification when someone ‘likes’ our post on Instagram, have you opened the app to find out that a random person has mentioned you in a comment? Sometimes it’s probably just a mistake, and sometimes it could be an annoying friend. So what can you do about it? Is there a way to stop people from mentioning you on Instagram? Read on to find out!

  • What is a ‘Mention’ on Instagram
  • Who can mention me on Instagram
  • How to stop being mentioned on Instagram
  • How to stop someone from mentioning you on Instagram
  • Can you remove a mention on Instagram?

What is a ‘Mention’ on Instagram

Mentioning is a form of tagging; however, it differs in its purpose. When you tag a person, you are indicating that you are present with the person (ideally), however, mention is used to chat directly with (or reply to) a particular person. You can mention people in Stories, comments, and captions. Tapping on a mention takes you to the user’s profile.

When you mention a person on Instagram, they get a notification letting them know (similar to a tag). However, this only applies if the person allows mentions.

Who can mention me on Instagram

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Instagram lets you choose the audience that you allow to mention you. By default, Instagram allows everyone to mention you in their stories, comments, and captions, irrespective of whether you follow them or not.

There are three options to choose from: Everyone, People you follow, and No one. If you enable the third option, no user will be able to mention you. When they try to @yourusername they will be notified that you do not allow mentions.

How to stop being mentioned on Instagram

Unfortunately, there is no way to prevent individual people from mentioning you. If you are getting mentioned by random people, you can change your audience for who can mention you. To do so, follow this simple guide below.

Launch the Instagram app, and go to your profile by tapping your profile image in the bottom right corner. Tap the hamburger menu in the top right corner.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

In the slide-out menu, select ‘Settings’.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Go to Privacy > Mentions. Now select ‘People You Follow’.

  • How to turn off comments on your instagram posts
  • How to turn off comments on your instagram posts
  • How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Once enabled, only the accounts that you follow can @yourusername. If you do not want anyone to be able to mention you, select the ‘No One’ option.

How to stop someone from mentioning you on Instagram

You can block anyone who you don’t want to be mentioning you. A blocked account cannot mention you. However, you will no longer be able to see each other’s posts or find each other on Instagram at all. To block an account, go to the account in question, tap the three dots in the top right corner, and select ‘Block’.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Can you remove a mention on Instagram?

Unfortunately, there is no way to remove yourself from a mention. Unlike a tag, which you can remove by simply tapping the post, a mention is part of the caption, and therefore cannot be removed.

If you block an account after the user has mentioned you, your profile will still remain in their mention. However, once you block them, they will not be able to mention you in their story, caption, or comments.

It seems strange that Instagram would not provide an option to remove a mention. For now, other than changing your audience, all you can do is message the user and request them to remove the mention. If you have any queries feel free to reach out to us in the comments below.

Stop getting alerts about posts, stories, and live streams

  • Western Kentucky University
  • Gulf Coast Community College
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email

What to Know

  • In the mobile app, from your profile, tap the menu icon, select Settings > Notifications, and choose which the alerts you want to disable.
  • On the web, go to your profile, click Settings > Notifications, then select the alerts you want to turn off.
  • If you don't want to disable alerts, you can choose to receive them only from specific activities or groups of users.

This article covers how to turn off post and story notifications and other activities in the Instagram mobile app and on a desktop browser.

How to Turn Off Post & Story Notifications on the Instagram Mobile App

The Instagram app's notification feature gives you a fair amount of control over the types of alerts you receive (or choose not to receive). Follow these steps to turn off post and Story notifications.

Open the Instagram app on your mobile device and tap the Profile icon in the bottom right corner.

On your profile page, tap the hamburger menu in the upper-right corner.

Tap Settings in the slide-out menu that appears.

Tap Notifications.

Tap Posts, Stories and Comments.

Scroll to the bottom of the page and choose how you want to handle notifications for First Posts and Stories:

  • Off: Turn all notifications for first posts and stories off.
  • From People I follow: Allow only first post and story notifications from people you follow.
  • From Everyone: Allow first post and story notifications from everyone.

In addition to the First Posts and Stories, there are many other notifications you can turn off on the same screen:

  • Likes: Turn off Like notifications or choose which ones you receive when someone likes a post you created.
  • Likes and Comments on Photos: Turn off or choose who you're notified about when they like or comment on photos you post.
  • Photos of You: Turn off or choose who you're notified about when they like or comment on photos you're tagged in.
  • Comments: Turn off or choose who you're notified about when they like or comment on comments you leave on Instagram.
  • Comment Likes and Pins: Turn notifications of comment likes and pins on or off.

If you want to turn off all notifications you can do that by tapping Additional options in system settings from the Notifications screen, then tap Show notifications to On (green) or Off (white).

How to Turn Off Instagram Notifications From a Web Browser

If you're using Instagram on your computer you can turn off notifications from the web browser.

Changing your notification preferences applies only to the device where you change them. So, if you're changing them on the Instagram desktop app through a web browser, that doesn't affect the notifications you receive when using the Instagram app on your mobile device.

Open Instagram in your web browser and click your Profile icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Choose Settings in the menu that appears.

Select Push Notifications in the left navigation menu.

Scroll through the list on the next screen and adjust the notifications you do or don't want to receive. Those options include:

  • Likes
  • Comments
  • Comment Likes
  • Likes and Comments on Photos of You
  • Accept Follow Requests
  • Friends on Instagram
  • Instagram Direct Requests
  • Instagram Direct
  • Reminders
  • First Posts and Stories
  • Instagram TV View Counts
  • Support Requests
  • Live Videos

For each selection, you can either choose On or Off. In some cases, you have the options for Off, From People I Follow, or From Everyone.

Once you make your selections you can return to Instagram and your new settings are automatically saved.

Instagram rolled out it's new 'Suggested Posts' feature in early August, but many users were displeased by it. Find out how to turn it off.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Instagram rolled out the new ‘Suggested Posts’ feature at the beginning of August 2020. However, many daily users of the app were utterly displeased and wanted to get rid of suggested posts appearing in their timeline. For those who haven’t noticed it yet, the new suggested posts on Instagram appear at the bottom of a user’s feed.

A user will be able to see this feature at work, once they have spent a good amount of time on the app and scrolled through all the new content posted the accounts they follow. The content that comes up in the suggested posts feature will be from accounts you may not have seen before. Read on to find out, “How to turn off suggested posts on Instagram?”

first instagram gives me an ad for something I don’t care about and then it gives me “suggested posts” from people I don’t care about. who tf is on the ig beta team and approved this shit? pic.twitter.com/V6C79s3L0D

— J (@JessicaPalomar) August 19, 2020

How does Instagram suggest you posts?

Instagram’s suggested posts feature is based on posts from accounts which happen to be similar to the ones the user is already following. It is also similar to the posts which a user has liked or saved on the app. Users of the social media app aren’t too impressed by the new update. Many Instagram users took to Twitter to express their annoyance with the new feature. Several users also wanted to know how to turn off suggested posts on Instagram.

Dear @instagram how do I turn this awful suggested posts nonsense off, I don’t want it, I’m more than capable of searching for things if I want to pic.twitter.com/TVgvDB6WyZ

— Thom Bolton (@tbolt87) August 19, 2020

Yeah, this is a hard “No” from me, @instagram. How do you turn this off? And. isn’t there already a suggested posts section? #instagramupdate pic.twitter.com/AenC3r8gLL

— Chris C. – WMAR-2 News (@PhotogChris) August 19, 2020

Does anyone know how I can get rid of this stupidass Suggested Posts option on @instagram ? Istg that site is like a plague, you breathe and they come up with something else that is completely useless and utterly annoying pic.twitter.com/xQzZFIyIfi

— Andrada (@AndryPresh) August 19, 2020

How to turn off suggested posts on Instagram?

The short answer to this question is, You Can’t. There is no way for a user to be able to turn off or disable this feature. Instagram has already noted in its support document, that users “won’t be able to hide Suggested Posts.” Hence, Instagram’s suggested posts feature is here to stay at least until a critical mass of user base demands for the removal of the feature.

While users can’t hide suggested posts or disable them from their feeds, but they can tell Instagram if they are ‘not interested’ in their suggestions. A user can just tap the three dots above the post and then tap ‘not interested’. This feature will not make the post go away but will alert Instagram about future suggestions. Another way is to tap ‘View Older Posts’ and see more posts from the accounts which you do follow, this will push the suggested posts further down. One way to avoid suggested posts on Instagram altogether is to use Instagram in a web browser instead of using the app on a phone.

Facebook will effectively allow users to turn off comments, with options providing more control over what is posted on their profiles, but the impact will be felt most by media businesses, which have struggled to moderate comments on their posts. Photograph: Régis Duvignau/Reuters

Facebook will effectively allow users to turn off comments, with options providing more control over what is posted on their profiles, but the impact will be felt most by media businesses, which have struggled to moderate comments on their posts. Photograph: Régis Duvignau/Reuters

Facebook will allow every user including celebrities, politicians, brands and news outlets to determine who can and can’t comment on their posts.

The social media giant announced on Wednesday that when people post on Facebook, they will be able to control who comments on the post, ranging from everyone who can see the post, to only those who have been tagged by the profile or page in the post. It is similar to a change recently introduced by Twitter to limit who can reply to tweets.

Facebook has introduced tools allowing users and pages to limit who can comment on their public posts, effectively allowing them to turn off or disable comments. Photograph: Facebook/PA

The change comes after a landmark ruling in Australia in 2019, which found news media companies were liable for defamatory comments posted by users on the companies’ public Facebook pages, leading to media companies calling for a change to the law, which had put pressure on staff resourcing on moderation.

The ruling found media companies have a responsibility to pre-moderate comments, but previously there was no way to screen comments posted on Facebook before they were published, unless the page administrators used a limited keyword filter to pick up a word or words and prevent comments containing those words being posted.

While it will mean every Facebook user will have more control over what is posted on their profiles, the impact will be most felt among media organisations and other high-profile public pages that have struggled to moderate comments on Facebook posts on their pages.

The New South Wales supreme court ruled in 2019 that several Australian media companies were liable for defamatory comments posted by users on their Facebook pages in response to news articles.

Dylan Voller, whose mistreatment in the Northern Territory’s Don Dale youth detention centre led to a royal commission, had sued the Sydney Morning Herald, the Australian, the Centralian Advocate, Sky News Australia and The Bolt Report over 10 comments on their Facebook pages in response to news articles about him between 2016 and 2017.

An appeal of the ruling was upheld last year, with the court finding media outlets had “sufficient control” over deleting postings when they became aware they were defamatory.

Since then, media companies have been advised to deploy significant resources into moderating comments or refrain from posting articles that were likely to attract potentially defamatory comments in response.

Media companies had sought this change from Facebook as part of the Australian government’s news media bargaining code legislation, which passed the parliament last month. The exposure draft for the legislation contained a section requiring the platforms like Facebook to allow for news businesses to moderate comments, but this was removed from the legislation when it was introduced into parliament.

The ABC told the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission in its submission to the draft legislation that without comment moderation tools “news media organisations may be forced to withdraw from the use of some of these products and/or increase moderation resourcing in order to mitigate legal risks incurred as a result of being on the platform”.

SBS told the parliament news media businesses “are subject to significant legal risk regarding user-generated content, including comments on social media posts, which means the ability to manage these features is increasingly important.

The broadcaster said it had to “substantially increase its investment in social media moderation, in particular for news and current affairs content”.

“With the ability to switch off comments, this investment could instead be redirected to additional trusted news content for audiences.”

The rollout of the new feature began on Wednesday, but could take up to two weeks before every profile and page has the ability to turn comments off.

Facebook’s vice-president of global affairs, Nick Clegg, recently penned a 5,000-word essay aimed at addressing recent criticism of its news feed algorithm in creating echo chambers and increasing polarisation in society, most notably made in the Netflix documentary, The Social Dilemma.

Clegg argued Facebook’s actions showed the company did not actively encourage the sharing of sensationalised content in order to keep people on the platform. He said Facebook “reduces the distribution” of content found to be sensational, misleading” or to be gratuitously soliciting engagement.

Websites that also have a disproportionately large amount of traffic coming from Facebook were also demoted, Clegg said.

Instagram has rolled out a new feature that allows users to choose whether they want to hide likes or not. We’re covering the all-important details in this blog post!

Last Updated May 20, 2021

Stay on top of the biggest social media marketing trends!

Instagram has rolled out a feature that allows users to choose whether they want to hide likes or not.

This is the latest in a series of moves by Instagram designed to alleviate social pressure around “like counts.”

Ready to find out more about hiding likes on Instagram? We’re covering the all-important details in this blog post.

Why is Instagram Giving Users the Option to Hide Likes?

Instagram has experimented with hiding likes in several countries over the last few years.

In fact, in 2019, Instagram trialled the removal of likes entirely for select users in the US, Canada, Australia, Brazil, Ireland, Italy, Japan, and New Zealand.

According to Adam Mosseri, CEO of Instagram, this was an initiative to make Instagram “a safer place on the internet.”

However, not everyone was in favor of hidden like counts. “Some still wanted to see like counts, in particular to track what’s popular,” Mosseri shared on Twitter.

In particular, creators and influencers said that the like count metric was important for communicating value to brand partners, and that their removal could have a negative impact on an influencer’s average engagement rate.

As a result, Instagram has announced it is giving users a new option to choose whether to hide likes on the platform or not.

As the 2020 election ramps up, political ads are likely to infiltrate your social media feeds. If you'd rather they not appear, here's how to banish them from your Facebook and Instagram accounts.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Tired of seeing political ads on Facebook and Instagram? Unless Facebook decides to ban them, you’re about to see a lot more as the November 2020 election gets closer. Thankfully, there is a way to prevent these kinds of ads from popping up on your feed. Both Facebook and Instagram allows you to turn off political ads, either by blocking them as they appear or by going directly to your ad settings. Here’s what you can do.

Disable Political Ads on Facebook

You can hide an individual ad, as well as all future political ads, via the Facebook app or website. The process is the same for both, but we’ll use the app for the examples below.

If you’re on Facebook and find a political ad you no longer want to see on your timeline, click the ellipsis icon in the upper right of the ad. From the list of options, tap Hide ad. You are then asked to identify why you want to hide the ad. Depending on the type of ad, you can choose from such reasons as sensitive topic, irrelevant, misleading or scam, offensive, spam, false news, or other. Pick the reason and tap Done.

The next screen then suggests other steps you can take. If you’re finished, tap Done. But you can also use this opportunity to banish other ads from this source. To do that, tap the option to Hide all ads from [name of the source]. At the next screen, tap the Undo button if you change your mind. Otherwise, a message appears in place of the ad saying that you won’t see this ad in your News Feed.

Here’s another way to block all ads from the same source. Tap the ellipsis icon in the upper right of the ad and select Why am I seeing this ad? The next screen tries to explain why this ad popped up on your News Feed. To stop all such ads in the future, tap the option to Hide all ads from this advertiser.

You can turn off all political ads if you don’t want to see any of them. If you’ve found a political ad, look for a button that says Confirmed Organization and tap it. You can also tap the (i) icon that appears after the Confirmed Organization button vanishes. Alternatively, tap the text indicating that the ad was sponsored and paid for by a specific organization.

At the next screen, tap the option to See fewer ads about this topic: Social Issues, Elections, or Politics. Confirm your action by tapping the button to See fewer ads about this topic.

You can also turn off all political ads through the Ad settings option. In the Facebook app, tap the hamburger icon in the lower right and select Settings & Privacy > Settings > Ad Preferences > Ad Topics. Tap the three-dot icon next to the entry for Social Issues, Elections or Politics and then select the command to See fewer ads about this topic.

Disable Political Ads on Instagram

Instagram also allows you to hide an individual ad, political or otherwise. Tap the ellipsis icon at the top right of the ad and select Hide Ad. The next screen asks why you don’t want to see this ad. You can choose from such reasons as It’s not relevant, I see it too often, and It’s inappropriate. The ad then disappears.

You can turn off all political ads a couple of different ways. In the ad, tap the text that says Paid for by. and at the next screen, tap the link that says See Fewer Ads Like This.

Alternatively, tap the profile icon in the lower right and go through your account settings. Tap the hamburger icon and select Settings > Ads >Ad Topic Preferences. Tap the circle for Social Issues, Elections or Politics to turn off those types of ads, then tap Save.

Like What You’re Reading?

Sign up for Tips & Tricks newsletter for expert advice to get the most out of your technology.

This newsletter may contain advertising, deals, or affiliate links. Subscribing to a newsletter indicates your consent to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy. You may unsubscribe from the newsletters at any time.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Isn’t it one of the worst feelings when you take your time to write a comment on an Instagram post and you look back only to see a bunch of typos and words autocorrect wrongly replaced?

You feel ashamed and stupid and illiterate.

So you go back trying to edit it.

But how to edit an Instagram comment?

Well, sadly, Instagram doesn’t exactly throw us a bone when it comes to editing comments, so our only choice is to wallow in our own shame.

Or delete. Yes, delete.

You can’t edit a comment on Instagram, you can only delete it and repost the edited version. To delete a comment on Instagram, you can tap and hold the comment you want to delete on your Android phone or swipe left on your iPhone. On your desktop, click on the three dots that appear to the right of your comment and click delete.

Now I know it’s a hassle and you’d rather edit your comment than delete and write it all over again, but until Instagram decides to give us that option (maybe never), that’s the only thing you can do.

You can do this with all of your comments on your own posts or someone else’s posts, and even other people’s comments if they are under your post.

So here’s how to edit an Instagram comment… by deleting it:

I’ve briefly summed it up above, but let’s see how you can delete and edit an Instagram comment on your phone and desktop in more detail:

How to edit an Instagram comment on your smartphone

1. If the Instagram comment you wish to change is under one of your posts, go to your profile by tapping the little human icon in the bottom right corner.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

2. Then go to the post you want to edit the comment of and tap the speech bubble. On Androids, tap and hold your comment — which will be highlighted in a light blue color — and tap the trash can icon. On iPhones, swipe left over your comment and tap the trash can icon. Be careful, once you press it, you can’t go back, it will delete it immediately.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

3. Write your new and improved comment and tap on “Post”.

4. What if you want to edit a comment on someone else’s instagram? If the comment you want to edit is under someone else’s post, you have to go to that person’s profile — by writing their name in the search box or looking for them under the “followers” or “following” tabs in your profile — and search for their post, then tap the speech bubble icon to find your comment and delete it by tapping on your Android or swiping left on your iPhone.

5. If there are a lot of comments, this might prove a little difficult and time-consuming, but there might be a workaround. If someone has already liked or replied to your comment, you can find it very easily. Just tap the heart icon on the bottom of the Instagram app and you will see all the likes, mentions and replies to your comments and posts. If someone has already liked or replied to your comment, you will find it there.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

Bonus tip: you can also delete other people’s comments the same way if they’re under your posts.

How to edit an Instagram comment on your desktop

If you think not being able to edit your comment without deleting it is a nightmare, think again. In the Instagram application on your desktop, you couldn’t even do that before. Now you can and here’s how:

1. Go to instagram.com on your desktop and sign in.

2. Go to your profile by clicking on your profile photo in the top right corner, or search for another person’s profile in the search box or by going to the “followers” or “following” tabs under your profile name.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

3. Search for the post you commented on.

4. The same goes here as on your smartphone. If someone has liked or replied to your comment, you can find it easier by clicking on the heart icon at the top of the screen.

5. Find your comment and click on the three dots that appear to the right of your comment.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

6. Click delete.

How to turn off comments on your instagram posts

7. BUT FIRST, don’t forget to copy-paste your comment before deleting it so that you can actually edit it without having to write it all over again. You can’t do that on your smartphone, once you select the comment on your smartphone, you can’t select the text, you can only delete it. So if you have the choice, and especially if you’ve taken the time to write a long comment that you can’t fully replicate, edit it on your desktop.

8. Then add your new comment in the comment box and click post.

So there you have it. You can’t actually edit an Instagram comment, but you can at least delete it and post it again.

But seriously Instagram, get your marbles together and let us edit our own comments like normal human beings!

I hope this short tutorial on how to edit an Instagram comment has helped you in some way, and if you have a magical workaround for this, do let us know in the comments below. We’re hot for new social media tricks!

Oh, and if you frequently use several social media channels and would like to manage all your comments, replies and messages in one place, take a look at one of the social media management tools for individuals, which come in both free and paid versions depending on your needs, and make your life ten thousand times easier!

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Windows 10 comes with a special feature called Battery Saver. It is intended to save your PC’s battery by limiting background app activity and putting your device hardware in power saving mode. It is possible to enable Battery Saver automatically when on battery or turn it on manually. Here is how.

To enable Battery Saver in Windows 10, do the following.

  1. When your device is running on battery, you should see the Battery icon in the notification area of the taskbar. Click it to see the following flyout:How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  2. Click on the Battery saver button to toggle enable this feature.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Alternatively, you can press Win + A to open the Action Center and use the appropriate Quick Action button as shown below.

Finally, you can configure Battery Saver using Settings. There, you can enable the feature manually and set options to enable it automatically when required.

Enable Battery Saver in Windows 10 using Settings

  1. Open the Settings app. How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  2. Go to System -> Battery.
  3. On the right, you will see a number of options related to Battery Saver. To enable the Battery Saver right now, turn on the switch Battery saver status until next charge. This will enable the battery saver feature immediately.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  4. To enable the automatic Battery Saver feature, tick the check box Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below: and use the slider to set the desired battery percentage. Once the battery level falls below the specified percentage, the Battery Saver feature will be enabled automatically.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Tip: To manage the Battery Saver options quickly, you can create a special shortcut to open the Battery page in Settings directly. Here is how it can be done.

Create Battery Saver Shortcut in Windows 10

Right click the empty space on your Desktop. Select New – Shortcut in the context menu (see the screenshot).

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

In the shortcut target box, type or copy-paste the following:

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

The command above is a special ms-settings command, which can be used to open the desired Settings page directly. Refer to the following articles for details:

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Use “Battery Saver” as your shortcut’s name. Actually, you can use any name you like.

Right-click the shortcut you created and change its icon. An appropriate icon is present in the file %SystemRoot%\System32\taskbarcpl.dll.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Now, you can move this shortcut to any convenient location, pin it to taskbar or to Start, add to All apps or add to Quick Launch (see how to enable Quick Launch). You can also assign a global hotkey to your shortcut.

Winaero greatly relies on your support. You can help the site keep bringing you interesting and useful content and software by using these options:

If you like this article, please share it using the buttons below. It won’t take a lot from you, but it will help us grow. Thanks for your support!

Author: Sergey Tkachenko

Sergey Tkachenko is a software developer from Russia who started Winaero back in 2011. On this blog, Sergey is writing about everything connected to Microsoft, Windows and popular software. Follow him on Telegram, Twitter, and YouTube. View all posts by Sergey Tkachenko

To improve battery backup time and preserve battery life, you can turn on the battery saver mode in Windows 10. Here’s how to do it.

For Windows 10 laptop users, there is a simple and accessible setting called Battery Saver that limits the overall battery usage to improve its backup time. Some call the Battery Saver as Power Saver mode. So, don’t get confused if someone uses both these words interchangeably.

When the power saver mode is turned on, Windows reduces the screen brightness, limits background activity, and disables all notifications.

By default, Windows 10 automatically enables the battery saver mode when your battery is at or below 20% percent. That way, you will get a bit more time before the laptop shuts down completely due to low battery. If you want to, you can manually enable it whenever you want to extend the battery life. For example, if your laptop has 8 hours of battery backup, the battery saver mode can extend it to around 10 hours provided that you are not doing any heavy work on the laptop.

In today’s article, let me show you the steps to turn on battery saver in a Windows 10 laptop.

Table of contents:

How to turn on battery saver mode

Time needed: 1 minute.

You can turn on the battery saver mode from the Windows 10 Settings app. The option is located in the Battery tab on the System page. Here’s how you can find and turn it on.

  1. Open the Windows 10 Settings app

That is all. With that, you’ve successfully enabled the battery saver mode in Windows 10.

Turn on battery saver automatically

You can turn on the battery saver automatically when the battery reaches a certain percentage.

  • Never: Battery saver never turns on automatically.
  • 10%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 10%.
  • 20%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 20%.
  • 30%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 30%.
  • 40%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 40%.
  • 50%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 50%.
  • Always: Battery saver is always turned on regardless of how much charge is left in the battery.

The default setting is 20%. When the laptop battery reaches 20% or less, the battery saver turns on automatically. How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” modeautomatic battery saver

Disable battery saver mode

  1. Open Windows 10 settings.
  2. Go to the “System → Battery” page.
  3. Turn off the “Battery saver” option on the right page.
  4. Close the Settings app.

With the above steps, you’ve successfully disabled the Windows 10 battery saver mode.

Battery Saver option is grayed out

On some occasions, the battery saver option can appear grayed out. A grayed out battery option means the laptop is running on AC power. i.e, the laptop is connected to a wall plug. When connected to the wall plug with active power, the battery saver option is disabled as the laptop is no longer running on the battery. How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” modebattery saver option grayed out

To fix grayed out battery saver option, unplug the laptop from wall power. As soon as you do that, the battery saver option will appear normally. How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” modeunplug laptop from AC power

What is battery saver mode

The battery saver mode in Windows 10 is designed to improve the battery backup time and extend the time you can use your laptop. For example, when traveling or on long journeys, you might not have quick access to charge the laptop. In those cases, you can turn on the battery saver to extend the battery life.

Some laptop manufacturers offer their own software like Lenovo battery saver mode but they work pretty similarly to the built-in tool. So don’t worry about using a third-party program to extend battery backup time.

When the battery saver is turned on, Windows 10 will limit the background processes, disable all notifications, and lowers the screen brightness (optional). In addition to that, Windows 10 also limits the overall power usage by your laptop CPU and GPU. As such, depending on your CPU and GPU, the laptop can be a bit slower than when connected to AC power.

Wrapping up: Turn on battery saver mode

As you can see, Windows 10 makes it quite easy to turn off and turn on the battery saver mode. Though there is a performance penalty to turning on the battery saver mode, it is worth it if you want to extend the battery backup time as long as possible.

As of now, there is no way for you to fine-tune the battery saver settings. For example, you cannot control how much CPU and GPU power to limit. Hopefully, Microsoft will add those options in the future Windows 10 versions.

That is all. I hope that helps. If you are stuck or need some help, comment below and I will try to help as much as possible.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Windows 10 inclut un mode «Battery Saver» conçu pour prolonger la durée de vie de la batterie de votre ordinateur portable ou tablette. Windows activera automatiquement Battery Saver lorsque la batterie de votre PC est faible, mais vous pouvez contrôler cela et choisir exactement ce que fait Battery Saver

Qu’est-ce que le mode Battery Saver fait?

CONNEXION: Comment gérer Windows Nouvel “Power Throttling” des 10 pour économiser la vie de la batterie

L’économiseur de batterie est similaire au mode Low Power sur un iPhone, ou Battery Saver sur Android. Lorsqu’il est activé (ou lorsque vous l’activez), il apporte quelques modifications aux paramètres de Windows afin d’allonger la durée de vie de la batterie de votre ordinateur portable.

D’abord, il réduit automatiquement la luminosité de votre écran. Il s’agit d’un gros réglage qui peut économiser la batterie sur chaque périphérique, car le rétroéclairage consomme beaucoup d’énergie.

L’économiseur de batterie limite de manière agressive les applications d’arrière-plan que vous n’utilisez pas activement, même s’il s’agit d’applications de bureau. Cette fonctionnalité a été ajoutée avec la mise à jour des créateurs d’automne. Les applications universelles du Windows Store ne peuvent pas non plus fonctionner en arrière-plan et recevoir des notifications push lorsque ce mode est activé.

Par défaut, le mode Economiseur de batterie s’active automatiquement lorsque votre ordinateur portable ou tablette atteint 20%. Branchez votre PC pour recharger et Windows désactivera le mode Économie de batterie

Comment l’activer

Vous pouvez activer le mode Économie de batterie lorsque vous le souhaitez. Par exemple, vous voudrez peut-être l’allumer manuellement au début d’une longue journée si vous savez que vous serez loin d’une prise pendant un certain temps.

Pour ce faire, cliquez ou appuyez sur l’icône de la batterie dans la notification zone sur votre barre des tâches. Faites glisser le curseur vers la position la plus à gauche pour activer le mode “Battery Saver”.

Cette option est à un clic de l’icône de la batterie, tout comme le plan d’alimentation “Power Saver” sur Windows 7 et Windows 8. Microsoft Vous utilisez plutôt ceci au lieu de jouer avec ces plans d’alimentation anciens et déroutants.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Vous trouverez également une vignette de configuration rapide “Economiseur de batterie” dans le Centre d’Action de Windows 10. Faites glisser votre doigt depuis la droite ou cliquez sur l’icône Centre des tâches dans la barre d’état système pour y accéder

Cliquez sur le lien “Développer” situé au-dessus des vignettes en bas du panneau Action Center si vous ne voyez pas la vignette Économiseur de batterie. Vous pouvez réorganiser ces cases pour rendre l’option plus facilement accessible, si vous le souhaitez.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Comment configurer Battery Saver

Vous pouvez configurer ce que fait l’économiseur de batterie et quand il est activé. Pour ce faire, allez dans Paramètres> Système> Batterie. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l’icône de la batterie dans la zone de notification et cliquer sur le lien “Paramètres de la batterie” dans le menu contextuel.

Sous “Economiseur de batterie”, vous pouvez choisir si Windows active automatiquement le mode Economiseur de batterie. Cela fait. Par défaut, Windows active automatiquement le mode d’économie de batterie avec 20% de batterie restante. Vous pouvez changer cela-par exemple, vous pouvez avoir Windows automatiquement activer l’économiseur de batterie à 90% de la batterie si vous avez de la batterie sur votre ordinateur portable.

Vous pouvez également désactiver l’option “Plus faible luminosité de l’écran en batterie” C’est très utile sur tous les appareils, donc vous devriez probablement laisser celui activé.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Vous pouvez cliquer sur le lien “Utilisation de la batterie par application” en haut de l’écran Batterie pour voir quelles applications utilisent le plus de batterie et contrôler avec quelle agressivité Les fenêtres les étrangle en mode Economiseur de batterie.

Quelle est l’utilité du mode Economiseur de batterie,

CONNEXION: Comment augmenter la durée de vie de la batterie de votre ordinateur portable Windows

la vie. Bien sûr, si vous avez l’habitude de baisser manuellement la luminosité de votre écran – quelque chose d’autre que vous pouvez faire avec un clic rapide ou appuyez sur l’icône de la batterie – vous ne trouverez peut-être pas cette fonctionnalité si nécessaire. Cela dépendra de la luminosité de votre écran et de l’intensité du rétro-éclairage.

Cette fonctionnalité réduit désormais la puissance utilisée par les applications de bureau en arrière-plan ainsi que par les applications universelles, ce qui la rend plus utile sur tous les ordinateurs. Même si vous n’utilisez que des applications de bureau traditionnelles, il vaut la peine de l’activer lorsque vous voulez réduire la durée de vie de la batterie de votre ordinateur.

Si vous avez des problèmes de batterie, suivez notre guide. que le mode Économie de batterie le fera. Pourtant, c’est une bonne inclusion, et beaucoup plus facile à utiliser que les anciens “plans d’alimentation” de Windows 7 et 8.

Comme beaucoup de parties de Windows 10, le mode Battery Saver ressemble un peu à un work-in-progress. Il pourrait être plus agressif en diminuant la vitesse de votre processeur et en effectuant d’autres réglages pour prolonger la durée de vie de votre batterie, et Microsoft pourrait ajouter cette fonctionnalité dans le futur.

Malgré tout, le mode Battery Saver est toujours utile. Windows peut activer automatiquement le mode Économie de batterie et le désactiver si nécessaire, ce qui vous évite de devoir effectuer une microgestion fastidieuse, ce qui vous permet de continuer à travailler.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Récupérer le contenu de votre ordinateur après une panne matérielle peut être un cauchemar, surtout si vous n’avez pas de bon système de sauvegarde, mais vous Cela peut rendre le travail beaucoup plus facile en sauvegardant correctement votre profil Firefox. Pour effectuer cette tâche, nous utiliserons FEBE, un add-on Firefox pour sauvegarder vos configurations Firefox.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Avez-vous un iPhone dont vous avez besoin pour réinitialiser ou restaurer? Avez-vous besoin d'effectuer une réinitialisation d'usine et tout effacer ou avez-vous juste besoin de réinitialiser certains paramètres parce que le téléphone est en train d'agir?Ou peut-être avez-vous besoin de restaurer votre iPhone à partir d'une sauvegarde iTunes ou d'iCloud? En out

When Microsoft created Windows 10 it borrowed a few features from the world of smartphones. One of the more obvious ones is Battery Saver. Just as your phone has a low-battery mode, the battery life on Windows 10 laptops and tablets can be extended by turning off things like automatic email and calendar sync, live tile updates, and background processes for some apps. Battery Saver also lowers your display’s screen brightness, though you can undo that setting.

With Battery Saver enabled, you can keep checking Facebook, writing email, or finishing your dissertation for a few more minutes before your PC has to shut down.

Here’s how the feature works in the Windows 10 Anniversary Update.

Where to find it

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Battery Saver in the quick-actions area of the Action Center.

Battery Saver lives in two different spots on your PC. The first is in the quick-actions area at the bottom of the Action Center. Here you can quickly turn Battery Saver on and off at will.

You can also get to the Battery Saver quick-actions tile by clicking on the battery icon on the far right of the taskbar.

Note that you cannot turn on Battery Saver if you’re using your PC’s power cord. That seems obvious, but nonetheless bears mentioning.

The other location for Battery Saver is in the Settings app.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

The battery section of the Settings app.

To take a look go to Start > Settings > System > Battery. When you’re running on battery power you’ll see your battery’s remaining percentage at the top under the heading Overview, as well as the estimated time remaining before your PC has to shut down. This section also has a link labeled Battery usage by app that takes you to another screen that shows a breakdown of that information.

Below that, the Battery Saver subheading houses the actual settings you can tweak for the feature. First, you will see a checkbox—that should be enabled by default—to turn on Battery Saver automatically when your battery falls below 20 percent. If you’d rather turn on Battery Saver manually every time, just uncheck this box.

Next, you’ll see a slider labeled Battery saver status until next charge. This is just another way to turn on Battery Saver. When this slider is activated you’ll enter Battery Saver mode until you plug in your device.

Finally, one last checkbox at the bottom of the Battery Saver area allows you to go into Battery Saver mode without the lower screen brightness.

Battery Saver is a good feature to know about for those times you want to extend your Windows 10 device’s cord-free power for as long as possible.

We all want to use our mobile devices without worrying about the battery life. But, because this is impossible, we need to use the power conservation technologies provided by our operating systems. If you are using a laptop or tablet with Windows 10, and you don’t want to run out of battery unexpectedly, you should read this article and see how to work with the battery saver:

NOTE: The options that are shown in this guide apply to Windows 10 May 2019 Update or newer. If you do not know what Windows 10 version you have, read: How to check the Windows 10 version, OS build, edition, or type.

How to turn off the battery saver in Windows 10

When the battery saver is enabled in Windows 10, the screen’s brightness is set to a low level, and the background activity, and push notifications are disabled to save energy. The battery saver is enabled automatically by Windows 10 when the battery level below 20% or a custom level set by the user.

The best way to turn off the battery saver is to plug your Windows 10 laptop or tablet into a power outlet. As soon as Windows 10 detects that your device is charging, it should stop using the battery saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Another way to turn off the battery saver is to click or tap the battery icon in the bottom-right corner of your desktop. The power slider should be found on the left margin. Move the slider to the right, to any other position, and the battery saver is disabled.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

NOTE: To learn more about the power slider, its levels and settings, read: Use the Windows 10 power slider to save battery or increase performance.

A third way to disable the battery saver in Windows 10 is to open Settings. Then, go to System and click or tap Battery in the column on the left. On the right, in the Battery saver section, look for the switch that says: “Battery saver status until next charge.” Set it to Off.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

If you did this, and the battery saver is still turned on, then your battery may be at a critical level, under 20%, and you should charge your Windows 10 laptop, or tablet. However, you can still disable the battery saver, by unchecking the option that says: “Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below.”

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

How to turn on the battery saver in Windows 10

When you want to enable the battery saver on your Windows 10 laptop or tablet, click or tap the battery icon in the bottom-right corner of the desktop. Then, move the power slider to the left margin. To learn more about the power slider, its levels and settings, read: Use the Windows 10 power slider to save battery or increase performance.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

When the battery saver mode is turned on, you see that the Power mode is named Battery saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Another visual confirmation is that you see a small green leaf over the battery icon from your taskbar, like in the screenshot below.

A second way to enable the battery saver in Windows 10 is to open Settings. Then, go to System and click or tap Battery in the column on the left. On the right, in the Battery saver section, look for “Battery saver status until next charge,” and set the switch to On.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

The battery saver is now enabled in Windows 10, doing its best to lower the energy consumption and increase battery life.

How to configure the battery saver mode in Windows 10

If you want to personalize how the battery saver works, open Settings and go to System.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

In the column on the left, choose Battery, and then look for Battery settings on the right. Besides the switch that turns the battery saver mode On and Off, you have other settings too. For instance, you can choose when the battery saver is turned on automatically. By default, it is set to activate when your battery is at 20% of its charging capacity, but you can change it to whatever level you want, by moving the slider. If you do not want the battery saver to turn on automatically when the battery reaches a particular point, uncheck the box next to “Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below,” and it is never going to turn itself on automatically. Secondly, the battery saver also includes an option for dimming the screen brightness so that less energy is being consumed. If you check the “Lower screen brightness while in battery saver” setting, when the battery saver turns on, your display is dimmed automatically.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Now, the battery saver from Windows 10 should be configured according to your needs.

Why did you turn off or turn on the battery saver in Windows 10?

You now know how to use and configure the battery saver, so use it with confidence. Keep in mind that this tool only increases the time until your device runs out of power and, in the end, it is going to shut down, with an empty battery. Before closing this guide, tell us why you decided to turn off or turn on the battery saver. Comment below and let’s discuss.

You can use the Battery Saver to save power on your laptop. This discussion is brought to you by the word parsimonious. It’s a polite word for stingy, which is an excellent adjective to describe how the Windows 10 Battery Saver feature works.

The Battery Saver kicks in automatically when your laptop’s power percentage drops below a certain threshold — typically, 20 percent. You can, however, bolster the battery’s life by activating the Battery Saver at any time. Follow these steps:

Display the Action Center.

Swipe the screen from the right edge or, for non-touchscreen laptops, click the Notifications notification icon, as shown in the margin.

Click or tap the Battery Saver button.

If the button is disabled, the laptop is AC-powered, which means nothing needs saving.

When Battery Saver mode is active, the screen instantly dims. Laptop activity is curtailed, including Internet access. The idea is to power the laptop by using just a trickle of power. So don’t be surprised if some of your favorite laptop features or programs don’t work while Battery Saver is active.

To control the Battery Saver settings, follow these steps:

Open the Settings app.

Press the Win+I keyboard shortcut.

Click the System button.

On the left side of the window, choose Battery Saver.

You can use the toggle on the right side of the screen to activate the Battery Saver, but instead:

Click the Battery Saver Settings link.

Ensure that a check mark is set by the item Turn Battery Saver On Automatically If My Battery Falls Below.

Set the battery percentage.

The value of 20 percent is fine.

Set other options on the screen.

For example, keep the Push Notifications item off if you don’t need the laptop to check the Internet frequently for new email or other updates.

The Add an App item lets you select a program or an app that can ignore the restrictions applied by Battery Saver mode. For example, if you’re desperate to check the weather despite Wi-Fi network restrictions, you can add the Weather app to the list.

About This Article

This article is from the book:

About the book author:

Dan Gookin has been an author, editor, ghostwriter, and a public official. He’s written more than a dozen Dummies books on technology, with a special focus on PCs, the Android operating system, and Microsoft products. And in 1991, he was the author of the very first Dummies book, DOS For Dummies, which started the whole enterprise.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

With Windows 10 there have been many new features available, and today we will talk about one such feature called battery saver. The main role of battery saver is that it extends the battery life on Windows 10 PC and it does so by limiting the background activity and adjusting screen brightness settings. Many third-party applications are claiming to be the best battery saver software, but you don’t need to go for them as Windows 10 inbuilt battery saver is the best.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Even though it limits background apps to run in the background, you could still allow individual apps to run in battery saver mode. By default, the battery saver is enabled and is automatically turned on when the battery level falls below 20%. When battery saver is active, you would see a small green icon on the taskbar’s battery icon. Anyway without wasting any time let’s see How to Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Windows 10 with the help of the below-listed tutorial.

How to Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Windows 10

Make sure to create a restore point just in case something goes wrong.

Method 1: Enable or Disable Battery Saver in Windows 10 using Battery Icon

The simplest way to manually enable or disable battery saver in Windows 10 is using a battery icon on the taskbar. Just click on the battery icon and then click on “Battery saver” button to enable it and if you need to disable battery saver, click on it.

You could also enable or disable battery saver in action center. Press Windows Key + A to open Action Center then click on “Expand” above the settings shortcut icons then click on Battery saver to enable or disable it according to your preferences.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Method 2: Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Windows 10 Settings

1. Press Windows Key + I to open Settings then click on System.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

2. Now from the left-hand menu, click on Battery.

3. Next, under Battery saver make sure to enable or disable the toggle for “Battery saver status until next charge” to enable or disable the battery saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Note The Battery saver status until next charge setting will be greyed out if the PC is currently plugged into AC.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

4. If you need battery saver to enable below a certain battery percentage automatically then under Battery saver checkmark “Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below:“.

5. Now set the battery percentage using the slider, by default, it is set to 20%. Which means if the battery level falls below 20% battery saver will be automatically enabled.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

6. If you don’t need to automatically enable battery saver to uncheckTurn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below:“.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

7. Reboot your PC to save changes.

Note: Battery saver also includes an option to dim the screen brightness to save more battery, under Battery settings just checkmarkLower screen brightness while in battery saver“.

This How to Enable or Disable Battery Saver in Windows 10, but if this didn’t work for you then move to the next method.

Method 3: Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Power Options

1. Press Windows Key + R then type powercfg.cpl and hit Enter.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

2. Now click on “Change plan settings” next to your currently active power plan.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Note: Make sure you don’t select “High Performance” as it only works when connected to AC power supply.

3. Next, click on “Change advanced power settings” to open Power Options.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

4. Expand Energy saver settings, and then expand Charge level.

5. Change the value of “On battery” to 0 to disable Battery Saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

6. If you need to enable it to set its value to 20 (percentage).

7. Reboot your PC to save changes.

Recommended:

That’s it, you successfully learned How to Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Windows 10 but if you still have any queries regarding this tutorial then feel free to ask them in the comment’s section.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Aditya Farrad

Aditya is a self-motivated information technology professional and has been a technology writer for the last 7 years. He covers Internet services, mobile, Windows, software, and How-to guides.

One of the possible reasons why there isn’t a notification when your laptop reaches the critical power percentage is that the settings on the battery is currently disabled, but has been enabled on other power options on your system.

For us to check, kindly follow the steps below:

  1. Press the Windows logo + X button on your keyboard.
  2. Select Control Panel.
  3. Click on Power options.
  4. Choose Power Saver, then click Change Plan settings.
  5. Go to Change advanced power settings.
  6. Under Battery, check if the Low battery notification is currently disabled.
  7. Change the current option to Yes.
  8. Click on Apply, then OK.

Let us know if you have any further questions.

Report abuse

4 people found this reply helpful

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn't help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn't help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

There are several reasons which can cause this error in your computer. One of these is a corrupted or missing system file. You may run the System File Checker to identify and troubleshoot this error.

You can also follow the steps through Fix Windows Update errors by using the DISM or System Update Readiness tool to check for any update errors.

Note: Please perform the Clean boot on your PC.

Clean Boot temporarily disables all third party applications as well as all Microsoft non-essential services so only basic drivers will run. This will help us find any third-party software which can be the cause of this issue.

Here are the steps:

From Start , search for msconfig

Select System Configuration from the search results.

On the Services tab of the System Configuration dialog box, tap or click to select the Hide all Microsoft services check box, and then tap or click Disable all .

On the Startup tab of the System Configuration dialog box, tap or click Open Task Manager .

On the Startup tab in Task Manager, for each startup item, select the item and then click Disable .

Close Task Manager.

On the Startup tab of the System Configuration dialog box, tap or click OK , and then restart the computer.

Windows 11 is getting into more PCs and Laptops. Whether you purchased a new Windows 11 laptop or tablet, or just updated your laptop to Windows 11, battery life must be something you always will want to be vigilant about. When you are operating your PC laptop in battery, there are methods to save battery life. The Battery Saver in Windows 11 helps you save a few more hours in battery on your laptop.

Let’s see how to configure and use the Windows 11 Battery Saver option.

Change Power Modes in Windows 11

Like Windows 10 laptops, the Windows 11 also comes with a handful of battery modes for better performance and better battery life. If you have been using Windows 10 on your laptop, you must have noticed the power modes that come up when you click the battery icon on the taskbar. First off, you will not see those power modes in Windows 11. Where do you get these?

Windows 11 still has the battery performance modes but buried in the Settings. Unlike in Windows 10, you cannot simply click on the Battery icon and choose a mode. To change Windows 11 power mode, follow the steps.

Right-click on the battery icon on the Windows 11 taskbar and go to “Power and sleep settings.

  • Best Performance
  • Balanced
  • Best Power Efficiency

Depends on your usage, choose a suitable power mode for you. If your laptop is not plugged into power and you are using it only to browse the internet or read ebooks, then choose Best power efficiency. This will save battery life on your Windows 11 laptop or tablet.

Turn On Battery Saver in Windows 11

Instead of putting the battery saver mode in the Battery tray icon, Microsoft took out all such quick options and clubbed them into the new action center in Windows 11. If you have just started using Windows 11 on your PC, you must have noticed that clicking on WiFi, Sound, and Battery icons from the taskbar icon opens the same menu. That’s where we are going to find the new Battery saver options in Windows 11.

To put your laptop or Windows 11 device in Battery saver mode, click on the WiFi/sound/battery icons on the taskbar to open the Action Center. You can instead press Windows Key + A to open the action center or quick settings menu.

From there, click on the “Battery Saver” option to enable it. The button will turn the theme color when enabled and the battery icon will turn into a “battery with leaf” icon. Click on the Battery Saver icon again to disable low power mode in Windows 11.

If the Battery saver option is greyed out and you cannot click on it, it means that your laptop or tablet is plugged into the charger. You need to unplug the charger to enable low power mode in Windows 11. On the other hand, you will not see such an option at all if you are using a PC and not a laptop or tablet.

Automatically Enable Battery Saver in Windows 11

Like in previous Windows versions, you can enable the battery saver mode automatically at a certain battery level. Say you want your laptop to go into low power mode once the battery dips below 30%. Let’s see how you can do it.

To do this, right-click on the battery icon located on the taskbar at the bottom right corner of your laptop.

Click on Power and sleep settings option.

From the settings window, click and expand the “Battery saver” menu. Just below that, you will an option named “Turn battery saver on automatically at.” Click the dropdown menu with a number against it and choose the battery limit in which you want to enable battery saver mode automatically on Windows 11.

In case you want to keep the laptop in battery saver mode always, choose the option “Always” from the menu. Once you choose the battery limit, you are all set.

Apart from settings the battery limit to automatically turn on battery saver mode, you can also choose whether you want to dim the screen during the power-saving mode. Disabling it will just keep the same brightness when the laptop goes power saver mode. It is better to enable the option since you will know when the battery is low and it will save some marginal power from the battery as well.

Apart from setting that battery into battery saver mode, there are plenty of other ways you can save battery life on your Windows 11 PC. However, the power-saving mode on the PC is the basic thing you can do to make your laptop run a few more hours without tweaking anything.

Disclosure: Mashtips is supported by its audience. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

Quando o seu dispositivo Windows 11 está ficando sem bateria – ou você deseja aproveitar ao máximo cada minuto de energia – você pode ativar o modo de suspensão. É assim que se faz.

O que é o modo de economia de bateria?

A Economia de bateria é um modo especial de economia de energia do Windows que prolonga a vida útil da bateria diminuindo o brilho da tela, reduzindo as atividades em segundo plano e limitando algumas notificações. É muito semelhante ao modo “Low Power Mode” no iPhone e ao modo “Battery Saver” no Android. O Windows 10 também inclui um modo de economia de energia.

Por padrão, o modo de economia de energia é ativado automaticamente quando a bateria atinge 20% ou menos. No entanto, isso pode ser configurado nas configurações em Sistema> Desempenho e bateria. Ele será desligado automaticamente assim que você conectar seu dispositivo para recarregá-lo. Além disso, você sempre pode usar o modo de economia de bateria manualmente se quiser prolongar a vida útil da bateria.

Como usar e configurar o modo “economia de bateria” do Windows 10

Ative o modo de economia de energia usando as configurações rápidas

A maneira mais rápida de ativar o modo de economia de energia é através do menu “Configurações rápidas”. Para abri-lo, clique no botão oculto Configurações rápidas na bandeja do sistema – é onde você vê os ícones do Wi-Fi, alto-falante e medidores de bateria. Ou você pode pressionar Windows + a no teclado.

Quando as configurações rápidas forem abertas, clique em Economia de bateria.

(Se você não vir Economia de bateria em Configurações rápidas, clique no ícone de lápis na parte inferior do menu, selecione Adicionar e selecione Economia de bateria na lista exibida.)

Após clicar, o Battery Saver será ativado imediatamente. Quando estiver pronto para desativá-lo, abra as Configurações Rápidas novamente e clique no botão “Battery Saver” até que ele não esteja mais destacado.

É assim que funciona o novo menu “Configurações rápidas” no Windows 11

Ative o modo de economia de energia no aplicativo Configurações

Você também pode habilitar (e configurar) o modo de suspensão no aplicativo Configurações do Windows 11. Para fazer isso, primeiro abra as configurações do Windows pressionando Windows + i no teclado. Ou você pode procurar por “Configurações” no menu iniciar e clicar no ícone quando ele aparecer nos resultados.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Quando as configurações forem abertas, clique em “Sistema” na barra lateral e selecione “Energia e bateria”.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Em Configurações de energia e bateria, role para baixo até a seção Bateria. Clique no botão “Ativar agora” ao lado da opção “Economia de bateria”.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

O modo de economia de energia é ativado imediatamente. Para desativá-lo novamente, clique no botão “Desligar agora” ao lado do rótulo “Economia de bateria”.

Enquanto estiver nesta tela, você também pode selecionar a porcentagem na qual o modo de economia de energia será ativado no menu suspenso “Ativar economia de energia automaticamente em”. Este menu também contém uma opção “Sempre” para manter permanentemente o modo de economia de energia e uma opção “Nunca” para desativá-lo completamente.

Você também pode alternar se o modo de economia de bateria escurece a tela com a chave “Diminuir o brilho da tela ao usar a economia de bateria”. Em geral, reduzir o brilho da tela tem um grande impacto na extensão da vida útil da bateria do seu PC. Muita sorte!

6 maneiras de melhorar a vida útil da bateria em laptops com Windows

You may not see all the Windows settings and tools in one place, but there is a trick to see them. The God Mode in Windows 10 lets you see all the settings in one place and access them quickly. But what exactly is the Windows 10 God Mode and how do you enable it?

In this guide, we will show you how to enable and use the God Mode in Windows 10 PC.

What Is God Mode in Windows 10?

Windows 7 users will remember this old trick called God Mode. The God Mode is simply a trick that allows you to easily access over 208 Windows administrative and management tools and settings within one folder. It still works in 2021, and we’re going to show you how to enable Windows 10 God Mode.

Windows 10 makes it a lot easier to find various Settings that are usually hidden behind multiple layers. This wasn’t always the case with previous versions of Windows. If you remember having to use the Control Panel, you can understand. Settings and features were often unnecessarily nested in so many categories and clicking through them all could quickly become tedious.

With everything available right inside one folder on your desktop, finding things is a lot easier. You do not have to guess what category something might be in. With Windows 10 God Mode enabled, you might find settings you didn’t even know existed. You can also use the God Mode in Windows 11 as well. Read further to know how to enable Windows 10 and Windows 11 God Mode.

Enable Windows 10 God Mode

While it is popularly called God Mode, you can name this folder anything you want. With that said, let’s see how you can enable Windows 10 God Mode folder.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

  1. Right-click on an empty space on your Windows 10 desktop.
  2. From the context menu, select New >Folder.
  3. Give the folder this name: GodMode.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

You should now see a GodMode desktop entry, which has the Control Panel icon instead of a folder. This is the Windows 10 God Mode folder. To name it something less promising or eye-catching, simply replace GodMode with whatever name you want. For instance, we named it MashTips. For that we used Mashtips. as the folder name

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Keep in mind, that there must be some text before the code in brackets otherwise you may get an error while naming the folder. It’s also possible that you don’t see any name under the icon at all. The name still exists, and you can see it in the window when you open the folder.

Should You Enable God Mode on Windows 10?

You can enable it but does that mean you should enable God Mode on Windows 10? Unless you share your PC with some very irresponsible people or children who might start clicking things in the God Mode folder without knowing what they’re doing, enabling God Mode is probably not a good idea. But other than that there really is no drawback to the Windows 10 God Mode trick.

When you decide you don’t need it anymore, you can always delete the folder, just like any regular folder on Windows. The trick is especially useful for IT professionals or those who often find themselves fixing computers. However, it’s not a good idea to enable Windows 10 God Mode for someone who is not so well-experienced with computers.

Disclosure: Mashtips is supported by its audience. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Have you ever experience that your laptop suddenly shut down while you were working? If battery life of your laptop is not much and you want to extend it then Windows has something for you. There is a “Battery Saver” mode in Windows 10 that extends your laptop battery life when it’s too low and you can’t charge it due to whatever reason. Battery Saver mode is definitely helpful when you are working on a laptop but its battery is near to end.

Also Read : UC Broswer Mini

This mode gives you some extra time in which you can save your work and find your laptop’s charger to charge it. We are going to discuss in details that how does this mode operate and how does it save your laptop’s battery. After that, you’ll know the way to enable and set up this mode according to your needs. So if you’re interested in this then you should look further in the article.

How Does Battery Saver Mode Work?

As the name suggests, this mode tries to save the battery of your laptop or tablet by reducing your PC’s performance wherever it is possible. Whenever you turn on this mode, it tinkers with some of your computer’s settings which results in power saving. It extends your laptop’s battery power by reducing your screen brightness. It is one of the effective ways to increase battery power as your laptop screen uses most of the battery.

You should also know that this mode prevents battery power by shutting down all the apps that aren’t in use but still running in the background. There are many slightest changes in the laptop after enabling this mode. However, it automatically turns on when your laptop’s battery is near or less than 20%. It happens by default but you can change it according to you.

How To Turn On “Battery Saver” Mode And Configure It?

It’s very easy to enable this feature and you can do this whenever you wish to. Here are the steps to do it.

  • Drag your mouse to the taskbar.
  • To the extreme right in the taskbar, click on the battery icon.
  • There will be a slider. Drag the slider at extreme left so that your laptop will reduce your unnecessary battery power consumption.
  • Now, Battery Saver mode is on and you can work for some extra time.

If you wish to configure some settings related to Battery Saver mode then you can follow the steps shown below.

  • Go to System Settings and then to Battery.
  • If you don’t want to enable this mode manually then you can opt for option that turns this mode on whenever your laptop is at critical battery stage.
  • You also have a choice whether you want to reduce screen brightness or not. It’s up to you but we suggest you keep it enabled as screen backlight uses much battery power.

So that’s it. Now, you can enable and configure the Battery Saver mode as per our liking.

Conclusion

Battery Saver mode is very useful while you’re in an area where electricity breakouts are normal. You can enable this feature from the start to save battery power and then you can work for some extra time. So it’s a good thing that you know how to enable and set up the Battery Saver mode. Read our blog for more articles like this.

To conserve and extend battery run time, you can turn on the Battery Saver mode in Windows 10 laptop. Here is how to do it in simple steps.

One of the best things about Laptops is that you don’t need active AC power to use them. As long as you have a well-charged battery, you can use the laptop for a few hours without worries. Of course, depending on the laptop, its battery capacity, and what you are doing, the battery backup time will be completely different. For example, if you are trying to render a video or play games, the battery backup time will be a lot less when compared to doing simple things like web browsing, media consumption, etc.

Generally, Windows 10 is pretty good at managing the battery to extend its backup time and overall health. For a vast majority of users, this good enough. However, there might be situations where you need to extend the battery backup time. In those cases, you can turn on the battery saver mode in Windows 10. Once enabled, it will automatically control Windows 10 to increase the overall battery backup time.

This straightforward Windows 10 guide lets me show you how to enable battery saver mode and disable it when not needed.

Turn on battery saver mode in Windows 10

  1. Open the Settings app.
  2. Select “System.”
  3. Click on “Battery” on the sidebar.
  4. Turn on the “Battery Saver” option.

First, press the “Windows key + I” shortcut to open the Windows 10 Settings app. You can also search for it in the Start menu. After opening the Settings app, go to the “System -> Battery” page. This is where you will find the essential options to manage and monitor the laptop battery.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Here, turn on the “Battery Saver” option. Next, close the Settings app.

From now on, the battery saved mode is turned on on your laptop.

Important note: Windows 10 automatically enables the battery saver mode when the battery is 20% or lower.

Disable battery saver mode in Windows 10

  1. Open the Settings app.
  2. Select “System.”
  3. Click on “Battery” on the sidebar.
  4. Turn off the “Battery Saver” option.

Cannot turn on battery saver mode

The Battery Saver mode is greyed out if the laptop is plugged in. To turn on or turn off battery saver mode, unplug the laptop from the wall outlet.

What does battery saver mode do?

  • Background sync for many Windows apps is stopped.
  • Unnecessary background apps are automatically stopped. If needed, you can add specific apps to the exclusion list.
  • Windows 10 push notifications are disabled.
  • Non-critical Windows updates are temporarily paused.
  • Laptop display brightness is reduced to 30%.
  • The majority of Windows 10 background telemetry is blocked.
  • Some scheduled tasks might not run.
  • Windows 10 disables some eye candy effects like transparency and blur.
  • OneDrive sync is disabled.

That is all. It is that simple to turn on or turn off battery saver mode in Windows 10.

I hope that helps. If you are stuck or need some help, comment below, and I will try to help as much as possible.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Generally, people can use a laptop for a few hours constantly on a single charge. A laptop with better battery life could last longer. However, it’s true that your laptop battery life will be degraded over time. What you can do to prolong the laptop battery life manually? MiniTool gives you some advice.

Even if you’re running the best battery life laptops, you’ll be struggling to keep Windows 10 running for more than half a day. This will become more obvious as time goes by. However, the good news is that Microsoft offers you several ways to extend laptop battery life running Windows: enabling relative features, modifying settings, etc. In the following part, I’ll take Windows 10 as an example to show you how to save battery on Windows 10 (how to extend battery life on laptop running Windows 10).

How to Increase Battery Life on Laptop Windows 10 Using the Built-in Tools

Microsoft adds some features to Windows for better battery maintenance. In this part, I’ll show you how to maximize laptop battery life on Windows 10.

Configure Power and Sleep

The Power & sleep option was built in Windows 10 for battery optimization. You can access it by following steps.

  1. Press Windows + I to open Windows Settings.
  2. Click on the System option, which is in charge of display, sound, notifications, power, etc.
  3. Select Power & sleep from the left sidebar.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Here, you can configure the Screen and Sleep settings.

  • The Screen is running on battery power: specify the time that you want your system to wait before it turns off the screen when you’re not using the Windows 10 laptop.
  • The Screen is running when plugged in: specify the time that you want your system to wait before it turns off the screen when you’re not using the laptop.
  • The Sleep mode is activated on battery power: specify the time that you want your PC to go to sleep when you’re not using the Windows 10 computer.
  • The Sleep mode is activated when plugged in: specify the time that you want your PC to go to sleep when you’re not using Windows 10.

The smaller the number is, the more the battery will be saved. However, it would be inconvenient if the number is too small. You need to find a good balance between power usage and convenience. That’s all about improving battery life via Power & sleep.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

It’s annoying to find your computer keeps waking up from sleep when you want it stay asleep for certain reasons.

Use Battery Saver

How to increase battery life of laptop using battery saver:

  1. Open Settings.
  2. Choose System.
  3. Select Battery in the left pane.
  4. Look for the Battery saver section in the right pane.
  5. Toggle the switch of Battery saver status until next charge to On.
  6. If you the battery saver to turn on automatically whenever the battery falls below a certain level, you should check Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below and then set a battery level by dragging the slider.
  7. Also, you can check the Lower screen brightness while in battery saver option to save more battery.

By default, the battery saver will be enabled automatically in Windows 10 when the battery level falls below 20%.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Turn to powercfg Command

How to improve laptop battery life using the Command Prompt tool: press Windows + S -> type cmd -> right click on Command Prompt -> select Run as administrator -> type the following commands and press Enter.

  • powercfg /a: find out what are the available sleep status and what are the unavailable status.
  • powercfg /energy: trace the system usage for 60 seconds and show the power efficiency.
  • powercfg /batteryreport: show the results of the up-to-date analysis of your battery.
  • powercfg -devicequery wake_armed: keep track of your unwanted processes and disable them.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

16 Other Tips on How to Increase Laptop Battery Life Windows 10

Here are some practical tips to save battery power in Windows 10:

  • Change display settings: reduce the brightness, use a dark theme/background, set a shorter active display duration, etc.
  • Change power settings: set a shorter PC sleep duration, disable Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection when in sleep mode, select a lower power mode, choose what the power buttons do, put a lid, etc.
  • Change sync settings: specify the emails/calendars/contacts you want to sync, sync items less often, etc. .
  • Mute the volume or turn it down.
  • Turn off the keyboard backlights.
  • Close unnecessary applications and processes.
  • Control startup apps and services.
  • Turn on the airplane mode when it’s possible.
  • Browse with Microsoft Edge, instead of Chrome or other browsers. regularly.
  • Remove all unnecessary peripherals.
  • Keep the PC plugged in until it’s fully charged.
  • Disable some of the CPU processors.
  • Disable special effects like UI animations and shadows.
  • Run the Troubleshooter to let Windows fix battery problems for you.

That’s all I want to say about how to keep Windows 10 laptop battery healthy.

  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • Linkedin
  • Reddit

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Position: Columnist

Sarah has been working as an editor at MiniTool since she graduated from university. Sarah aims at helping users with their computer problems such as disk errors and data loss. She feels a sense of accomplishment to see that users get their issues fixed relying on her articles. Besides, she likes to make friends and listen to music after work.

How to access and adjust Windows 10’s battery-saving mode.

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal

Sarah is a freelance writer and CNET How To blogger. Her main focus is Windows, but she also covers everything from mobile tech to video games to DIY hardware projects. She likes to press buttons and see what happens, so don’t let her near any control panels.

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

Windows 10 has a couple of different tools for helping you eke the most life out of your laptop’s ailing battery . There’s the traditional power options menu that lets you pick and choose how long your computer should stay awake when you’re not using it, and there’s also a new battery saver feature that switches off things like push notifications — because Windows 10 is basically a mobile operating system, and it has push notifications.

Here’s what you need to know to tweak your battery settings in Windows 10:

Power & sleep

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

The Power & sleep menu (Settings > System > Power & sleep) is nothing new. Here, you can choose how long your computer is idle before it automatically shuts off the screen or goes into Sleep mode, based on whether your computer is plugged in or running on the battery.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

You can also find the Additional power settings, which opens up the Power Options menu in the Control Panel. Here, you can edit your power plans, choose what happens when you close the lid of your laptop, and choose whether to require a password when your computer wakes from sleep mode.

Battery saver

In addition to the Power & sleep settings, Windows 10 has a new feature called Battery saver. Battery saver is a battery-saving power mode specifically optimized for Windows 10, which means it does things like limit background app activity and push notifications — similar to the battery-saving modes you find on smartphones and tablets.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

Battery saver automatically turns on when your computer falls below 20 percent battery life, but you can also turn it on manually by going to Settings > System > Battery saver and switching the toggle from Off to On.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

Battery saver mode is tweakable. In the Battery saver menu, click Battery saver settings to enter the settings menu. Here, you can adjust the point at which Battery saver mode automatically turns on (between 5 and 100 percent battery life), choose whether to allow push notifications or lower screen brightness in Battery saver mode, and add app exceptions to Battery saver mode. Apps that you choose to exclude from Battery saver mode will be able to run in the background and send push notifications at all times.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

In the main Battery saver menu, you can also see how much of your battery different apps are using (including background usage) by clicking Battery use. This will help you determine whether Battery saver mode will really help you out — according to my Battery use screen, in the past week, background app activities have only accounted for less than 1 percent of my battery use. Because I don’t use a lot of apps that work in the background, I probably won’t see a dramatic jump in battery life with the Battery saver mode.

Hello there. I have problem enabling Battery saver when I am running my laptop on battery. When I press it it is just nothing happening. Anyway when I navigate to Start -> settings -> system -> battery and click the toggle it turns on. What I have tried so far:

  • 3 reinstalls of latest Windows 10 2004 version.
  • Reinstalling, updating and so on of the Microsoft ACPI-Compliant Control Method Battery
  • Removing the laptop battery and then reassemble it

I literally have no Idea what else to do as this stopped working suddenly and it is not related to any new software or any kind of installation on the system.

Is there anybody else who is experiencing the same issue and can you please advice me what to do?

p.s. I have tried to put Turn battery saver automatically at – > always option but it is also not working that way. Anyway – when I set it to a certain percentage it is working.

  • Subscribe
  • Subscribe to RSS feed

Report abuse

Replies (7) 

My name is Rhaine, I’m Independent Community Volunteer. I’m so glad assisting you today.
I am also Windows user. Let us work together to sort this out.

Try to restore to default using the command prompt

1. Windows Key + R
2. Type CMD and run as admistrator
3. Copy and paste the command below.

You can refer to this link below as reference to reset the power plans

Disclaimer: This is a non-Microsoft website. The page appears to be providing accurate, safe information. Watch out for ads on the site that may advertise products frequently classified as a PUP (Potentially Unwanted Products). Thoroughly research any product advertised on the site before you decide to download and install it.

We show you how to turn Battery saver on or off in Windows 10 so you can increase battery life on your laptop.

Though the amount of juice you can get out of a laptop’s battery has improved over the years, it’s still far from perfect. As a result, Windows 10 has techniques to squeeze out every last drop when you’re in a bind. Today we’re going to walk you through Battery saver, including how to turn off Battery saver when you don´t need it to change power saver mode.

What is Battery saver mode?

Before we get into it, let’s talk a little bit about what Battery saver is and the effect it will have on your system. This way, you can make an informed decision about whether you want to leave in on.

The first thing you should know about Windows 10 Battery saver is that it will automatically kick in when your laptop’s battery falls below 20%. Microsoft assumes that if you aren’t charging at this point, you have a good reason for it, and therefore need some help to keep your laptop alive.

However, putting your computer in this mode has some downsides. Namely, it will disable some features.

What does Battery saver do?

Battery saver for Windows 10 takes the following actions:

  • Disables syncing for the Microsoft Store, Mail, People, and Calendar apps
  • Blocks background apps
  • Blocks Non-critical Windows update downloads
  • Reduces your display brightness by 30%
  • Blocks the majority of Microsoft’s telemetry
  • Stops most Windows Task Scheduler tasks from running

Now let’s talk about what Battery saver isn’t. Battery saver is not the same as the power save mode. The power-saving plan in Windows 10 is separate and does things like adjust your sleep time, turn off your hard disk, and change your system performance.

Now that you’re aware of the consequences, let’s dive into how to turn it on or off:

How to Turn On or Turn Off Battery Saver via the Windows 10 Action Center

The simplest way to turn Windows 10 Battery saver on or off is through the Action Center. Unless you have disabled the Action Center, this should be your main method of interacting with the mode.

    Open the Action Center and click “Battery saver”

If you haven’t realised, you can access the Action Center by pressing the message icon in the bottom right corner of your taskbar. If the Windows battery saver icon is lit up, it indicates that battery saver is on.

Simply click the icon to turn it on or off whenever you like.

How to Manually Turn Off or Turn On Battery Saver Mode in Settings

If you don’t like to use the Action Center, you can access Battery saver through the Windows 10 Settings menu. This will give you the additional ability to control whether your brightness dims independently.

    Open Settings

Press Start and then click the settings cog in the Start Menu, above the power button.

In the Settings sidebar, click “Battery”, then look for the “Battery saver” heading in the main pane. Switch the toggle underneath “To get more from your battery when it’s running low, limit notifications and background activity”. Naturally, putting it to off will turn off the power saving mode, while “On” will turn on battery saver mode.

Optionally, you can keep Battery saver on but untick the “Lower screen brightness while in battery saver” option. This will ensure you can still see your laptop on low battery even if it’s a sunny day.

How to Turn Automatic Battery Saver On or Off in Settings

We’ve shown you how to turn Battery saver on or off manually, but that won’t stop it from kicking in automatically when your battery reaches 20%. For that, we need to dive into the Settings app once more, where you can change the percentage or disable it entirel

    Open Settings

Press Start, then click the settings cog above your power button. Alternatively, press “Windows + I”.

Click “Battery” in the Settings sidebar, then looking for the text that says “Turn battery saver on automatically at”. Click the drop-down and choose a value from the list.

Optionally, choose whether Windows 10 dims your brightness by ticking or unticking the “Lower screen brightness while in battery saver” setting.

That’s all for this Battery saver in Windows 10 guide. However, if you’re still experiencing problems with your battery life, it may be worth checking your battery health. You can also squeeze out some extra juice by telling Windows to turn off your hard disk when idle.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Battery Saver issues can sometimes arise on a Windows 10 laptop. This mode is fundamental, especially when running out of battery and your laptop tries to increase the time you can use your laptop without causing any excessive drain on the battery. If you are experiencing an issue where this mode isn’t working any need to worry. I will show you step-by-step how to fix battery saver mode not working on Windows 10 laptops.

Fix Battey Saver Mode Issues In Windows 10 Laptop

Usually, when such an issue exists, users cannot enable the mode from the Action Center. If you are wondering what this is, let me explain. At the bottom of your desktop screen is a taskbar and at the extreme right corner is the action center or the notifications icon.

alt=”Task Bar” width=”740″ height=”33″ />
If you click on the icon at the notification icon, it will expand, and you will find the battery saver option.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

If you cannot turn on the battery saver mode from here, there are three ways that this issue can be resolved, and I will go through each method in detail.

Fix Battery Saver Mode In Settings

Step-1: Go to the Start Menu and click on the Settings cog. (Shortcut Keys: Win + I)

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-2: Once the settings open up, click on System.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-3: When the system settings open up, you will see that at the left side of your screen are various options. Click on Battery.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-4: When the battery settings open up, an on/off toggle switch underneath the battery saver settings. Click on it to switch it On.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

If this solution doesn’t work, read on forward to follow the next method.

Power Troubleshooter

Step-1: Go to Start Menu and click on the Settings cog. (Shortcut Keys: Win + I)
Step-2: When the settings open up, Click on Update & Security.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-3: On the left side of the screen, you will see various options. Click on Troubleshoot.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-4: Select Additional troubleshooters.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-5: Scroll down a little and under Find and fix other problems, click on Power.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-6: Once you click on the option, it expands. Click on Run the troubleshooter.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Let the troubleshoot complete.

Hopefully, this will fix battery saver mode for your Windows 10 computers.

Restore Default Settings

Restoring settings is always the last resort to fixing any issue. Follow these steps if the above methods did not work for you.

Step-1: You have to access the power options in the control panel to restore settings. Go to the Start Menu and type Control panel in the search bar. Click Open.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-2: Now, Click on System and Security.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step3: Select Power Options.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-4: Click on Change plan settings next to the power plan that is currently active on your computer. [The plan active on my computer is Dell, so I clicked on the Change plan settings next to this option]

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-5: Click on Restore default settings for this plan.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-6: Once this is done, you will get a prompt asking for confirmation. Click Yes. Then click on Save Changes.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Now once the plan has been restored to its default settings, Restart your computer and see if the issue has been fixed.
After all these methods, the issue with battery saver mode in Windows 10 will hopefully be resolved.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Windows 10 bevat een "Battery Saver" -modus die is ontworpen om de levensduur van uw laptop of tablet te verlengen. Windows schakelt Battery Saver automatisch in als de batterij van uw pc bijna leeg is, maar u kunt dit regelen en kiezen wat Battery Saver precies doet.

Wat doet de Battery Saver Mode precies?

Battery Saver is vergelijkbaar met Low Power Mode op een iPhone of Battery Saver op Android. Wanneer het wordt geactiveerd (of wanneer u het activeert), brengt het een paar wijzigingen aan in de Windows-instellingen om de levensduur van uw laptop verder te vergroten.

Ten eerste verlaagt het automatisch de helderheid van uw display. Dit is een grote aanpassing die de levensduur van de batterij op elk apparaat kan verminderen, omdat de achtergrondverlichting behoorlijk wat stroom verbruikt.

Battery Saver versnelt agressief achtergrond-apps die u niet actief gebruikt, zelfs als dit desktop-apps zijn. Deze functie is toegevoegd met de Fall Creators Update. 'Universele apps' uit de Windows Store kunnen ook niet op de achtergrond worden uitgevoerd en pushmeldingen ontvangen als deze modus is ingeschakeld.

Standaard wordt de batterijbesparingsmodus automatisch geactiveerd wanneer uw laptop of tablet een batterijduur van 20% bereikt. Sluit uw pc aan om op te laden en Windows zal de batterijbesparingsmodus deactiveren.

Hoe het aan te zetten

U kunt de batterijbesparingsmodus inschakelen wanneer u maar wilt. U kunt het bijvoorbeeld handmatig aan het begin van een lange dag inschakelen als u weet dat u een tijdje niet in de buurt van een stopcontact bent.

Om dit te doen, klikt of tikt u gewoon op het batterijpictogram in het systeemvak op uw taakbalk. Sleep de schuifregelaar naar de meest linkse positie om de modus "Batterijbesparing" te activeren.

Deze optie is één klik verwijderd van het batterijpictogram, net zoals het energiebeheerschema van Power Saver op Windows 7 en Windows 8 was. Het is duidelijk dat Microsoft dit liever gebruikt in plaats van te knoeien met die oude en verwarrende energieplannen.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

U vindt ook een sneltoets voor de 'batterijbesparing' in het Action Center van Windows 10. Veeg naar rechts of klik op het pictogram Action Center in het systeemvak om er toegang tot te krijgen.

Klik op de koppeling "Uitbreiden" boven de tegels onder aan het paneel van het Actiecentrum als u de batterijbespaartegel niet kunt zien. U kunt deze tegels opnieuw rangschikken om de optie gemakkelijker toegankelijk te maken, als u dat wilt.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Hoe batterijbesparing te configureren

U kunt configureren wat Battery Saver doet en wanneer het wordt geactiveerd. Ga hiervoor naar Instellingen> Systeem> Batterij. U kunt ook op het batterijpictogram klikken in uw systeemvak en op de koppeling "Batterijinstellingen" in de pop-up klikken om deze te openen.

Onder "Batterijbesparing" kunt u kiezen of Windows de modus Batterijbesparing automatisch inschakelt of niet, en wanneer dat het geval is. Standaard schakelt Windows de batterijbesparingsmodus automatisch in bij 20% resterende batterij. U kunt dit wijzigen. U kunt bijvoorbeeld Windows automatisch Batterijbesparing op 90% van de batterij inschakelen als u problemen ondervindt met de levensduur van de batterij op uw laptop.

U kunt ook de optie "Helderheid van het onderste scherm uitschakelen terwijl de batterij wordt bespaard" uitschakelen, maar dit is erg handig op alle apparaten, dus u moet die waarschijnlijk ingeschakeld laten. Helaas is er geen manier om het helderheidsniveau van het scherm te configureren dat Battery Saver zal gebruiken.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

U kunt op de link "Batterijgebruik per app" boven in het batterijscherm klikken om te zien welke apps de meeste batterij gebruiken en hoe agressief Windows ze in de batterijbesparingsmodus regelt.

Hoe bruikbaar is de Battery Saver Mode, echt waar?

De schermhelderheid van de Battery Saver alleen zou een behoorlijk serieuze batterijduur moeten besparen. Natuurlijk, als je de gewoonte hebt om de helderheid van je scherm handmatig te verlagen, iets anders wat je kunt doen met een snelle klik of tik op het batterijpictogram, dan zul je deze functie misschien niet helemaal nodig vinden. Hoeveel dit kan helpen, is afhankelijk van hoe helder u normaal uw scherm bewaart en hoe sterk de achtergrondverlichting is.

Deze functie vermindert nu het vermogen dat wordt gebruikt door desktop-apps op de achtergrond, evenals universele apps, waardoor het bruikbaarder wordt op alle pc's. Zelfs als u alleen traditionele desktop-apps gebruikt, is het de moeite waard om in te schakelen als u meer batterijlevensduur van uw computer wilt persen.

Als u worstelt met een slechte levensduur van de batterij, zal het volgen van onze gids om de levensduur van uw laptop te verlengen waarschijnlijk meer helpen dan de Battery Saver-modus. Toch is het een mooie toevoeging en veel gemakkelijker te gebruiken dan de oude "powerplannen" van Windows 7 en 8.

Net als veel andere delen van Windows 10, lijkt de Battery Saver-modus een beetje op een work-in-progress. Het kan agressiever zijn als u de snelheid van uw CPU verlaagt en andere aanpassingen uitvoert om de levensduur van uw batterij te verlengen, en Microsoft kan dit in de toekomst toevoegen.

Maar ondanks dat is de batterijbesparingsmodus nog steeds nuttig genoeg voor de meeste mensen. Windows kan de Battery Saver-modus automatisch inschakelen en indien nodig uitschakelen, zodat u niet langer hoeft te wachten op micromanagement.

Windows 10 sisaldab režiimi „Aku säästja”, mis on mõeldud sülearvuti või tahvelarvuti aku tööea pikendamiseks. Windows lubab akusäästja automaatselt, kui teie arvuti aku hakkab tühjaks saama, kuid saate seda juhtida ja valida täpselt, mida akusäästja teeb.

Mida täpselt teeb akusäästja režiim?

SEOTUD:Kuidas hallata Windows 10 uut "võimsuse reguleerimist", et säästa aku kasutusaega

Aku säästja on sarnane iPhone'i vähese energiatarbega režiimile või Androidi akusäästjale. Kui see aktiveeritakse (või kui aktiveerite), muudab see Windowsi seadetes mõningaid muudatusi, et pikendada sülearvuti aku kasutusaega.

Esiteks vähendab see teie ekraani heledust automaatselt. See on üks suur näpistus, mis võib säästa iga seadme aku eluiga, kuna taustvalgus kasutab üsna palju energiat.

Akusäästja piirab nüüd agressiivselt taustarakendusi, mida te aktiivselt ei kasuta, isegi kui need on töölauarakendused. See funktsioon lisati koos Fall Creators Update'iga. Selle režiimi lubamisel ei saa Windowsi poe universaalsed rakendused ka taustal töötada ega tõuketeateid saada.

Vaikimisi aktiveeritakse akusäästja režiim automaatselt alati, kui teie sülearvuti või tahvelarvuti jõuab 20% aku kasutamiseni. Ühendage arvuti laadimiseks ja Windows inaktiveerib akusäästja režiimi.

Kuidas see sisse lülitada

Aku säästmise režiimi saate igal ajal sisse lülitada. Näiteks võite pika päeva alguses selle käsitsi sisse lülitada, kui teate, et olete mõnda aega pistikupesast eemal.

Selleks klõpsake või puudutage lihtsalt tegumiriba teavitusalal akuikooni. „Battery Saver“ režiimi aktiveerimiseks lohistage liugurit vasakpoolsesse asendisse.

See suvand asub akuikoonist ühe hiireklõpsu kaugusel, täpselt nagu energiasäästuprogramm „Energiasäästja“ oli Windows 7 ja Windows 8 puhul. On selge, et Microsoft soovib, et kasutaksite seda vanade ja segaste energiaplaanidega jamamise asemel.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Windows 10 tegevuskeskusest leiate ka kiirseadete paani „Aku säästja”. Pühkige paremalt paremale või klõpsake sellele juurdepääsemiseks süsteemses salves ikooni Action Center.

Kui te ei näe akusäästja paani, klõpsake paneeli Action Center all paanide kohal linki „Laienda”. Soovi korral saate neid plaate ümber paigutada, et see oleks hõlpsamini juurdepääsetav.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Kuidas seadistada akusäästjat

Saate konfigureerida, mida akusäästja teeb ja millal see aktiveerub. Selleks minge menüüsse Seaded> Süsteem> Aku. Võite ka klõpsata oma teavitusalas akuikoonil ja sellele juurdepääsemiseks klõpsata hüpikaknas linki „Aku seaded”.

Jaotises „Aku kokkuhoid“ saate valida, kas Windows lubab automaatselt akusäästja režiimi või mitte. Vaikimisi lubab Windows automaatselt akusäästja režiimi, kui aku jääb järele 20%. Saate seda muuta – näiteks võite lasta Windowsil lubada akusäästja automaatselt 90% aku kasutamisel, kui näete vaeva sülearvuti aku kasutusaega.

Võite ka keelata valiku „Madalam ekraani heledus akusäästja ajal”, kuid see on kõigis seadmetes väga kasulik, seega peaksite selle tõenäoliselt lubama. Kahjuks pole ekraani heleduse taset võimalik konfigureerida.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Akuekraani ülaosas oleval lingil „Aku kasutamine rakenduste kaupa” saate klõpsata, et näha, millised rakendused kasutavad kõige rohkem akut ja kontrollida, kui agressiivselt Windows neid akusäästja režiimis gaasitab.

Kui kasulik on tegelikult akusäästja režiim?

SEOTUD:Kuidas suurendada Windowsi sülearvuti aku kasutusaega

Ainuüksi akusäästja ekraani eredus peaks säästma üsna tõsist aku kasutusaega. Muidugi, kui teil on kombeks ekraani heledust käsitsi vähendada – midagi muud saate teha kiire klõpsuga või puudutada akuikooni – ei pruugi see funktsioon vajalikuks osutuda. Kui palju sellest abi on, sõltub sellest, kui eredalt ekraani tavaliselt hoiate ja kui palju energiat näljane on taustvalgus.

See funktsioon vähendab nüüd nii töölaua taustarakenduste kui ka universaalsete rakenduste kasutatavat võimsust, muutes selle kõigi arvutite jaoks kasulikumaks. Isegi kui kasutate ainult traditsioonilisi töölauarakendusi, tasub see lubada, kui soovite arvutist rohkem aku kasutusaega pigistada.

Kui teil on probleeme halva aku kasutamisajaga, aitab meie sülearvuti aku tööea pikendamise juhend tõenäoliselt rohkem kui akusäästja režiim. Sellegipoolest on see kena kaasamine ja seda on palju lihtsam kasutada kui Windows 7 ja 8 vanu "toiteplaane".

Nagu paljud Windows 10 osad, näeb ka akusäästja režiim veidi välja nagu pooleliolev töö. See võib olla agressiivsem, kui vähendate protsessori kiirust ja teete muid muudatusi, et pikendada aku kasutusaega, ja Microsoft võib seda funktsiooni tulevikus täiendada.

Vaatamata sellele on akusäästja režiim siiski enamiku inimeste jaoks piisavalt kasulik. Windows saab automaatselt sisse lülitada akusäästja režiimi ja vajadusel selle keelata, säästes tüütu mikrojuhtimise arvelt, et saaksite tööd jätkata.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

If your Windows 11 device is running low on battery life – or you want to get the most out of every minute of power, you can turn on Battery Saver mode. Here’s how to do it.

What is a battery saver?

Battery Saver is a special Windows Power Saving mode that removes more life from your battery by dimming your screen brightness, reducing background activity and limiting certain notifications. It’s like “Low Power Mode” on iPhone and “Battery Saver” mode on Android. Windows 10 also includes battery saver mode.

By default, Battery Saver turns on automatically when your battery reaches 20% or less, but can be configured in Settings under System> Power and Battery. Once you plug in to recharge your device, it will turn off automatically. Also, you can use the battery saver manually anytime you want to save battery life.

Related: How to use and configure Windows 10 “Battery Saver” mode.

Turn on the battery saver using the quick settings.

The fastest way to activate Battery Saver is through the Quick Settings menu. To open it, click the “Quick Settings” button hidden in your taskbar – this is where you see the icons for Wi-Fi, speaker, and battery indicator. Or you press Windows + A on your keyboard.

When Quick Settings opens, click “Battery Saver”.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

(If you don’t see “Battery Saver” in Quick Settings, click the pencil icon at the bottom of the menu, select “Add”, then select “Battery Saver” in the list that appears.)

After clicking, the battery saver will be activated immediately. When you’re ready to turn it off, re-open Quick Settings and click the “Battery Saver” button until it’s highlighted.

Related: How Windows 11’s New “Quick Settings” Menu Works

Turn on Battery Saver in the Settings app.

You can also enable (and configure) the battery saver in the Windows 11 Settings app. To do this, first open Windows Settings by pressing Windows + i on your keyboard. Or you can find “Settings” in the Start menu and click on its icon when it appears in the results.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

When the settings open, click “System” in the sidebar, then select “Power and Battery”.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

In the Power and Battery settings, scroll down to the “Battery” section. Click the “Turn on” button next to the “Battery Saver” option.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

The battery saver will turn on immediately. To turn it off again, click the “Turn off now” button with the “Battery Saver” label.

When you’re on this screen, you can also select the percentage at which the battery saver will automatically activate using the “Automatically turn on the battery saver” drop-down menu. This menu includes an “always” option to keep the battery saver permanently and a “never” option to disable it completely.

You can also toggle the battery saver dimming the screen using the “low screen brightness” switch when using the battery saver. In general, keeping your screen brightness off will have a big impact on extending your computer’s battery life. good luck!

Related: 6 Ways to Improve Battery Life on Windows Laptops

When Microsoft created Windows 10 it borrowed a few features from the world of smartphones. One of the more obvious ones is Barrage fire Saver. Just as your phone has a miserable-battery mode, the battery life on Windows 10 laptops and tablets can be extended by turning off things like automatic email and calendar sync, live tile updates, and play down processes for some apps. Battery Saver also lowers your display’s screen brightness, though you can undo that mount.

With Battery Saver enabled, you can keep checking Facebook, writing electronic mail, or coating your thesis for a fewer more proceedings ahead your Personal computer has to shut down.

Here’s how the feature works in the Windows 10 Anniversary Update.

Where to find it

Battery Saver in the quick-actions area of the Action Center.

Battery Saver lives in two different spots connected your PC. The first is in the hurried-actions area at the behind of the Action Center. Here you can quickly turn Battery Saver on and unsatisfactory at testament.

You can as wel get to the Battery Saver fast-actions tile aside clicking on the bombardment icon on the far right of the taskbar.

Note that you cannot turn happening Battery Rescuer if you’re using your PC’s big businessman cord. That seems obvious, only nonetheless bears mentioning.

The other placement for Battery Saver is in the Settings app.

The battery section of the Settings app.

To have a look offer to Start > Settings > System > Battery. When you’re running connected battery baron you’ll see your battery’s leftover percentage at the top under the heading Overview, too as the estimated fourth dimension left over before your PC has to close down. This section also has a link tagged Battery usage by app that takes you to another test that shows a breakdown of that information.

Below that, the Battery Recoverer subhead houses the actual settings you can tweak for the feature. Prototypic, you will see a checkbox—that should be enabled by default—to turn on Battery Saver automatically when your battery waterfall below 20 percent. If you’d rather turn on Battery Saver manually every time, just uncheck this box.

Next, you’ll encounter a yellow-bellied terrapin labeled Battery saver position until side by side charge. This is just another way to turn along Battery Saver. When this slider is activated you’ll enter Battery Recoverer mode until you nag in your device.

At long last, one last checkbox at the bottom of the Bombardment Saver expanse allows you to go into Battery Saver manner without the lower screen brightness.

Battery Saver is a good feature to know about for those times you want to extend your Windows 10 device’s cord-free power for as long as possible.

It has always been possible to change power plan settings in recent versions of the Windows operating system to save and extend battery life. There are dozens of software around that claim to improve battery life. That good news is that you no longer need to go for third-party battery-saving software as Windows 10 ships with a built-in Battery Saver feature.

Battery Saver is one of the hundreds of new features introduced with Windows 10. As the title of the functionality goes, the function is designed to extend the battery time of devices running Windows 10 operating system.

By default, the feature gets automatically activated when the battery level falls below 20%. And when the Battery Saver is active, you can see a small green icon on the battery icon located in the system tray to indicate that the Battery Saver feature is active.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

According to Microsoft, Battery Saver limits background activities to improve the battery time. Additionally, Windows Store, Calendar, and People apps do not sync. Windows 10 reduces the computer’s screen brightness by 30% to save the battery (you can turn off this under battery settings). When the Battery saver is turned on, Windows 10 doesn’t download non-critical Windows updates. Lastly, Windows 10 also blocks most of the telemetry.

As mentioned above, with default settings, Battery Saver is turned on only when the battery level goes below 20%. You might want to change this default setting to 40 or 50% to improve the battery time in Windows 10.

It’s important to note that Battery Saver is turned off while charging even if the battery level is below the specified percentage. Needless to say that the Battery Saver functionality is not available on computers without batteries.

Quickly turn on the Battery saver in Windows 10

Step 1: Click on the battery icon in the system tray area of the taskbar to see the battery flyout.

Step 2: Move the slider to the Best battery life position (extreme left) to turn on the Battery saver feature.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Turn on Battery Saver in Windows 10

By default, the Battery Saver kicks in when the battery charge goes below the 20% mark. But if the feature is not getting activated automatically, you can use this method to enable the feature.

Step 1: Open the Settings app. Navigate to System > Battery.

Step 2: Here, in the Battery saver section, make sure that Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below option is turned on. If not, select the option to turn on the Battery saver feature when the battery level falls below 20%. To turn on the Battery saver now (irrespective of the battery level), turn on Battery saver status until next charge option.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

To completely disable Battery Saver in Windows 10

Step 1: Navigate to Settings > System > Battery.

Step 2: Here, uncheck the Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below option to disable the Battery saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

To enable or disable Battery Saver in power options

UPDATE: This method doesn’t work in the newest version of Windows 10.

It’s possible to enable or disable Battery Saver for a particular power plan. Here is how to do it:

Step 1: Type Power Options in the Start search box and then press Enter key. Power Options window can also be launched by clicking on the battery icon and then clicking Power Options.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step 2: Under Power Options window, click or tap Change plan settings link next to your desired power plan.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step 3: Click or tap Change advanced power settings to open the small Power Options dialog.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step 4: Here, expand Energy saver settings, and then expand the Charge level.

Step 5: Change On battery (Percent battery charge) value to 0 to disable Battery Saver.

I hope this helps you!

Filed Under: Windows 10 Tagged: Tips

Related Articles

Comments

Started recently, whenever I plugged in my laptop it won’t show any sign of charging expect 0 percent, someone told me the battery has been off or something like that but unable to on it what can do.

I have same problem as many others do fix please

david blum says

hello, whatever i do i cannot find this menu on my windows 1607 14393.331 build 🙁 is it another menu ? netiher on the desktop or power scheme i GPO.

There are several ways to enable Battery Saver in Windows 11, which we will review in today’s post. Battery Saver is an essential part of power management in Windows-based laptops and tablets. It allows you to prolong the battery life by disabling background activities, limiting notification, and slightly reducing the overall performance.

However, keep in mind that you cannot turn on Battery Saver in Windows 11 when your device is plugged in. In such a case, the Battery Saver button in Windows 11 appears grayed-out. Once you unplug the AC power source, you’ll be able to turn on Battery Saver.

Tip: You can combine Battery Saver with other options, such as Airplane Mode and with disabling background apps to improve battery life of your device.

Enable Battery Saver in Windows 11

There are multiple ways to turn on Battery Saver. You can use either Quick Settings, the Settings app, or even make the OS activate it automatically depending on device’s battery charge level. Let’s review these methods in detail. So, to enable the Battery Saver feature in Windows 11, do the following.

Using Quick Settings

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

  1. Press Win + A to open the Quick Settings flyout menu. You can also open it by clicking one of the following indicators in the notification area: Network, Volume, and Battery.
  2. Click the Battery Saver button
  3. To disable it later, just repeat the above sequence. Clicking on the Battery Saver option second time will disable it.

If the Battery Saver button is missing in the Quick Settings menu, you need to add it manually there. do the following.

Add Battery Saver to Quick Settings

  1. Open the Quick Settings menu and click the edit button with a pencil icon.
  2. Click Add, then select Battery Saver from the list of available toggles.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  3. Click Done to save the changes.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

You are done. From now, you’ll have the Battery Saver button in Quick Settings.

The Quick Settings menu allows you to turn on or off Battery Saver without customizing it. Alternatively, you can enable or disable it using the Windows 11 Settings. Also, the Settings app allow changing additional power-related options.

Turn on Battery Saver in Settings

  1. Press Win + I to open the Settings app.
  2. Go to System > Power and Battery.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  3. Scroll down and find the Battery section.
  4. Click the arrow down icon next to the Battery Saver.
  5. Click Turn on Now. That action enables instantly Battery Saver.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Automatically Enable Battery Saver in Windows 11

You can set Windows 11 to enable Battery Saver automatically once the battery in your laptop or tablet hits a specific threshold. By default, Windows 11 turns on Battery Saver on a 20% charge. Because Battery Saver limits background activity and reduces performance, some users might want to decrease that threshold or disable automatic Battery Saver altogether.

To automatically enable Battery Saver in Windows 11, do the following.

  1. Open Windows Settings and go to System > Power and Battery.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  2. Click Battery Saver and find the Turn battery saver on automatically at option.
  3. Select the required value from a drop-down list.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  4. If you want to disable the automatic Battery Saver in Windows 11, select “Never.”

Disable Battery Saver in Windows 11

If you want to turn off Battery Saver in Windows 11, repeat any of the steps above. Press Win + A , then click Battery Saver. Alternatively, open Windows Settings ( Win + I ) and go to System > Power and Battery. Under the Battery Saver group of options, click Turn off.

Finally, those who frequently change Battery Saver settings in Windows 11 can create a special shortcut to access its options with a single click.

Create Battery Saver Shortcut in Windows 11

  1. Right-click the empty space on the Desktop and select New > Shortcut.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  2. On a new window, enter ms-settings:batterysaver .How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  3. Click Next, then give your shortcut a proper name, for example, Battery Settings.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  4. Click Finish to save changes.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

You are done. Note that Windows 11 will assign the default Settings icon to your shortcut, but you can change it using the properties menu.

That’s it. Now you know how to enable or disable Battery Saver in Windows 11.

Winaero greatly relies on your support. You can help the site keep bringing you interesting and useful content and software by using these options:

If you like this article, please share it using the buttons below. It won’t take a lot from you, but it will help us grow. Thanks for your support!

Author: Taras Buria

Taras is here to cover stories about Microsoft and everything around, although sometimes he prefers Apple. You can stay in touch with him on Twitter. View all posts by Taras Buria

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

For computer file systems, fdisk is a command-line utility that provides disk partitioning functions. In versions of the Windows NT operating system line from Windows 2000 onwards, fdisk is replaced by a more advanced tool called diskpart. Similar utilities exist for Unix-like systems.

There are 10 fdisk Commands to Manage Linux Disk Partitions:

1. View all Disk Partitions in Linux

Use this command to check all:
sudo fdisk -l

2. View Specific Disk Partition in Linux

Use this command to check only one:
fdisk -l /dev/sda

3. Check all Available fdisk Commands

This command helps you to use fdisk:
fdisk /dev/sda
Enter “m” for help.

4. Print all Partition Table in Linux

Use this commands and after enter “p” in shell:
fdisk /dev/sda

5. How to Delete a Partition in Linux

Use this command:
fdisk /dev/sda
When asked for command, enter “d”
After, enter partition number that you want to delete.

6. How to Create a New Partition in Linux

Use this command:
fdisk /dev/sda
When asked for command, enter “n”
After, enter “e” for extended partition and “p” for the primary partition.
Next, enter the size of the partition.
To save it, enter “w”.

7. How to Format a Partition in Linux

To format any partition, enter this command:
mkfs.ext4 /dev/sda3
Note: change /dev/sda3 with the disk location that you want to format.

8. How to Check Size of a Partition in Linux

Use this command to view size of a partition:
fdisk -s /dev/sda3

9. How to Fix Partition Table Order

Use this command to fix:
fdisk /dev/sda
Enter “f” in command, to fix it.
And enter “w” in command, to save it.

10. How to Disable Boot Flag (*) of a Partition

Use this command to Disable boot flag:
fdisk /dev/sda
Enter “p” command to view the current partition.
Next, enter “a” to disable flag.
Then enter a number of the partition.

You have successfully learned How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux.
Enjoy it.

By Genesis Emmanuel Gonzales – April 26, 2016 – no comments Email article | Print article

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Fdisk is a text facility which is used to view and manage the hard disk partition on Linux. It can be the most powerful tool for the which can be used for managing the hard disk partitions, but it is also confusing to the new users.

On some of the distributions of the Linux, there is a need of using a word sudo as prefix before the commands fdisk and mkfs, and those distributions which do not require using this word as a prefix are required to use the word “su” to get to the root shell, then you must type every other command without sudo.

List partitions:

To list the partitions, write…

sudo fdisk –l

You can also add the name of the disk devices name to list only partitions on it. For instance to list only the partitions on the first disk device, you have to write:

sudo fdisk –l /dev/sda

Entering command mode:

If you want to work on the partition of the disk, you just need to enter the command mode. You can get the name of the device from the fdisk –l command. If you want to enter the first disk device, following command is used.

sudo fdisk /dev/sda

There is a warning that does not edit partitions when they are in use. If you desire to edit them boot it from the live CD first.

Using command mode:

In this mode, in this mode you just need to single letter to specify your command and tell the system what to do. Just type m and then press to see the list of the commands

Deleting the partition:

If there is a need to delete the partition use the button ‘d’. the screen will prompt you asking the number of partitions you want to delete, which you have got from the ‘p’ command.

After deleting the desired partition, type the command ‘p’ again if you want to view the current partition. At this type it appears that the partitions are deleted but these partitions are not written on the disk until you press the ‘w’ button.

Creating partition:

In order to create the new partition use the button ‘n’. you have the option to create the logical or primary partition. ‘l’ for the logical and ‘P‘ for the primary partition. A disk can only have 4 primary partitions. The next thing to do is to specify the sector of the partition which you want to start portioning at. To choose the default sector press Enter key.

The last thing to do is to specify the last sector of the partition. After selecting the initial sector if you want to select all available space, press Enter. You have the option that you can also specify the size +6G for the partition of 5 Gigabytes and +512M for the partition of 512 megabytes. If you will not specify the unit after pressing +, fdisk will utilize sectors as the unit.

fdisk is a menu-driven command-line utility, and hence new users find this tool confusing and difficult to use. fdisk is not an easy tool to use and should be used with caution. You need to have root access or sudo privileges to make changes to storage partitions.

So, today in this article, I will give you a tutorial on how to create a partition in Linux using the fdisk command.

You can carry out the following operations using the fdisk command.

  • Create New Partition
  • Manage Space
  • Reorganize space on old drives.
  • Move data to a new disk

How to list partitions?

Before making any changes to the drive, you first look at the basic structure of the drive and its partitions. To view all the partitions on the drive, run the following command in the Linux terminal.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Partitions are displayed by their device name, such as dev/sda, dev/sdc, etc., as you can see in the above screenshot.

If you wish to view partition on the specific disk, you have to use ‘-l’ followed by the device name as shown in the command below.

This command will show the output as shown in the screenshot below.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Creating Partition:

To create a partition on a specific drive, you have to run the fdisk command with the device name, as shown in the command below.

Once you’re on the device where you want to create a partition, type M and press enter.

You will see the list as shown below screenshot. This is the list of single-letter commands you can use to take specific action using fdisk.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

To create a partition, you have to use the N command. Both logical and primary partitions can be created where I denote logical partition and P denotes primary partition.

By default, the first free sector on the disk is chosen to create a new partition. Just like that, you also have to specify the last sector of the partition. You can also specify the size of the partition according to your requirement.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Deleting Partition:

To delete the specific partition, you have to use the D command. Use the P command to make sure which partition you want to delete.

When you fire the D command, it will ask for the partition number you want to delete. Just type that partition number and hit the enter button. This will delete the selected partition.

So, this is how you can use the fdisk command to create and delete the partition on Linux. fdisk is a very useful command-line tool when used efficiently and correctly. Make sure you have the back of the partitions where you are going to use the fdisk command. Good day!

About the author

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Swapnil Tirthakar

A Software Engineer who loves football and passionate about traveling. I often spend my free time playing with gadgets and exploring new possibilities in tech world. I am Linux enthusiast and have about 6 years of experience in web development. I have good command on Python, Java, SQL and system security.

Fdisk is a text based utility used in Linux to manage disk partitions. Using fdisk you can view all disk partitions, create a new partition, delete an existing hard disk partition and view the size of the partition.

Using fdisk you are allowed to create a maximum of four primary partitions, and any number of logical partitions, based on the size of the disk. Keep in mind that any single partition requires a minimum size of 40MB.

In this tutorial, let us learn how to use fdisk command in linux with some examples.

1) View all existing disk partitions

Before you create a new partition or modify an existing partition, you might want to view all available partitions in the system.

The command will list partitions from all the connected hard disks. When you have more than one disk on the system, the partitions list are ordered by the device’s /dev name. For example, /dev/sda, /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc and so on.

Use fdisk -l to view all available partitions as following:

2) View partitions of a specific hard disk

To view all partitions of the ‘/dev/sda’ hard disk, do the following.

View all fdisk Commands Using fdisk Command m

Use fdisk command m , to view all available fdisk commands as shown below:

3) Delete a hard disk partition

Let us assume that you like to combine several partitions (for example, /dev/sda6, /dev/sda7 and /dev/sda8) into a single disk partition. To do this, you should first delete all those individual partitions, as shown below.

4) Create a new disk partition

Once you’ve deleted all the existing partitions, you can create a new partition using all available space as shown below.

After the partition is created, format it using the mkfs command as shown below.

5) View the size of an existing partition

As shown below, fdisk -s displays the size of the partition in blocks.

In the following example it shows the size ‘/dev/sda7’ as 4900MB.

6) Toggle the boot flag of a partition

Fdisk command displays the boot flag of each partition. When you want to disable or enable the boot flag on the corresponding partition, do the following.

As seen above, the boot flag is disabled on the partition ‘/dev/sda5’.

7) Fix partition table order

When you delete a logical partition and recreate it again, you might see the ‘partition out of order’ issue. i.e ‘Partition table entries are not in disk order’ error message.

For example, when you delete three logical partitions (sda6, sda7 and sda8), and create a new partition, you might expect the new partition name to be sda6. But, the system might’ve created the new partition as sda7. This is because, after the partitions are deleted, ‘sda9’ partition has been moved as sda6 and the free space is moved to the end.

To fix this partition order issue, and assign sda6 to the newly created partition, execute the expert command f as shown below.

Once the partition table order is fixed, you’ll not get the ‘Partition table entries are not in disk order’ error message anymore.

Conclusion

In this tutorial, we learned how to use fdisk command in Linux to manage partitions. I hope you enjoyed reading and please leave your suggestion on the below comment box. Note: Don’t delete, modify, or add partition, if you don’t know what you are doing. You may end up losing your data. Be careful.

There are different options to create or manage partitions under Oracle Linux – fdisk is one of them. This post describes its usage and the use case when creating a new partition table. fdisk is a menu-driven program for the creation and manipulation of partition tables. It understands GPT (experimental for now), MBR, Sun, SGI, and BSD partition tables.

Hard disks can be divided into one or more logical disks called partitions. This division is recorded in the partition table, found in sector 0 of the disk. (In the BSD world one talks about ‘disk slices’ and a ‘disklabel’.)

Linux needs at least one partition, namely for its root file system. It can use swap files and/or swap partitions, but the latter is more efficient. So, usually one will want a second Linux partition dedicated as a swap partition. On Intel-compatible hardware, the BIOS that boots the system can often only access the first 1024 cylinders of the disk. For this reason, people with large disks often create a third partition, just a few MB large, typically mounted on /boot, to store the kernel image and a few auxiliary files needed at boot time, so as to make sure that this stuff is accessible to the BIOS. There may be reasons of security, ease of administration and backup, or testing, to use more than the minimum number of partitions.

The basic fdisk commands needed are:

  • p print the partition table
  • n create a new partition
  • d delete a partition
  • q quit without saving changes
  • w write the new partition table and exit

Changes you make to the partition table do not take effect until you issue the write (w) command.

Further information can be found at the man pages:

Partitioning a disk with fdisk

1. Run fdisk against the desired device “/dev/device_name”.

2. Choose option “p” to print the partition table of the disk:

3. Choose option “n” to create a new partition:

Here is an exaple of creating another partition on the same disk:

4. Check the partition table with the option “p“:

5. Choose the option “w” to write the new partition or partitions.

6. Run the command partprobe to inform the OS of partition table changes:

fdisk command is a free and open source utility widely available on Linux Based Platforms to Manage Disk Partitions Table. It understand different partitions table like BSD, GPT, MBR, SUN and SGI. fdisk command can be used to create a new partition, delete a partition, change the partition ID, resize the partition, move a partition and so on.

One can create a maximum of four primary partition using fdisk command and n number of logical partitions based on available disk size. Partition number from 1 to 4 are reserved for Primary partitions and then logical partition starts from number 5. fdisk command creates partition of minimum 40 MB size and maximum of 2 TB size.

What is Block Device

A Block device in Linux is defined as a file which represents devices like Hard Disk, CD-ROMs from where data can be read in fixed size blocks.

What is Partition

A Block device are usually divided into one or more logical disks which are known as partitions. The information of these partitions are stored in a table Known as Partition Table.

Synopsis

fdisk [-uc] [-b sectorsize] [-C cyls] [-H heads] [-S sects] device

fdisk -l [-u] [device. ]

fdisk -s partition.

fdisk -v

fdisk -h

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Fdisk Command Examples to Manage Disk Partitions in Linux

Example 1: How to Check fdisk Command Version

To check fdisk command version you need to use -v option as shown below. Here current fdisk version is 2.23.2 .

Example 2: How to List All Disk Partitions in Linux

If you want to List all the disk partitions then you need to use -l option with fdisk command as shown below. Here we have two disks /dev/sda and /dev/sdb but partitions are created only on /dev/sda disk. We have two partitions /dev/sda1 and /dev/sda2 available on /dev/sda disk.

-l : List the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit. More on fdisk Man Page.

Example 3: How to Check total number of partitions in a Disk

If you want to check all the partitions of a Specific disk then you can also use -l option along with the disk name. In this example we are checking all the partition information of /dev/sdc disk using fdisk -l /dev/sdc command as shown below.

Example 4: How to Delete a Disk Partition in Linux

To delete a disk partition you need to use command d as shown below. In this example we are deleting partition /dev/sdc1 using d command and then writing the partition table changes using w command.

Example 5: How to Create a Disk Partition in Linux

To create a disk partition you need to use n command as shown below. In this example we are creating partition on /dev/sdc disk using fdisk /dev/sdc command. Then selecting n command to create a new partition and selecting p to create it as a primary partition type. Here we are using default sector value i.e first sector value as 2048 and last sector value as 16777215 which will create partition on entire 8 GB disk and then writing the changes to partition table using w command.

Example 6: How to Check the Size of Disk Partition in Linux

To check the size of disk partition you can use -s option with fdisk command as shown below. In this example we are checking the size of /dev/sdc1 partition using fdisk -s /dev/sdc1 command. Here you will see size in number of blocks. So the total size of /dev/sdc1 partition is 8387584 blocks.

-s : Print the size (in blocks) of each given partition. More on fdisk Man Page.

Example 7: How to Verify Disk Partition table in Linux

Another useful command that you can use is v command to verify the disk partition table in Linux. In this example we are verifying /dev/sdc disk partition using v command and then writing the changes to partition table using w command.

Example 8: How to Quit fdisk Command without saving any changes

To quit fdisk command utility without saving any changes you need to use q command as shown below. In this example we have exited the /dev/sdc disk changes without saving it by using q command.

Example 9: How to Save and Exit fdisk Utility

If you want to exit after saving partition table information then you need to use w command as shown below. This command will save all the partition table changes and then exit out from fdisk command.

Example 10: How to Change Disk Partition ID to “Linux LVM” type

If you want to change disk partition ID to Linux LVM type then you need to use hex code 8e after selecting the partition through t command as shown below. In this example we are changing the partition Id of /dev/sdc1 partition from 83 to 8e to convert the partition from normal disk to LVM type.

Example 11: How to Change Disk Partition ID to “Linux Swap” Type

For creating a swap partition you need to change the partition type to Linux swap type by using hex code 82 as shown below. In this example we are changing partition ID of /dev/sdc1 from normal partition to Linux swap type.

Example 12: How to Disable/Enable Boot Flag(*) of a Partition

If you want you can also disable/enable boot flag of a partition using fdisk command in Linux. As you can see from below output, partition /dev/sda1 is currently marked as boot partition.

To disable the boot flag from /dev/sda1 partition you need to use command a under fdisk utility and then select the partition to disable the boot flag as shown below.

After writing the disk partition table changes if you check the /dev/sda1 partition status again then you can notice that star(*) marked is removed now. This confirms boot flag is now disabled. You can follow the same procedure to enable it again.

Example 13: How to Correct the Partition Table Order

If you want to correct the partition table order then you need to use the extra functionality available by using x command and then use f command to correct the partition table order. Since in this example our disk partition table is already in order so it won’t do any changes here.

Example 14: How to Disable/Enable DOS Compatibility Mode

If you want to disable/enable DOS compatibility mode from a disk partition then you need to use c command as shown below. In this example we are changing the DOS Compatibility mode of partition /dev/sdc1 using c command.

Example 15: How to Check all the available options of fdisk command

To check all the available options of fdisk command you need to use m command as shown below. This command will list all the available actions that can be done on disk partition using fdisk command.

Example 16: How to check Man Page of fdisk command

Man Page of fdisk command can be checked using man fdisk command as shown below.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Fdisk(fixed disk or format disk) is a text-based command-line utility for viewing and managing hard disk partitions on Linux. Using fdisk you can view, create, resize, delete, change, copy and move partitions. Fdisk allows you to create a maximum of four primary partitions as permitted by Linux with each requiring a minimum size of 40mb. You can also have a much larger number of logical partitions by subdividing a primary partition. ​In this article, let us review how to use fdisk command to manage disk partitions by employing some very simple and practical examples.

Important points to note

  1. Fdisk requires root to operate. On Debian and Ubuntu based systems, you can prefix with sudo. On other distros, use su- command to get a root shell and then enter the commands without sudo.
  2. Take note of the form the device names (disks) are presented. Usually, you see the following names
  • /dev/hd[a-h] for IDE disks
  • /dev/sd[a-p] for SCSI disks
  • /dev/ed[a-d] for ESDI disks
  • /dev/xd[ab] for XT disks

​ 3. Warning: Do not delete, modify, or add partition unless you know exactly what you are about. You ran the risk of losing your data!

1. View All Existing Disk Partitions

​The first thing you want to do before tampering with your disks and partition is to view basic details about all available partitions in the system. The commands list the partitions on your system. When you have more than one disk available, the partitions list is ordered by the device’s /dev name as in /dev/sda, /dev/sdb and so on. Use the following command to view all existing partitions in the system –

2. View Partition on a Specific Disk

​If you want to look at all the partitions on a specific disk, use the following command to view all disk partitions on device /dev/sdb. # sudo fdisk -l /dev/sdb

3. View all fdisk Commands

​You can use the following command to view all available fdisk – # sudo fdisk /dev/sda This will provide you with a prompt. Enter m to see the list of all available commands of fdisk which can be operated on /dev/sda.

Command (m for help): m

The output will be this – Command action
a toggle a bootable flag
b edit bsd disklabel
c toggle the dos compatibility flag
d delete a partition
l list known partition types
m print this menu
n add a new partition
o create a new empty DOS partition table
p print the partition table
q quit without saving changes
s create a new empty Sun disklabel
t change a partition’s system id
u change display/entry units
v verify the partition table
w write table to disk and exit
x extra functionality (experts only)

4. Delete a Hard Disk Partition

Assuming you need to combine some partitions to form a larger one, you will first have to delete those partitions. To delete a specific partition on /dev/sdb2, follow the following -1. Enter the following command to enter/view the disk – # sudo fdisk /dev/sdb 2. Enter ‘d’ to delete a partition.​Command (m for help): d

3. You will be prompted to enter the partition number. We enter 2 in our case to delete /dev/sdb2. Save changes by entering ‘w’ at command and reboot for changes.

5. Create a New Disk Partition with Specific Size

To create a new partition, enter the following command -1. Enter the following command to enter/view the disk
# sudo fdisk /dev/sdb

2. Enter ‘n’ to create a new partition that will prompt you to specify for either a primary partition or an extended partition. Enter ‘p’ for a primary partition or ‘e’ for an extended partition.

3. You will then be prompted to enter the first cylinder or sector number of the partition to be created. You may press Enter to accept the defaults.

4. You will then be prompted to enter the Last cylinder or sector number of the partition to be created. You may press Enter to use all available space after the first sector or enter a specific size such as +2G or +256M for a 2 gigabyte or 256 megabyte partition respectively.

5. Run ‘w’ command to write the changes and reboot your system.

6. How to Format a Partition?

After you have created your partition, you need to format it with a file system. Use the following command to format to ext4 file format –

7. How to View the Size of your new or existing Partition?

​If you want to check the size of a specific partition, use the following command to check the size of the partition on /dev/sda2.

8. Viewing the Partition Table

​You can use the following command to look at your current partition table –
Use ‘p’ in command mode.

Command (m for help): p

Conclusion

​With this simple tutorial, you can manage your disks and partitions with Fdisk. Hope this has been useful. If you have any issues with anything above, let me know in the comment section below this article. Thank you!

Mohd Sohail is a web developer and a Linux sysAdmin. He also loves to write how-to articles, applications reviews and loves to use new Linux distributions.

2 responses to “‘fdisk’ Command To Manage Disk Partitions In Linux”

Dear Sir,
Thanks so much for sharing your powerful in depth of Linux tutorials(creating partition)which has really change my perspective and also broaden my horizon in Linux.
I say kudos and God bless you.I want to be a master in Linux so kindly show me steps I should take daily for me to be powerful in Linux and Linux Bash.
Thanks
Acquaye

You can start with installing a simple beginner friendly Linux distribution. I have written an article covering best beginner-friendly Linux distributions. Check that out here –

You can follow Linux communities including LinuxAndUbuntu. I have also written an article covering best sources to learn Linux for free.

There are different options to create or manage partitions under Oracle Linux – fdisk is one of them. This post describes its usage and the use case when creating a new partition table. fdisk is a menu-driven program for the creation and manipulation of partition tables. It understands GPT (experimental for now), MBR, Sun, SGI, and BSD partition tables.

Hard disks can be divided into one or more logical disks called partitions. This division is recorded in the partition table, found in sector 0 of the disk. (In the BSD world one talks about ‘disk slices’ and a ‘disklabel’.)

Linux needs at least one partition, namely for its root file system. It can use swap files and/or swap partitions, but the latter is more efficient. So, usually one will want a second Linux partition dedicated as a swap partition. On Intel-compatible hardware, the BIOS that boots the system can often only access the first 1024 cylinders of the disk. For this reason, people with large disks often create a third partition, just a few MB large, typically mounted on /boot, to store the kernel image and a few auxiliary files needed at boot time, so as to make sure that this stuff is accessible to the BIOS. There may be reasons of security, ease of administration and backup, or testing, to use more than the minimum number of partitions.

The basic fdisk commands needed are:

  • p print the partition table
  • n create a new partition
  • d delete a partition
  • q quit without saving changes
  • w write the new partition table and exit

Changes you make to the partition table do not take effect until you issue the write (w) command.

Further information can be found at the man pages:

Partitioning a disk with fdisk

1. Run fdisk against the desired device “/dev/device_name”.

2. Choose option “p” to print the partition table of the disk:

3. Choose option “n” to create a new partition:

Here is an exaple of creating another partition on the same disk:

4. Check the partition table with the option “p“:

5. Choose the option “w” to write the new partition or partitions.

6. Run the command partprobe to inform the OS of partition table changes:

Recently, one of our customers asked us to upgrade his server hardware. Unfortunately, they can’t…

Basic information smartd is a daemon that monitоrs the Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T)…

Recently, We described how to configure your server for high load and prevention of DDoS.…

Introduction If you are using old software on new software you can receive some weird…

Introduction Python is an interpreted, high-level, general-purpose programming language. Created by Guido van Rossum and…

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linuxOn Linux distributions, fdisk is the best tool to manage disk partitions. fdisk is a text based utility.

Using fdisk you can create a new partition, delete an existing partition, or change existing partition.

Using fidsk you are allowed to create a maximum of four primary partition, and any number of logical partitions, based on the size of the disk.

Keep in mind that any single partition requires a minimum size of 40MB.

In this article, let us review how to use fdisk command using practical examples.

Warning: Don’t delete, modify, or add partition, if you don’t know what you are doing. You will lose your data!

1. View All Existing Disk Partitions Using fdisk -l

Before you create a new partition, or modify an existing partition, you might want to view all available partition in the system.

Use fdisk -l to view all available partitions as shown below.

The above will list partitions from all the connected hard disks. When you have more than one disk on the system, the partitions list are ordered by the device’s /dev name. For example, /dev/sda, /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc and so on.

2. View Partitions of a Specific Hard Disk using fdisk -l /dev/sd

To view all partitions of the /dev/sda hard disk, do the following.

View all fdisk Commands Using fdisk Command m

Use fdisk command m, to view all available fdisk commands as shown below.

3. Delete a Hard Disk Partition Using fdisk Command d

Let us assume that you like to combine several partitions (for example, /dev/sda6, /dev/sda7 and /dev/sda8) into a single disk partition. To do this, you should first delete all those individual partitions, as shown below.

4. Create a New Disk Partition with Specific Size Using fdisk Command n

Once you’ve deleted all the existing partitions, you can create a new partition using all available space as shown below.

In the above example, fdisk n command is used to create new partition with the specific size. While creating a new partition, it expects following two inputs.

  • Starting cylinder number of the partition to be create (First cylinder).
  • Size of the partition (or) the last cylinder number (Last cylinder, +cylinders or +size ).

Please keep in mind that you should issue the fdisk write command (w) after any modifications.

After the partition is created, format it using the mkfs command as shown below.

5. View the Size of an existing Partition Using fdisk -s

As shown below, fdisk -s displays the size of the partition in blocks.

The above output corresponds to about 4900MB.

6. Toggle the Boot Flag of a Partition Using fdisk Command a

Fdisk command displays the boot flag of each partition. When you want to disable or enable the boot flag on the corresponding partition, do the following.

If you don’t know why are you are doing this, you’ll mess-up your system.

As seen above, the boot flag is disabled on the partition /dev/sda5.

7. Fix Partition Table Order Using fdisk Expert Command f

When you delete a logical partition, and recreate it again, you might see the “partition out of order” issue. i.e “Partition table entries are not in disk order” error message.

For example, when you delete three logical partitions (sda6, sda7 and sda8), and create a new partition, you might expect the new partition name to be sda6. But, the system might’ve created the new partition as sda7. This is because, after the partitions are deleted, sda9 partition has been moved as sda6 and the free space is moved to the end.

To fix this partition order issue, and assign sda6 to the newly created partition, execute the expert command f as shown below.

Once the partition table order is fixed, you’ll not get the “Partition table entries are not in disk order” error message anymore.

The fdisk command is a text-based utility for viewing and managing hard disk partitions on Linux. It’s one of the most
powerful tools you can use to manage partitions, but it’s confusing to new users.
This tutorial will go through the basics of using fdisk to manage a partition table. After using fdisk, you’ll have to use a mkfs
command to format new partitions with a �le system.

Sudo vs. Su
On Ubuntu, Linux Mint or other Ubuntu-derived distributions, the fdisk and mkfs commands must be pre�xed with sudo.
On distributions that don’t use sudo, use the su – command �rst to get a root shell, then type every command without sudo.

List Partitions
The sudo fdisk -l commands lists the partitions on your system.

You can add a disk’s device name to list only partitions on it. For example, use the following command to only list partitions
on the �rst disk device:
sudo fdisk -l /dev/sda

Entering Command Mode
To work on a disk’s partitions, you have to enter command mode. You’ll need the device name of a disk from the fdisk -l
command. The following command enters command mode for the �rst disk device:
sudo fdisk /dev/sda

How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux

Don’t edit partitions while they’re in use. If you want to edit system partitions, boot from a live CD �rst.

Using Command Mode
In command mode, you use single-letter commands to specify actions you want to take. Type m and press Enter to see a list
of the commands you can use.

Viewing the Partition Table
Use p to print the current partition table to the terminal from within command mode.

Deleting a Partition
Use the d command to delete a partition. You’ll be asked for the number of the partition you want to delete, which you can
get from the p command. For example, if I wanted to delete the partition at /dev/sda5, I’d type 5.

How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux

After deleting the partition, you can type p again to view the current partition table. The partition appears deleted, but fdisk
doesn’t write these changes to disk until you use the w command.

Creating a Partition
Use the n command to create a new partition. You can create a logical or primary partition (l for logical or p for primary). A
disk can only have four primary partitions.

Next, specify the sector of the disk you want the partition to start at. Press Enter to accept the default sector, which is the
�rst free sector on the disk.
Last, specify the last sector of the partition on the disk. If you want to use up all available space after the initial sector, just
press Enter. You can also specify a speci�c size, such as +5G for a �ve gigabyte partition or +512M for a 512 megabyte
partition. If you don’t specify a unit after the + sign, fdisk uses sectors as the unit. For example, +10000 results in the end of
the partition being 10000 sectors after its beginning.

System ID
The n command I just ran recreated the swap partition I deleted earlier — or did it? If I run the p command again, I’ll see that
the new /dev/sda5 partition is a “Linux” partition instead of a “Linux swap” partition.
If I want to change its type, I can use the t command and specify the partition’s number.
I’ll be asked for the hex code of the type. I don’t know it, so I can type L to view a list of hex codes.

How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux

It says 82 is the code for Linux swap partitions, so I can type that.

This doesn’t format the partition with the �le system you select. You’ll have to do that later with the appropriate mkfs
command.

Writing Changes
Use w to write the changes you’ve made to disk.
Use q if you want to quit without saving changes.

Formatting a Partition
You must format new partitions with a �le system before you can use them. You can do this with the appropriate mkfs
command. For example, this command formats the �fth partition on the �rst disk with the ext4 �le system.
sudo mkfs.ext4 /dev/sda5

Use the mkswap command if you want to format a partition as a swap partition:

How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux

sudo mkswap /dev/sda5

Fdisk contains a variety of other commands, including expert commands you can access by running the x command �rst.
Check out fdisk’s man page with the man fdisk command for more detailed information.

JOIN THE DISCUSSION

Chris Ho�man is a technology writer and all-around computer geek. He’s as at
home using the Linux terminal as he is digging into the Windows registry.
Connect with him on Google+.

Linux users create partitions to organize their data in an efficient manner. As easy as they are created, Linux partitions can be deleted to reformat a storage device and regain storage space.

In this step-by-step tutorial, you will learn how to delete a partition on a Linux system.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

  • A system running Linux
  • A user account with sudo or root privileges
  • Access to a terminal window / command line (Activities > Search > Terminal)
  • The fdisk command-line utility

Delete a Partition in Linux

Deleting a partition in Linux requires selecting the disk containing the partition and using the fdisk command-line utility to delete it.

Follow the steps outlined in the sections below to delete partitions in Linux.

Note: The fdisk command-line utility is a text-based partition table manipulator. It is used for partitioning and repartitioning storage devices.

Step 1: List Partition Scheme

Before deleting a partition, run the following command to list the partition scheme.

In our case, the terminal prints out information about two disks: /dev/sda and /dev/sdb . Disk /dev/sda contains the operating system, therefore its partitions should not be deleted.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

On the /dev/sdb disk, there is a /dev/sdb1 partition which we are about to delete.

Note: The number 1 in /dev/sdb1 indicates the partition number. Make a note of the number of the partition you intend to delete.

Step 2: Select the Disk

Select the disk that contains the partition you intend to delete.

Common disk names on Linux include:

Step 3: Delete Partitions

Before deleting a partition, back up your data. All data is automatically deleted when a partition is deleted.

To delete partition, run the d command in the fdisk command-line utility.

The partition is automatically selected if there are no other partitions on the disk. If the disk contains multiple partitions, select a partition by typing its number.

The terminal prints out a message confirming that the partition is deleted.

Note: If you wish to delete multiple partitions, repeat this step as many times as necessary.

Step 4: Verify Partition Deletion

Reload the partition table to verify that the partition has been deleted. To do so, run the p command.

The terminal prints out the partition structure of the disk selected in Step 2.

Step 5: Save Changes and Quit

Run the w command to write and save changes made to the disk.

After following the instructions in this tutorial, you should have learned how to delete a partition in Linux.

If you want to learn more about partition manipulation, we recommend reading our tutorial on creating partitions in Linux or if you are running NTFS partitions, check out our article on how to mount NTFS partitions in Linux.

Partitioning a disk allows you to create separate sections within the disk inorder to manage your data more efficiently. For example, in Windows you have C, D or E drives. There are various uses of partitioning a disk like:
a) Allows to boot different OS from same disk
b) Allocate separate partition to different users
c) Creating separate area for OS virtual memory swapping
In this post we will cover how to create disk partitions in Linux using the fdisk utility.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Prerequisite

  1. root user access
  2. free disk

The process to create disk partitions

Step1: List the disks

Use the lsblk command to list the exiting disks along with partitions. An alternate command is fdisk -l.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

The output shows that two disks sdb and sdc are both un-partitioned whereas sda is partitioned into sda1 and sda2. Think of sda disk as your hard disk which is partitioned into C(sda1) and D(sda2) drive. All the devices are listed in /dev directory. So the path of these disks are /dev/sda, /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc and so on.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Note: If you do not have a free disk like /dev/sdb or /dev/sdc, add a new virtual disk from your Virtual Box or VMWare software. As an alternate, you can run the below commands to add a disk temporarily.

This will add a disk /dev/loop1 whose size is 5Gb. Keep in mind that on the next reboot, the disk and the created partition(s) will be lost.

Step2: Specify the disk to partition

As the root user run the fdisk command by specifying the disk name as an argument. I will use the /dev/sdc disk for partitioning.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Step3: Request a new partition

Press ‘n‘ to request for a new partition. On pressing “enter” key, the system will ask for partition type, either primary or extended. Press ‘p‘ for primary and ‘e‘ for extended partition. The default is primary. maximum 4 primary partitions can be created. If you intend to create more then create 3 primary partitions and 1 extended partition. Then this extended partition can be used as a container to create more logical partitions can be created.

Step4: Specify partition number, first sector and last sector

Next, assign a partition number. Then specify the size of partition. For size you need to tell two things: first sector and last sector. The best way is to choose the default value of First sector (manual specification may result in wastage of sectors if you are not aware about the details). Simple press “enter” key to choose the default starting sector. F theor Last sector you can either specify the sector or give the exact size. Its better that you specify the size in Mb or Gb as shown in the example below.

So, here I choose the size to be 1Gb and the partition is created.

Step5: Specify the partition type

The default partition type is “Linux” as shown in the previous figure. If you want to change it to something else then press the ‘t’ key. If you don’t know the type code then use the ‘L’ key to see a list of all the available types.

Step6: Save the Partition Table

Use the ‘w‘ command to save the partition table. It is must to do this otherwise the partition will not be created.

Step7: Initiate kernel re-read of partition table

Use the partprobe command to force a re-read of the partition table

Now, re-run the lsblk command and you will see the partition.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Creating File systems

A partition can not be used until a file system is applied over it. There are different file systems but the most popular ones are xfs and ext4. mkfs command can be used for the same

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Mounting file system

Finally, to access the partition we need to attach it to the directory structure. So, first create a mount point, which is nothing but a directory using the mkdir command.

There are two ways to mount: manually or persistently

Manually mounting the file system

Use the below command to manually mount the device or partition at the mount point

and start creating or accessing files as shown below.

However, on the next reboot, the file system will not be automatically mounted. For a persistent mount as an admin you need to make the entry in the /etc/fstab file

Persistently mounting the file system

To permanently mount a device at a mount point add an entry for that device in the /etc/fstab file. /etc/fstab is a white space-delimited file with six fields.

The first filed is the device name, second is the mount point, third is the file system type, fourth field applies default mount settings. The last two fields are the dump flag and the fsck order.

Caution:

A wrong entry in /etc/fstab file my render the system unbootable. Hence, use the

command. If the command returns no error this means everything is perfect.

fdisk command is a free and open source utility widely available on Linux Based Platforms to Manage Disk Partitions Table. It understand different partitions table like BSD, GPT, MBR, SUN and SGI. fdisk command can be used to create a new partition, delete a partition, change the partition ID, resize the partition, move a partition and so on.

One can create a maximum of four primary partition using fdisk command and n number of logical partitions based on available disk size. Partition number from 1 to 4 are reserved for Primary partitions and then logical partition starts from number 5. fdisk command creates partition of minimum 40 MB size and maximum of 2 TB size.

What is Block Device

A Block device in Linux is defined as a file which represents devices like Hard Disk, CD-ROMs from where data can be read in fixed size blocks.

What is Partition

A Block device are usually divided into one or more logical disks which are known as partitions. The information of these partitions are stored in a table Known as Partition Table.

Synopsis

fdisk [-uc] [-b sectorsize] [-C cyls] [-H heads] [-S sects] device

fdisk -l [-u] [device. ]

fdisk -s partition.

fdisk -v

fdisk -h

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Fdisk Command Examples to Manage Disk Partitions in Linux

Example 1: How to Check fdisk Command Version

To check fdisk command version you need to use -v option as shown below. Here current fdisk version is 2.23.2 .

Example 2: How to List All Disk Partitions in Linux

If you want to List all the disk partitions then you need to use -l option with fdisk command as shown below. Here we have two disks /dev/sda and /dev/sdb but partitions are created only on /dev/sda disk. We have two partitions /dev/sda1 and /dev/sda2 available on /dev/sda disk.

-l : List the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit. More on fdisk Man Page.

Example 3: How to Check total number of partitions in a Disk

If you want to check all the partitions of a Specific disk then you can also use -l option along with the disk name. In this example we are checking all the partition information of /dev/sdc disk using fdisk -l /dev/sdc command as shown below.

Example 4: How to Delete a Disk Partition in Linux

To delete a disk partition you need to use command d as shown below. In this example we are deleting partition /dev/sdc1 using d command and then writing the partition table changes using w command.

Example 5: How to Create a Disk Partition in Linux

To create a disk partition you need to use n command as shown below. In this example we are creating partition on /dev/sdc disk using fdisk /dev/sdc command. Then selecting n command to create a new partition and selecting p to create it as a primary partition type. Here we are using default sector value i.e first sector value as 2048 and last sector value as 16777215 which will create partition on entire 8 GB disk and then writing the changes to partition table using w command.

Example 6: How to Check the Size of Disk Partition in Linux

To check the size of disk partition you can use -s option with fdisk command as shown below. In this example we are checking the size of /dev/sdc1 partition using fdisk -s /dev/sdc1 command. Here you will see size in number of blocks. So the total size of /dev/sdc1 partition is 8387584 blocks.

-s : Print the size (in blocks) of each given partition. More on fdisk Man Page.

Example 7: How to Verify Disk Partition table in Linux

Another useful command that you can use is v command to verify the disk partition table in Linux. In this example we are verifying /dev/sdc disk partition using v command and then writing the changes to partition table using w command.

Example 8: How to Quit fdisk Command without saving any changes

To quit fdisk command utility without saving any changes you need to use q command as shown below. In this example we have exited the /dev/sdc disk changes without saving it by using q command.

Example 9: How to Save and Exit fdisk Utility

If you want to exit after saving partition table information then you need to use w command as shown below. This command will save all the partition table changes and then exit out from fdisk command.

Example 10: How to Change Disk Partition ID to “Linux LVM” type

If you want to change disk partition ID to Linux LVM type then you need to use hex code 8e after selecting the partition through t command as shown below. In this example we are changing the partition Id of /dev/sdc1 partition from 83 to 8e to convert the partition from normal disk to LVM type.

Example 11: How to Change Disk Partition ID to “Linux Swap” Type

For creating a swap partition you need to change the partition type to Linux swap type by using hex code 82 as shown below. In this example we are changing partition ID of /dev/sdc1 from normal partition to Linux swap type.

Example 12: How to Disable/Enable Boot Flag(*) of a Partition

If you want you can also disable/enable boot flag of a partition using fdisk command in Linux. As you can see from below output, partition /dev/sda1 is currently marked as boot partition.

To disable the boot flag from /dev/sda1 partition you need to use command a under fdisk utility and then select the partition to disable the boot flag as shown below.

After writing the disk partition table changes if you check the /dev/sda1 partition status again then you can notice that star(*) marked is removed now. This confirms boot flag is now disabled. You can follow the same procedure to enable it again.

Example 13: How to Correct the Partition Table Order

If you want to correct the partition table order then you need to use the extra functionality available by using x command and then use f command to correct the partition table order. Since in this example our disk partition table is already in order so it won’t do any changes here.

Example 14: How to Disable/Enable DOS Compatibility Mode

If you want to disable/enable DOS compatibility mode from a disk partition then you need to use c command as shown below. In this example we are changing the DOS Compatibility mode of partition /dev/sdc1 using c command.

Example 15: How to Check all the available options of fdisk command

To check all the available options of fdisk command you need to use m command as shown below. This command will list all the available actions that can be done on disk partition using fdisk command.

Example 16: How to check Man Page of fdisk command

Man Page of fdisk command can be checked using man fdisk command as shown below.

Sometimes we stuck in a situation where we just have access to the terminal and need to delete partition, or you have stepped down in Linux, and your logical mind pushes you to delete the partition using a command.

But you don’t know how to delete the partition using the terminal, not a big deal, and I’m here to rescue you just follow the instruction, and your motive will be accomplished.

In this article, we will use fdisk command-line based utility to delete the partition.

Table of Contents

Prerequisites

  • Privilege account (sudo users)
  • Terminal
  • fdisk (Already preinstalled in Linux)
  • A partition should exist (If you think you can delete unallocated partition, then I suppose you might be wrong)

Delete a Partition in Linux using fdisk

To Delete partition first, we need to list out the available partitions and select the appropriate disk. For that, we can use the fdisk command to list out and delete the selected partition.

If you don’t know what is fdisk read these short descriptions and move ahead to delete partitions.

In short fdisk is a command-line utility tool to manage disk it allow you to view, create, delete, change, resize, copy and move partitions on a hard drive.

Note:- This below step will format your USB drive, so it requests you to make a backup of your USB drive else you may lose your valuable data.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Step 3: Delete Partitions using fdisk

We are one step back to delete partition, from the above measure we confirmed we had selected correct Disk.

In this step we will delete partition If you have important data, please make sure to take a backup and proceed next.

To delete partition type d or del command in the fdisk command-line utility followed by partition number in case of multiple partitions.

In my case, multiple partitions are available to /dev/sda because of that, and I have to pass partition number manually.

If you are thinking How to get the partition number, check the above output of p command and note it down.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Step 4: Verify changes

From the above command, we are able to delete selected partitions, To make sure whether the partition is deleted pass the p command in the fdisk command-line utility.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

We can see the change earlier total of 10 partitions was available in /dev/sda now it’s 9, hold on our work is not completed one last command is required to type.

Step 5: Save and exit

This is the last step to delete partition, after that you will not be able to revert changes.

Inside the same terminal type w command to write changes once the changes apply you will get the exit from fdisk utility tool.

This is a demo of the above explanation you can a look at the below output screen.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Wrap-up

That’s all my friend to delete the partition using the fdisk command-line utility. In case you need some assistance from my end, feel free to comment Down.

If you want to share some feedback or any topic feel free to comment down.

A man with a tech effusive, who has explored some of the amazing technology stuff and exploring more, While moving towards, I had a chance to work on Android Development, Linux, AWS, DevOps with several Open source tools.
One of my life mottos “Always be lifelong Students.”

The fdisk command utility is useful for viewing and editing hard drive or SSD partitions on Linux and its distributions such as Ubuntu. It is one of the most powerful tools for managing hard drive partitions on Linux. There are other tools available to do hard drive partition on Linux, but fdisk is one of the most commonly used.

fdisk is a menu-driven command line utility, and new users will find this tool confusing and difficult to use. fdisk is not a simple tool and should be used with caution. You need root access or sudo permissions to make changes to storage partitions.

Today in this article I am giving you a tutorial on how to create a partition on Linux using the fdisk command.

You can perform the following operations with the fdisk command.

  • Create a new partition
  • Manage storage space
  • Relocate the space on old drives.
  • Move data to a new hard drive

How to List Partitions

Before making any changes to the drive, first look at the basic structure of the drive and its partitions. To view all of the partitions on the drive, run the following command in the Linux terminal.

Partitions are displayed by their device name, e.g. B. dev / sda, dev / sdc etc. as you can see in the screenshot above.

If you want to view the partition on the particular hard drive, you need to use ‘-l’ followed by the device name as shown in the following command.

$ sudo fdisk -l / developer / sda3

This command will display the output as shown in the screenshot below.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Create partition:

To create a partition on a specific drive, you need to run the fdisk command with the device name as shown in the following command.

$ sudo fdisk / developer / Loop1

Once you are on the device you want to create a partition on, type M and hit Enter.

You will see the list as shown in the screenshot below. This is the list of single letter commands you can use to perform specific actions with fdisk.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

To create a partition, you must use the N command. Both logical and primary partitions can be created, where I will denote the logical partition and P denotes the primary partition.

By default, the first free sector on the hard drive is selected to create a new partition. You must also specify the last sector of the partition in the same way. You can also set the size of the partition according to your needs.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Delete partition:

In order to delete the specific partition, you need to use the D command. Use the P command to make sure which partition you want to delete.

When you trigger the D command, it asks for the partition number you want to delete. Just type in that partition number and hit enter. This will delete the selected partition.

Here’s how you can use the fdisk command to create and delete the partition on Linux. fdisk is a very useful command line tool when used efficiently and correctly. Make sure you have the back of the partitions that you will be using the fdisk command on. Good day!

Fdisk is a partition table manipulator for Linux. Linux partitioning with fdisk is quick and simple. We can view, create, modify and delete partitions using fdisk from the Linux command line. In this post i will explain how to manage Linux partitioning with fdisk. I will view existing partitions on system, add a new hard disk, create new partitions, modify partitions system ID and delete partitions.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Linux partitioning

1. Viewing existing partitions with fdisk

To list the existing partitions on your hard disk we use “fdisk -l” command. “Fdisk -l” lists the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit. If no devices are given, those mentioned in /proc/partitions (if that exists) are used.

Let’s see an example:

We can see, that this system has one disk /dev/sda the size of 16.1 GB. There are two partitions created on this disk:

  • /dev/sda1

This is the first partition which is a bootable partition (this is the * at “Boot” column). This partition starts at cylinder 1 and ends at cylinder 64. It takes 512000 Blocks on disk and has the ID 83 which means it is a Linux partition (seen in the “System” column).

  • /dev/sda2

This is the second partition and it starts at 64 cylinder and ends at 1959. It takes 15215616 Blocks on disk and has the ID 8e which means it is a Linux LVM partition.

We see the error “Partition 1 does not end on cylinder boundary.” This is not a big deal. Drives have not used cylinder boundaries since hard drives exceeded 8GB and BIOS uses LBA or large block allocation. But all the partition tools thru Linux & Win installs still followed cylinders so partition tools never changed the error messages.

We also see two more disks called /dev/mapper/vg_foo-LogVol01 and /dev/mapper/vg_foo-LogVol00 but these disks are actually mapped and located on /dev/sda disk (mind the “mapper” in the name). This is an additional layer on top of our /dev/sda disk. We can create this kind of mapped disk using LVM (Logical Volume Management). Since this is not the topic of this post we won’t lose time on this… I am preparing a separate post on Logical Volume Management on CentOS.

We will now add another hard disk to our system. Let’s check “fdisk -l” output again:

We can see that there is a new /dev/sdb hard disk the size of 1073MB without any partitions on it. In order to use the disk and create a filesystem we need to create a partition on it.

2. Creating a new partition with fdisk

To start linux partitioning for a desired hard drive we must enter a command “fdisk /dev/harddrive“.

Here is an example:

I think help is self explanatory. Since we want to create a new partition, we need to enter “n”.

We will be creating a primary partition this is why we entered “p”. One hard drive can only hold 4 primary partitions – to increase the number of partitions over 4, the 4th partition should be made an extended partition. If we continue…

Partition number is the /dev/sdbX number. Since this is the first partition on this hard drive, the partition number is 1 (/dev/sdb1). The first partition will start at the first cylinder (just press “Enter” and first cylinder is the default value) and the last cylinder may be entered as the number of cylinder or the size of partition. We have entered “+500M” so our partition will be 500MB large (mind the “+” in front of the partition size!!). You can also enter the size in Kilobytes (K) and Gigabytes (G).

No changes have yet been done to the disk and partitions until we write changes out. We can see what we did with the “p” key:

We can see a new partition on /dev/sdb hard drive. Now i want to create another partition on the same disk but with different partition system ID. Let’s try and do that:

OK. So we can now see two new partitions on /dev/sdb. We can see the start and end cylinder and the partition system ID. For cylinders (size) we used the default values by entering “Enter“. Both partitions ID is 83 which means it is a Linux partition. Let’s change the partitions system ID:

As we can see, we must enter “t” for partitionss system ID change. Next we must enter the number of the partition which ID we want to change – in our case this is partition number 2 (/dev/sdb2). Next we list the codes of partition’s system ID with “L” and choose the one we like. We have changed our /dev/sdb2 system ID to “Linux swap“. Let’s check if we successfully changed the ID:

We are now satisfied with the partitioning of the /dev/sdb hard drive and can write changes out by entering “w”. DO NOT FORGET to write changes out. If you hit “q” to quit, all changes are lost!

If we check for partitions, we see that our changes have been written out and our partitions exist. To start using them you still need to create a filesystem. This is not the topic of this post – i will try to cover it in a post about filesystem creationg on Linux.

3. Delete partition with fdisk

To start linux partitioning for a desired hard drive we must enter a command “fdisk /dev/harddrive“.

We enter “p” to print out the existing partitions on /dev/sdb hard drive. We can hit “m” for a quick list of fdisk help:

Again, help is self explanatory. To delete a partition we need to enter “d”.

After entering “d” we need to choose the partition number we want to delete. We need to delete partitions in the order they were created! We chose to delete partition number 2 (/dev/sdb2). We can now check partitions again:

We can see, that partition 2 (/dev/sdb2) no longer exists – it was deleted. Now we can delete the first partition too, if we choose to..

After making changes to with fdisk linux partitioning we MUST ALWAYS CONFIRM changes with “w” – write out. DO NOT FORGET TO WRITE OUT!

Last check to see, if changes were successfully applied with “fdisk -l“:

This was a quick guide on how to use fdisk for linux partitioning on CentOS 6. You can do alot more with fdisk regarding the partitions. Fdisk help can be very useful so do not hesitate to read it!

..and do not forget to always write your changes to partition changes with “w”!

The first thing that we need to know is there is no C drive or E drive in Linux. We will see something like /dev/sda, /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc, … etc. instead. The dev is short for device. The sd was short for Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) mass-storage driver.

  • /dev/sda – The first SCSI disk SCSI ID address-wise.
  • /dev/sdb – The second SCSI disk address-wise and so on.
  • /dev/sda1 – The first partition of disk sda
  • /dev/sdb1- The first partition of disk sdb

Understanding Disk Partition Tables

A partition table shows the partitions of a Hard Drive or any other storage device. There are two standards for the partition table:

  • Master Boot Record (MBR) – MBR also know as MS-DOS, is what us might call the original standard. MBR is still the most widely used partition table, it comes with two major limitations.
  • GUID Partition Table (GPT) – GPT came later. While MBR is still in use, the limitations are what led to the development of GPT. GPT overcomes the two limitations of MBR. We can have multiple primary partitions, and the drive sizes can exceed 2 TB.

The limitation of MBR:

  1. It does not allow us to create more than four main partitions. Those partitions are called primary partitions.
  2. Disk partitions may not exceed 2 TB.

Understanding Disk Partitions and Partition Numbering

To install an operating system on a hard drive, we have to divide it into distinct storage units. We call those storage units partitions. Under MBR – which is the default on virtually all Linux distributions, there are three different types of partitions – Primary, Extended, and Logical.

  • Primary – Holds the operating system files. Only four primary partitions can be created.
  • Extended – Special type of partition in which more than the four primary partitions can be created.
  • Logical – Partition that has been created inside of an extended partition.

With MBR any partition that is not explicitly created as an extended or logical partition, is a primary partition.

Any unallocated space is shown as Free. While it may be free, we cannot use it in that state. As far as the system is concerned that free space does not exist until it is partitioned.

Names without a trailing digit refer to the whole disk, while names with a trailing digit refer to a partition of that whole disk. By convention, SCSI disks have a maximum of 16 minor numbers mapped to a single disk.

Thus, for each whole disk, there is a maximum of 15 partitions per disk because one minor number is used to describe the entire disk (for example /dev/sda), and the other 15 minor numbers are used to refer to partitions for that disk (for example /dev/sda1, /dev/sda2, etc).

Understanding Disk Extended Partition

By tagging a partition as an extended partition, it is possible to create many more partitions under the extended partition. Those partitions are called logical partitions, and there is effectively no limit to the number of logical partitions that us can create. This means us can have three primary partitions and one extended partition and then create numerous partitions from there.

Check disk Partition with fdisk command in Linux

The best way to check disk partition in Linux is using fdisk command. It is a text-based utility for viewing and manipulating disk partitions. Typing fdisk -l at the command prompt will list all of the partitions on your Linux system.

You can also use the fdisk command to create, delete, or resize partitions. For more information on using fdisk, consult the man page by typing: man fdisk at the command prompt.

parted -l and fdisk -l can both list disk partitions on Linux.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linuxHow to use fdisk to manage partitions on linuxHow to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

  • Model – Model of the storage device.
  • Disk – Name and size of the disk.
  • Sector size – Logical and physical size of the memory. Not to be confused with available disk space.
  • Partition Table – Partition table type (msdos, gpt, aix, amiga, bsd, dvh, mac, pc98, sun, and loop).
  • Disk Flags – Partitions with information on size, type, file system, and flags.

Check disk Partitions with ls command in Linux

Here we can see that there are 3 partitions on disk sda.

  • # ls -l /dev/sda*
  • brw-rw—- 1 root disk 8, 0 May 24 08:09 /dev/sda
  • brw-rw—- 1 root disk 8, 1 May 24 08:09 /dev/sda1
  • brw-rw—- 1 root disk 8, 10 May 24 08:09 /dev/sda2
  • brw-rw—- 1 root disk 8, 11 May 24 08:09 /dev/sda3

Check disk partitions with cat /proc/partitions in Linux

/proc/partitions file also has much important info about disk and disk Partitions.

  • major minor # blocks name
  • 8 0 17774160 sda
  • 8 1 1052226 sda1
  • 8 10 208845 sda2
  • 8 11 10490445 sda3

What is the difference between a partition and a filesystem?

A partition is a section of a disk that is allocated for use by an operating system. A filesystem is a method for organizing and storing files on a partition.

What is the purpose of partitions?

Partitions are used to separate different types of data. For example, you might have a partition for your operating system and another partition for your personal files. Partitions can help to improve performance and stability by isolating different types of files. For example, you can use a separate partition for your operating system files and another partition for your personal data files. This way, if one partition becomes corrupted, the other partition will not be affected.

What is the difference between primary and extended partitions?

Primary partitions are the first four partitions on a disk. Extended partitions are any partitions after the fourth partition. You can create up to four primary partitions or three primary partitions and one extended partition.

How do I delete a partition in Linux?

You can use the fdisk command to delete partitions in Linux. First, you need to find the device name of your disk. You can do this by running the lsblk command. Next, you need to run the fdisk command with the device name as an argument. Then, you will need to enter d to delete a partition. Finally, you will need to enter w to write the changes to the disk.

1. View All Disk Partitions:The first thing to do before doing any thing with the disks and partition is to view basic details about all available partition in the system. The below command is used to list the partitions on your system and see their /dev names. For example /dev/sda, /dev/sdb or /dev/sdc.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

2. View Partition on a Specific Disk: Below command is used to view all disk partitions on device /dev/sda.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

3. View all fdisk Commands: To see all the command which are available under fdisk command you can use /dev/sda partition with fdisk command.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Note: This will prompt for a command. Type m for seeing all the operations which can perform on /dev/sda. After pressing m you will get:

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

4. Create a Hard Disk Partition: For this go inside the hard drive partition that is the /dev/sda partition, and use the following command:

Now you have to type n to create new partition and then type p for making a primary partition and e for making an extended or logical partition depending on the type of partition to make.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Run w command to write the changes and reboot your system.

5. Delete a Hard Disk Partition: To delete a partition for the hard disk and free up space occupied by that partition for example /dev/sdb. Go to the command menu using following:

and then type d to go to the delete partition menu. It will prompt the partition number you want to delete(type the number).

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Run w command to write the changes and reboot the system.

fdisk یک ابزار خط فرمان است که بهترین ابزار برای پارتیشن بندی یک هارد به حساب می آید.وقتیکه یک توزیع لینوکسی را توسط واسط گرافیکی نصب میکنید در اصل با آن واسط کاربری دارید از fdisk استفاده میکنید فرض کنید یک هارد جدید به سیستم اضافه کرده اید با اجرای دستور زیر میتوانید فهرست تمامی پارتیشن های هارد اول را مشاهده کنید

برای توضیحات تکمیلی در ارتباط با نام گذاری دیسک ها پیشنهاد میکنم مطلب آشنایی با نام گذاری دیسک ها در لینوکس را مطالعه کنید.
برای شروع به پارتیشن بندی ابتدا دستور fdisk را به همراه نام هارد دیسک جدید بصورت زیر اجرا کنید:

وقتی دستور فوق را اجرا کنید یک اعلان مانند زیر نشان داده میشود که بیان میکند برای نمایش help باید کلید M را وارد کنید

کلید M را بزنید تا فهرستی از تمام دستورهای fdisk را مشاهده نمایید. در زیر مهمترین آنها فهرست شده اند:

با اجرای دستور fdisk -l جدول پارتیشن های موجود روی سیستم نشان داده میشود وقتی با دستور N یک پارتیشن جدید ایجاد میکنید و یا با دستور D یک پارتیشن را حذف میکنید تا زمانیکه W را اجرا نکنید هیچ تغییری ذخیره نخواهد شد و برای خروج بدون ذخیره تغییرات باید Q را بزنید. هر نوع سیستم فایل مانند ext3 یک عدد منحصر به فرد را دارد بطور مثال پارتیشن نوع ext3 عدد ۸۳ و پارتیشن swap عدد ۸۲ را دارد. برای مشاهده این اعداد باید دستور L را اجرا کنید.

فرق گزینه L که بصورت fdik -l بکار رفته با دستور L ی که جلوی اعلان Command m for help استفاده کردید این است که L اولی برای نمایش جدول پارتیشن ها و L دومی برای نمایش اعداد معادل هر کدام از نوع سیستم های فایل ها استفاده شده است.

اگر دستور P برای چاپ کردن جدول پارتیشن ها را اجرا کنید خروجیش همانند زیر خواهد بود

یعنی که هیچ پارتیشنی وجود ندارد.

ایجاد پارتیشن

برای ایجاد یک پارتیشن جدید باید ۶ گام را دنبال کنیم.

گام اول

جلوی اعلان Command (m for help) دستور o را بزنید تا جدول پارتیشن ساخته شود

گام دوم

حالا دستور n را بزنید تا اعلان command action ظاهر شود.

گام سوم

از بین گزینه های e و p باید p را نوشته و Enter بزنید.

گام چهارم

عدد ۱ را برای ایجاد شدن اولین پارتیشن primary انتخاب کنید.

گام پنجم

باید شروع sector را انتخاب کنید در داخل پرانتز عددی – default است که میتوانید همین عدد را وارد کنید.

گام ششم

باید انتهای سکتور را انتخاب کنید در داخل پرانتز عددی – default است که میتوانید همین عدد را انتخاب کنید یا اینکه سایز دلخواهتان را بر حسب K یا مگابایت M انتخاب کنید( دقت کنید که حروف K و M می بایست بزرگ نوشته شوند) برای ساخت پارتیشن های دیگر مراحل دوم تا ششم را تکرار کنید برای ساخت پارتیشن extended در جلوی اعلان command action باید دستور e را وارد کنید و برای اعمال تغییرات روی هارد باید دستور w را وارد کنید. در این مرحله هارد شما آماده است و فقط باید پارتیشن های خود را فرمت کنید برای اینکار باید از دستور mkfs استفاده کنید در صفحه خودش به طور کامل آموزش لازم ارائه شده است

حذف یک پارتیشن

برای حذف یک پارتیشن جلوی اعلان Command (m for help) باید از دستور d استفاده کنیم.
وقتی جلوی اعلان دستور d را میزنید اعلان partition number ظاهر میشود که درون پرانتز تعداد پارتیشن ها را نشان میدهد اگر ۴ پارتیشن داشته باشیم تعداد ۴ پارتیشن وجود دارد و برای پاک کردن پارتیشن اول باید جلوی اعلان partition number عدد یک را بزنید و یا برای پاک کردن پارتیشن چهارم عدد ۴ را بزنید. دقت کنید اگر دستور w را وارد نکنید هیچ تغییری در جدول پارتیشن ها نوشته نمیشود.
اگر میخواهید پیش از پاک کردن پارتیشنی بدانید که کدام عدد متعلق به چه پارتیشنی است میتوانید جلوی اعلان Command (m for help) دستور p برای چاپ جدول پارتیشن استفاده کنید.

Creating partitions via the command line interface is simple and quick, also having the kernel acknowledge the partition table has been modified and having the partition scheme take effect without having to reboot your workstation/server and without having to use the parted utility.

The first step to this guide is to see what hard drives are available and what hard drive you would like to partition. If you have multiple hard drives in your machine, fdisk will report them to you as shown in Figure 1. There are two hard drives shown in Figure 1 “sda” and “sdb”.

The fdisk command with the -l qualifier (“fdisk -l“) will display the current partition tables along with the hard drives that are attached to your workstation/server as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: fdisk -l output.

Once you have determined which hard drive you want to partition you can issue the fdisk command followed by the hard drive (“fdisk /dev/sda“), in this article we will use the first hard drive (sda).

Figure 2: Partitioning the first hard drive (sda).

Once fdisk has been executed your command prompt will change to “Command (m for help):” and you are ready to examine and partition your hard drive. The commands that are supported by fdisk can be displayed by pressing the “m” character followed by the return key. The commands that we will be using are “p” for printing the partition table, “n” for creating a new partition and “w” for saving the changes and exiting.

Displaying the current partition table

The first step before we start to partition our hard drive is to get a sense of what disk space we have available and what the current partition table looks like. The command we will use from fdisk is the “p” character which will print the current partition table as show in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Current partition table.

The output shown in Figure 3 shows that we have 1809 cylinders available (9729 ? 7920 = 1809) and with this we can use the calculation (1809 * 16065 * 512 = 14879531520 Bytes) which is roughly about 14 gigabytes. (The 16065 and 512 were taken from the “Units =” statement and may differ on your system, so you may be require to substitute them if necessary).

Creating a new partition

The next step is to create our new partition. For our example, we will create a partition of type “Linux” with the partition size of one gigabyte. The command that we will use to create our new partition is the “n” character, we will then be asked to select what cylinder to start from (I recommend sticking with the default) and the size of the partition as shown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: Creating a new partition with the size of one gigabyte.

Once the partition has been created, using the “p” character we can display our new partition table which will show the newly created partition, as shown in Figure 5.

Figure 5: Newly created partition (sda6).

Writing the new partitions to disk

Now that the partition has been successfully created you can save the changes by issuing the “w” character which will write the new partition table to the hard disk as shown in Figure 6.

Activating the newly created partition

Once the new partition table has been written to the hard disk it is possible to have the kernel read the new partition table without the need of rebooting. The first step is to create a mount point for the new partition, in our example we will use “/media/newpart” and also use the command “partprobe” to have the kernel re-read the partition table, as shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7: Creation of a new mount point and a re-read of the partition table.

Now that a new mount point has been created and the partition table has been re-read by the kernel you can now format the partition and place a file system of your choice on it. (ext2, ext3, ResierFS etc) In our example we have chosen the ResierFS file system as shown in Figure 8.

Figure 8: Formatting the newly created partition.

Once the partition has been formatted with the file system of your choice you can mount and use your newly created partition, Figure 9 shows the newly created partition being mounted.

Figure 9: Mounting the newly created partition.

Final thoughts

Once you have mounted your newly created and formatted partition you can store your files on the partition without having any problems, you may also add your new partition to the “/etc/fstab” file so that the partition will be mounted after every reboot.

The latest version of this article, and future updates, will be located at the Computer Underground.

  1. /usr/src/linux/Documentation/ide.txt
  2. man fdisk
  3. man lilo
  4. man lilo.conf
  5. man sfdisk # for scripting fdisk
  6. man hdparm # side issue — you might find this useful for other things.

Introduction to Fdisk

The purpose of this article is to explain how we use fdisk manually to initialize IDE hard drives instead of using Disk Druid that comes with Red Hat 6.0. Why do you want to do this? Well, it can be one way of many ways to solve the problem where you need to have your bootable files for Linux before the 1024th cylinder. There are many ways to solve this problem, but for this article, we are only going to concentrate on redoing the number of heads and cylinders for your IDE hard drive. For further information about why you can do this, read the file “/usr/src/linux/Documentation/ide.txt” on your RedHat 6.0 computer (assuming you have the source code for the kernel installed).

Fdisk is a tool that allows you to change the partitioning of your hard disks. For example, you can make DOS, Linux, FreeBSD, and many other types of partitions.

Disk Druid is a tool, used by Red Hat 6.0, to set up partitions and to initialize hard drives when you install Red Hat 6.0. The problem is, I never found out how to use Disk Druid to initialize a second hard drive after RedHat 6.0 is installed.

There are also extra functions in fdisk. Some of them can be used to initialize your new hard drive for use with linux, which requires you to have 1024 or less cylinders. For most of the people these functions will never be needed, but let’s say that you have your computer with Linux on it and decide to add an extra hard disk. The easiest and fastest way to initialize it is to use fdisk.

Having 1024 cylinders or less is not an issue before you start using very large hard disks. The brief reason is, you can remap the heads and cylinders using LBA to make it so you reduce the number of cylinders and maximize the number of heads. In general up to 10G bytes there shouldn’t be any problem, but with the fairly low prices of large hard disks today, more and more people go past the 10G bytes size and this is when having 1024 or less sectors becomes an issue. Also, there are other simple ways to get around the 1024 cylinder problem without remapping your hard drive (like using a partition for /boot) but we won’t get into that here.

How to use Fdisk to initialize your new hard disk

There are two steps you need to do. First, find out the number of heads, cylinders, and sectors your hard drive has in the LBA setting in your BIOS. Then, use fdisk to you remap the hard drive.

First, turn off your computer, install the second hard drive, turn your computer on, and before it boots your operating system, get into your computers BIOS. Usually pressing the delete key, the F1 key, or perhaps some other key, gets you into the BIOS of your computer before it gets ready to start booting your operating system. It is recommended that you get professional help when your install another hard drive.

Then, in your BIOS you should be able to find the LBA settings for the hard drive. Sometimes if you have a feature in your BIOS which lets you auto-detect your IDE devices, it will let you know what the LBA settings for your hard drives should be. Get the LBA settings for the cylinders for your new hard drive. The LBA settings for the sectors and heads should be: heads=255, sectors=63.

Second, you want to start fdisk with one of the following commands after booting your Linux operating system: After you choose which command is appropriate, you will have the following prompt: Pressing ‘m’ will result in the following help menu: At this point you have to enter ‘x’, which will lead you to the extra functionality menu: Pressing ‘m’ again will show you the options in this menu: Notice that you have ‘c’ for changing the number of cylinders, and ‘h’ for changing the number of heads. These are the options we are going to use. The idea is to maximize the number of cylinders and minimize the number of heads. In order to do this, enter ‘c’ at the Expert menu and you will get the following prompt: At this prompt you should enter the number that the LBA shows for cylinders in the BIOS. After you enter the number of cylinders, you will be back at the expert menu. Press ‘h’ and this prompt will ask you for the number of heads: You can leave the number of heads at 64, since this is the lowest you can go. After you enter 64, you are back at the Expert prompt. At this point you need to save the changes by entering ‘w’. After that the fdisk will exit and you are done.

Actually, before typing “w”, I might enter “r” or return you to the main menu, and then enter “p” just to see what you have done. If the number of heads is 255 and the sectors are 63, and the number of cylinders is correct, then you are done and you can enter “w”.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linuxLes Chatfield (CC BY 2.0)

How much do you need to know about disks to successfully manage a Linux system? What commands do what? How do you make good decisions about partitioning? What kind of troubleshooting tools are available? What kind of problems might you run into? This article covers a lot of territory – from looking into the basics of a Linux file systems to sampling some very useful commands.

Disk technology

In the beginning days of Unix and later Linux, disks were physically large, but very small in terms of storage capacity. A 300 megabyte disk in the mid-90’s was the size of a shoebox. Today, you can get multi-terrabyte disks that are the size of a slice of toast.

Traditionally, files resided within file systems that resided in disk partitions that were themselves simply slices of disks. This organization still dominates today, though servers in large data centers often take on an entirely different structure.

This simplistic view still works for many systems, but these days there are lot of complexities that make disk management harder in some ways and easier in others. A file system might be virtual – no longer residing on a single disk and more complex to manage, but far easier to resize as needed. In fact, the entire system could be virtual. And what we might manage as if it were a single disk could actually be some portion of a very large disk array.

Disk management

Sysadmins generally have to deal with many issues when it comes to managing disks. These include:

  • Partitioning disks
  • Creating file systems
  • Mounting file systems
  • Sharing file systems
  • Monitoring free space within file systems
  • Backing up (and sometimes restoring) file systems

The reasons to partition a disk include:

  • protecting some file systems from running out of space (e.g., you may want the OS partition to be separated from home directories or applications to keep it from being affected if users’ files begin to take up far an excessive amount of disk space)
  • improving performance
  • allocating swap space
  • facilitating maintenance and backups (e.g., you might be able to unmount /apps if it’s not part of / and you might want to back up /home more frequently than /usr)
  • more efficient (and targeted) fsck
  • maintaining (particularly on test systems) multiple operating systems
  • reserving enough disk space for file system expansion
  • sharing select file systems with other systems

Partitioning commands

For most Linux servers, partitioning is done before the servers are deployed. On the other hand, you might add disks at some later time or hold back some significant amount of free disk space for future use.

To make changes or verify partitions, enter a command such as fdisk /dev/sda to start fdisk interactively and then type m to see a list of the things that you can do with the fdisk command.

As you can see, the fdisk command provides a lot of functionality. The partitions that you set up may look something like this configuration in which four partitions have been set up on a single disk – /dev/sda.

Examining disk space and disk partitions

There are a number of excellent commands for examining disk partitions. The df command is one of the most commonly used commands for reporting on disk space usage. With the -h option, the df command displays the measurements in the most “human-friendly” format and that is, in fact, what the “h” is meant to imply. As you can see in the example below, the measurements are displayed in kilobytes, megabytes or gigabytes depending on the sizes rather than all using the same scale.

The pydf command (think “python df” as it’s really a python script) also provides a very useful disk usage display showing mount points and cute little illustrations for how full each partition is.

The parted command displays partition information in a different format:

The lsblk (list block devices) command illustrates the relationship between disks and their partitions graphically and also supplies the major and minor device numbers and mount points.

The fdisk command reports more details on disk partitions and uses very different numbers. You can also use fdisk to create or delete partitions, list unpartitioned space, change a partition type, or verify the partition table.

The sfdisk command is similar to fdisk, but makes some partition manipulation activities easier to perform.

NOTE: A mebibyte (MiB) = 2 20 bytes or 1,048,576 bytes.

The cfdisk command can also be used to display or manipulate disk partitions.

Monitoring disk performance

The iostat command can display statistics that illustrate how disks are performing, including how heavily they are being used. It also displays important measurements that show how busy the CPU is and how much of its resources are used for types of work. The system described below is idle more then 95% of the time. More importantly for our focus on disks, the %iowait (CPU waiting on disk IO) is very low. This would not be true if the disk were unusually busy and disk IO were a bottleneck.

Probably one of the most informative commands for looking at disk health is smartctl (part of smartmontools). While the command generates a lot of output, it provides valuable measurements that might help you pinpoint disk problems, particularly once you get used to working with its extensive output.

In this article, we will look at how to extend/increase a standard partition online (no downtime) without losing data and we will use the root partition (/) as an example.

How To Increase / Extend The Root (/) Partition In Linux Using The fdisk Utility

NOTE 1: Take a backup of your system if you can. If it a VM on Azure or any other cloud services provider, take the snapshot of the OS disk

NOTE 2: The reason for the backup is to roll back if anything goes wrong. If your filesystem is healthy, it is very rare for an issue to occur. These steps are the steps I usually take and have used in a production environment before and was successful. So, no worries.

NOTE 3: When you use the “d” option to delete the partition and use the “n” option afterward, what you are doing is actually creating a partition table and remains in memory and not deleting the whole partition, so no worries.

Step By Step Process

1. verify the root (/) filesystem size

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

2. verify the root(/) filesystem type

You can see that the root filesystem type is “xfs”

3. Initialize /dev/sda using the fdisk utility

enter the letter “p” to print all the partitions on sda

enter the letter “d”to delete a partition

enter the partition number 3 or press enter to leave it at default which is 3

NOW, ENTER THE LETTER “n” TO RECREATE THE PARTITION TO YOUR DESIRED SIZE

enter the letter “p” to make it a primary partition, yours might be secondary depending on the number of partitions you have. A disk can have only four partitions as primary partitions

enter the partition number which is 3 or press enter to leave at default which is 3

press the enter key again to get to the last sector

enter the new partition size or press the enter key to use the whole available space on sda. In this scenario, we are using the whole available space

enter “no” not to remove the signature

enter the letter “w” to write or save the changes and press enter

4. verify the partition increment

5. resize the filesystem,

If the filesystem is xfs, use the command,

If you get the error above, use the command,

If the filesystem is ext (2,3,4), use “resize2fs” instead

6. you may also run the command below to make immediate changes to the kernel

7. verify the filesystem new size

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

You can see that the size has increased.

Tutorial Video On How To Extend Root Partition Using fdisk In Linux

Your feedback is welcomed. If you love others, you will share with others.

• Create a new partition using fdisk. Set the partition’s system id as “82” (Linux Swap / Solaris).

Note: You should be familiar with the Linux fdisk command to learn this lesson. Click the following link to learn how to use the Linux fdisk command.

Command (m for help): n
Command action
e extended
p primary partition (1-4)
p
Partition number (1-4): 1
First cylinder (1-783, default 1):
Using default value 1
Last cylinder or +size or +sizeM or +sizeK (1-783, default 783): +512M

Command (m for help): t
Selected partition 1
Hex code (type L to list codes): 82
Changed system type of partition 1 to 82 (Linux swap / Solaris)

Command (m for help): w
The partition table has been altered!

Calling ioctl() to re-read partition table.
Syncing disks.

• Create the swap filesystem on the raw partition using “mkswap” command.

]# mkswap /dev/sdd1
Setting up swapspace version 1, size = 518156 kB

• Enable swaping on the swap partition created now.

• Update /etc/fstab to make use the new swap partition whenever the system is rebooted.

LABEL=/ / ext3 defaults 1 1
LABEL=/boot /boot ext3 defaults 1 2
devpts /dev/pts devpts gid=5,mode=620 0 0
tmpfs /dev/shm tmpfs defaults 0 0
proc /proc proc defaults 0 0
sysfs /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
LABEL=SWAP-sda3 swap swap defaults 0 0
# Beginning of the block added by the VMware software
.host:/ /mnt/hgfs vmhgfs defaults,ttl=5 0 0
# End of the block added by the VMware software
/dev/sdd1 swap swap defaults 0 0

Note: To disable swaping on a partition, use “swapoff” command.

Enable file based swaping

We can create file based swap space (similar to Windows pagefile), if there is not available partition, but space is available in already existing partitions.

• To enable file based swap space, you must create a file using “dd” command.

]# dd if=/dev/zero of=/root/swap bs=1024 count=524288
524288+0 records in
524288+0 records out
536870912 bytes (537 MB) copied, 4.98139 seconds, 108 MB/s

• Overlay a swap file system on the binary file created using the above command.

]# mkswap /root/swap
Setting up swapspace version 1, size = 536866 kB

• Enable swaping on the swap file created now by using “swapon” command.

• Update /etc/fstab to make sure that the swap file is available to the OS after a reboot.

LABEL=/ / ext3 defaults 1 1
LABEL=/boot /boot ext3 defaults 1 2
devpts /dev/pts devpts gid=5,mode=620 0 0
tmpfs /dev/shm tmpfs defaults 0 0
proc /proc proc defaults 0 0
sysfs /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
LABEL=SWAP-sda3 swap swap defaults 0 0
# Beginning of the block added by the VMware software
.host:/ /mnt/hgfs vmhgfs defaults,ttl=5 0 0
# End of the block added by the VMware software
/dev/sdd1 swap swap defaults 0 0
/root/swap swap swap defaults 0 0

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You can find your iPad on a map if this feature is turned on

  • University of Texas at Arlington
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • iPad
  • Macs

What to Know

  • Go to Settings > your name > Find My, and then toggle the Find My iPad switch to turn the feature on and off.
  • Toggle on Send Last Location to send Apple the iPad's location data so you can find the device even if it's off or the battery dies.
  • Track a lost iPad: Go to iCloud.com, select Find iPhone > All Devices, and choose your iPad. Select Play Sound, Lost Mode, or Erase iPad.

This article explains how to turn the Find My iPad feature on or off. Turning the feature on allows you to track the device. You’ll need to turn the feature off before selling your iPad or giving it away. Instructions cover iPadOS 14 through iOS 9.

How to Turn Find My iPad On and Off

Access your iPad's settings to enable or disable Find My iPad.

Open the Settings app.

In the Settings pane, tap your name.

Tap iCloud in iOS 12 and earlier. (In newer iPadOS versions, select Find My instead and jump to Step 5.)

In the Apps Using iCloud section, tap Find My iPad.

Turn on the Find My iPad toggle switch to enable the feature or turn off the toggle switch to disable it.

For Find My iPad to work, Location Services must be turned on. In the Settings app, go to the Privacy area and confirm Location Services is turned on or turn it on.

Turn on the Send Last Location toggle switch to send Apple the iPad's location information when the battery is low, so you can find it even if its battery ran down and it is turned off.

When this feature is turned off and the iPad is powered down or not connected to the internet, you won't be able to see a location.

How to Use Find My iPad

A benefit to Find My iPad is that you don't need an iPad to use it. Here's how to use it to track a missing tablet:

Open a web browser and go to iCloud.com.

Tap Find iPhone.

Use Find iPhone to locate any device set up on Find My, including desktop and laptop computers, Apple Watch, iPhone, and iPad.

In the default Find My iPad screen, click the All Devices drop-down arrow and choose a specific device.

When using an iPad to locate another iOS device, hold the tablet in landscape mode so that the list appears on the side of the screen.

The device screen zeroes in on the location of that device and offers these options:

  • Play Sound: Plays a sound on the iPad to locate the tablet when you're sure it's somewhere within hearing range.
  • Lost Mode: Locks the iPad so that nobody else can access it. You can also type a message to appear on the iPad screen. Use this option if you left the iPad and want to protect it from being used. This also tells anyone that finds it your phone number, email address, home address, or other contact information so that they can return it to you.
  • Erase iPad: Erase the iPad when you know you will not get it back and want to clear it for security reasons. Another reason to erase an iPad is to reset it without plugging it into a computer if it keeps freezing up.

You can manage every device on your Apple ID from this site.

What Is Find My iPad?

The Find My iPad option on the iPad is one of the most important features on the tablet. It can locate an iPad using GPS or locate an iPad that’s hiding under a couch or beneath a pillow. To locate a missing device, use an iPhone or a computer to play a sound on the iPad. Find My iPad has other features, such as Lost Mode, and you can completely erase the iPad remotely if someone steals it.

If you plan to sell your iPad or give it to a friend, turn off the Find My iPad feature and then reset the iPad to its factory default settings. Also, turn off Find My iPad before you have any repairs done to it.

Для включения iPad используйте верхнюю кнопку. Для выключения iPad можно использовать верхнюю кнопку (вместе с любой из кнопок громкости на некоторых моделях) или приложение «Настройки» .

Если iPad работает некорректно, попробуйте его перезагрузить. Для этого сначала выключите, а затем включите iPad. Если проблема сохранилась после выключения и включения устройства, попробуйте принудительно перезагрузить его.

Выключение и включение iPad (модели с Face ID или Touch ID в верхней кнопке)

Если на Вашем iPad нет кнопки «Домой», выполните следующее.

Включение iPad. Нажмите и удерживайте верхнюю кнопку до появления логотипа Apple.

Выключение iPad. Одновременно нажмите и удерживайте верхнюю кнопку и любую из кнопок управления громкостью, затем перетяните бегунок.

Выключение и включение iPad (модели с кнопкой «Домой»)

Включение iPad. Нажмите и удерживайте верхнюю кнопку до появления логотипа Apple.

Выключение iPad. Нажмите и удерживайте верхнюю кнопку, затем перетяните бегунок.

Либо, чтобы выключить любую из моделей, откройте «Настройки» > «Основные» > «Выключить», затем перетяните бегунок.

Find My iPad is a reliable option for iPad users as it helps to locate your device if it’s stolen or missing. However, if you want to perform different things, such as factory reset, you have to disable this option. But the situation becomes complicated when you don’t remember your Apple ID and password. Don’t worry as we have got your back. If you want to turn off Find My iPad without a password, read this blog for a quick solution.

Part 1: Can I Turn Off Find My iPad without Password

To turn off Find My iPad, you are asked to enter the Apple ID and password. But in case you have forgotten your credentials, you can use different third-party applications to reset your device details or remove your Apple account. But some tools can be a bit risky. Therefore, we have mentioned a tool for you that will remove Apple ID without causing any issues. Don’t forget to read about this software in the next section.

Part 2: How to Turn Off Find My iPad without Password

Turning off Find My iPad without a password is no longer a difficult task if you have a reliable tool with you. You can easily remove your Apple account to turn off the “Find My”.

But the question is, which program will help to achieve this goal? You can use Tenorshare 4uKey for this purpose as it is easy to use and doesn’t require any technical skills. It will help you erase your Apple ID without any complicated steps.

Follow the guide below for more details.

Download and install Tenorshare 4uKey on your computer. Then run 4uKey. Click on “Unlock Apple ID”.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Connect your device to the computer and then choose “Start Remove” to continue.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

If your device is running iOS 11.4 or later, you need to make sure that you’ve enabled the screen lock and two-factor authentication.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

And you need to download the firmware package. When it is downloaded successfully, 4uKey will start removing the Apple ID.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

When the Apple ID has been successfully removed, you will find the Find My is also turned off.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Note: If you’re running iOS 11.4 and below, you need to reset your device first. You just need to follow our guide to complete the process.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Part 3: FAQs about Find My iPad

Find My iPad is not a new feature, but some users don’t know what it is and how you can locate it. If you don’t have any idea about this function, don’t panic because after readings these answers, you will also be able to find a solution on how to turn off Find My iPad without an iCloud password.

Q1. Where is Find My iPad on My iPad?

  • Go to your iPad settings. On the sidebar, you will find your profile, click it and select the iCloud option.
  • Now scroll down a bit and search for the “Apps Using iCloud” section.

You will find the “Find My iPad” option there.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Q2. How Do I Find the Last Location of My iPad?

In case you have lost your iPad, you can use the Find My iPad option to locate your device. To do that, we read the steps below.

  • Sign in to iCloud using your ID and password. You can also use the iCloud.com/find link on the web. In case you are using iPhone or iPad, you can directly open the Find My iPhone option.
  • Now, select the device to view the location. It will probably show you the location on the map.

In case the device is near your area, you will hear a sound. In this way, you will easily find your device. However, to complete this procedure, make sure that the Find My [device] option is enabled.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Q3. Can I Find My iPad If It Has Been Reset?

If your device is stolen and your data has been reset, then it’s not possible to locate your device using the Find My iPad option. The reason is that the eraser command will remove all your details, including your phone’s settings, which will not allow any tool to track the location.

Q4. How Do I Restore My iPad without Turning off Find My iPad?

Here are the steps that you can follow to restore MY iPad if you don’t want to turn off Find My iPad option.

  • First, you have to connect your iPad with your PC.
  • Now sign in to iCloud using your Apple ID.
  • After that click, the “All Devices” option and choose the offline device. After that, you have to select “Remove from Account.”
  • In the last step, select the “Delete” button to remove the account.

If this method didn’t work for you, then you can try a third-party application to recover iPad settings.

Conclusion

Are you worried about how to turn off Find My on an iPad without a password? This guide is definitely a quick fix for all your Find My iPad issues. Besides, you don’t have to remember the password to turn off this option. However, we recommend you try a third-party application, such as 4ukey, so you don’t have to worry about any technical errors. It’s a simple application and works amazingly for all devices.

Find My iPad/iPhone is an essential feature of an iPad that allows the users to lock, track and remotely access their iOS device whenever it is stolen or lost. This feature must always be turned on in order to offer your iPad an extra level of security. On the other hand, it may sometimes be necessary to turn off this feature, especially when you want to reset your device. Turning off Find My iPad is easy when you remember the password. But what if you don’t know? No worries!! This guide has solutions to your concern of “how do I turn off Find My iPad without password”.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Read on to learn three effective ways to disable Find My iPad without password.

Part 1: How to Turn Off Find My iPad without iCloud Password on iOS 7/8/9?

If you are an iOS 7 user and want to know the workable ways on how to remove Find My iPad activation lock without previous owner or iCloud password, follow the below steps:

  1. Step 1: Turn on your iPad and go to “Settings.”
  2. Step 2: Scroll down and then click on “iCloud.”
  3. Step 3: Click on “Delete Account” and tap to disable “Find My iPad.” Now, a new window will pop up that will ask you to enter your iCloud password. Here, you need to press and hold the “Power” button and shut down the iPad.
  4. Step 4: Turn your iPad on and go to “Settings”> “iCloud Settings.”

Step 5: Click on “Delete Account” and disable “Find My iPad.”

How to turn find my ipad on or off

That’s how to turn off Find My iPad without iCloud password on iPad with iOS 7/8/9. Continue reading to disable Find My iPad on other iOS versions.

Part 2: How to Turn Off Find My iPad without Password on iOS 10, iOS 11, and iOS 12?

So, how do I turn off Find My iPad if you’re using iOS 10-12? Follow the below steps:

  1. Step 1: Go to “Settings” on iPad and click on “iCloud.”
  2. Step 2: After clicking on “iCloud,” you will be asked to enter the password. Simply enter any random number and hit the “Done” button.
  3. Step 3: After entering a random number in the password field, you will be notified that the password is incorrect. Click on the “OK” button.
  4. Step 4: Tap on the “Cancel” button at the top left corner of the screen, and then the iCloud section will reappear.

Step 5: Now, click on “Account” and tap on the “Delete” button. After this, you will see the main iCloud section once again, and the Find My iPhone feature will automatically be turned off now.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

It was this hassle-free and straightforward to solve the issue of how to turn off Find My iPhone on iPad without password on iOS 10-12.

Part 3: How to Turn Off Find My iPad without Password on All iOS versions?

If your concern is how to remove Find My iPad activation lock without previous owner, then look no further from UltFone Activation Unlocker. On top of all, disabling Find My iPad is hassle-free and quick with this tool. It supports a wide variety of devices that involves iOS 9 to iOS 15 on all iPhone/iPad models

Whether you could not activate your iPad without a password or you are encountering an activation error, the UltFone Activation Unlocker will help you fix the issue “can’t turn off Find My iPad to restore” with no technical skills required.

Here’s how to turn off Find My iPad without Apple ID password on iOS 14 using UltFone Activation Unlocker:

Step 1 Launch the UltFone Activation Unlocker and select “Turn off Find My iPhone” from the main interface. Now, connect your iPad to a computer.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 2 Once the iPad gets recognized, follow the onscreen instructions to start the process.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 3 After that, disable the “Find My iPad” option. For this, you need to:

  • Wait for a while and copy the serial number to verify FMI Status.
  • Wait for a while again to remove your Apple ID.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

That’s how to turn off Find My iPad from the computer.

Part 4: Find My iPhone on iPad FAQs

1. What Is Find My iPhone on iPad?

Find My iPhone is an inbuilt feature of Apple devices that allows an iDevice user to track their lost Apple device. So, in case you lost your iPad, you can easily use the Find My iPhone/iPad app on another device to check the last known location of your iPad. This feature of the Apple device makes it easy for the user to monitor their iPad even remotely. In simple words, Find My iPhone will help you to locate your lost or stolen iPad.

2. What happens when you turn off Find My iPhone?

Find My iPhone comes with a handful of capabilities that are excellent to have in any device. If you turn off or disable Find My iPhone on your iPad, you’ll no longer be able to avail the benefits it offers. It can moreover make your iPad even more challenging to recover.

Conclusion

So, how do you turn off Find My iPad without a password? We hope that this guide has helped you disable Find My iPad without a password on your device. If you need a quick solution and your iPad is running an iOS 13 or later, we highly recommend using UltFone Activation Unlocker. It offers a highy success method to turn off Find My iPad without password or when your iPad disabled Find My iPad without password.

Some apps require that you turn on Location Services

  • University of Texas at Arlington
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • iPad
  • Macs

Much like a smartphone, the iPad’s location-tracking sensors are fairly accurate at pinpointing your location. An iPad that can connect to a cellular network also includes an Assisted-GPS chip to help determine the location, but even without GPS, it works almost as well using Wi-Fi triangulation.

However, while Location Services can come in handy in many situations, you should disable it if you’re concerned about apps knowing your location. Another reason to disable Location Services on the iPad is to save some battery power.

These instructions apply to iPadOS 14, iPadOS 13, and iOS 12 through iOS 8.

How to Turn Off Location Services for All Apps

Location services are probably turned on for your iPad, so here's how to shut off location tracking for all your apps at once:

Open the iPad’s Settings by tapping Settings.

Scroll down and tap the Privacy menu item.

Tap Location Services at the top of the screen.

Tap the toggle switch next to Location Services to off/white to disable the feature.

When asked if you're sure, tap Turn Off.

With Location Services off, apps won’t be able to see your location, and you won’t be able to use services like Find My Friends.

How to Temporarily Disable Location Services

You can quickly turn Location Services off and on through the Control Center on your iPad.

To do so, swipe down from the upper-right corner of the screen and tap the airplane icon to turn on Airplane Mode. While this method will shut down Location Services for all your apps in just a moment or two, it also stops your phone from taking or making calls and connecting to networks via cellular or ​Wi-Fi.

How to Manage Location Services for One App

While it is easier to disable Location Services for all the apps at once, you can also toggle the setting off for single apps so that they can't identify your location.

Every app that uses location services asks your permission first, but even if you allowed it before, you can still disallow it.

Go to Settings > Privacy > Location Services on your iPad.

Scroll down through the list of applications and tap whichever one you want to disable (or enable) Location Services for.

You have two or three options to define when Location Services can use your data. Tap the one you want to use.

  • Never means the app can't use your location at all.
  • While Using the App means the app can see and use your location when the app is open.
  • Always means that the app can read your location whether the app is open or not.

The Always choice isn't always available, but you should avoid using it on apps you don't trust.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

The Find My option on your iPhone, iPad, and Mac is incredibly useful for locating your device when it gets misplaced, lost, or stolen. It lets you view your device’s location, remotely lock it, or erase the data, and more. Therefore it’s highly recommended that you always use Find My on your Apple devices. However, in some instances, you might want to disable it. So, let’s learn more about how to turn off Find My on iPhone, iPad, and Mac.

Why Do I Need to Turn Off Find My?

There are a few different reasons why you might need to disable Find My on an iPhone, iPad, or Mac. For instance, it is recommended that you do this before selling your device or passing it on to a new owner.

You might want to deactivate Find My iPhone or Find My Mac because it can allow someone to track you. This is because anyone who knows your Apple ID log on details can use the Find My feature to locate the devices that you’re logged into.

What Happens When You Disable Find My?

If you disable Find My on your iOS or Mac, it will become nearly impossible to trace or recover your device if it is lost or stolen. Find My helps you locate your phone by viewing it on a map, playing a sound on it, remotely wiping the data, locking it, etc. It also includes Activation Lock that prevents others from using your device.

So, turning off the Find My feature will eliminate these options, and it won’t be easy to find your device. Of course, if you’re selling or giving away your iPhone, iPad, or Mac, you should disable the Find My feature. Along with turning off this feature, you can also add or remove devices from Find My.

How to Turn Off Find My iPhone on your iPhone

  1. Open the Settings app.
  2. Tap on your name and then tap on Find My.
  3. Tap on Find My iPhone ( On an iPad, tap “Find My iPad”).How to turn find my ipad on or off
  4. Toggle OFF Find My Phone.
  5. Enter your Apple ID password and tap on Turn Off.How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to Turn Off Find My on Mac

  1. Open System Preferences.
  2. Click on Apple ID.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  3. Click on Checkbox for Find My Mac.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  4. Enter your Apple ID password.How to turn find my ipad on or off
    How to turn find my ipad on or off

Summing Up

We hope this guide has equipped you to disable Find My on iOS and macOS. You can also remotely remove Find My iPhone using iCloud.

You may also like to read these:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

iGeeksBlog has affiliate and sponsored partnerships. We may earn commissions on purchases made using our links. However, this doesn’t affect the recommendations our writers make. You can read more about our review and editorial process here.

If you are an iPhone/iPad user then it is pretty much sure that you should know about Find My iPhone feature. This is one of the best feature in iDevice that helps users keep their devices safe and unauthorized access can’t happen.

But there are so many users who manage to turn on the feature but don’t know how to turn off Find My iPhone. Today, I will be showing you how do you turn off Find My iPhone using different methods.

What is Find My iPhone?

Apple’s Find My iPhone is a tool used to help you track down your iPhone/iPad/iPod no matter what happens to it. Whether you’ve lost it at a corner of your bedroom or it’s been stolen right out of your hands, the Find My iPhone can be very useful.

Why Need to Turn Off Find My iPhone?

Sometimes, you may need to disable Find My iPhone because:

  • You iPhone battery dies so fast when this app tracks where your device is.
  • Find my iPhone disables you to restore your iPhone when you really want do that because you forgot the passcode.
  • You need to delete data on your iPhone and gave it to your friend and relative but Find My iPhone prevents you from wiping.

Way 1: How to Turn Off Find My iPhone Using iCloud

If you don’t wish to keep “Find My iPhone” feature turned-on on your device then you can easily turn it off. All you need to know is the Apple ID and password that is associated with the device and then follow the given process accordingly. You will be able to turn off Find My iPhone within few minutes. Make sure to have an internet connection on your computer.

Steps on how to turn off Find my iPhone from Computer by iCloud:

    First type www.iCloud.com on the URL bar of any web browser.

Next enter the same Apple ID and Password that has been used in the iPhone.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Then select “All Devices” option that you can see on the top of the screen and also select the iPhone which you want to turn off “Find My iPhone” feature.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You will be thrown to new windows screen where you will see the selected device with few features beneath it.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Now click on “Name of the iPhone” which you can see on the top of the screen. This time the drop down will came with “X” just beside the device name. Simply, click on “X’ icon.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After that you will see a confirmation messages on the screen. Click on “Remove” option.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You have successfully turned off Find My iPhone from your device.

Way 2: How to Turn Off Find My iPhone from Settings?

If you have the physical access on the iPhone then you can turn off Find My iPhone/iPad in few minutes. This method also requires the Apple ID and Password that is linked to the iPhone whose Find My iPhone feature you are going to turn off.

Steps to turn off Find My iPad/iPhone on devices:

  • First go to Settings of your iPhone/iPad.
  • Next tap on your name (which you can see on the top of the screen) and click on iCloud option from the list.

Then scroll down the screen until you don’t see Find My iPhone.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Way 3: How to Turn Off Find my iPhone without Password

Somtimes, you might forget password to turn off Find My iPhone. If you no longer remember the password of the Apple ID that is linked to your device then this method will definitely help you. There are many users who ask, how to disable Find My iPhone without Apple ID or password. Here, we’ll walk you through an ideal way – Tenorshare 4uKey, a great tool which can help you disable Find My iPhone without password free-hassle.

Tenorshare 4uKey widely supports devices which runs almost all iOS versions. The most important thing you need to keep in mind that your iPhone wil be restored to factory settings.

First of all, download and install Tenorshare 4uKey on your Windows/Mac. After that, you’ll see an interface saying “Unlock Apple ID”. Click it.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Then you need to connect your iPhone to computer with usb cable. Then make your iPhone trust the computer.

After your phone is recognized by 4uKey, there are 2 situations to turn off find my iPhone: 1. for iOS 11.4 and earlier; 2. for iOS 11.4 and later, click Start Remove to go on.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Set screen lock and Two-Factor Authentication. If you have already set them up, download the firmware package.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After that, 4uKey willl start to remove Apple ID from your device. The process will take no less than 2 minutes.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Now, your iPhone has been successfully removed form Find My/Apple ID. You can restore and activate your iPhone while Unlock with Passcode.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Conclusion

I hope you have learned how to turn off Find My iPhone using different methods. All the methods are easy to use and work perfectly fine, just use the one that is convenient for you. Also remember to use Tenorshare 4uKey. Comment below, if you have any query.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Activation Lock is a form of theft protection designed to prevent people from taking, wiping, and restoring your iPhone or iPad without your express permission. It does this by using your Apple ID. Before an iPhone can be activated with a new account, it needs to be removed from yours. If you’re selling or giving away your iPhone or iPad yourself, you’ll need to sign out of iCloud first. If you’re buying or receiving an iPhone or iPad, you’ll need to make sure it’s not locked to someone else’s Apple ID first. If anything goes wrong and you can’t get through Activation Lock… well, read on!

Update: There have been some reports of iPhone 7 and iPhone 6s showing Activation Lock that can’t be removed. If that happens with you, you’ll need to contact Apple to have it taken care of.

How to turn off Find my iPhone on iPhone and iPad

Activation Lock is tied to the Find my iPhone (or iPad) app on iOS. If you have your iPhone or iPad in your hands, this is the fast way to turn off Activation Lock.

Note: You can also reset your iPhone to erase all content and settings. Do that, and you’ll be asked to remove Find my iPhone — and Activation Lock — as part of the process.

  1. Launch Settings from the Home screen.
  2. Tap your Apple ID banner.
  3. Tap on iCloud.
  4. Tap Find My iPhone.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  5. Switch Find My iPhone to Off.
  6. Enter your Apple ID password to confirm.
  7. Tap Turn Off.How to turn find my ipad on or off

You’ll then need to sign out of iCloud on the iPhone or iPad if you plan on selling it.

How to turn off Activation Lock with Apple

If all else fails, Activation Lock is turned on, and you can’t turn it off, you still have an option:

You can either call AppleCare or go to your local Apple Store and present proof of ownership. From there, Apple will confirm that it is indeed your iPhone or iPad and, if satisfied, remove the Activation Lock for you.

How to erase an iPhone, iPad, or Mac with the Find My iPhone app

You can no longer simply remotely turn off Find My iPhone. From a separate device or the Find My iPhone app, the only way to remove an iPhone or iPad from Find My iPhone is by erasing it. Here’s how to do it using the Find My iPhone app.

  1. Launch the Find My iPhone app from any iOS device. If you don’t already have it you can get it for free in the App Store – Download Now
  2. Sign in with your iCloud account, if prompted.
  3. Tap on the device you’d like to erase.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  4. Tap on Actions at the bottom of the screen.
  5. Tap Erase on the bottom righthand corner of the screen.
  6. Tap Erase to erase all contents and settings from the device.How to turn find my ipad on or off

Boom. Your iPhone or iPad has now been essentially reset to factory settings. This is a good tool if you’ve completely lost your device and are totally sure you’re never getting it back. It’s also a good idea to do if you’re selling or giving away your device. The only issue is that, if you did not sign out of iCloud first, then Activation Lock still may be active on the phone.

How to erase an iPhone, iPad, or Mac with iCloud.com

  1. Click Find My iPhone on the iCloud website, from any web browser on your Mac or Windows PC.
  2. Sign in to your iCloud account when prompted.
  3. If you’re not immediately taken to Find My iPhone, click on Find My iPhone from the Home menu.
  4. Click on All Devices at the top of the Find My iPhone screen.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  5. Click the device you’d like to erase.
  6. Click Erase (device) on the upper right of the screen, beneath the picture of your device.
  7. Click Erase.How to turn find my ipad on or off

The device will now be wiped of its content and settings. Make sure you’re sure that you’re sure you want to erase your iPhone, iPad, or Mac, because when it says “Erase,” it means “Erase.” All of it. If you plan on selling your device, note that erasing it via Find My iPhone may not necessarily disable Activation Lock. You’ll need to sign out of iCloud on the device to fully disable Activation Lock.

i want to restore my ipad but it wants to turn off the find my ipad.I went to icloud on my device but it does not take my apple id password as correct but when i want to sign in app store it says it is correct. Same password same account but it takes it as incorrect. What should i do?

Posted on Dec 25, 2014 1:26 AM

All replies

Loading page content

Page content loaded

User level: Community Specialist

Hello there, kramermichalis.

To turn off Find My iPad, there are a few options available to you. The following Knowledge Base article offers a few solutions you can try:

Remove an iOS device or Mac by turning off Find My iPhone

Remove a device from Find My iPhone by turning off Find My iPhone on the device.

  • On an iOS device: Go to Settings > iCloud, then tap to turn off Find My [ device ].

  • On a Mac: Choose Apple menu > System Preferences, click iCloud, then deselect Find My Mac.

Remove an iOS device or Mac on which you can’t turn off Find My iPhone

If you can’t turn off Find My iPhone on the device, turn off the device so it goes offline, then remove it from Find My iPhone on iCloud.com.

  1. Turn off the device you want to remove.

  2. Sign in to icloud.com/#find on another computer with your Apple ID (the one you use with iCloud).

    If you’re using another iCloud app, click the app’s name at the top of the iCloud.com window, then click Find My iPhone.

  3. Click All Devices, select the offline device, then click Remove from Account. If you don’t see Remove from Account, click All Devices again, then click the Delete button next to the device.

    If the device comes online again, it will reappear in Find My iPhone. If your device reappears, turn off Find My iPhone on the device (follow the instructions above for removing a device by turning off Find My iPhone), or if it’s an iOS device and you no longer have it, follow the instructions below for removing an iOS device you no longer have.

It’s no secret that “Find My iPhone” is one of the most useful features of an iOS device. It lets users remotely locate their iPhone/iPad in case it goes missing or gets stolen. You can even virtually wipe your entire data if you’re unable to locate the device. The truth is “Find My iPhone” has helped many users find their lost devices and save hundreds of dollars. However, there are many situations when you’ll need to turn-off this feature. For instance, if you’re planning to sell your device to someone else, it’ll be important to disable “Find My iPhone” first. Similarly, if you’re leaving your device at the service center, you’ll be asked to disable the feature as well. So, in this article, we are going to discuss how to turn off Find My iPhone from the computer so that you can disable the feature without any hassle.

Part 1: What’s the Difference between Find My iPhone and Activation Lock?

Many iOS users get confused between Find My iPhone and Activation Lock. It’s worth noting that these two are slightly different from each other. “Find My iPhone” is a feature that’s designed to help users locate their stolen/lost iDevices. However, “Activation Lock” is an iOS feature that restricts unauthorized people from accessing your device (when it gets stolen or lost). Basically, when your iPhone or iPad goes missing, the ‘activation lock’ will automatically get enabled if “Find My iPhone” is turned on. So, when you want to sell your device to someone else or leave it at the service, it’ll be crucial to disable “Find My iPhone” so that the activation lock doesn’t get activated.

Part 2: How to Turn off Find My iPhone from Computer on iCloud.com [For Both Windows and Mac Computer]

The easiest way to turn off “Find My iPhone” from the computer is to sign into your iCloud account. Whether you’re using Windows or Mac, you can easily log into your iCloud account and disable “Find My iPhone” with one click.

Follow these steps to turn off Find My iPhone from a PC using iCloud.com.

    1.Open the web browser on your PC and go to iCloud.com. Sign in with your iCloud credentials to get started.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

That’s it; “Find My iPhone” will be disabled on the selected devices and you’ll be able to sell it to someone else easily.

Part 3: How to Turn off Find My iPhone on Mac Computer

Alternatively, you can also use your Macbook to directly disable “Find My iPhone”. This method will be helpful for users who have configured “Find My iPhone” for their Macbook as well. Like an iPhone or iPad, it’ll be crucial to disable the feature before you give away the Macbook to someone else.

Let us walk you through the step-by-step procedure to turn off “Find My iPhone” on your mac OS.

  1. 1.On your Macbook, go to System Preferences and select your Apple ID.
  2. 2.Then, uncheck the Find My Mac option.
  3. 3.Enter your Apple ID password and click Continue to complete the process.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

So, that’s how to turn off “Find My iPhone” from your Mac computer.

Part 4: How to Turn off Find My iPhone from Computer without Password

Now, whether you use a Windows system or a Macbook, you’ll need your Apple ID credentials to turn off Find My iPhone. But, there are many situations when the users don’t know the password and can’t disable the feature using any of the above-mentioned methods. If that’s the case, we recommend using UltFone Activation Unlocker to turn off “Find My iPhone”. It is a professional Activation Unlocker that’s primarily tailored to help iOS users bypass the activation lock on their iPhone. However, it also had a dedicated “Turn Off Find My iPhone” feature that’ll allow you to disable Find My iPhone without using the password.

Some of the key features of UltFone – Activation Unlocker include:

  • Remove activation lock from an iPhone/iPad/IPod Touch
  • Turn off “Find My iPhone”, even if you don’t know the Apple ID password
  • Supports all iOS versions (even the latest iOS 14)

So, if you’ve also forgotten the password of your Apple ID, here’s how to directly turn off “Find My iPhone” using UltFone – Activation Unlocker.

    Step 1 Install and launch UltFone – Activation Unlocker on your PC and click Turn Off Find My iPhone.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

So, that’s how to turn off “Find My iPhone” from a computer.

Bonus Tips: Turn off Find My iPhone on Phone with Password

Another way to turn off “Find My iPhone” is to directly use your iDevice itself. If you have your iPhone near you, you won’t have to sign into iCloud at all. Simply follow these instructions to disable the feature instantly.

  1. 1.On your iPhone/iPad, go to Settings and tap your name at the top of the screen.
  2. 2.Navigate to iCloud>Find My iPhone.
  3. 3.Then toggle the Find My iPhone switch off to disable the feature. You’ll be asked to enter your iCloud credentials. Enter your Apple ID & Password and then press Turn Off to complete the process.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Sum up

It doesn’t matter if you want to sell your iPhone to a friend or leave it at the service center for a while, it’ll be imperative to turn off “Find My iPhone” beforehand. When it comes to disabling the feature, you can utilize any of the above-mentioned solutions to get the job done. But, if you’ve forgotten the Apple ID password, it would be better to use a professional tool such as UltFone Activation Unlocker. It’ll allow you to turn off Find My iPhone from a computer without the password and remove the Apple ID at the same time.

Are you among those seeking the best alternative on how to remove find my iPad activation lock without previous owner? You need to read the entire part of this article. Each section contains some great solution you need to easily remove activation lock on your device.

Part 1: Can You Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock without Previous Owner?

You can remove iPad activation without the need for previous owner intervention. However, you will need to learn how to remove find my iPad activation lock without the previous owner in the USA. That’s what this post covers. Check other parts of this article to gain insights on how to remove your iPad activation lock.

Part 2: How to Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock without Previous Owner-Using 4MeKey

Tenorshare 4MeKey is a great software Tenorshare develops for iOS device users. This software was created to help people bypass iCloud activation lock on their device. It offers people access to a locked device without any need for an Apple ID or password!

More importantly, the software can guard your Apple device against the illegal usage of your phone. Once you unlock your device with the software, you can easily log in to your Apple device with a new Apple ID through App Store or iTunes.

This software standout for its ability to help users :

  • unlock iCloud without Apple ID/Password
  • remove previous iCloud activation lock
  • create new Apple login credentials

If you’re someone who desires to know how to remove find my iPhone activation lock on ipad without the previous owner, then follow the guide below :

A Video Tutorial: How to Remove iCloud Activation Lock

Download Tenorshare 4Mekey. This is the essential step you must take to unlock your iOS device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After you’ve downloaded and install the software, the next action is to jailbreak your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Immediately after the jailbreak is completed, you can start to remove the iCloud activation feature on your device. To do so, click on the start remove button and confirm the device info.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Wait for few minutes for the process to be completed.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Part 3: How to Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock without Previous Owner-DNS Bypass

If you chose to learn another way on how to remove find my iPad mini 4 activation lock without previous owner, then you may consider DNS bypass tool. The DNS bypass tool is an online tool that makes people watch video, browse websites, play games, chats with friends, listen music and radio on their iCloud Locked device. It helps people change their device DNS to unlock the activation lock on their device.

When you use it, you will be able to manually change the DNS address from your manual WIFI settings. Also, this tool offer you the chance of enjoying almost all the features and apps on your iOS device.

To use the tool for your iCloud activation unlock purpose, kindly follow the procedures below :

  • On your device, choose your LANGUAGE and COUNTRY from the menu.
  • Click “Proceed” to enter the Wi-Fi settings page. If asked to connect to Wi-Fi, look for the “I” symbol closed to the Wi-Fi tab.
  • Now, disconnect the Wi-Fi network, go to “Connection Settings” and click “Forget this Network”.

Now, click the “I” and enter a DNS server IP address to bypass the iCloud activation lock. You can choose from the list below according to your location:

  • USA: 104.154.51.7
  • South America: 35.199.88.219
  • Europe: 104.155.28.90
  • Asia: 104.155.220.58
  • Australia and Oceania: 35.189.47.23
  • Other continents: 78.100.17.60

The disadvantage of using this software include :

  • No guarantee that the service will unlock your device.
  • Failure to access all the features of your iPhone after unlocking your device.
  • Compatibilty issue as it doesn’t work for all versions of iOS especially the recent ones.

Part 4: How to Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock without Previous Owner-Online Service

You will be needing online unlock services to accomplish this goal. This service is often provided by companies that send your cell unlock code via email.Company like AppleiPhoneUnlock is worthy to mention in this scenario.

Appleiphoneunlock.uk has several reviews that indicate the quality of their service delivery to customers. The company offers a 100% Money Back guarantee to dissatisfied customers. You can chat their customer support for more information regarding their service.

Part 5: How to Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock with Previous Owner?

You can remove activation lock with the help of previous owner by following the steps below :

  • Visit the iCloud official site and enter the Apple ID. Or the owner does that on his device.
  • Tap on the Find my iPhone web app and launch it.
  • Click the All Devices button at the menu bar.
  • You or the person should select the devices needed to be deleted.
  • Select Remove from Account.
  • This method works dor people that erased their own devices.

Final Words

How to remove find my ipad activation lock without previous owner for free is not hard to achieve. More importantly, when you use 4mekey, you can easily achieve the goal. People using the software testifies to its uniqueness and ability to remove all blockages on iOS devices.

The Find My app helps you quickly locate a lost Apple device or keep tabs on friends and family, but there are times when you need to disable it, revoke access for specific devices, or stop sharing your location.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

With Apple’s Find My app on iPhone, iPad, and Mac, you can track the location of a lost phone, find missing luggage with an AirTag, or keep tabs on close friends and family members (with permission). We recommend you keep it on for those reasons, but there are times when you’ll need to shut it off.

Perhaps you’re selling your device and need to disconnect it from your Apple ID before wiping it. Maybe you just want to purge your device of the services (and people) who can track your location. Whatever the reason, you can shut down the Find My app in a few easy steps.

Turn Off Find My Services

If you need to quickly shut everything down, including location and device tracking, head to Settings > [your name] > Find My > Find My iPhone. Tap the switch next to Find My iPhone, then enter your Apple ID password to disable the service. For iPad users, the instructions are the same but the options will say Find My iPad instead.

You should notice two other options on this screen. Find My network, which will allow your device to be tracked even when it’s offline. Send Last Location will automatically send your location when the battery is low. If you don’t want to turn everything off, you can instead turn one or both of these options off to minimize when your location is tracked.

Remove Individual Devices

There are several ways to remove a specific device from the Find My app. On mobile, open Settings and tap your name. Scroll down to view the different devices, select the one you wish to remove, then select Remove from Account to disconnect it from your Apple ID. You can also remove devices from the Find My app under the Devices tab. Tap a device and select Remove This Device from the pop-up menu to disconnect it from your account.

Another way to do this is from the iCloud website, where you select Find iPhone, click your name in the right-hand corner and choose Account Settings. Select the device from the My Devices section and click Remove.

Mac users who have Find My set up can go to System Preferences > Apple ID and click Options next to Find My Mac. You can then turn off Find My Mac and Find My network.

How to turn find my ipad on or off Nicole Campbell

If you purchased a second-hand iPad and you find that the Activation lock is enabled on the iPad, you will not able to access or use any of the apps and features of the iPad. In most cases, the best solution is just to contact the previous owner and ask them to remove the iCloud Activation lock.

If this is not an option for you, the following solutions will help you remove Activation Lock from the iPad without contacting the previous owner. Let’s begin by defining exactly what activation lock is.

What is Activation Lock?

Activation Lock is a security measure introduced by Apple to discourage the theft of devices. It is often automatically enabled when you enable the “Find my” feature on your iPhone, iPad, iPod Touch, Apple Watch, AirPods, and Macs with the T2 security chip.

When the Activation lock is enabled on the iPad, no one will be able to set up the iPad without the iCloud password. In this way, if the iPad is stolen, the thief will be unable to use the iPad. When they try to set up the iPad, they will be asked to enter the Apple ID details of the connected account. Apple will not show the full email address of the connected account, but the iPad owner will get an automated email saying Activation Lock is still enabled.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

If the previous owner of the iPad you purchased didn’t give you their password and you are not able to contact them, the following are some of the options you have:

About 3rd-Party Online Activation Lock Removal Services

There are a lot of iCloud Activation removal tools that you could use online. These tools typically require that you provide the iPad’s IMEI number and pay a small fee for the service.

But you should be very cautious when using these tools as many of them are scams, only out to get the $30 and may not be able to unlock the iPad at all. Many will even claim the service is just $30, only for them to contact you a few days later asking for more money. They will do this a few times, before sending you an email saying it is impossible to unlock the iPad with a refund in the form of a voucher for their service.

Even if an online iCloud Activation tool has wonderful reviews, treat it with suspicion, and only use it if you are certain that it can help you.

The Tool that Truly Works

The best tool to use to remove iCloud Activation from your device when you can’t reach the previous owner is iToolab UnlockGo. This tool is easy to use and highly effective, allowing you to unlock the iPad and get access to the iPad in a matter of minutes.

But before, we take a look at how you can use UnlockGo to remove iCloud activation, let’s first of all stake a look at some of its most useful features. They include:

  • You can use it to very easily remove the iCloud Activation Lock without the password.
  • You can log into the iTunes store with a new Apple ID, and enjoy all functions except for calls, iCloud, and cellular, once the iCloud lock is unlocked. .
  • It is useful when you want to remove the iPad’s passcode whether the iPad’s passcode is a 4-digit/6-digit passcode or Face ID and Touch ID.
  • It is very easy to use, allowing you to unlock the iPad in a matter of minutes.

To use this program to remove the Activation lock from your iPad, download and install the program onto your computer, and then follow these simple steps:

📍 The “Find My” is a very useful feature designed to help you locate your Apple devices. Previously known as “Find my iPhone”, it was renamed with the release of iOS 13, since it now works with your iPad, AirPod, Apple Watch, and MacBook.

You can use “Find My iPhone” from computer or any other Apple device, simply log in with your Apple ID to iCloud and you will be able to find all of your Apple products on a map. Devices that have their “Find My iPhone” turned ON and are linked to your Apple ID will show up as a green dot, devices that are currently offline will show a grey dot for the last known location. Tap on the name of each device to play a sound, put your device into lost mode, or erase your device.
Pretty neat, isn’t it? So how does this work?

If your device got misplaced, forgotten, or, god forbid, stolen, log in to your iCloud account and click “Find My” tab. You will see a screen that looks like this:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

To see your device on the map, click “Lost mode”. If you do not have a passcode set up, you will be asked to come up with one.
DO NOT LOSE this passcode, you will need it to turn off the “Lost mode” on the device. You will also be prompted to include your contact phone number and a message that would appear on the lost phone:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

This is how your device will look like on the map:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Here is a very useful User guide by Apple that would guide you through the whole process.

As useful as it sounds, there are times when you need to have “Find My iPhone” disabled:

🔹 To reset or restore your device, to bring it to out-of-the-box condition.

🔹 When bringing it for service to Apple store technicians.

🔹 Before you sell it ot give it away.

The reason behind turning off “Find My iPhone” tool is a feature called Activation Lock. Its purpose is to prevent a potential thief from reseting the stolen device to factory settings and being able to use it. The phone will not accept another Apple ID, except for the old one. Activation Lock is enabled automatically when you turn on “Find My iPhone”.

Before restoring a backup or selling your device to someone, you’ll need to disable Activation Lock by turning off Find My iPhone.

There are two ways to turn off Find My iPhone:

📱 From your device:

💻 From your computer

How to Turn OFF Find My iPhone

📎 iOS 13, 14 and 15

On your iPhone, iPad, or iPod Touch, go to Settings > tap on Your Name.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Click on “Find My”, then click on “Find my iPhone”.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Disable “Find My” by sliding the switch to the left.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Once prompted, enter your iCloud password and tap “Turn Off”.

Disable Find My iPhone

📎 iOS 12 and earlier versions

On your iPhone, iPad, or iPod Touch, navigate to Settings > tap on Your Name > iCloud and look for “Find My iPhone” at the bottom.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Disable “Find My iPhone” by sliding the switch to the left.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Once prompted, enter your iCloud password and tap “Turn Off”.

Disable Find my iPhone from computer

  1. Log-in to your iCloud account.
  2. Go to Account Settings.
  3. Go to My Devices and remove the device from the list by clicking a blue cross icon, like so:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Now this device is no longer associated with your Apple ID and can be used by someone else. It is also ready to be restored. Check out the best Backup and Restore options below. 👇

Best Backup and Restore Options

To restore your device from a backup disabling “Find My” is also required.

Here at CopyTrans we have designed our own Backup and Restore app, we called it CopyTrans Shelbee. It is a versatile multi-tool, capable of:

Here is a taster screenshot for you:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

💾 CopyTrans Backup Extractor

Backups are always saved as a bunch of code, they only start making sense when restored back to the device. Ever wondered if it is possible to export your selected data from an old backup directly to your PC? Let’s say you needed your old WhatsApp conversation for some reason, and it is stored in an old backup.

With CopyTrans Backup Extractor you can get it in .PDF format in a couple of clicks without restoring to the device. We can also extract Photos, Messages, Contacts, Calendars, and Notes.

Wondering how to turn off Find My iPhone? You’ve come to the right place!

Find My is an awesome app from Apple. It enables you to track your iPhone, iPad, Mac, iPod touch, AirTags, Apple Watch, and AirPods all from a single app. This means if you lose any one of these, you can log into your other devices – or iCloud.com from any computer – and track down your missing devices.

Find My is an evolution of the original Find My iPhone app that Apple debuted years and years ago. But in recent years Appel decided to rename the app since it can track many more devices than the iPhone.

But just understand when people talk about the “Find My iPhone” app and the “Find My” app they are talking about the same app. The shorter name is just the later version of the app.

With the app you can choose to automatically play a sound from the missing device, helping you locate it if you are within audible range of the app. Also, if you device is stolen, you can remotely wipe its data using the Find My app.

But what about if you want to turn off the Find My app? Read on…

Why You May Want To Turn Off The Find My App

How to turn find my ipad on or off

I know, it sounds odd that an iPhone owner may want to turn off their Find My app. But there are actually a few reasons you may want to do this.

The first reason is if you are going to sell your iPhone. In this case, you’ll want to remove all logins associated with the device – including the Find My app.

Other reasons include if you’re going to give your iPhone away to a friend or family member. Finally, you’ll want to turn Find My off if you are going to trade in your iPhone for a new one – like you can do with Apple.

How To Turn Off Find My On iPhone: If You Have Your iPhone Still

How to turn find my ipad on or off

So how do you actually go about turning off Find My on iPhone? It’s pretty easy if you still have the iPhone:

  1. Open the Settings app on the iPhone.
  2. Tap [your name] > Find My.
  3. Tap Find My iPhone.
  4. Tap the Find My iPhone toggle OFF (so it turns from green to white).
  5. Enter your Apple ID password when prompted. This step ensures it’s the iPhone’s owner turning off Find My for that iPhone.
  6. Tap Turn Off.

And that’s it! You’ve now turned off Find My for that iPhone.

How To Turn Off Find My On iPhone: If You Don’t Have Your iPhone

How to turn find my ipad on or off

But what happens if you no longer have your iPhone? Can you still turn off the Find My app for it? Thankfully, yes.

But don't worry, we won't let the same happen to you. This article will show you how to turn off Find My iPhone on computer.

Part 1. What Does Find My iPhone Do?

It is acknowledged that Find My iPhone aims to track, locate, erase and remotely access your iOS device in order to protect your iPhone or iPad if they are stolen or lost.

There are numerous features in the following:

Have a clear location about your or your family members' iDevices on the map.

Track your iDevice in line with use Lost Mode.

Remotely access your iDevice or erase your iDevice's data.

Prevent your iDevice if it's lost or stolen by Activation Lock.

In line with above-mentioned features, it is suggested that you need to turn on Find My iPhone. However, if you want to restore a backup or erase your iDevice, what you need to do is to disable it.

Part 2. How to Turn off "Find My iPhone" on Computer

In this part, what your priority thing is to own a computer because it is quite essential for the first step. Then the Apple ID account and password are needed.

Here are the steps about how do I turn off Find My iPhone from iCloud:

Step 1. Please make sure your computer has a good connection with the Internet because iCloud.com belongs to Cloud Corner. Then, use your computer to login into iCloud.com and sign in with your Apple ID and password.

Step 2. Please moves your mouse to choose "All Devices" (you can see it at the top on your screen). Then, choose the device which is stolen, lost or selling.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 3. After completing the above-mentioned, you will be informed about the device you choose. Ignore it and go to the next step.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 4. Back to the center of the screen which appears "All Devices". If you see your name of the device which is stolen, lost or selling. Please click on this name and you will see numerous devices in the list. Then, the "x" will be appeared in the right of the device and click it.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 5. When you've been completed the aforementioned steps, you can be allowed to remove the device and you just need to click "Remove". Done!

How to turn find my ipad on or off

According to the above-mentioned method, you may clearly understand how to turn off Find My iPhone online and no longer troubled by can't turn off Find My iPhone.

Tips. How to Completely Wipe Device After Turn Off Find My iPhone

As a common user, you may not clearly understand how to use third-party software. FoneCope iPhone Data Eraser is an effective software which can erase data from your iPhone.

It aims to help users to have the option for removing their data permanently in a simple way. There are lots of key features about this third-party software in the following:

Selectively wipe out the private data forever and make sure your personal data including the previously deleted is non-recoverable.

Wipeout Snapchat history, Facebook, or Chrome private fragments, and more third apps.

Clean up all hidden junk such as files, trash, caches or temp files by one-click.

Depending on your demands or preferences, choose the appropriate level of security because it provides users with 3 levels of security.

Here are the steps to completely wipe the iPhone after turning off Find My iPhone:

Step 1. Open your computer. Connect your iPhone to your computer via the USB wire and launch FoneCope iOS Data Eraser.

Step 2. Depending on your preferences and needs, choose the appropriate mode for wiping out the data. By these erasing categories, it can guide you to delete your iCloud account permanently without using a password. Then, select a suitable option such as the Erase All Data and click Scan.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 3. After completing the scan, the window will appear all data and you can choose the data that you desire to wipe out. For example, click Photo & Video and select the photos you want to delete.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 4. Eventually, find the "Erase Now" button at the right of the bottom of the screen and click it. The software will delete the data. When the process completed, it also erases your iCloud account.

The Bottom Line

In the end, hope this article can make you know how to turn to Find My iPhone off from computer. Meanwhile, you can learn how to erase data on your iPhone through iOS data eraser when the Find My iPhone is disabled or forgetting the password.

Provided that you have any suggestions or problems, please let me know. I am very pleased to hear the customer's voice to make this article better.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Last Updated: February 13, 2019

Author: Elio G. M /

A smartphone geek who perseveres in generating esay-to-follow solutions to various Android and iPhone issues.

How do I turn off Find My iPhone from my computer? There are two ways of turning off Find My iPhone feature from a laptop. The first one is to do it via iCloud.com, and the second one is to turn the feature off by using Tenorshare 4uKey software. Here in this article, you will get to know about both the two ways of turning off Find My iPhone feature from a laptop in detail.

Part 1: What Is Find My on iPhone/iPhone/iPod Touch?

Find My iPhone is an Apple security highlight that enables you to find your gadgets so you can discover them if they got missing or taken. At the point when Find My iPhone is enacted, you can sign in to iCloud.com or launch the “Find My iPhone” application, and see the area of you missing gadget on a guide. You can likewise play a sound to find your gadgets or even wipe them remotely.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Find my iPhone incorporates a feature called Activation Lock that is intended to prevent any other person from using your iPhone, iPad, or iPod contact if it’s ever lost or taken. Activation Lock is enabled mechanically when you turn on Find My iPhone.

Part 2: How Do I Turn off Find My iPhone from My Laptop?

Your iCloud account should be removed and “Find My iPhone” should be disabled before you sell your iPhone, Apple Watch, iPod Touch, iPad, Mac, or Air pods. Usually, there are two ways of turning off the Find my iPhone feature from a laptop.

Way 1: Turn off Find My iPhone via icloud.com

One can easily turn off Find My iPhone via iCloud by following the below mention steps:

  • Step 1: First of all, login to iCloud.com from your computer.
  • Step 2: After this, click on the setting icon.

Step 3: After this select your device from the settings. In setting, under the “My devices” option you can see different device names. Select your device and click on the “x” sign which is present next to the device name.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Way 2: Turn off Find My on Someone Else’s Using 4uKey

Tenorshare 4uKey is your best friend when it comes to turning off Find My iPhone from a laptop. It is essentially a tool that is used to remove Apple ID on an iOS (iOS 15.4 included) device without having the account password. In the situation where you’ve overlooked your password or the past owner left their iCloud account signed into the device, then this iPhone unlocker will help you in removing the Apple ID without a password so that you can easily turn off Find My iPhone. Simply follow the below mention steps to turn off Find My iPhone on your device by removing Apple ID.

First of all, download and install Tenorshare 4ukey on your Windows/Mac. Open the program, select “Unlock Apple ID” in the lower left corner of the interface.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Then you need to connect your iPhone to computer with a usb cable. Then make your iPhone trust the computer.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After your phone is recognized by 4uKey, there are 2 situations to turn off find my iPhone:

1. If you device is running iOS 11.3 and earlier, pleses refer to this guide to remove Apple ID.

2. If you device is running iOS 11.4 and later, then click on “Start Remove” to proceed.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Then you need to follow the guiding steps to set up screen lock and Two-Factor Authentication on your device. Please follow every step in order and click on “Yes” once confirmed.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After that, you will need to download a firmware package for your device. Simply click the “Download” button.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

When the firmware package is downloaded, click on “Start Remove” and 4uKey will start to remove the Apple ID from your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Now, the Apple ID has been successfully removed from your device. You can restore and activate your iPhone by following the on-screen instructions.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

So, that’s how easy you can turn off Find My iPhone from your laptop with the help of Tenorshare 4uKey.

Part 3: What Will Happen If Turn off Find My iPhone?

Find My iPhone can help you with finding your phone when you have left it on the train or if it is stolen. This feature can help you in providing constant updates to your phone’s present area. As long as the device is charged and working properly, it keeps on broadcasting its tracking signal until you catch up with it. If you turn off this feature on your phone then you are not able to get these benefits.

alt=”findmyiphone icon 2x” width=”250″ height=”250″ />Find My iPhone (or Find My iPad) is an iOS feature that enables users to locate a lost or missing Apple device. When you sign in to iCloud.com or the ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌ app, you can see your missing device on a map and play a sound to locate it if it’s close by. It also has a Lost Mode to lock, track, or remotely erase all of your personal information.

For these reasons, Apple recommends that users keep Find my ‌iPhone‌ enabled, but there are circumstances where you might want to turn it off. If you’re selling your ‌iPhone‌ or passing it on, for example, you should disable ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌ beforehand, because the new owner won’t be able to disable it (unless they have your Apple ID password), which means they won’t be able to restore the device to its factory settings.

Likewise, if you’ve acquired a second-hand ‌iPhone‌ or ‌iPad‌ and the previous owner hasn’t disabled ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌, you’ll want to unlink the device from their ‌Apple ID‌, but of course you’ll only be able to do this if you know their ‌Apple ID‌ password. Whatever the reason, here’s how to turn off ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌ in iOS.

How to Turn Off Find my iPhone in iOS

  1. Launch the Settings app on your ‌iPhone‌ or ‌iPad‌.
  2. Tap your name in the ‌Apple ID‌ banner at the top.
  3. Tap iCloud.
    alt=”how to turn off find my iphone” width=”800″ height=”772″ />

That’s all there is to it. To do the same thing on a Mac, check out our separate article on how to turn off Find My Mac. Note that signing out of iCloud on an ‌iPhone‌ or ‌iPad‌ will also disable ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌ as it requires an ‌iCloud‌ account to work.

Sometimes when you try to restore your iPhone with iTunes, you get an error that says Find My iPhone must be turned off before iPhone can be restored. Many of you who do not know what Find My iPhone is are going to get confused as to what this item iTunes is talking about. There is actually a good reason why iTunes asks you to disable Find My iPhone before you can restore your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

The following guide tells you the reason why Find My iPhone must be turned off before iPhone can be restored and how you can then successfully restore your device. You will also learn what to do if you can t turn off Find My iPhone to restore in the below guide.

Part 1. Why Does Find My iPhone Need to Be Off to Restore?

One major reason why Find My iPhone must be turned off before you restore the phone is that Apple does not want unauthorized users to use your phone. In order to keep your data and your device secure, you have a feature called Find My iPhone on your device.

When your phone gets stolen or it gets lost, you can use this feature to keep track of your device. It will not let anyone use the device until and unless they enter the correct Apple ID logins.

The reason iTunes prevents you from restoring your device is that it does not want for the thieves to be able to find your device and then restore it and use it.

Part 2. How to Turn off “Find My iPhone” with Password and Restore Your iPhone

Now that you have an answer to your do I need to turn off Find My iPhone to restore question, let us check out what all methods are available to turn off Find My iPhone on your iPhone.

1. Turn off “Find My iPhone”

One of the easiest ways to disable Find My iPhone is to go to settings on your iPhone and turn off Find My iPhone before restoring your iPhone.

  • Go to Settings and tap your “Account Name” at the top.
  • Tap Find My

Turn off Find My iPhone and enter your Apple ID password.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Find My iPhone should now be turned off and you can now restore your device with iTunes.

2. Restore iPhone with iTunes

After turning off Find My iPhone, you can use iTunes to restore it. The following shows how you can do it on your iOS device.

  • Connect your iPhone to your computer and launch the iTunes app.
  • In the iTunes, click the Device button.
  • Click Summary.

Click Restore, then follow the onscreen instructions.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Your iPhone should be successfully restored now.

Part 3: How to Restore Disabled iPhone Quickly with Tenorshare 4uKey

What If you forget the Apple ID password? Is there any way to turn off Find My iPhone/iPad/iPod touch? Yes, you can find answer here. Today, we’ll tell you how to do it with a cutting-edge desktop software called Tenorshare 4uKey and it allows you to turn off Find My iPhone and remove Apple ID.

Download and launch the software on your computer. Click on Unlock Apple ID on the main software interface.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Plug-in your iPhone to your computer and allow Trust this computer and click on Start Remove in the software.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

It is important to ensure you have set a screen lock and two-factor authentication on your iPhone to proceed. If not, go to set them up. Then select Download to download the firmware for your iPhone.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Hit Start Remove when the firmware is downloaded to start removing the Apple ID on your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You will see the following when your iPhone is restored. Be careful to follow the on-screen tips to activate your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You are all set. That is how to restore iPhone with Find My iPhone on using Tenorshare 4uKey.

People Also Ask About Find My iPhone

If you have a specific question about this procedure, the following likely has covered the answer to your question.

1. What happens when you erase an iPhone from Find My iPhone?

When you erase an iPhone from Find My iPhone, all the data and settings stored on your device get wiped off. If you then select the option to remove your device from your account, your device can then be used with any other Apple accounts.

2. Does reset all settings turn off Find My iPhone?

No, the reset all settings option doesn’t turns off Find My iPhone on your device. You can turn off it from iPhone setting or erase iPhone from iCloud website.

3. Do you have to turn off Find My iPhone to restore?

Yes, if you use iTunes, you need to turn off Find My iPhone to restore your device. If you use a third-party tool like Tenorshare 4uKey, then you do not need to disable Find My iPhone to restore your device.

Summary

If iTunes constantly displays the Find My iPhone/iPad must be turned off before can be restored message, that means you need to first disable the Find iPad or iPhone feature on your device before you can restore it. The above guide tells you why that happens and how you can get past it. Tenorshare 4uKey is here to help you.

How to turn find my ipad on or off Dave Patterson

In this article, we provide you with the best ways to disable Find my iPhone without the password.

These solutions can be very helpful if you purchased a second-hand iPhone and you need to disable the Find my iPhone without a password.

Let’s get started.

What Is “Find My iPhone?”

Find my iPhone is a security feature that is enabled automatically as soon as you connect the device with an iCloud account. It is essential in that it can help you locate your iPhone in case it is lost or stolen. It can also allow you to erase the iPhone remotely, thereby preventing unauthorized individuals from accessing the data on the device. If you put the device in Lost Mode, anyone without the password from unlocking the device.

Therefore, if someone sells you a second-hand device without removing it from the iCloud account, you may find it very difficult to use the device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Why Disable Find My iPhone?

Since Find My iPhone does is a great feature for the protection of your data, it may not be a good idea to disable it. But under certain circumstances, it may become necessary to turn it off. They include the following:

  • You may want to disable Find My iPhone before selling the device to not only make it easier for the buyer to use the device, but also to prevent them from accessing your data.
  • If you purchase a second-hand iPhone, you may need to remove Find my iPhone to add your own iCloud account and to prevent the previous owner from begin able to track the device from the Find My iPhone website.

Use UnlockGo to Disable Find My iPhone without Password

One of the best ways to both unlock the device and turn off Find my iPhone is iToolab UnlockGo. This iOS unlocking tool provides the simplest solution when it comes to unlocking any iOS device.

Pros

  • Turn off the Find My iPhone on your device without password easily.
  • It is also one of the best ways to remove iCloud Activation from the device.
  • It allows you to remove the previous Apple ID and use a new one.
  • Your device won’t be erased or tracked by the previous iCloud account.
  • Support iPhone 5S to iPhone X running iOS 12.3 and later versions,including the latest iOS 15.

Cons

  • UnlockGo will jailbreak the iOS before removing Find My iPhone.

Here’s how to use UnlockGo to unlock the device and disable Find my iPhone:

Before passing on an old iPhone, Apple recommends that users should turn off the ‘Find My’ feature to avoid exposing the location of the new owner.

Before selling, trading, or giving away an iPhone, iPad, or any Apple device, it is recommended that users turn off the ‘Find My’ feature. Find My is a location tracker app that finds a person’s iPhone or any other Apple device if it gets lost or stolen. The same functionality that helps a user to locate a lost device, though, can pose a security risk for the new owner of a device should it be passed on.

Find My was first introduced at the Worldwide Developer Conference in 2019. It is made up of two previous Apple features, Find My Friends and Find My iPhone, with the two having been combined to make it easy to keep track of devices and friends from one place. The service has evolved to be more than just a location tracker, though.

Find My can locate missing iPhones, iPads, Apple Watches, Macs, and even AirPods. The location of a user’s devices — and their relatives’ devices if Family Sharing is set up — can be seen on a map and Find My can be used to trigger a sound to be played from a device to help pinpoint it when nearby. If a device’s battery is low, its last known location can be flagged on a map and the Find My network can also help to locate devices by relaying a beacon via other people’s Apple devices. If needs be, devices can be marked as lost, with a message and contact number displayed for whoever finds them, or be set to have all data erased if they are unrecoverable. People can use Find My to share their location and send notifications to friends when they arrive or leave a specified location too. Throughout all this, the owner’s information and location are kept private.

Turning Off Apple’s ‘Find My’

Apple recommends turning off the Find My feature before giving away an iPhone for security reasons. When the Find My feature is turned off, the iPhone is removed from the devices list in the Find My service. This eliminates the possibility of the new owner’s location being exposed to the previous owner. It also turns off Activation Lock, which prevents other people from using a lost iPhone.

To turn off Find My on iPhones with iOS 12 or earlier, go to ‘Settings’, tap the user’s name, tap ‘iCloud’, and then ‘turn off Find My iPhone’. Once the Apple ID password has been entered, the user can turn off Find My. If the iPhone is running iOS 13 or later, go to ‘Settings’, tap the user’s name, locate ‘Find My’, and then tap ‘turn off Find My iPhone’. Again, the user’s Apple ID password will be required to finish the process.

Компания Readdle была основана в Украине, и для многих наших сотрудников эта страна стала родным домом. Прямо сейчас российские вооруженные силы бомбят и атакуют Украину на суше, в воздухе и на воде.

С начала войны тысячи мирных жителей были убиты и ранены, среди них много детей. Более 1000000 человек были вынуждены покинуть свои дома, спасаясь от ужасных военных бесчинств. Число жертв продолжает расти.

В силу этого компания Readdle предпринимает следующие меры:

  • Мы удалили все наши продукты из App Store и Google Play в России;
  • Мы больше не сотрудничаем с компаниями, которые принадлежат российским гражданам или имеют к ним отношение;
  • Мы не ведем бизнес с компаниями, которые продолжают отрицать войну в Украине, поддерживают российскую агрессию в Украине или связаны с любыми лицами, выступающими на стороне захватчика.

И хотя мы понимаем, что вы можете не разделять взгляды и убеждения российского правительства, идущего на нарушения прав человека и военные преступления, мы должны предпринять действия, направленные на поддержку борьбы Украины за свою свободу.

  • Для текущих пользователей:
    Для текущих пользователей в России доступ к установленным приложениям сохраняется, но все новые функции и обновления безопасности с нашей стороны предоставляться не будут. Кроме того, мы больше не будем обеспечивать “техническую поддержку” наших приложений пользователям из России.
  • Для новых пользователей:
    Приложения Readdle больше не будут доступны для продажи в российском App Store и Google Play. Мы не будем предлагать наши продукты и услуги пользователям в России.

Считаем, что вы заслуживаете знать правду. Поэтому мы отобрали достоверные источники, которые круглосуточно следят за событиями войны в Украине. Ниже вы можете найти список надежных СМИ, освещающих войну в Украине на русском языке:

Вы можете помочь не только словом. Есть и более действенные способы остановить войну. Здесь вы можете узнать, как помочь Украине уже сейчас. Помните, каждый ваш шаг имеет значение.

Maggie Tillman, US contributing editor

How to turn find my ipad on or off

– Here's how to remove your device from the Find My app

(Pocket-lint) – Not everyone is a fan of Find My iPhone – which is now known as Find My after the Find My Friends and Find my iPhone apps were combined in 2019.

The Find My service makes it easy for you to track down your lost or stolen Apple device, but, for whatever reason, some people don’t want that ability.

If you find yourself among that crowd, no worries, we’ll help you figure out how to turn off Find My for your iPhone, or any other Apple device you want to turn it off for. If you’re no longer using an Apple device, and you want to remove it from Find My, we can help you with that, too. This guide covers everything.

How to turn off Find My iPhone

Those of you who own an iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch, AirPods, or Mac and want to turn off Find My feature can do so via the steps below.

iPhone or iPad users

On an iOS device, go to Settings > [your name] > Find My > Toggle off Find My [iPhone/iPad]. You can also remove your device by turning off iCloud completely on that device. Turning off Apple’s iCloud subsequently turns off all iCloud features on the device.

Mac users

On a Mac, choose Apple menu > System Preferences > click Apple ID > and then deselect Find My Mac. You can also remove your device by turning off iCloud completely on that device. Turning off Apple’s iCloud subsequently turns off all iCloud features on the device.

Apple Watch or AirPods users

To turn off Find My for Apple Watch or AirPods, you have to remove them from from Find My iPhone on iCloud.com. So, turn off Apple Watch or put AirPods in their case to make them go offline, then log in to iCloud.com, go to Find My iPhone, click All Devices at the top, select the offline device, and click Remove from Account.

If you don’t see Remove from Account, click All Devices again, then click the “x” button next to the device.

How to remove your device from Find My iPhone

If you no longer have the iOS device, Mac, Apple Watch, or AirPods because you gave it away or sold it, you can still remove it from your Find My iPhone app. However, you need to remotely erase the device first. You can do this from iCloud.com or the Find My iPhone app.

iCloud.com

Log in to iCloud.com, then go to Find My iPhone, and click All Devices.

Now, select the device you want to erase. To erase an iOS device or Apple Watch, enter your Apple ID credentials and answer the security questions or enter the verification code that is sent to your other devices. To erase a Mac, do the same thing. If either device is offline, the remote erase begins the next time it’s online. You receive an email when the device is erased.

Finally, when the device is erased, log back into iCloud.com, click All Devices, find your device, and click Remove from Account.

Find My iPhone app

Again, you need to remotely erase a device before you can remove it. Open the Find My app on your iPhone or iPad > click on the Devices tab > Tap the device you want to erase > Swipe up from the card at the bottom of the display > Tap on Erase This Device > Follow the instructions. If the device is offline, the remote erase begins the next time it’s online.

When the device is erased, open the Find My app again > click on the Devices tab > Tap the device you have just erased and want to remove > Swipe up from the card at the bottom of the display > Tap on Remove This Device > Follow the instructions.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Like any other app from Apple, Find my iPhone is a great app as useful as many other iPhone tracking apps which enable you to track your iPhone all in one place at the comfort of your home. However, if you are planning to upgrade your phone or iPad, selling your existing device or even if you are trading, in all these cases you must make sure that you turn off Find my iPhone entirely before handing it to someone else. This will make sure that the new user cannot access any of your personal information and files and that they will be able to link the device to their iCloud account.

Now if you are wondering how to turn off find my iPhone? Just keep reading this article to have a clear picture of the process.

Part 1: How to remotely turn off Find My iPhone using iCloud

This method works perfectly to disable Find my iPhone using iCloud on your personal computer, even when your iPhone screen is locked. All you need to do is follow the below-given instructions and you will be able to disable Find my iPhone in no time. To follow this method, you have to ensure that you have a desktop or PC available as you need to have the desktop version of iCloud to execute this method.

The stepwise execution of this process is as follows:

Step 1. To start simply power off Your Device. This is important as the iOS device should not be online to progress to the next step. If in case the device is online or connected to the internet you will not be able to disable you Find My iPhone.

Step 2. Now in your Web browser visit iCloud.com and log in by entering your account information (Apple ID and Password) the way you normally log in to access your files.

Step 3. After you are in your account you need to click on Find iPhone this will further take you to inside the app to make any necessary changes.

Step 4. As shown in the graphic below, simply click on the icon “All devices” which is located on the top of the screen and choose the device you wish to turn off.

Step 5. To turn off Find my iPhone remotely, move your cursor on the device and you will see an “X” sign next to the device. Click the “X” sign to remove your device from Find my iPhone.

And this is all that it takes to disable Find my iPhone using iCloud on computer. If you don’t have a computer, you can download Find My iPhone app on another iOS device and log in your iCloud account. You can then also remove the offline device and turn off Find My iPhone remotely.

Part 2: How to turn off Find My iPhone from an iPhone/iPad

This method is comparatively simpler but you need to make sure you still have access to your iPhone or iPad, and this will prove to be the fastest and simplest way to turn the Find my iPhone off.

To understand this, follow the stepwise procedure:

Step 1: To start with this process, open our Settings from the Home screen and simply click iCloud.

Step2: Here you will see Find My iPhone. Simply tap on it as shown in the figure below

Step3: Now you need to turn the Find My iPhone to Off.

Step4: Moving further, to confirm you will have to insert your Apple ID password.

That’s about it. That’s all you need to do to disable Find my iPhone. Your iPhone or iPad will no longer be visible via Find My iPhone. Just follow the same steps in case you want to turn it back on.

Part 3: How to turn off Find My iPhone without password

Step 1: By opening the Settings page go to your iCloud account.

Step 2: Here you need to remove the current password and enter any passcode and click ok

Step 3: As expected iCloud will inform you that either your username or your password is incorrect and does not match as displayed in the image below

Step 4: Now just tap OK and then click cancel. You will reach the iCloud page.

Step 5: Further, tap on Account and erase the description. Press ok

Step 6: It will now return to the main page on iCloud and won’t ask for the password this time. Here you’ll see that Find My iPhone app has been on OFF mode automatically.

This is how you can Disable Find my iPhone without your password and without the need to jailbreak your phone. Scroll downward and choose to remove the account. Reconfirm and you are good to go.

We hope this article has helped you and answered your Questions related to Turning off Find my iPhone using different techniques. We would love to hear back from you and get your suggestions in delivering accurate and up to date information.

Note: Find my iPhone is a great and extremely useful application and in this, you won’t be able to disable Find My iPhone without knowing the Apple ID and password that you once used to set it up. Hence, if you are unable to turn off Find My iPhone, you simply cannot completely restore your factory settings on your iPhone. We suggest you must turn off Find My iPhone before selling, or passing on, your iPhone to ensure the safety of personal information.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Nowadays, there are still a lot of people using PS3 controller. That’s still no reason to ditch your PS3 console or throw out your controllers quite yet. In this post, MiniTool shows you how to connect PS3 controller to PC.

Quick Navigation :

A keyboard and mouse may be the preferred input device for PC gaming, but there are others who are more comfortable with a console controller. Nowadays, although the PS4 has stolen the spotlight from the PS3, you can still get plenty of use out of your PlayStation 3 controllers.

The PS3 controller, Dualshock 3, has something the best PC controllers don’t have: pressure-sensitive analog face buttons. That makes the Dualshock 3 the best choice for emulating PS2 games with PCSX2.

Then, How to use PS3 controller on PC? Please read the following content to get the guide.

How to Use PS3 Controller on PC Windows 10 (Wired Connection)

Step 1: Make sure you have these components installed:

  • Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5
  • Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable Package
  • Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Runtime
  • DirectX Runtime

Step 2: Turn on your controller by pressing the stylized “PS” button in the middle of your controller. Then, connect your PlayStation 3 controller to your PC using a Mini USB cable.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Do you know how to start Steam in offline mode properly? You may encounter some problems during this process. The post will provide you with a full guide.

Step 3: Click ScpToolkit to download it. Then, run the installer, accept the terms, choose your install location, and then you’ll get a menu of all the options to install. Just leave this to the default and click Install to begin the installation.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Step 4: After about 30 seconds, ScpToolkit will be installed successfully, and you’ll be required to Run Driver Installer. Then, check the boxes for the drivers you want to install. In this case, you should check “Install Dualshock 3 driver“, and then click the arrow next to “Choose Dualshock 3 controllers to install” to open a dropdown list. From the list, check PlayStation 3 controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Step 5: Watch the SCP Toolkit run through its installation process. If you see “Dualshock 3 USB Driver installed”, it means a successful installation and then you can click Exit. After SCP Toolkit is installed, you can open ScpToolkit Settings Manager to change some settings like disabling rumble, adjusting analog stick deadzones, and more.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

PS4 controller is blinking white? How to fix the problem? In this post, you can get 4 solution to it. Try them one by one until it is fixed.

How to Connect PS3 Controller to PC via Bluetooth (Wireless Connection)

If you want to be able to use the controller wirelessly, please follow the steps below:

Step 1: Make sure you have a Bluetooth dongle plugged in or your motherboard’s Bluetooth enabled.

Step 2: You also need to install ScpToolkit. When you choose features to be installed, you should make sure the ScpToolkit Bluetooth Pair Utility option is ticked. Then, when installing drivers, you should make sure the “Install Bluetooth driver” box is checked, then click the arrow next to “Choose Bluetooth dongles to install” and find your Bluetooth device in the list to check it.

Step 3: If all went well, you should be able to simply unplug the controller, and after a couple seconds it will sync via Bluetooth.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

This post recommends 2 PS3 internal hard drives and 2 PS3 external hard drives to you. In addition, it shows you how to replace PS3 hard drive step by step.

  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • Linkedin
  • Reddit

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Position: Columnist

Author Linda has been working as an editor at MiniTool for 1 year. As a fresh man in IT field, she is curious about computer knowledge and learns it crazily. Maybe due to this point, her articles are simple and easy to understand. Even people who do not understand computer can gain something.

By the way, her special focuses are data recovery, partition management, disk clone, and OS migration.

This article explains how to connect and use a PS3's DualShock 3 controller with a PC, with or without a Bluetooth dongle, so you can play games on Steam without a mouse and keyboard. We cover computers with Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, or macOS.

How to Connect a PS3 Controller to a PC

In addition to your DualShock 3 controller and PC, you'll need a mini-USB cable and the following files:

When you've assembled everything you need, here's what to do:

If your DualShock 3 controller is paired with a PS3, first unplug the PS3 from its power source, or else it can cause syncing conflicts.

Plug the DualShock 3 into your PC via a mini-USB cable.

If your computer doesn’t have built-in Bluetooth support, plug in your wireless Bluetooth dongle.

Download and run ScpToolkit Setup.exe. It should automatically download all of the other files it needs, so just follow all the prompts.

If you're on Windows 7, download and install the Xbox 360 controller drivers.

After the ScpToolkit finishes setting up, select the big green button above Run Driver Installer on the window that pops up.

On the next screen, make sure the boxes next to Install DualShock 3 driver and Install Bluetooth driver are checked (if you have a Bluetooth dongle plugged in).

Uncheck Install DualShock 4 driver (and uncheck Install Bluetooth driver if you don't have a Bluetooth dongle).

Select the arrow beside Choose DualShock 3 controllers to install and choose your PlayStation 3 controller from the drop-down menu.

If connecting a Bluetooth dongle, select the arrow beside Choose Bluetooth dongles to install and choose your Bluetooth device from the drop-down menu.

Select Install. When finished, select Exit.

The ScpToolkit Settings Manager will then appear in your system tray. Select it to add another device.

How to Use Your PS3 Controller With Your Computer

Once installed properly, the DualShock 3 should automatically work with the Steam client and any PC game that supports gamepads. You may be able to adjust the control settings for individual games, but your computer will recognize the PS3 controller as an Xbox controller, so keep that in mind when adjusting the button mapping. When you're done playing, turn off the DualShock by holding down the PS button on the center of the controller.

ScpToolkit must be running for the DualShock 3 controller to work on your PC.

How to Use a Wireless PS3 Controller With a PC via Bluetooth

To use your PS3 controller wirelessly, you'll either need a PC with built-in Bluetooth compatibility or a Bluetooth dongle plugged in. You must plug in the controller before you can play wirelessly. After unplugging the controller, it should automatically sync with your PC via Bluetooth if the proper drivers are installed.

How to Connect a PS3 Controller to a Mac

Using a DualShock 3 controller with a Mac is much simpler than connecting it to a PC because the necessary drivers are already present in OS X Snow Leopard and later. But setting up wireless connectivity requires some extra steps.

If you have the latest version of macOS, you can skip steps 7-10 below, as the process has become more streamlined.

If your DualShock 3 controller is paired with a PS3, first unplug the PS3 from its power source, or else it can cause syncing conflicts.

Reset your PS3 controller by inserting a paperclip into the tiny hole under the L2 button on the back of the DualShock 3.

From the Apple menu on your Mac, select System Preferences > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.

Connect the controller to your Mac with a USB cable.

Hold down the PS button on your controller for 1-3 seconds until you see the red lights on top of the DualShock 3 flashing.

Unplug the controller from your Mac.

Click the + icon in the System Preferences menu, then select Bluetooth Setup Assistant.

When prompted for an access code, enter 0000 and select Accept.

Close the assistant and select PLAYSTATION3 Controller in the Bluetooth list in your System Preferences.

Select the gear icon and choose Add To Favorites and Update Services.

Disable your Mac's Bluetooth and wait a second.

Enable Bluetooth again and wait another second. Your DualShock 3 should now work with games that supports controllers.

Once you set up controllers to be compatible with your PC, you can connect multiple PS3 controllers using a wired USB connection. You may not be able to use multiple PS3 controllers wirelessly.

You can use an Xbox 360 controller, an Xbox One controller, or an Xbox Series X controller on your PC without any extra setup. Just plug the controllers into your computer's USB ports.

Anthony Heddings
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pcAnthony Heddings
Writer

Anthony Heddings is the resident cloud engineer for LifeSavvy Media, a technical writer, programmer, and an expert at Amazon’s AWS platform. He’s written hundreds of articles for How-To Geek and CloudSavvy IT that have been read millions of times. Read more.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Sony

Controller support is limited on Windows PCs. While the latest generation of console controllers will work out of the box with Windows, even last-generation gamepads like the PlayStation 3’s DualShock 3 require custom drivers.

A previous version of this article detailed the use of MotioninJoy to use your Sony PS3 controller as a joystick on your Windows PC. Unfortunately, MotioninJoy was a proprietary piece of software that turned into malware over the years. Luckily, you don’t have to infect your computer, as there is an open-source alternative in ScpToolkit. Don’t use MotioninJoy.

How to Install ScpToolkit

ScpToolkit has to modify some system drivers to make the controller work, so it’s not the safest install process. Proceed with caution, follow our instructions, and don’t click anything you don’t understand.

Download the latest release of ScpToolkit from the project’s Github page, open up the setup program, and agree to the Terms and Conditions—if you read them, of course. You’ll be shown a dialog with a list of install options:

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

You probably don’t need the Gamepad Analyzer and Debug Info Collector, but you should install everything else.

The installation process will take a few minutes. You should take this time to find your PS3 controller and plug it in with a USB cable. After the utility is done installing the toolkit, it will ask you to run the driver installer. Click “Run,” and you’ll be shown a list which should now include your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click the “Initialize All Connected Devices” button (don’t skip through with next button), let it install, and then click “Next.” This will configure the controller to be recognized as a PS3 controller, and install some drivers.

The next screen is for Bluetooth support, which you may not want because it requires a dedicated Bluetooth dongle to be “sacrificed.” Rightly so, there’s a huge “WARNING” label on this screen, because installing it to a wireless mouse dongle on accident will cause you to have a very bad time.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

If you really want wireless support, you’ll need to plug in the sacrificial dongle, make sure it’s the ONLY device in the list, and then click “Initialize All Connected Devices.”

Otherwise, feel free to hit “Next” and skip this process.

The next step is installing a virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver, which will trick Windows into thinking your PS3 controller is an Xbox 360 controller. This will make it work for more games.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

To install the driver, click “Install virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver” and click “Next.”

After that, ScpToolkit will want to install a Windows Service to handle communication with the controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click “Install Windows Service” and click “Next.” You’re now done, and you should be able to use your PS3 controller in any game that supports Xbox 360 controllers. That’s practically every game that supports a controller, so go nuts. You can also remap the controller’s buttons to make it work in other games.

  • › The Best Retro Game Controllers for Your PC or Raspberry Pi Emulators
  • › More Than Headsets: 5 Things You Can Do With Bluetooth
  • › How to Connect Any Console Game Controller to a Windows PC or Mac
  • › How to Put Your PS5 DualSense Controller Into Pairing Mode
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc Anthony Heddings
Anthony Heddings is the resident cloud engineer for LifeSavvy Media, a technical writer, programmer, and an expert at Amazon’s AWS platform. He’s written hundreds of articles for How-To Geek and CloudSavvy IT that have been read millions of times.
Read Full Bio »

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Alternatively, you can use a reliable driver update tool, like DriverDownloader. DriverDownloader is absolutely free to download, install, and run. When you run it, you will get a free driver update. Then you’ll have the option to register the software. When you register the software, you’ll get free updates, money-back guarantee, and technical support.

Download DriverDownloader

Click the Start Download button.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click Run or Save

You’re likely to see the following message on your screen. You can choose to either click Save or Run. If you’ve clicked Run, go to the next step straightaway. If you’ve clicked Save, go to the Downloads folder, locate driver_downlaoder.exe file and double-click it, and then go to the next step.

Click Install

Click the Install button.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Register Driver_Downloader

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Register the software to get automatic driver updates.

After you have installed required drivers, you will need an emulator which will recognize your PS3 controller as Xbox 360 controller. We are using SCP toolkit as the emulator.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Sony

Controller support is limited on Windows PCs. While the latest generation of console controllers will work out of the box with Windows, even last-generation gamepads like the PlayStation 3’s DualShock 3 require custom drivers.

A previous version of this article detailed the use of MotioninJoy to use your Sony PS3 controller as a joystick on your Windows PC. Unfortunately, MotioninJoy was a proprietary piece of software that turned into malware over the years. Luckily, you don’t have to infect your computer, as there is an open-source alternative in ScpToolkit. Don’t use MotioninJoy.

How to Install ScpToolkit

ScpToolkit has to modify some system drivers to make the controller work, so it’s not the safest install process. Proceed with caution, follow our instructions, and don’t click anything you don’t understand.

Download the latest release of ScpToolkit from the project’s Github page, open up the setup program, and agree to the Terms and Conditions—if you read them, of course. You’ll be shown a dialog with a list of install options:

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

You probably don’t need the Gamepad Analyzer and Debug Info Collector, but you should install everything else.

The installation process will take a few minutes. You should take this time to find your PS3 controller and plug it in with a USB cable. After the utility is done installing the toolkit, it will ask you to run the driver installer. Click “Run,” and you’ll be shown a list which should now include your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click the “Initialize All Connected Devices” button (don’t skip through with next button), let it install, and then click “Next.” This will configure the controller to be recognized as a PS3 controller, and install some drivers.

The next screen is for Bluetooth support, which you may not want because it requires a dedicated Bluetooth dongle to be “sacrificed.” Rightly so, there’s a huge “WARNING” label on this screen, because installing it to a wireless mouse dongle on accident will cause you to have a very bad time.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

If you really want wireless support, you’ll need to plug in the sacrificial dongle, make sure it’s the ONLY device in the list, and then click “Initialize All Connected Devices.”

Otherwise, feel free to hit “Next” and skip this process.

The next step is installing a virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver, which will trick Windows into thinking your PS3 controller is an Xbox 360 controller. This will make it work for more games.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

To install the driver, click “Install virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver” and click “Next.”

After that, ScpToolkit will want to install a Windows Service to handle communication with the controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click “Install Windows Service” and click “Next.” You’re now done, and you should be able to use your PS3 controller in any game that supports Xbox 360 controllers. That’s practically every game that supports a controller, so go nuts. You can also remap the controller’s buttons to make it work in other games.

RELATED: How to Remap any Controller to Keyboard Keys on Windows and MacOS

Do you find it hard to steer your mouse and hit the right keyboard key to play PC games? If you happen to have PS3 controllers, why not use them as Joysticks to play games?

Before we begin, head over to MotionInJoy website to install the required drivers for Windows. The installer comes for both x86 (32-bit operating system) and x64 (64-bit operating system), so make sure you download the right installer for your system. If you are in doubt, just go to Start -> Control Panel –> System, to verify your system settings.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Once you have downloaded the installer, unzip it, and execute the .exe file to start the installation. The installation begins with a standard welcome screen,

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

… and ends with asking you to run the software.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Plugin your PS3 controller to your USB port, and you should see a small icon on your system tray, showing you that Windows is installing drivers for your controller. At this point, even though your controller will be recognized in the “Game Controllers”, Windows will not recognized the buttons movement.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Open the DS3 tool, and press the “Load Driver” button.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Windows will warn you that it can’t verify the publisher of the driver; don’t worry, MotionInJoy’s drivers are safe for us to install.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Your PS3 controller is ready for use when you see a message: “SUCCESS: Install Completed”.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click the “Profile” button, and you should see that your controller appears under the “Connected game controller(s)” drop down list. You can click on the Vibration Testing button, to test that Windows recognizes your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

We recommend that you open your “Game Controller Settings” from Start Menu → Devices and Printers → right click on “HID-compliant game controller” → select “Game controller setting”, to calibrate your PS3 controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click on the “Properties” button to calibrate your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Guess what, MotionInJoy not only enable you to use your PS3 controller via USB, you can even use it as Joystick via Bluetooth. Click the “BlueToothPair” button, and click the “Pair Now” button, and your Windows should pair with your PS3 controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Disconnect your controller from the USB cable, head back to the profile page, and click the “Vibration Testing” button. If your controller is vibrating, this means that your PS3 controller is now connected to your Bluetooth. Now you can sit back, relax, and kill those zombies with your PS3 controllers.

MotionInJoy works with games that support JoySticks, and they have verified the software with a bunch of games. Feel free to share your experience with MotionInJoy with the other fellow readers in the comments section.

Run scpdriver.exe , if your on Vista or XP check force install.

If you want it to use a bluetooth dongle, first plug it in, allow windows to install the >default drivers.

Then when in scpdriver.exe check the bluetooth driver option. (Note that the dongle will only be useable for PS3 controllers)

Now if your on Windows Vista or Windows XP install the Xbox360 drivers from here.

Run scpserver.exe within the directory C:/Program Files/Scarlet.Crush Productions/bin/

You'll need to run scpserver.exe every time your computer starts so I would >recommend adding it to your startup items.

Just add a shortcut to scpserver.exe in the startup folder if you want it to launch at >startup.

Download SCP filter (latest version not update), then download the latest update.

Copy the files from the latest update and paste it into the 1.2.0.160 version's bin.

Connect your PS3 controller and run SCPDriver.exe as admin.

Make sure that configure service and blutooth driver are checked and hit install.

Wait for windows to recognize your 'xbox 360' controller and install drivers.

For PS4 controllers, there's a much better bit of software you can use than SCPFilter – InputMapper, previously known as DS4Windows:

It's based on the SCPFilter code and does a pretty darn good job – it's easy to install and update, easy to configure, has a reasonable UI. It's come a long way. Just install it, run it, and configure your devices.

That said, I've not confirmed that it works on dual-shock 3 (DS3) controllers – it was originally written to support the DS4 controllers. However, the author has indicated his specific goal is to support more than just DS4s (hence the name change from DS4Windows to InputMapper), and since it's based on the same old code that supported DS3s, there's a good chance it'll support them.

A guide for using the Dualshock 3 wired and Bluetooth on Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 10.

  • Setup
  • Software installation
  • Using it
  • Bluetooth

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

The Playstation 3’s controller, the Dualshock 3, isn’t the easiest pad to get working on the PC. So why bother when it’s so much easier to use something newer? Well, in some ways, the PlayStation 3 controller is still special. The Dualshock 3 has something the best PC controllers don’t have: Pressure-sensitive analog face buttons. That makes the Dualshock 3 the best choice for playing emulated PS2 games in the PCSX2 emulator. Metal Gear Solid 3, for example, just doesn’t play right without those analog buttons.

And if you simply prefer the feel of Sony’s older controllers over the redesigned Dualshock 4, this is the perfect controller for playing those classic Final Fantasy games on Steam. Here’s the best way to get your PS3 controller working on PC, using an open source tool called ScpToolkit.

Note: Steam actually has native support for the DualShock 3, meaning you can simply plug the controller in and set it up through the Big Picture mode Controller settings menu. However, Steam does not support the DualShock 3’s gyro controls or (more importantly!) its analog face buttons, which are what we’re really after. Follow this guide to get the PS3 controller working on PC with those buttons working, too.

Setup

What you need

Hardware

  • Dualshock 3 and mini-USB cable
  • Optional: Bluetooth dongle

Software

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Software installation

ScPToolkit installation guide

1. Download the software linked above, and start by installing the four Microsoft packages. If you’re on a Windows 7 PC, you’ll also need to install the Xbox 360 controller driver. On Windows 8 and 10, it’s already built in!

2. Important step: plug your Dualshock 3 into your PC with a mini-USB cable. Now we can start making it work.

Bluetooth installation note: if you also want to be able to use the controller wirelessly, make sure you have a Bluetooth dongle plugged in or your motherboard’s Bluetooth enabled. ScpToolkit notes you need a Bluetooth 2.0 or higher dongle that supports Enhanced Data Rate (EDR).

3. Download ScpToolkit and run the installer. After accepting the terms and choosing your install location, you’ll get a menu of all the options to install, as in the screenshot above. I recommend leaving this to the default. Click Install to begin the installation.

Bluetooth installation note: Make sure the ScpToolkit Bluetooth Pair Utility option is ticked.

4. After about 30 seconds, ScpToolkit will be installed, and you’ll see this screen, with a big green button that says Run Driver Installer. Since this is a fresh install, that’s what we want to do. Click the button.

5. This screen may look intimidating, but it’s still pretty simple! Check the boxes for the drivers you want to install. In this case, we want to make sure Install Dualshock 3 driver is checked (it should be by default). Now click the arrow next to “Choose Dualshock 3 controllers to install” to see a dropdown list of USB devices attached to your computer. Find the PlayStation 3 controller in the list and check it.

Bluetooth installation note: Make sure the “Install Bluetooth driver” box is checked. Like you did with the Dualshock 3, click the arrow next to “Choose Bluetooth dongles to install” and find your Bluetooth device in the list. Check it.

Note: If you’re on Windows Vista, check the box for “Force Driver Installation.” Otherwise, leave it unchecked. Click Install.

6. Watch the SCP Toolkit run through its installation process. You’ll see lots of pop-ups on the side of your screen as it detects your hardware. Scroll to the bottom of the log and you should hopefully see “Dualshock 3 USB Driver installed” (and “Bluetooth Driver installed” if you chose to), signifying a successful installation. If all went well, click Exit.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

7. Now that it’s installed, you’ll see ScpToolkit as an icon in your system tray. Look in your Start Menu for ScpToolkit Settings Manager. Here you can change some settings like disabling rumble, adjusting analog stick deadzones, and more. Most of these settings you should be able to leave alone.

ScpToolkit starts up with Windows by default, and also plays some sound effects that you might find obnoxious. To disable them, click the Sound settings tab and uncheck “Enable notification sounds.”

PCSX2 emulator note: The PCSX2 settings tab allows you to patch the emulator’s LilyPad controller plugin to support the pressure sensitive buttons. If you plan to use your PS3 controller with the emulator, click Browse to navigate to your PCSX2 installation folder, then click Enable to install the patch. Voila!

Using it

Using your Playstation 3 controller on PC

Now that it’s installed, the Dualshock 3 should behave like an Xbox 360 controller. Any game with native XInput support—pretty much any modern PC game that supports gamepads—should recognize it without a hitch. Unfortunately, this means that it won’t register as a PlayStation controller to the few games that have native DualShock 4 support, so you won’t get the correct Square/Cross/Triangle/Circle button icons by default. Some games let you manually choose your button icons, though. Look for that in game settings!

If you ran into issues installing ScpToolkit or using the controller, you can try posting in the official thread at the PCSX2 forums, but you may not get an answer.

Video games have gained great strength in recent times, thus creating a vast network of players around the world. With i Games you can connect to a virtual world where you can live fantastic experiences.

In general, video games are divided into different categories, in these the games are classified according to the characteristics with which they are designed. These categories range from adventure, action, racing, strategy, sport, games and many others.

Game development companies or console for Video games are constantly working, looking for new ideas like recording PS3 console screen without capture, connecting Skype to PS3 camera, using a PS3 control as N64 control, etc. to apply them on their consoles and thus satisfy the demands of consumers.

How to use and connect PS3 controller to PC to play on Windows or Mac?

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

One of the brands currently leading in this market is PlayStation, developed by the Sony company and officially launched on the market in 1994. Since then the success it has achieved has been resounding, becoming one of the most used consoles for playing video games.

This brand is characterized by always being in step with the times, improving its features and functionality more and more. From time to time, it releases consoles with more advanced features than previous versions.

One of the consoles that has had the best receptivity is the PlayStation 3, thanks to its functionality, design and operability, it is one of the most used. It has many functions and features that we need to know to make the experience much better.

On the other hand, even the the companies Microsoft e Apple with them systems operational Windows e iOS have developed very advanced game interfaces. That we can reproduce on our computers.

Since our computers are designed to perform different tasks, playing games can be a little tricky. However, there is a way to solve this problem.

The controllers or controllers we use to play games on our PS3 consoles they can be used to play games on our Windows or Mac computers. The PS3 controls are designed exclusively for playing video games.

Therefore, if we connect them to our computers, we will have an unparalleled gaming experience. In this article we will learn how to use and connect PS3 controller to PC to play on Windows or Mac.

Steps to connect PS3 controller to PC to play on Windows

To connect the PS3 controller to our computer running Windows we have to follow the following steps. First on our Windows computer we open our trusted browser.

Then in the search bar we write Scptoolkit and we give sending. We will have several options to download Scptoolkit, let’s select the one we are looking for. What we will do with this program is to have the options to be able to connect the PS3 controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

It should be noted that we have to download the option for Windows, it will start the download and we wait until it is finished. Then we open the previously downloaded program and run.

We accept the terms and conditions and click Next until the installation begins. After the download we can connect the controller of our PS3 via USB or Bluetooth to our Windows computer and it will recognize it immediately.

Steps to connect PS3 controller to PC to play on Mac

The iOS operating system was characterized as a very closed system compatible only with the devices produced by the company. However, connecting the PS3 controller is very simple.

Since it is possible to connect it via Bluetooth as any Peripheral normally connects, to connect it we must activate the bluetooth of our remote control. So let’s go to our Mac and go to the Bluetooth and other devices option.

It will recognize it automatically, we just have to click on the device and connect it to start using it. Ready in this way, we were able to successfully connect the PS3 controller to our PC with Windows and Mac operating systems.

Finally, we hope this article has been of help to you, however we would like to know, could you connect PS3 controller to computer easily? Do you know a simpler method? Leave your opinion in the comments.

Connecting a PS3 controller to a PC will not work straightaway. It requires more than just connecting a gaming controller and using it. This is because Windows won’t allow the installation of the drivers needed for the controller to work.

To fix this, we need to disable Driver Signature Enforcement and then install Motioninjoy to enable your DualShock controller work. If you have already disabled Driver Signature Enforcement, you can skip to Step 2 of this guide. In this guide, I will assume you’re using Windows 10.

Step 1: Disable Signature Enforcement

  1. Press Windows + C and click on PC settings.
  2. Click the Update & Recovery tab and then click the Recovery option on the left pane.
  3. Under the recovery options, you will see an advanced startup section on the right side of the window. Click on the Restart Now button and wait for while your PC reboots into the recovery mode.
  4. In the recovery mode, choose Troubleshooting > Advanced options > Startup Settings.
  5. Your PC may restart one more time and present you with a list of startup settings you can change. Choose Disable driver signature enforcement by pressing F7.

Step 2: Installing and Configuring Motioninjoy

  1. Download and install Motioninjoy from here.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Connect the controller to your PC via the supplied USB cable. Once plugged in, Go to the Driver Manager Here, you will see your controller listed with information on its location and ID. If you’re unsure about which of the listed devices is your controller, replug it into your computer.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Select the checkbox of your controller and then click Install all. Once this is done, you will have all the required drivers on your PC.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Head back to the Profiles tab and confirm if your DualShock controller is listed under the Connected Game Controller section and is connected.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Under the Select one mode section, click on the little circle next to Xbox 360 Controller Emulator and then Enable at the bottom of the screen.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Next time you connect the controller to your PC, open Motioninjoy and repeat step 5. There’s no need to install the drivers again at this point.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc1

Okay, so I have an AfterGlow third party ps3 controller that I bought for my ps3. I bought a couple games from steam and wanted to use that to play on my PC but could not get it working through DS3 Tool or Better DS3 because the programs would not recgonize the device because it was third party. Anyway, I spent a while looking online and on youtube for a solution to the problem or a way to make the controller work and most forums told me it would not work and to go buy the sony dualshock controller instead. Being broke, I decided to fiddle around with an xbox emulator but it would not work. I noticed alot of people online having trouble with the program as well and have errors and such. I figured out how to make it work though and thought I’d share with you guys on steam just in case you were having problems. If you have made it work already, then awesome, but I decided to post this to help those who do not know what to do.

First you need to make sure the Visual C++ 2012 is installed. Here is the link: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=30679
Press download and then select both the x64-bit and x86-bit. Both are needed (for my computer anyway).

Next download this: http://www.microsoft.com/en-in/download/details.aspx?id=35. This is needed for the program to work.

After that, click this link: http://code.google.com/p/x360ce/ and scroll down to where the download options are. One will be 32-bit and one will be 64-bit. Even if your computer is a 64-bit computer like mine is, still download the 32-bit. The 64-bit has issues and was not detecting my controller, but once I downloaded the 32-bit, it worked.

After that, click the file and extract the files. Once you’ve done that, run the file as an administrator. The program will ask you if it can make a file, click yes on both questions. After that the program will open and ask you if it can search online for drivers and such, click next and then finish.

After it is done setting up the controllers, beside controller 1, the box should be lit up green meaning the controller has been detected and it working. Try moving your controls around and testing them out. You can customize your controller in the program but it should be automatically set up.

Head into steam and the controller should work. If not, simply go to controller settings in the game and manually set it up.

If this does not work for you, I’m sorry, but it worked for me. If it doesn’t work, let me know and I can see if I can help.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Sony

Controller support is limited on Windows PCs. While the latest generation of console controllers will work out of the box with Windows, even last-generation gamepads like the PlayStation 3’s DualShock 3 require custom drivers.

A previous version of this article detailed the use of MotioninJoy to use your Sony PS3 controller as a joystick on your Windows PC. Unfortunately, MotioninJoy was a proprietary piece of software that turned into malware over the years. Luckily, you don’t have to infect your computer, as there is an open-source alternative in ScpToolkit. Don’t use MotioninJoy.

How to Install ScpToolkit

ScpToolkit has to modify some system drivers to make the controller work, so it’s not the safest install process. Proceed with caution, follow our instructions, and don’t click anything you don’t understand.

Download the latest release of ScpToolkit from the project’s Github page, open up the setup program, and agree to the Terms and Conditions—if you read them, of course. You’ll be shown a dialog with a list of install options:

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

You probably don’t need the Gamepad Analyzer and Debug Info Collector, but you should install everything else.

The installation process will take a few minutes. You should take this time to find your PS3 controller and plug it in with a USB cable. After the utility is done installing the toolkit, it will ask you to run the driver installer. Click “Run,” and you’ll be shown a list which should now include your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click the “Initialize All Connected Devices” button (don’t skip through with next button), let it install, and then click “Next.” This will configure the controller to be recognized as a PS3 controller, and install some drivers.

The next screen is for Bluetooth support, which you may not want because it requires a dedicated Bluetooth dongle to be “sacrificed.” Rightly so, there’s a huge “WARNING” label on this screen, because installing it to a wireless mouse dongle on accident will cause you to have a very bad time.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

If you really want wireless support, you’ll need to plug in the sacrificial dongle, make sure it’s the ONLY device in the list, and then click “Initialize All Connected Devices.”

Otherwise, feel free to hit “Next” and skip this process.

The next step is installing a virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver, which will trick Windows into thinking your PS3 controller is an Xbox 360 controller. This will make it work for more games.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

To install the driver, click “Install virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver” and click “Next.”

After that, ScpToolkit will want to install a Windows Service to handle communication with the controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click “Install Windows Service” and click “Next.” You’re now done, and you should be able to use your PS3 controller in any game that supports Xbox 360 controllers. That’s practically every game that supports a controller, so go nuts. You can also remap the controller’s buttons to make it work in other games.

RELATED: How to Remap any Controller to Keyboard Keys on Windows and MacOS

So I bought this PC/PS3 Controller that works for both PC and PS3. It works fine when playing Virtua Tennis 4 (on my PC), but how do I connect it to Skyrim? The only option I can see is for 360 controllers. Any help is appreciated!

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

6 Answers 6

Use the MotioninJoy DS3 tool, it comes with a Xbox 360 controller emulator and it works great. Just be sure to read the guide on how to install the PS3 control and enabling the emulator.

Xpadder works ok, but i’ve got noticeable lag, particularly with the R1 L1 buttons. It’s only a cheap gamepad though. Got gfriends spare PS3 dualshock so trying to set that up with motionjoy on 64-bit 7.

  • Install MotioninJoy
  • Open it up and click the device manager tab
  • Select your device and click load driver – be patient as this can take a while.
  • After it finished loading it will ask you to restart your computer.
  • After doing the restart open up MotioninJoy again (In the profiles tab) select Xbox 360 Controller Emulator and then click enable, done!

Open Skyrim and it will automatically recognize it.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

x360ce will emulate an XInput (read: 360 compatible) controller with any old DirectInput (read: any other controller in existence). It is a free, open source wrapper with a minimal footprint. I use it with my PC/PS2/PS3 controller with great success.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Getting your PS3 controller on PC wireless to work is a simple process that you can do on your own if you have all the right equipment. Generally, to get a PS3 controller on PC Windows to work, you need to plug the controller into the PC’s USB input and download a specific software that we’ll explain how to do. Even though most wireless PS3 controllers come packaged with a USB charge cable, PS3 owners can purchase a third-party charge cable ($1.50) if missing the component.

Here’s is a quick guide to connecting a PS3 controller to a PC, so you can start playing PS3 games on your computer without the mouse and keyboard. This process will allow you to use a PS3 controller on PC with Windows 8 and Windows 7. The process for doing this depends on if you want to use the controller wirelessly or with wired controller, but it’s essentially the same regardless of the controller.

Downloading the Better Program

You need to download the right software so your computer will recognize your PS3 controller. The best way to do this is by downloading software called Better DS3. After the software is downloaded, you just need to plug the controller in to start playing.

  1. Go to the Better DS3 website and download the driver configuration tool.
  2. After it downloads, open the resulting ZIP folder — titled “5.3
  3. Next, double-click the Better DS3 application to open the software.

Running the Program & Creating a Profile

After Better DS3 has been downloaded and installed, plug in your PS3 controller into the USB port of the PC. If you want to use the controller wirelessly, then connect the USB cable first to the PS3 controller, then the USB port of the computer. After the computer reads the controller, the device will appear on your computer.

After the controller is recognized, create a profile on your computer so the computer will know when you plug it in the future, this way eliminating having to keep setting up the controller every time you plug it in.

To create a profile, select the drop-down menu that is labeled “New” and select “XInput”. After that is complete, a new window will show you different options for customizing your controllers and how you want it to respond.

Syncing with Bluetooth

To sync you PS3 controller with Bluetooth, first you need to open the Better DS3 software and select “Bluetooth Pairing” button. Then unplug the charging cable connecting the PS3 controller to the PC. If the sync was done correctly, you can now game with your ps3 controller on PC Windows wirelessly.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Back in the day, you needed third party adapters or complicated USB hardware hacks to use the controllers from your game console with your PC. But thanks to a flexible design from Microsoft and some some enterprising hackers working on the PlayStation 3 gamepad, you can now easily use both controllers with your computer. While the Xbox 360 gamepad is extremely easy to set up, the PS3 gamepad is simple, but requires a few extra steps.

Xbox 360
If you have a wired Xbox 360 gamepad, you can just download the driver straight from Microsoft and plug it in. It will show up in the Windows Device Manager in the Control Panel, and you’ll be able to use all the buttons, sticks, and pads, just like you would on your Xbox.

If you have the wireless controller, you’ll need purchase the Xbox 360 Wireless Gaming Adapter ($10-$20 online). It’s a USB dongle that lets you connect your Xbox 360 controller to your PC using the same wireless protocol the Xbox 360 uses.

PlayStation 3
For PlayStation 3 controllers, you need to use a third-party driver called MotioninJoy. The bad news is that it isn’t as polished or integrated as the Xbox 360 controller driver. The good news, though, is that if your PC supports Bluetooth, you can play wirelessly without buying a USB adapter. Here’s what you need to know:

First, download and install the MotioninJoy driver. Next, run the installation program and launch the DS3 Tool. Plug the PS3 controller into the USB port with a mini-USB-to-USB cable and click the Driver Manager tab. Depending on whether you have a Sixaxis or Dual Shock 3 controller, one or two devices will be listed under “Hardware Location.” Check everything under that section and click “Load Driver.” The software will load the driver for the controller, which will require your confirmation (and might warn you that it’s an unsigned driver).

Once that’s done, go to the Profiles tab to select the type of controller you have (PlayStation 3) and change settings like button layout and vibration. You can remap each button on the controller in the Options link next to the controller name, so you can set it to play however you want.

If you want to use the controller wirelessly, there’s one last step: Click on the BluetoothPair tab and click Pair Now. The controller will then pair with your Bluetooth adapter, letting you use it without the USB cable. If you want to go back to using it with your PS3, you’ll have to plug it into your system and pair it again.

For another way to play games on your PC with a gamepad, read our review of the OnLive Wireless Controller.

2.Install the drivers
3.After drivers are installed ds3 tool will automatically run
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

4.Close ds3 tool
5.Connect PS3 contoller
6. Run ds3 tool as administrator
7. Go to Driver Manager tab
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc
8. Check all the boxes in Driver Managger
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

9. Then Click Load Driver

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

10. You will probably get this

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

11. Just wait until ALL of them are installed
12. If all are installed correctly it should look like this

13.The MotionJoy should have a check mark
14. Then Head over to Home Tab
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Though it’s a platform that began with the joystick the dominant control method, over the past 20 years the keyboard and mouse overtook it to become the only way to play most games on the PC. Which is a shame, because there are a lot of them that play better with a control pad.

This has become especially true over the past 3-4 years, as the PC has started to get a lot more ports of console titles, thanks to both the relative ease of bringing code over and the increasing popularity of Steam leading to a bigger market.

While the keyboard and mouse remain the best means of controlling many titles, especially PC staples like FPS and strategy, there are plenty of other options – from Dark Souls to Remember Me to DMC to Dirt 2 – that are really crying out for a pad.

You could go and buy a custom PC control pad, but that would be stupid. Chances are you already own a control pad you can use on the PC: the ones that came with your Xbox 360, PS3 or Nintendo console.

XBOX 360

Most of you will probably be aware of this, but just in case you’re not: you can use Xbox 360 control pads on a PC. With a little help.

Standard wireless pads won’t automatically connect to a PC, since your computer won’t be able to read the controller’s proprietary wireless tech. Microsoft do, however, offer a dongle you can buy, which plugs into a USB port on your PC. They run about $US20 officially, though you can of course get third-party alternatives for less (though your performance results may vary). If you want to go down this path, Microsoft has a handy guide on configuring your controller here.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

The better option, though, is to spend the cash on a custom “Xbox 360 Controller For Windows“. It’s a wired controller with the same 360 design that’s custom-made for the PC (though it also works on your Xbox 360 if you feel like disconnecting it and moving it around). I bought one when they first came out and it instantly became my primary controller, even on console, because occasionally having to move it between platforms was worth never again having to deal with 360 pad’s woeful battery life.

With one of these, all you need to do is plug it in and you’re set. Many games are even coded these days to automatically switch your control method from keyboard+mouse to control pad the instant the PC detects you plugging the pad in.

Let’s say you prefer the PS3’s DualShock 3, though. Or don’t already own an Xbox 360. The good news is you can get it running on a PC as well. The bad news is it’s a little more complicated.

The DualShock 3 communicates via Bluetooth, which your PC will be able to understand, but only if it’s got some means of Bluetooth connectivity. Laptops will probably have this already, but if you’ve got a desktop, you’ll need to go get a Bluetooth dongle (you can get decent USB ones for around $US10-20).

Once your PC has a means of talking to the DualShock 3, you’ll need the software to get things actually running. That software is called MotioninJoy, and if you’ve never messed around with this kind of stuff, before, it can seem a tiny bit complicated.

Download MotioninJoy from here.

After you’ve downloaded MotioninJoy, you’ve got some setting up to do. This video by IndeedGaming is probably the best available showing you every step you need to follow.

When that’s done, you should be good to go!

WII U

This isn’t exactly an ideal option, but if you’ve only got a Wii U, you can get the big Wii U controller working on a PC using a download that one of our readers, Chris, put together a few months back.

You can download the files necessary here.

A better option for Wii U owners, though, at least if you’ve got one, is to use the Wii U Pro Controller. TeHaxor69 made a good one earlier in the year that you can download here, while Screptilez’s tutorial video below should guide you through the process.

I’ve left the Wii off because the Wii Remote’s usefulness for the kinds of games you’d be playing on PC is limited, but if you absolutely must try it out, Instructables has a good tutorial here.

If you own more than one console, you’ve got a choice to make. It should be an easy one, as the Xbox 360 controller has emerged as almost the default option for the PC; most games that support pads, for example, will show button prompts for Microsoft’s controller.

But, hey, in case you want to try something else, at least you now know how to do it!

How to use the PS3 Camera on PC. PlayStation Eye (trademarked PLAYSTATION Eye) PlayStation Eye (trademarked PLAYSTATION Eye) is a digital camera device much like the webcam and is available for PlayStation 3. PlayStation 3. It uses computer vision and motion recognition to process the images captured from the Camera. It allows gamers to engage in games through motion and detection of colours in addition to sound via its inbuilt mic array. It’s the successor of the EyeToy that was released for PlayStation 2, launched in 2003.

The peripheral was launched as a package along with the game The Eye of Judgment in the United States on October 23 2007, and on the continent of Japan and Australia on October 25 2007. It was released in Europe on October 26 2007.

It was also released as a stand-alone product. PlayStation Eye was also released as a stand-alone item across Europe, the United States, Europe, and Australia. EyeToy creator Richard Marks stated that the EyeToy was used as a reference for the design of the rough cost. PlayStation Camera for PlayStation 4 followed the device.

A webcam lets a person sit on a screen to connect with the world visually. Numerous companies produce webcams specifically for computers. However, PlayStation 3 owners who have the PS3 EyeToy have the advantage of a camera that has motion sensing technology. This PS3 EyeToy camera can be utilized on a computer, provided that drivers for the specific device are installed. The process takes just some minutes to complete and won’t cause damage to either the EyeToy cameras or computer.

What's in It for You

How To Use The PS3 Camera On PC

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Click on the Windows “Start” menu, choose “Control Panel,” choose “Hardware and Sound”, and select”Hardware and Sound”, then click the “Device Manager” link under the Devices and Printers section.
  2. Connect the USB cable of the PS3 EyeToy camera to a USB port on your computer. Select “Cancel” if a dialogue box pops up.
  3. Locate it by searching for the PS3 EyeToy camera in the Device Manager under “Imaging devices” with an exclamation point. Note whether it is listed as a PS3 EyeToy camera is listed as a Logitech or Namtai model.
  4. Download and unzip on your desktop PS3 EyeToy camera driver compatible with the model you have selected (see the Resources).
  5. Click right-click to select the PS3 EyeToy camera visible within the Device Manager. Choose “Update Driver” from the pop-up menu. Keep a close eye on the update wizard starts.
  6. Follow the instructions to download the appropriate drivers. Navigate to a relevant PS3 EyeToy camera driver that was downloaded once the wizard informs you that it’s the right time to install it. Select the “Finish” button to end the wizard after it is finished installing.
  7. Restart your computer and then use your PS3 EyeToy camera as a webcam on your PC.

Instructions

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

1. Connect the minor part of the USB cable to your motion controller and the bigger end of the USB cable to the port on the back of the PS3 console.

2. Use”PS”. Press the “PS” button precisely in the middle of your motion control.

3. Use the “X” button on the motion controller to confirm the connection in your PS3.

4. Disconnect the USB cable from the motion control. Remove from the USB cable and connect it to your PS3.

5. Make use of the motion controller just like you would usually.

Conclusion

PS3 camera access via PC is a fantastic feature that lets you connect with your loved ones. Sony Computer Entertainment developed a remarkable feature that lets you travel to other places through virtual reality using the PS3 webcam or Camera. Furthermore, it lets you transmit voice with much lower background noise.

Considering these, we’ve reviewed all PS3 Cameras for PC in-depth within this post. It will also explain the features of the PS3 Camera and whether you can use it on a computer or not. In addition, we’ve explained step-by-step directions on how to use and open the PS3 Camera on a PC to improve communication speed and efficiency. Additionally, we have described the steps needed to broadcast using webcams or a PS3 Camera or webcam on a PC.

This way, you’ll be able to enjoy video chats, webchats, and record games, the rest of it. Give it some time and read up regarding the PS3 Camera on PC. PS3 Camera on PC in the shortest amount of time.

Do you find it hard to steer your mouse and hit the right keyboard key to play PC games? If you happen to have PS3 controllers, why not use them as Joysticks to play games?

Before we begin, head over to MotionInJoy website to install the required drivers for Windows. The installer comes for both x86 (32-bit operating system) and x64 (64-bit operating system), so make sure you download the right installer for your system. If you are in doubt, just go to Start -> Control Panel –> System, to verify your system settings.

Once you have downloaded the installer, unzip it, and execute the .exe file to start the installation. The installation begins with a standard welcome screen,

… and ends with asking you to run the software.

Plugin your PS3 controller to your USB port, and you should see a small icon on your system tray, showing you that Windows is installing drivers for your controller. At this point, even though your controller will be recognized in the “Game Controllers”, Windows will not recognized the buttons movement.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Open the DS3 tool, and press the “Load Driver” button.

Windows will warn you that it can’t verify the publisher of the driver; don’t worry, MotionInJoy’s drivers are safe for us to install.

Your PS3 controller is ready for use when you see a message: “SUCCESS: Install Completed”.

Click the “Profile” button, and you should see that your controller appears under the “Connected game controller(s)” drop down list. You can click on the Vibration Testing button, to test that Windows recognizes your controller.

We recommend that you open your “Game Controller Settings” from Start Menu → Devices and Printers → right click on “HID-compliant game controller” → select “Game controller setting”, to calibrate your PS3 controller.

Click on the “Properties” button to calibrate your controller.

Guess what, MotionInJoy not only enable you to use your PS3 controller via USB, you can even use it as Joystick via Bluetooth. Click the “BlueToothPair” button, and click the “Pair Now” button, and your Windows should pair with your PS3 controller.

Disconnect your controller from the USB cable, head back to the profile page, and click the “Vibration Testing” button. If your controller is vibrating, this means that your PS3 controller is now connected to your Bluetooth. Now you can sit back, relax, and kill those zombies with your PS3 controllers.

MotionInJoy works with games that support JoySticks, and they have verified the software with a bunch of games. Feel free to share your experience with MotionInJoy with the other fellow readers in the comments section.

Bluetooth is a common wireless technology used in mobile phones, computers and Sony’s PlayStation 3. For PS3, the console’s peripherals, including its Dualshock 3 and Sixaxis gaming controllers, remote control, keyboard, mouse and headset communicate via Bluetooth technology. The use of Bluetooth in the PS3 should allow for universal connectivity for PC gaming; however, the PS3’s wireless gaming controllers are not compatible with a PC without installing custom drivers and software.

  • Bluetooth is a common wireless technology used in mobile phones, computers and Sony’s PlayStation 3.
  • The use of Bluetooth in the PS3 should allow for universal connectivity for PC gaming; however, the PS3’s wireless gaming controllers are not compatible with a PC without installing custom drivers and software.

Download and install a third-party software package, such as MotionJoy. The package should contain all the drivers and software needed to allow Bluetooth communications between the wireless controllers and the PC.

Open the Windows “Start” menu. Click on “All Programs”, “MotionJoy” and then right-click on “Install Bluetooth Driver”. Select “Run as Administrator”. Notepad will open, alerting you when the driver has been installed.

Click on the Windows “Start” menu, followed by “Control Panel”, “Printers and Other Devices” and “Game Controllers”. The new Bluetooth controller should appear on the list. Do not close the controller window.

Connect the USB cable to a USB port on the computer and the mini-B end to your Dualshock 3 or Sixaxis wireless controller. A USB game controller now appears in the game controller window.

  • Click on the Windows “Start” menu, followed by “Control Panel”, “Printers and Other Devices” and “Game Controllers”.
  • A USB game controller now appears in the game controller window.

Close the controller window and disconnect the USB cord from the controller. The drivers have been successfully installed.

Locate MotionJoy’s “DS3 TOOL”, which is located under “Start”, “All Programs”, then “MotionJoy”. After the program loads, click “Pairing”.

Press the PS button on the connected wireless controller. Your Bluetooth controller is connected.

Load a PC game with gamepad controller support. Your PS3’s wireless controller is fully functional within the game.

You must open the DS3 TOOL every time you want to use your PS3 controller on your PC; this allows it to successfully pair with the Bluetooth on your PC. At driver install, if you are using a 64-bit PC, press F8 while installing the Bluetooth drivers and select “Disable Driver Signature Enforcement”. This can prevent driver conflicts that can arise.

WARNING

As long as the pairing tool is open, you can press the PS button on the wireless controller to disconnect and reconnect the wireless controller from the PC. However, if you disconnect it and use it on your PS3, you must pair it again to use it on your PC. If you have multiple Bluetooth adaptors installed, then you will need to disable them.

Can you use a wireless Guitar Hero controller on PC?

All Guitar Hero games come with a guitar controller that works both on the console that the game was created for and on the PC. This controller can be used to play any game that has the ability to utilize a USB controller. You can connect your Guitar Hero controller to your PC to extend your control’s use to PC games.

How do you connect a wireless Guitar Hero controller to a ps3?

  1. Connect the wireless receiver dongle to USB port 1 on the front of the station.
  2. Turn on the controller by pressing the PS button on the front panel of the drum set.
  3. Press and hold the connect button on the top of the wireless receiver dongle.

How do I get my computer to recognize my ps3 controller?

How to Recognize a PS3 Controller on a PC

  1. Plug the mini USB charging cable into the PS3 controller, then plug the other end of the USB cable into a USB port on your computer. …
  2. Wait while Windows scans its driver files for a driver matching the new hardware. …
  3. Run the driver installation program specific to your PS3 controller type (see Resources).

Can you use a ps2 Guitar Hero controller on PC?

You might have noticed there’s no way to insert a PlayStation 2 controller into your PC. This is easily solved by buying a PlayStation 2 to USB converter. This little piece of hardware is easy to find both on eBay and in your local hardware store.

Can you play guitar hero on PC?

Several of the Guitar Hero games have been released for Windows and Mac, including Guitar Hero III, Guitar Hero: World Tour and Guitar Hero: Aerosmith, and USB-based instruments should work natively with them. None of the Rock Band games have been released for PC, however, and intercompatibility is generally bad.

Why won’t my ps3 Guitar connect?

A guitar connection issue may occur if the batteries are nearly drained. Turn the guitar controller power switch to the “On” position on the back. Plug the wireless guitar dongle into the USB port on the PS3. The dongle must be the matching one for the guitar controller.

Can you play guitar hero with a controller ps3?

Short answer, no, regular controller gameplay was left out from Guitar Hero: World Tour and every Guitar Hero game after that.

How do you connect a dongle to a guitar?

Turn off your console. Turn on the controller, then turn the console back on. Hit the Connect button on the USB dongle and hit the PS button on the controller again, and it should connect. That did the trick that night, just wanted to say thanks.

How do I connect my Dualshock 3 to my PC?

2. Important step: plug your Dualshock 3 into your PC with a mini-USB cable. Now we can start making it work. Bluetooth installation note: if you also want to be able to use the controller wirelessly, make sure you have a Bluetooth dongle plugged in or your motherboard’s Bluetooth enabled.

How do you put a ps3 controller in pairing mode?

Here’s how to sync a PS3 controller to a PlayStation 3 console:

  1. Turn on your PlayStation 3.
  2. Connect a mini USB cable to your controller.
  3. Connect the other end of the cable to your PS3.
  4. Push the PlayStation button in the middle of the controller to turn it on.
  5. Wait for the lights on the controller to stop flashing.

Does ps3 controller work on Windows 10?

After disabling driver signature enforcement, your Motionjoy drivers should work just fine. After you set up your drivers, follow the instructions from Motionjoy, and you’ll be able to use PlayStation 3 controller on your Windows 10 computer.

Can I connect my ps3 controller to my laptop?

If you want to use a PS3 controller on your Windows laptop, it can be done. You can set up the controller to work through a USB or wirelessly. To set up the controller via USB, you will need to plug in the controller. When you do so, Windows will recognize the controller and attempt to install different drivers.

Ever want to use an Xbox360 controller, or a PS3 controller for your PC edition Minecraft? Here is how!

FOR XBOX360 CONTROLLER:
Go to this website,and download Minecontrol. Plug in your controller, o pen Minecontrol,and then run it. After Minecontrol fully loads up, you should be able to use RS to move the mouse, if you cannot, don’t worry. Click the tab on Minecontrol that says device , and select your controller. Keep Minecontrol opened while you play.

PS3 controllers are different, but Minecontrol can still be used for it.

FOR PS3 CONTROLLER
Go to this website and download Minecontrol. You must also download DS3 tool , which is here , after you get to the site, download the latest version that fits your bit range. After you download it, down in the lower left corner of your screen should be the download, depending if you have Windows 7 or later. When the download is complete, click the small arrow on it and then click open. Then what you need to do is click DS3 tool , which will be an application type, go through the wizard installer, after you complete the wizard, a small window should show up that is mostly green. When this window comes up, plug in your USB port charger of your PS3 controller into your computer while it is connected to the controller. Then the orange loading bar should be going up. While it is loading click the bullet that says Xbox360 controller emulator . Then click the enable button. What this will do is disguise your PS3 controller as an Xbox360 controller so it will work for Minecontrol. After that, minimize DS3 tool ,open up Minecontrol and run it. When Minecontrol fully loads up, you should be able to move the mouse with the analog stick, if you cannot, don’t worry. Just click the tab that says device , and select your controller. Keep both; DS3 tool and Minecontrol open as you play.

It causes very little lag, hardly noticeable.

You can re-arrange the controls to your liking in the menus of Minecontrol. Also in DS3 tool you can convert the PS3 controls to
Xbox360 controls.

Joined Sep 12, 2009 Messages 12,510 Trophies 2 Age 36 Location Cyprus, originally from Toronto Website modmii.github.io XP 6,804 Country

  • Oct 10, 2012
  • #1

How to Use a PS3 Controller to play Star Wars Battlefront 2 on your PC

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

I decided to make my own button profile for this awesome game cuz everything else I found online was garbage or I couldn’t get it working. The controls match the controls for the PS2 perfectly!

Included in the above download is an Xpadder controller profile for the PS3 controller as well as a game profile for Battlefront2. As a bonus I’ve also included a "Windows" profile so you can use your PS3 controller to control your mouse if you wish.

I’ve also included a READ ME in the download that should explain everything you need to do (which isn’t much) to get it working. Here is a copy and paste of the Battlefront2 READ ME.

Star Wars Battlefront II Xpadder Profile for PS3 Controller
by XFlak

Installation
============
First, get MotioninJoy installed on your PC, connect your PS3 controller either via USB or bluetooth.
On the Driver manager tab, load\install the drivers for the usb ports of your choosing.
Back on the profiles tab, select DX-Default (Playstation 3), and click "=> Options"
Next to L1, select Button 14
Next to L2, select Button 15
The last four items are for "tilt", change all four of those to "None"

Then just make sure MotioninJoy and XPadder (with Battlefront2 profile) are running when you launch the game.

Optional: You can create a link to start Xpadder automatically with the game by following these steps.

1) Create a shortcut to XPadder on desktop and rename it "Battlefront II – Xpadder"

2) Go to the properties of "Battlefront II – Xpadder.lnk" and ADD the following to the end of the Target:
"Battlefront2" "%userprofile%\Desktop\Battlefront II.lnk" /M
so that it looks like this:
". PATH. \Xpadder [5.7].exe" "Battlefront2" "%userprofile%\Desktop\Battlefront II.lnk" /M

Optional: Change icon of "Battlefront II – Xpadder.lnk" to match "Battlefront II" and hide the original "Battlefront II.lnk"

USAGE
=====
Start the game using "Battlefront2" Xpadder profile, then it will automatically switch controls when entering vehicles or turrets.
To manually switch between Battlefront Controls and Battlefront-Starfighter Controls (in case they get out of sync by hitting
triangle without being near a vehicle) hit left on the PS or triangle buttons again to switch the controls back.

You can also use up on the d-pad to use "triangle" without changing to vehicle controls (i.e. to change at CP).

You can view a diagram of all the controls as I’ve configured them from within Xpadder.

Star Wars Battlefront 2 Infantry Controls

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Star Wars Battlefront 2 Starfighter Controls

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

There are a couple things that you will need that is not included in the above download link.
The first is MotioninJoy: It’s free and is still being updated so just grab the latest version from http://www.motioninjoy.com
The second is Xpadder itself, you can buy it for $10 bucks or so, but there are cracked versions floating around the net if you just want to try it out before you buy it.

Also, I wanted to point out that you can play online multiplayer with this game (and many others) for free using tunngle. Half the reason I’m sharing this is cuz I hope it will help grow the Battlefront 2 tunngle community! So hopefully I’ll see some of you in the tunngle Battlefront 2 room\server!

edit:
On a sidenote, MotioninJoy can also allow your PS3 controller to emulate an xbox 360 controller. So you can use MotioninJoy’s Xbox 360 Controller emulator (without Xpadder) to play games like Borderlands 2, Blur, etc.

edit:
if you have audioloop errors like I did, this is the solution

How to Use a PS3 Controller on a PC
All Credit goes to Jonathan, from Gamefront, for this!

1. Download MotioninJoy

Motion in Joy is a Chinese company that makes a relatively straightforward utility for using PS3 controllers with PCs. Your first step is to download their client from GameFronts fast, free servers.

MotioninJoy 32-bit Client
[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

MotioninJoy 64-bit Client
[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

2. Unzip and Install the program
The expanded archive will create an .exe file with the same filename. Run it.

3. Run DS3_tool and plug in your PS3 controller
When the installation completes, therell be a check-box prompting you to run DS3_tool, the Motion in Joy client. Leave it checked when you exit the installer. When the program opens, you should see this screen:

[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

When you plug in your PS3 controller to the USB port, Windows will recognize it, and begin installing drivers. This is misleading even though the installation completes, and the controller shows up in the Device Manager, it will not work.

4. Load the driver
From the screen pictured above, click on Load driver. At this point, Windows security will ask you to verify that you want to allow the driver installation process to continue. Since the new versions of Motion in Joy include signed drivers, this step is easier than it used to be. Assent to the installation and you should see a rapid series of messages in the DS3_tool window, pictured below:

[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

If you cant find the Load driver button, or you accidentally end up in a different part of the DS3_tool utility, click on Driver Manager to return.

5. Configure the controller
With the driver loaded, your next step will be to configure the controller for use. Click on the Profiles tab, pictured below. In order to take full advantage of the DualShock 3s twin analog sticks and many buttons, youll want to select Playstation 3, as shown in the picture. Once youve selected that setting, hit Enable, then Vibration testing. If youve followed these steps correctly, you should feel your controller vibrate. Motion in Joy also provides a convenient Game Controller Panel button, which whisks you directly you to the Windows controller calibration utility. You can use it to ensure that all of your controllers buttons are functioning correctly.

[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

6. Et voila! Enjoy gaming with your PC-connected PS3 Controller!
Some addition configuration and button-mapping may be required to get it working with your game of choice

[Ed. Note: The below instructions do not work for Windows 7 machines]

One industrious modder out there has created a simple program so you can use your PS3s SIXAXIS controller on a PC like a game pad. Heres what youll need to do:

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Harry Guinness
How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless cameraHarry Guinness
Writer

Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero. Read more.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Mirrorless cameras are proving more and more popular. As they’ve developed in the last few years, they’ve become really useful in certain circumstances.

One of the really interesting features of mirrorless cameras is, due to their design, you can use new and old lenses from different manufacturers with an appropriate adapter. This is thanks to the “flange distance” which is the distance between the lens mount and the film plane. Most DSLRs and SLRs have very similar flange distances (around 45mm) which means that any adapter would need to be unworkably thin. Mirrorless cameras, however, have a flange distance of about 20mm. This give manufacturers a lot of room to play with. So, let’s look at how to go about using any lens on your mirrorless camera.

Buy Third Party Lenses With the Correct Mount

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

The simplest way to use different lenses with your mirrorless camera doesn’t actually need any adapter: just buy lenses from third-party manufacturers that come with the correct mount. For example, Sony’s Alpha series of cameras use the E-mount. Sigma, Tokina, Voigtlander, and Zeiss all make a range of E-mount lenses that will just work with your camera.

One thing to watch out for; some of the lenses, like the Zeiss Loxia 35mm f/2, will be E-mount but manual focus. This means you won’t be able to use your camera’s autofocus features.

Unfortunately, the range of third-party lenses that are available for mirrorless cameras still doesn’t come near the amount available to DSLRs.

Buy a Cheap Adapter for Old Manual Focus Lenses

Old manual focus lens with manual aperture controls are the easiest lenses to get working with your mirrorless camera. The adapters are really just dumb bits of metal (or plastic) that adjust the flange distance so that the lens can focus on the mirrorless camera’s film plane. You won’t have autofocus or electronic aperture control, but otherwise they’ll work just fine.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

This means that pretty much any lens made before 1985 (after that, camera manufacturers started really getting into electronic controls) is your best bet. You can also use Nikon and Pentax autofocus lenses that still have aperture rings, such as the Nikon AF FX NIKKOR 50mm f/1.8D, but again, you’ll have to use them without autofocus.

The combination of adapters, lenses, and cameras is way too wide here for me to make any solid recommendations. Instead, you should try and find a well reviewed, inexpensive metal adapter that is compatible with the lens mount and the camera mount. For example, this $14.95 adapter from Fotodiox fits the bill perfectly for connecting the Nikon lens I mentioned earlier to a Sony Alpha camera.

Buy a “Smart” Adapter for Modern Lenses

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

If you want to use modern autofocus lenses with electronic controls with your mirrorless cameras, then a dumb bit of metal just won’t cut it. Instead, you need to look for adapters that also connect the electronics in the lens and camera body.

There are a wide range of smart adapters available, but the most popular combination is connecting Canon’s EF-mount lenses to Sony’s E-mount mirrorless cameras. If you’re considering buying a mirrorless system and want to have the most options, that’s the way to go. At the low end, you can get a Fotodiox Pro Fusion Adapter for $99.95, while at the high end there is the Metabones Canon EF Lens to Sony E Mount Smart Adapter (Fifth Generation) for $399. Both adapters do largely the same thing, although the Metabones adapter has a few extra features to give you more control over how the lens and camera work together.

For every other combination, I’d recommend you look for a Fotodiox adapter if you’re budget conscious or a Metabones adapter if you want something closer to the top end. If you can’t find one, then the best advice I can give is do a bit of research and buy the best reviewed adapter at the price you want to pay. Expect to pay between $100 and $500 for most set ups.

A Note on Speed Boosters

As well as straight up adapters, if you’re researching how to connect different lenses to mirrorless cameras you’ll run into “Speed Boosters”. As well as connecting the lens to the camera, they also increase its maximum aperture. There are, however, several downsides.

First, speed boosters are a lot more expensive than regular adapters. The Metabones Canon EF to Sony E-Mount Speed Booster (Fifth Generation) costs $649, a full $250 more than the regular adapter.

Second, speed boosters only work with crop sensor (APS-C) and Micro 4/3 mirrorless cameras. If you have a full-frame mirrorless camera you will need to use it in APS-C compatibility mode which digitally reduces the size of the sensor’s capture area.

If you have an APS-C or Micro 4/3 mirrorless camera, and don’t mind the extra expense, go ahead and consider getting a speed booster adapter for a little more low light performance. On the other hand, if you have (or you’re planning to upgrade to) a full-frame mirrorless camera, or the price seems a little silly, just get a regular adapter.

  • › Should You Use a Lens Adapter with a Mirrorless Camera?
  • › How to Move to a Dedicated Camera After Using a Smartphone Camera
  • › Should You Switch to a Mirrorless Camera?
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera Harry Guinness
Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero.
Read Full Bio »
Harry Guinness
How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless cameraHarry Guinness
Writer

Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero. Read more.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Canon

Mirrorless cameras aren’t the future, they’re the present. If you’re switching from an older DSLR, though, the obvious thing to do is just buy an adapter so you can keep using your old gear.

The Advantages of a Lens Adapter

The biggest advantage of lens adapters is pretty clear: they enable you to use your existing collection of lenses on your new camera. With many mirrorless cameras starting at over $1,000, anything that offsets the cost of switching is much appreciated. After all, mirrorless lenses cost as much as the new camera body.

For most photographers, simultaneously switching systems and replacing all their DSLR lenses with their mirrorless equivalents would cost more than they can justify spending.

So, as the upside of a lens adapter is pretty clear, are there any downsides?

Why Lens Adapters Are Necessary

Mirrorless cameras aren’t just DSLRs without the mirror—they’re a totally overhauled platform. Both Canon and Nikon took the opportunity to radically redesign their decades-old lens mounts, and with good reason. Canon debuted the EF mount in 1987, while Nikon’s F mount has been around since 1959.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

The adapter is actually wider than the lens because the new R mount is bigger. Canon

The most noticeable change is that the lens mounts are now bigger, and the rear lens elements sit closer to the image sensor. Of course, the actual mount connection has changed, too.

This means lens adapters are necessary because the lens mounts on mirrorless cameras are entirely different from the DSLR mounts they succeed. Canon’s RF mount isn’t just an updated EF—it’s new.

Lens Adapters Add Size, Weight, and Hassle

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Nikon

Lens adapters add physical size and weight to your lenses. It’s not a huge amount, but if you’re buying a mirrorless camera because you want a smaller, lighter setup, this is something to consider. For example, Canon’s most basic EF-EOS R adapter adds an extra inch and four ounces to any lens you use. Nikon’s FTZ adapter adds a bit more weight and bulk because of its tripod mount.

In addition to the size and weight penalty, a lens adapter is simply one more thing you have to remember to take with you on a shoot. If you forget it, you won’t be able to take any photos.

Compatibility Issues

If you switch from a Canon DSLR to a Canon mirrorless camera, and also use a Canon lens adapter, things are pretty sweet. You should be able to use all your lenses happily. If not, though, things get a bit more complicated.

Even if you switch from a Nikon DSLR to a Nikon mirrorless camera, and use a Nikon lens adapter, there are some compatibility issues. Most newer lenses should be fine, as they have built-in autofocus motors. However, because the adapter doesn’t have one, Nikon’s AF and AF-D lenses are manual focus only.

With some older lenses, there’s also no automatic aperture control, which means no electronic metering, automatic exposure modes, or EXIF data.

And that’s even if you stay with the same brand. If you want to mount a Nikon DSLR lens to a Canon mirrorless camera, you’ll need a pricey adapter to get even a fully manual experience.

With Canon, though, there are EF-to-other-brand adapters available for pretty much every platform. Photographer Ken Rockwell even claimed he’s had better results using Canon’s DSLR lenses instead of Nikon’s on his Nikon mirrorless.

Put simply, though, just because an adapter exists doesn’t mean you’ll have an easy (or pleasant) time switching—especially if you’re mixing brands. Generally, cheaper adapters will give you only manual control. They can also prevent features like image stabilization from working.

Make sure you research the specific trade-offs you’ll have to accept before committing to a new system.

Autofocus Might Be Slower

DSLRs and mirrorless cameras autofocus a bit differently. DSLRs have dedicated focus sensors, while mirrorless cameras generally rely on sensors built into the imaging sensor. Naturally, mirrorless lenses are designed to work with the focus on mirrorless cameras, while DSLR lenses are designed to work with DSLRs.

This means if you’re using a lens with an adapter, you might notice it autofocuses slower than it did on your DSLR or with an equivalent mirrorless lens. This is especially noticeable when you’re trying to focus on fast-moving subjects or action shots.

Of course, it’s always ideal if you can replace your DSLR lenses with the equivalent mirrorless lenses for your new mirrorless camera. Unless you’ve got a lot of cash to burn, though, a lens adapter can definitely be a worthwhile trade-off.

  • › The Best Mirrorless Cameras of 2022
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera Harry Guinness
Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero.
Read Full Bio »

Apple’s AirPods “just work” with iPhones thanks to their W1 chip, but they’re also standard Bluetooth headphones. That means they work with any device that supports Bluetooth audio—even Android phones.

What Is Apple’s W1 Chip?

The pairing process won’t be as effortless as pairing with an iPhone, and the connection may not be quite as solid, but they’ll work with anything from an Android phone or Windows PC to other Apple devices like an Apple TV. There’s also an easy pairing process if you’re using a Mac or iPad.

How to Pair Your AirPods With a Mac or iPad

If you’ve already paired your AirPods with your iPhone, this pairing status will sync between your iPhone and any iPads and Macs you have on your account thanks to iCloud. For this to work, you have to be signed into the iPad or Mac with the same Apple ID you use on your iPhone. For Macs, you must have Handoff enabled.

Older Macs that don’t support Handoff can’t take advantage of this easy pairing process, and you’ll have to manually pair it with them using Bluetooth. This pairing status also doesn’t sync to Apple TVs, so you’ll have to use Bluetooth to pair AirPods with an Apple TV, too.

If everything is set up properly, you can simply select your AirPods like any other audio device from your iPad or Mac. First, ensure either your AirPods case is open, the AirPods are out of the case, or that they’re in your ears. If they’re in the case and the case is closed, they won’t be available as an audio device option.

On an iPad, open the Control Center, tap the audio wave icon at the top right corner of the music controls or long-press the music controls and tap the device switcher icon, and select your AirPods in the list of audio devices.

On a Mac, click the volume icon on your Mac’s menu bar and select your AirPods in the list of available devices or head to Apple menu > System Preferences > Sound and choose the AirPods. You can also enable the volume icon on your Mac’s menu bar from here by checking the “Show volume in menu bar” box, if it isn’t already enabled.

How to Pair Your AirPods With an Android Phone, Windows PC, Apple TV, or Anything Else

To pair your AirPods with any other device—or an older Mac, if you don’t meet the above requirements—you’ll just need to find the easy-to-miss pairing button on the AirPods charging case.

Look on the back of your AirPods case. See that faint silver circle near the bottom, just above the Lightning port? That’s the “setup button” you need to pair your AirPods with other devices where the W1 chip can’t pair it automatically.

To place your AirPods in pairing mode, here’s what you need to do:

Place both your AirPods in the charging case.

Open the lid on the case. You’ll see the light come on, indicating the charging status.

Press and hold the circular button on the back of your AirPods case. The light inside the case will begin to blink white. This indicates that your AirPods are in pairing mode.

While the white light is flashing, your AirPods will be “discoverable”. In other words, they’ll appear as a peripheral you can pair from your Bluetooth settings, just like any other Bluetooth headphones or speakers. For example:

Android: Go to Settings and tap the “Bluetooth” option under Wireless & networks. Ensure Bluetooth is enabled and you’ll see the AirPods as an available device here.

Windows 10: Head to Settings > Devices > Bluetooth & other devices > Add Bluetooth or other device > Bluetooth. Select your AirPods in the list of nearby devices.

Windows 7: Head to Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers > Add a device. Choose your AirPods.

Mac: Click the Apple menu and head to System Preferences > Bluetooth. Select your AirPods in the list and click “Pair”.

Apple TV: Navigate to Settings > Remotes and Devices > Bluetooth. Pick your AirPods in the list.

Other Devices With Bluetooth: Just navigate to the Bluetooth settings screen where you can view and connect Bluetooth devices. Your AirPods will appear as an option here like any other Bluetooth headphones would.

If you take a little while to find the Bluetooth options, your AirPods might leave pairing mode and you’ll see the white blinking light stop. Just long-press the circular setup button again and your AirPods will re-enter pairing mode and be discoverable from your other devices once again.

Once they’re connected, your AirPods will function as normal Bluetooth headphones with whatever device they’re paired to.

How to Reconnect Your AirPods to Your iPhone or iPad

Your AirPods will be disconnected from your iPhone after you pair them with another non-iOS device. You’ll need to reconnect them to your iPhone to use them with your iPhone once again.

To do this, first place your AirPods back in their case. Head to your iPhone’s home screen, open the AirPods case, and hold it near your iPhone. (This same process works on an iPad, if you want to pair your AirPods with an iPad instead of an iPhone.)

You’ll see a “Not Your AirPods” message appear on your screen. Tap “Connect.” You’ll then be prompted to press and hold the circular button on the back of the case. Release the button when “Connecting” appears on your screen and they’ll be automatically reconnected to your iPhone.

Commercial fashion photographer and teacher, Mark Wallace enjoys sharing his wealth of experience in a fun and creative series of how-to videos.

Use Vintage Lenses with Your Mirrorless Camera: Exploring Photography with Mark Wallace

Learn how to mix and match vintage lenses (of almost any brand) with modern mirrorless cameras (of almost any brand). Add flavor to your photography with “flawed” used lenses. An old lens and a simple lens adapter is all you need to start having tons of fun.

Related Products at Adorama:

Additional Images courtesy of RJ ProtacioInstagram: @rjprotacio_photos

Like, share, and comment on the video below. let’s get the conversation started!

If you have questions, please share them below.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Are you the creator of this podcast?

and pick the featured episodes for your show.

Listen to Exploring Photography with Mark Wallace

RadioPublic

A free podcast app for iPhone and Android

  • User-created playlists and collections
  • Download episodes while on WiFi to listen without using mobile data
  • Stream podcast episodes without waiting for a download
  • Queue episodes to create a personal continuous playlist

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Connect with listeners

Podcasters use the RadioPublic listener relationship platform to build lasting connections with fans

Harry Guinness
How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless cameraHarry Guinness
Writer

Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero. Read more.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Buying lenses for your camera isn’t always simple. The two major manufacturers, Canon and Nikon, both have different options depending on whether you’re getting a lens for a full-frame or crop sensor camera. Even if you’ve got a Canon camera, you can’t be sure that any Canon lens will work.

Third parties, like Sigma and Tamron, make things even more confusing. They also make lenses that come with a choice of mount. You can get a Sigma 24-105 for either Canon or Nikon cameras.

Let’s break things down a bit and look at what mounts Canon and Nikon are currently using for their cameras and lenses.

Canon: EF, EF-S, EF-M

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Canon cameras use one of three lens mounts: the standard EF mount and then two derivatives, the EF-S mount and EF-M mount.

The EF mount was introduced by Canon in 1987. It’s what’s used by their modern full-frame cameras like the 5D Mark IV and the 6D Mark II. Every EF lens has an autofocus motor build into it—the EF stands for Electro-Focus. You can’t buy non-autofocus EF lenses from Canon, but third party manufacturers do make manual focus lenses that fit the EF mount. If a lens is listed as for Canon cameras without specifying further, it’s almost certainly an EF lens.

The EF-S mount is used by Canon’s crop-sensor cameras such as the 7D Mark II, 80D and 1300D. Since the sensor is smaller, the lenses can also be smaller and lighter. An EF-S lens will not work on an EF mount camera, however the reverse is not true—EF lenses work perfectly with EF-S mount cameras.

The EF-M mount was created for Canon’s mirrorless cameras such as the M100. EF-M lenses will only work on EF-M cameras. EF and EF-S lenses can be used with an adapter.

Nikon: FX and DX

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Unlike Canon, Nikon only has one lens mount: the F-mount, which was introduced in 1959. There are, however, still a few complications.

Nikon has two sensor sizes: the FX full-frame sensor, used in cameras like the D810, and the DX APS-C sensor, used in cameras like the D500. There are lenses available for each that use the F-mount.

The DX sensor is smaller, so lenses designed just for it don’t need to project as big an image. A DX lens will still fit on any F-mount camera, however, they won’t be able to fully use the larger sensor. Modern Nikon FX DSLRs will automatically crop out the empty image space if they detect you’re using a DX lens, but you will be left with a lower resolution, and potentially lower quality, image.

FX lenses are designed to work with the larger FX sensor. They also use the F-mount so you can use them with your DX cameras as well.

Nikon also has a mirrorless mount: the Nikon 1 mount. Nikon 1 lenses can only be used with Nikon 1 cameras, although F-mount lenses can be used with an adapter.

Any third-party lens designed for Nikon cameras will use the F-mount, though some might be designed just for DX cameras.

Before you get too complacent and think you can use any Nikon lens on any camera, there’s another wrinkle. Unlike Canon cameras, where every lens has an autofocus motor, some Nikon lenses, like this 50mm f/1.8, don’t. Instead, they use an autofocus motor that’s built into high end Nikon DSLRs. Confusingly, these lenses are called AF lenses.

At the moment, the only Nikon cameras without an autofocus motor are the D5600, D5500, D5300, D5200, D5100, D5000, D3400, D3300, D3200, D3100, D3000, D60, D40X and D40. These are all entry-level DX models. You can still use AF lenses on them, however you will need to manually focus them.

Lenses with an autofocus motor build in are called either AF-S or AF-P, depending on the kind of motor they have. These can be used on any Nikon DSLR and will always have autofocus.

Camera and lens standards have changed and developed as new technologies have evolved. Camera gear, however, can last along time. Most lenses from the 90s will work on modern Canon cameras and some lenses from the 70s will work on Nikon cameras. Just make sure they’ve got a compatible mount.

  • › Should You Buy Crop Sensor Specific Camera Lenses?
  • › What Lenses Should I Buy for My Nikon Camera
  • › How to Use Old and Differently-Branded Lenses with Your Mirrorless Camera
  • › What’s the Difference Between Canon’s Regular and L-Series Lenses and Which Should You Buy
  • › How to Get Started With Film Photography
  • › How to Move to a Full Frame Camera
  • › Why Are Good Camera Lenses So Important?
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera Harry Guinness
Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero.
Read Full Bio »

I had a thought recently when I was looking for a decent adaptor so that I could use my FD lenses with my new mirrorless camera. I have two FD cameras and a few lenses but an adaptor suddenly seemed so inconvenient. Would it not be worth the likes of Canon, Olympus, or even a third party, making a mirrorless version of an AE-1 or an OM-1? The demand for them for the sake of using these old lenses must be there. I’d consider buying one if it was under £1000/US$1500. Might be a little indulgent admittedly…

What are you looking for on mirrorless versions of AE-1 and OM-1 that aren't available on current mirrorless bodies? Do you mean a mirrorless AE-1 that can mount FD lenses natively? In that case, you lose the ability to mount lenses of similar or shorter flange distance (Minolta MD, Leica M, Konica Hexanon, Olympus PEN, etc), so I can't see why people would buy that instead of a Sony A7 which is more flexible.

It's more that it seems to me that a Mirrorless camera which fits an older mount natively is a missed opportunity so far for the retrospective/nostalgia market. If it had fewer menus, art modes and superfluous features, and focused on the simplicity of things like the old SLR's that wouldn't be bad. I wasn't that interested in switching lens mounts around to be honest, but I understand where you're coming from in regards to flexibility

If they made an SLR that small that's FF, THAT would be the miracle. But I agree with you about the compatibility, it creates a very small user base.

The demand for them for the sake of using these old lenses must be there.

I imagine the number of people who have a lot of FD lenses, who want to shoot digitially exclusively with these lenses and are at the same time unwilling to use adaptors is extremely small.

Also the concept of producing a camera which people wont buy any lenses for is a non-starter. Much better to get them to buy into an ecosystem of expensive native lenses!

There's no real reason for Canon to make a new camera with an older mount. Making a digital FD body would only really help the used lens market, but they wouldn't make any profit from lenses, since FD was a previous mount. They'd have to start making FD lenses again, which would conflict with the sales of their more pricey modern EF glass. And even if they did re-make FD glass, it'd be expensive to do so, and it'd undermine their current market because they'd have to be cheaper than the EF counterparts, and they'd lose sales on EF because who is going to shell out $2k for a fast EF prime when they can get a new FD for less.

Just use an adapter with FD lenses on your mirrorless camera. I use a $7 adapter from amazon to use FD lenses on my X-T1. I personally find that the older FD lenses are a great bang for your buck, I have a 50mm f1.2, a 85mm f1.2L, and a 35mm f2.8 Tilt Shift all with an inexpensive adapter so they're always ready for use.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

You’ve just bought a new mirrorless camera and you’re ready to start shooting the moment it arrives. It is important that you test your new gear before you head out on an adventure with it in tow. In this blog post we will cover 5 ways to test your new camera so that you can be sure everything is working properly and capture some amazing shots!

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

One of the most important things you should do when testing your new mirrorless camera is calibrating it. This ensures that all of the buttons are working as they’re supposed to and there aren’t any issues with autofocus or exposure settings. It’s best if this test can be done on location so that you can ensure everything works properly.

Make sure to use a tripod when calibrating your camera so that there is no movement and the settings stay consistent. The first thing you should do is find an object with some texture (a tree, brick wall or even an old barn door will work). Set up your tripod and frame it in the center of your composition – this ensures consistency throughout all of your shots.

Next, manually focus on the object you have chosen and take a picture. Take note of what exposure setting was used for this shot – it should be spot on if things are going well! While still looking through the viewfinder, change your exposure to brighten or darken the scene by one stop increments while checking the “Exposure” value in the viewfinder each time. Make sure to write down what changes were made for each stop so that you can use this information later when setting up your shot!

Another way to test your new mirrorless camera is by using a tripod and varying the ISO settings on your camera until something interesting pops out of the shadows. As with the calibration test, it’s best to do this in a location that has some texture or detail so you can see what is happening.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Choose an area of your scene and set up your tripod accordingly – making sure the focus point will be where you want it for your final shot. Set up manual focus on “infinity” by rotating the focus ring until it reads “∞” and take a picture.

Now, open up your image in Adobe Camera Raw or another post-processing software that allows for this type of editing. Find the Histogram panel on your screen (it might be labeled differently depending on which program you are using) and find where there is detail without clipping (when a graph is pushed up against the left or right side of your histogram).

Clip some shadows and see how it affects the overall look of your photo. If you’re not happy with what has happened to your image, change the ISO setting on your camera and try again! This time, make sure there aren’t any clipped shadows before taking your next picture.

One way to test out the capabilities of your new mirrorless camera is by using it in adverse conditions – this ensures that you will be ready when things get crazy! There are two good ways to do this: shooting with extremely low light and high ISO settings or testing out your autofocus during fast moving events.

While it might seem like a good idea to shoot with the lowest ISO and aperture settings, this is not actually what you should be doing. It’s best if these photos can be shot with your lens wide open (the smallest F-stop number) so that there isn’t any issue with depth of field or diffraction . You will want to be sure that the ISO is set as low as it can go to maintain a clean image.

If you want to test out your autofocus, an easy way to do this is by taking shots of moving lights or objects at night. This ensures there will always be something for your camera’s autofocus system to lock onto and gives you a good idea of how accurate it is.

Make sure you have AF-C mode enabled so that your camera will continue to focus as long as the shutter button remains depressed and take shots of moving lights or objects at night. You can also set up an object on another surface (like a wall) where there are regular patterns – this allows for easy use of the autofocus tracking feature.

A great way to test how well your mirrorless camera performs is by taking lots and lots of photos! This ensures that you are getting a variety of shots – each with different settings, compositions , etc . It also gives you an idea about whether there are any issues (like shutter lag or noise) that you need to work on.

Take a variety of photos – with different settings, compositions , and exposures . Make sure to take shots in burst mode as well so that the camera fires off several images at once! If there is any sort of shutter lag or noise (graininess), this will become evident pretty quickly and give you an idea of what you need to focus on for your next shoot.

One way to test out the capabilities of your new mirrorless camera is by taking it outside in natural light – this ensures that there are no issues with different lighting conditions, etc . You can do this pretty much anywhere where there isn’t extreme weather or other unexpected circumstances! Make sure to take a variety of images – this ensures that you are able to see what the camera can do in different situations.

Take photos indoors, outdoors , and at night! Make sure your ISO is set as low as possible so there aren’t any issues with graininess or noise . This way, you’ll be able to get an idea about how each image turned out – which ones are good and which ones need improvement.

Using the tips outlined above, you’ll be able to test your new mirrorless camera in just about any setting! This ensures that when it comes time for a real shoot , you’ll be ready to get amazing shots with ease . Being confident will allow you to focus on your subject and capturing the most beautiful images possible.

With a little bit of practice, you’ll be able to test out your new mirrorless camera in no time!

If you're just getting into photography and want the flexibility of an interchangeable lens model, you'll want an entry-level camera that's affordable and easy to use without sacrificing your room to grow as an artist. Here are some of our favorites.

  • Related Camera Picks:

Our 8 Top Picks

Best for Getting Started With Full-Frame

Canon EOS RP

Best for Stabilized Imaging and Fuji Color

Fujifilm X-S10

Best SLR for Nikkor Lenses

Nikon D5600

Best Dust-and-Splash-Protected Full-Frame Starter Model

Nikon Z 5

Best for 4K Video With Micro Four Thirds Lenses

Panasonic Lumix DMC-GX85

Best Front-Facing Screen for Vlogging

Canon EOS M50 Mark II

Best Small SLR for Optical Viewfinder Fans

Canon EOS Rebel SL3

Best Low-Cost Option for Stabilized 4K

Olympus OM-D E-M10 Mark IV

With a smartphone in your pocket, everyone is a photographer. The latest iPhone, Galaxy, and Pixel handsets capture images that turn heads and rack up social media likes, but there’s a limit to what they can do. If you’re interested in trying new photo techniques, it’s time to think about a camera with interchangeable lens support. Whether it’s for capturing distant wildlife, trying your hand at long exposure landscapes or night sky astrophotography, or delving into the tiny world of macro, you’ll find that a dedicated camera offers big benefits over your phone, and you don’t need to spend a ton of money on one.

Don’t Get an SLR

There’s a better-than-average chance that you’re reading this after searching for recommendations on SLRs for beginners. And here’s what we have to say about that: Most beginners shouldn’t buy SLRs.

Technology has moved beyond the scope of the optical viewfinder. A decade ago the best cameras were all SLRs; today they are mirrorless. The idea is the same—a large image sensor, interchangeable lenses, and a direct view through the lens—but now the view is created by the image sensor and shown on a rear screen or eye-level electronic viewfinder.

There are palpable advantages for beginners. For one, you’ll get a preview of your exposure in the EVF, freeing you to experiment with manual exposure modes and see feedback in real time. Autofocus coverage typically extends much farther, so you’ve got more creative freedom to position a subject in the frame.

The creative side is there, too. If you’re thinking about making photos in black and white, you can set a mirrorless camera to preview your scenes in monochrome. The same is true for any color looks you want to apply—almost every camera offers vivid and neutral modes, but others extend them to more artistic looks.

That said, we’ve included a couple SLRs in our list for folks who strictly prefer an optical viewfinder. They’re worth thinking about if your eyes don’t deal well with digital displays, but you’re definitely missing out on the more modern trappings of a mirrorless camera.

Choosing a Mirrorless System

When you buy an interchangeable lens camera, you’re not just buying the camera. The system you choose dictates what lenses you’ll be able to use.

That’s not a big deal if you’re just starting out—you’ll buy a camera with a bundled zoom, and if you want to add a telephoto, wide aperture prime, or macro lens, you’ll have no problem finding one that works with your camera.

If you think you’re going to move to higher-end equipment down the road, you’ll want to take a little more into consideration. The Fujifilm X, Micro Four Thirds, and Sony E offer the widest range of lenses, and Canon’s EOS M has the basics covered.

For more detail on what every camera system offers, check out our guide to choosing a system.

Should You Go Full Frame?

Most cameras marketed toward budding photographers use image sensors that are smaller than the 35mm film models of yesteryear.

The bigger sensor size means that lenses are also a little bit bigger, and pricier, generally speaking. But there are some real reasons to mull a full-frame camera, even if you’re starting out.

I recommend them especially to photographers whose main interests lie in portraiture, landscapes, and other more artistic pursuits, especially those who love the blurred-background bokeh look.

They’re also a good choice if you’re interested in trying out old, manual focus lenses, to give your images a bit of a vintage feel.

We’ve included a couple of full-frame picks here. The Canon EOS RP is built for beginner users and can be had for around $1,300 with the basic 24-105mm kit lens. The Nikon Z 5 is a bit pricier, $1,700 with a short 24-50mm zoom, but is a bit better built.

If you’re still mulling a camera and want to get the best shots out of your phone, you can check out our tips for getting better photos with your smartphone, or our advice for beginning photographers working with phones and cameras alike.

I have my first wedding photography job coming up next year for my cousin. I've been told that you can use analog lenses with mirrorless cameras and get a similar visual effect to film photography. I've heard that sony alphas are good but are there any other camera / lens combinations that you would recommend? I have a small budget of about £500. Thank you!

Much safer to go with the a camera you know with modern lenses and then play with filters afterwards in lightroom (VSCO, for example).

IMHO weddings are not the time or place to experiment with manual focus or use lenses that could be dodgy.

I have both a digital Sony film camera that I use via adapters with vintage glass and vintage analog cameras that I use with film.

It is definitely true that you can get good results with analog lenses on mirrorless cameras; practically all vintage lenses can be adapted to mirrorless cameras of all manufacturers. Keep in mind that lens technology made a huge progress during the last decades. This is in particular noticeable with vintage zoom and wide angle lenses, those are often of inferior quality in comparison to modern glass. Prime lenses in the range between 50 and 135mm are often of good quality and can yield beautiful results when used correctly.

"Used correctly" is another important point here, these lenses are all completely manual, meaning that you can set your camera to aperture priority, but you have to set the aperture and focus yourself on the lens. If you are used to fully electronic lenses that is something that needs practice, and honestly I would not want to try to manual focus during the critical moments of a wedding (candid shots during the party is a different question).

As for the film look, you will get the optical imperfections of these old lenses but not the grain and colors of film. Of course this look can be simulated in editing, even though film offers a soft roll-off of highlights that digital sensors can simply not capture.

I myself was asked to shoot a wedding next year and I plan to have a digital main camera with fully electronic lens (plus another backup in the bag) and an analog second camera for some candid shots.

What are your favorite non camera branded lenses and what do you use it on? For example, I have a Yonguno 50mm that is supposed to be a good clone of canon’s 50mm. I’ve been impressed with it so far. This weekend Im renting a Tamron 150-600. I use a canon. Always up to learn about new brands and share my thoughts.

Yeah, I just meant non camera brands. Oh well, can't edit the title now. Numerous people suggested Samyang, I will have to check them out. What do you shoot with your 40mm? I have a 50mm but I originally bought it to play around with reverse mounting for macro. On a crop, it almost feels to close but I don't do a lot of portrait style shots. Sharp though, I do like what I have taken with it.

Love my Tamron 70-200 G2.

I have shot my last 4 shoots without literally ever taking my Tamron 70-200 G2 off my camera. Love this lens.

That one looks super nice, I like wildlife shots so a really nice zoom is on the wishlist.

This and the Sigma 35mm 1.4 Art are the best lenses in my bag. The bokeh the 70-200 generates is just gorgeous.

Tamron and Samyang. The Tamron lenses are great, looks amazing and have by far the best Stabilizer I personally have tested. And they cost pretty much half the price of what the equivalent Canon lenses does. I can never get myself to spend $2,099.00 on a Canon 70-200mm when Tamron's cost $1,299.00.

The above applies for other brands as well. I really hated my Canon 85mm F1.8 because it never managed to nail focus for me in lowlight, and I had other issues with it as well. I was looking at the Canon 85mm F1.4 IS, but the $1,599.00 was a slight deal breaker for me. Then I found out after a chat with another photographer that Samyang release a 85mm F1.4 for Canon, WITH autofocus for almost a third of the price. I bought that over the Canon one in a heartbeat.

So yeah, when I can save hundreds of dollars for the same results, I spend my money on "non branded" lenses.

These days there are a billion camera lens options, and so little time to research which lens you need for your camera.

While lenses are interchangeable – in that a camera can use different kinds of lenses (standard, wide angle, macro, etc), they aren’t completely interchangeable, across brands and types of cameras. So finding the right lens can be much more complicated than picking one and attaching it to your camera.

Swapping out the lens that came with your camera is a great way to expand the uses of your camera and allow you to use your camera in different ways. Whether you have had your DSLR for a while and are just now looking to upgrade your standard lens to something fancier, or you are buying your first DSLR, we have written a simple guide to camera lenses that are interchangeable, and lenses that aren’t.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Brands

If you have bought a DSLR from a major manufacturer, it’s likely that the manufacturer will have a range of lenses designed specifically for your new camera. Often, these lenses from major brands will only work with their brand cameras. So, for instance, a Canon lens won’t fit a Nikon camera.

This can be particularly frustrating if you have bought a new camera and can no longer use the old lenses from a different brand. While there are adaptors, they may not be worth it in the long run, as the camera won’t be able to use all the features of a different brand of lens.

Often, smaller independent brands make lenses that fit most common major camera brands. While they aren’t always as good as the ones made by the original manufacturer, they are a lot more affordable and can do the job just as well if they’re high quality.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Compact System Camera vs DSLR Lenses

These days you can get compact system cameras that can perform close to the same job as DSLRs. They are a more compact professional camera, and unlike compact cameras, give photographers the option of using a range of different lenses.

Generally, lenses that fit into your DSLR will not fit your compact system camera. Manufacturers usually have a separate range of lenses specifically designed for compact system cameras.

When buying a lens for a compact system camera, it’s important to check the specs. Independent brands may have adapters that will make it possible for you to use your DSLR lenses with your compact system camera, but the functions on your camera may be limited if you use an incompatible lens and an adaptor.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Mounts

The reason that lenses aren’t interchangeable across brands and camera types is mainly attributed to the mounts. While many third-party lenses clearly advertise which brand the lens is made for, often knowing the brand isn’t enough. Different cameras within a brand can have different mounts.

The Canon EF-lens mount has been around since 1987 and was designed for the EOS range of cameras. In 2003 Canon introduced the newer EF-S-mount which are used for cameras that use an APS-C sensor.

Sigma, Tamron, and Tokina manufacture lenses using the EF and EF-S mounts. Olympus, Kodak and Panasonic use the Micro Four Thirds mount. However it’s a good idea to check whether the image stabilisation feature sits within your camera body or the lens itself, as it often operates differently for various brands.

Introduced in 1959, the Nikon F-mount is one of the oldest mounts still being used. Other manufacturers, like Fujifilm, make cameras compatible with this mount. The Nikon 1-mount was introduced in 2011 and is used for Nikon compact system cameras.

If you’re ready to buy a new lens for your camera, head over to the Camera House online store. We include the specs so it’s easy to figure out what lens you need. If you still need help, why not head instore and have a chat with our friendly staff? They’ll have all the answers to your questions!

One of the main advantage of a mirrorless system is to being mirrorless (sorry for the pun). Of course in an ideal world where we all rich, the best solution is to buy the top of the gamma lenses of the brand we have and then we are pretty much sorted, but for who just started into photography, or like me, where the mirrorless camera is more a lightweight alternative to the heavy duty DSLR we already own, and maybe we don't want to invest billions on a second system knowing that we already have spend plenty of money for the lenses for the big boy. But there is any cheap alternative? Of course there is, and you can find it in vintage lenses.
On ebay and similar sites, or even in most of the camera shops in your city, it's pretty easy to find old used lenses, sometimes even older than us, and most of the times, unless you are looking for rarities, they are extremely affordable.

Vintage lenses can be mounted pretty much on every interchangeable lens camera with the right adapter, but in the case of a modern digital SLR the adapter needs a lens to correct the increased distance between the sensor and the camera, adding a crop factor in some cases that reduce the real angle of view of the camera, and in some cases you lose the ability to focus to infinity, and adding another piece of glass in front of the lens it effects the general image quality and these adapters are generally not super cheap, or at least you want something that doesn’t make you lens as useful as a bottom of a bottle.
But in the case of a mirrorless system it’s a totally different story, as the fact that the camera is smaller, they only need to cover the distance from the mount of the camera to where the lens supposed to be to work correctly, so no glasses on the way, which means that there are no such things as additional crop factor or decrease of image quality, and it’s way cheaper as it’s just a pipe of metal or plastic.

Why so cheap?

Well, it’s easy, these lenses are in the best case at least 20 years old, for example Canon, in the pre-autofocus era, used to have a mount called FD, which was replaced by the current EF mount in 1987. So as you can pretty much image, everybody rushed to move to the new system and leaving the lenses with the old system on the shelves, and the production of those lenses has stopped since then, so the only way to find them is on the used market. If you want some specific and rare lenses, they still cost good money, but for those lenses who were pretty common back then, the value of these lenses dropped dramatically.

But are they good?

If you compare to their modern counterpart, obviously the newer ones will beat them in any test, they are not as sharp as the new ones, they are not as contrasty and bokehy as the new ones, they don’t have autofocus, they are not weather sealed, and so on… But this doesn’t mean that they are bad lenses, it only means that the new ones are better, but these grandparents of photography can still make great shots. And especially if consider that their price, the quality/price ratio is pretty impressive.
Let me do you an example: a few months ago I bought two vintage lenses, and one of these is this beauty shown down here.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

It’s a Canon FDn 28mm f/2.8. At full aperture is decent, if you close down by a stop it’s very pretty sharp and it reaches the peak of image quality between f/5.6 and f/8. It’s a tiny and extremely lightweight lens, and to be honest is as sharp as the Canon EF 24mm f/2.8 I owned a while ago. Of course it doesn’t have autofocus nor even a focus confirmation, and things like image stabilisation were sci-fi for that era, the contrast is not as good as the EF counterpart, and you can’t even compare it with the newer Canon EF 28mm f/2.8 IS, but the newer EF version costs around €/$500, while I paid the vintage one for only €75 with 6 months of warranty and a leather case, but you can probably find it for even less, as I’ve seen it on ebay for around $50, a tenth of the price of the EF lens.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera
Another great lens I bought is the Canon FD 50mm f/1.4, paid €150 on Adverts.ie, and it’s the lens that stays the most on my Fuji X-E1. It’s not perfect as at full aperture is pretty much unusable, unless you love the argentinian soap opera effect, but from f/2 is already pretty sharp, and from f/2.8 onward is very sharp. The build quality of this lens is simply superb, despite it’s age is still in perfect conditions and the focus is extremely smooth. On my Fuji with a crop factor of x1.5 it becomes a 75mm, and it takes a few seconds to focus properly, but it’s a pure pleasure to use this lens.
But aside these two lenses, in internet you can find billions of different lenses, from brands like Olympus, Pentax, Nikon and so on.

Which adaptor I should buy?

On ebay you can find several brands that produces adaptors, some of them have contacts to allow some autofocus lenses to work with your camera, but they come with an higher price tag.
For my Fuji X-E1 I bought two Fotasy FD-FX adaptors sold by rainbowimaging, they cost about $10 each, and for that price they are really well build and they work perfectly on my camera. Obviously they sell several different adaptors, and I think they cover every possible mount combination, otherwise you just need to search on ebay for the one you need.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Conclusions

Vintage lenses are a great deal for photographers on a budget. Yes, they don’t have autofocus, and you need to set the aperture on the lens itself, but to be honest the lack of these modern comforts can only be a great school for who really wants to learn how to manually expose and focus a photo, and it slows you down, making you think a bit more before pressing the shutter button. You might spend a bit of time before you get the grip with it, but once you get it, it becomes as natural as breathing.

Images shot with the Canon FDn 28mm f/2.8 and Canon FD 50mm f/1.4.

By now we know lot about Mirroless camera, DSLRs, and point and shoot cameras. We also know composition and to find a balance in the frame is important part of photography, every photograph is an interpretation of your subject and message. Undoubtedly camera is an extension of your eyes, but I believe it is an extension of your soul too. You pour in all your efforts to express your feeling with your photography.

We already know that mirrorless cameras don’t have mirror that offers first line of defense against dust, so cleaning the sensor is a much more frequent activity, and constantly sending it to shop is unreasonable. So here in this special article on world photography day we list you few ways to keep the extension of your eyes safe and clean.

Dust free Environment

To start off with even before considering cleaning your camera sensor is to prepare a dust free environment. You can use Air filter in small areas or even in bathroom as the moisture there won’t allow dust to come between you and your photography. You can always keep you shower on and steam out the bathroom for few minutes this will help dust settle down. But make sure that bathroom is steam free before you start cleaning your camera sensor.

Air Blower:

Blower is a dry method which you can use to clean sensor of your mirrorless camera while lens changes or for general maintenance, it is one of the best ways to extend life of your camera and click some of your best photographs. Sometime you notice visibly large particles of dust on sensor or lint on camera sensor you can always use the blower to instantly remove it.

Sensor Cleaning Brush:

Sometimes even after using Blower few dust particles stays on the sensor like stubborn because static connection to the sensor. Here where the brush plays it role. But remember never to touch the bristles with bare hands and when using the brush second time use Air Blower on the bristles of your brush as this removes the old dust if there is any. This keeps the static charge which help in removing remaining dust from sensor. Do not, we repeat do not put pressure while cleaning the sensor, brush across gently few time. Brush is a must have thing when you love your mirrorless or DSLRs camera.

Sensor Cleaning Swab:

Air Blower and Brush are part of dry methods to keep your camera sensor clean, though this method works most of the time but there is some debris that needs wet method to remove them from sensor. Debris like salty misty particles or microscopic particles that accumulate while shooting near sea . Even sometime while changing lens we unintentionally sneeze and that microscopic spit get stuck to our sensor, here the swab works perfectly.

Always remember use Wet Method only after using the dry method else large particle will put scratch n you sensor while rubbing with swab.

Sensor Cleaning Swab are good for larger sensor like full frame and especially medium format, use the swab once across your sensor as even as possible.

Instead of buying the Box Set you can always go for cleaning kit and buy some extra Pec Pads so that you can reuse the spatulas.

You can always buy the Mirrorlss, DSLR sensor cleaning kit from online retail sites like Amazon India and Flipkart.com.

How to keep camera safe

Most of us in India prefer to carry camera in our laptop or some other bags. Never ever do this… Why? Camera bags are made to keep cameras safe they are padded enough to bear all sort of pressure even if you are travelling in public transport.

Always remember to keep lens intact with the body, if your camera bag doesn’t have space enough to keep them together do use the rear lens cover and Camera Body Cover Cap. This will keep sensor and lens safe.

In case if you have to use the camera in places where dust is all around like clicking in villages or doing street photography, when you return home follow the above mentioned method to keep your camera clean and safe.

The Canon R5 and R6 are a big deal in the Canon world. While the original full-frame mirrorless cameras were the EOS R and EOS RP, they were something of a stop-gap for the RF mount system while efforts were put into lens development for the new system.

The EOS R system uses Canon’s new RF mount instead of the older EF mount from the SLR and DSLR cameras. With millions of EF lenses in circulation from 20+ years of sales, it’s no wonder people are wondering whether they can use their beloved EF lenses on the new RF mount cameras like the R5 and R6.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Use one of Canon’s official EF-RF adapters to enable EF lenses to work on the Canon R5 and R6

Thankfully, the answer is YES! You can use EF lenses on the R5 and R6, although you will need to buy one of Canon’s EF-RF mount adapters to do so.

Canon was smart here. Instead of just making one basic adapter, they have actually created a series of EF-RF mount adapters that bring some additional functionality to the table. There’s a basic adapter that simply connects an EF lens to an RF mount, this one is the cheapest. Then there’s an adapter that includes a user programable ring around it, called the control ring. This is my personal favourite of the whole bunch. You can read a detailed review of the Canon EF-RF Control Ring Adapter here.

In addition to these two adapters, there are a further two adapters that include either a circular polarizing filter or a variable ND filter. The first being useful for landscape photographers, and the second being useful for filmmakers. Further details about the adapters in the lineup can be seen in the table beneath the gallery.

Weighing less than DSLRs the mirrorless cameras are capable to deliver 4K videos and offer almost similar result on the photography front. The mirrorless cameras are available in the market with affordable price tag; however there are very few accessories available to embrace them.

Undoubtedly, there are a number of companions for DSLRs including third party lenses but mirrorless camera owners you don’t need to feel left out as we have cherry picked top accessories for your camera in this article.

Table Dolly

We often had to shoot stepping in towards the subject with the camera (dolly in), or step backwards with the camera (dolly-out) as a result we get jerky videos. To get better result you need a table camera dolly featuring four skate style rubber wheels that glides over smoothly on tabletops or any flat surface. You can add straight and curved motion to your smartphone videos with the Table Dolly, you can also mount light or smartphone as per your requirement. Grab one for your lovely cam at starting price of Rs. 5,000.

Video Action Stabilizing Handle

Undoubtedly, tripods are a best solution to record stable videos, but you can also use handle Grips an inexpensive stabilisers — it provide necessary stability to action video shoots. The camera remains suspended in the Stabilizing Handle and helps to stable shots. It is a perfect accessory for your mirrorless camera as it reduces fatigue over lengthy filming session.

LED lights

Almost all the mirrorless cameras come with built in flash but that sometime does not give the result you want while shooting at night. Often the light produced by inbuilt flash is quite harsh. As most of the cameras come with hotshoe you can mount a dimmable LED lights that work as a perfect companion while shooting. The LED light come with couple of filters, Spotlight effect and Diffuse effect for reducing the color temperature to 3200K. You can also use the light to give special effects to the subjects.

Macro Ring Flash

Macro photography is an art of clicking extreme close-up snaps that shows subject in details. Many Mirrorless cameras are capable of talking such greats pictures, but when we get close to the subject lights are often improper. Here the Macro Ring Flash works – the circular LED light fixes around the lens and packs battery to offer better photography. You can also adjust intensity of light and color as per your need.

Microphone

Audio is very important part of quality video when you have 4K camera, at some point you can compromise with the shaky or less than sharp video but not with sound quality. Audiences quickly switches off videos with poor audio. So when you have to offer better audio at low cost for mirrorless and DSLR cameras, Rode microphones are the best companion. There is a range of mics in Videomic series which runs on battery and uses a standard 3.5mm jack; this is the reason why most bingers and pros recommend the brand.

One of the things we hear quite often in regard to mirrorless cameras is that it’s hard to find lenses for them, and that when they’re found, they’re expensive. While the latter can be said of most any high-end glass, it’s certainly true when you’re dealing with anything for the latest generation of photo gear. As always, we’re out there shaking the bushes and kicking the trees to find you the best deals on the equipment you need. Here are a few recent finds:

For Panasonic Lumix G

Panasonic’s line of Micro Four Thirds cameras have been drawing great reviews. If you’ve got one and want to expand your capabilities with it, here’s a selection of lenses you’ll appreciate and you’ll like these prices even more:

For Olympus 4/3

As one of the oldest and most respected names in the business, Olympus isn’t afraid of playing with the big boys. Hand in hand with the brand is the M.Zuiko lens, built to professional standards. Here’s one that covers just about any everyday shooting situation, from landscapes to portraits. If you need a good walk-around lens for your Olympus, grab one of these while they’re available:

For Sony

You can’t think mirrorless without thinking Sony. They were first to give the DSLR a real run for its money and they’re still competing. Take a look at some of the great deals we found on glass for your Sony mirrorless (one is a Zeiss!):

For Canon EOS-M

Canon isn’t exactly a stranger to the mirrorless market, either. Their compact, M-series APS-C cameras are favorites of many amateurs and pros for quick shooting. If you’re a Canon shooter, being able to mount your EF and EF-S series lenses on your EOS-M would really round out your gear, don’t you think? You can give yourself that capability for less than $70:

For Nikon 1

We’re not going to leave the Nikon compact shooters out. How about great walk-around lens for that little gem? How about an internal-focusing Nikkor for only a bit over $100? Take a look:

Hopefully you’re starting to see that buying great glass for your mirrorless camera doesn’t have to be a traumatic experience. We could list a lot more, but it’s really uch easier for you to simply visit Used Photo Pro yourself to take a look at what they’ve got to offer for all your photo gear needs. Their used merchandise is honestly rated and warrantied for a full 180 days. Plus, what you see is most definitely what you get! See for yourself!

When you're shopping for an interchangeable lens camera, Canon is the first name that comes to mind. But Canon has multiple mounts and sensor sizes, so it can be tricky to pick out the best lens for your SLR or mirrorless camera. If you're not sure which lenses work with your model, we've got you covered.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Canon currently markets three types of interchangeable lens cameras—and they all use different lenses. It makes shopping for a new lens for your Canon camera a little harder than for other brands, but we’re here to help.

Which Canon Camera Do You Own?

Before you buy a lens, you need to determine which Canon lenses are compatible with your camera. The first thing you’ll need to figure out is your camera type.

Most consumers with a Canon SLR own an APS-C model, one from the Rebel family, or a midrange entry like the EOS 80D or 90D. Canon doesn’t use the Rebel branding outside of North America. In Japan the series is called Kiss, and in Europe Canon uses model numbers with a three- or four-digit designation—the EOS 1500D and 800D are two examples.

If you don’t know a thing about cameras, you can tell an SLR apart from mirrorless models very easily: it’ll have an optical viewfinder and when you remove the lens you’ll see a silvered reflective mirror inside the camera.

If you have one of these Canon SLRs, you’ll want to use EF and EF-S lenses, as well as compatible entries from third parties. The same is true for full-frame Canon models in the 1D, 5D, and 6D series—we’ve covered options for them in depth. Click through to read our list of The Best Canon EF SLR Lenses to get started with the right lens for your SLR.

Canon’s other ILCs are mirrorless. It’s broken up into two families. Mirrorless cameras don’t have a mirror, so when you take the lens off you’ll see the green reflection of an image sensor, and they’ll either use an eye-level electronic viewfinder or rely solely on the camera’s rear display to see the view through the lens.

Canon is pushing casual photographers and budding hobbyists toward its compact EOS M system, a series of small cameras with lenses sized to match, but without an enthusiast or professional upgrade path. All of the cameras in the series have an EOS M designation, including the most recent EOS M6 Mark II and EOS M50 Mark II. The lens library isn’t vast, but they can use EF SLR lenses via an adapter if you don’t mind putting a big lens on a small camera. If you’re interested in a new lens for your EOS M series, click through to read our picks for The Best Canon EF-M Mirrorless Lenses.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

The Nikon Df DSLR is unique in that it can be used with many of the legacy NIKKOR lenses produced since 1959. The camera features an enhanced lens mount that works with current AF-S lenses as well as AF-D and AF lenses, and Ai (Aperture index) and Non-Ai lenses.

To determine if a lens is a Non-Ai, Ai, or more current model (AF, AF-D, AF-S), you need to look at the lens itself. You are looking for two distinctive properties of the lens.

A Non-Ai lens will have a meter coupling shoe without holes and it will be missing a meter coupling ridge.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Step 1. When to adjust the Meter Coupling Lever

When you want to use a Non-Ai lens on your Nikon Df, you will need to raise the meter coupling lever out of the way, on the camera body.

An Ai lens, on the other hand, will have a meter coupling shoe with holes and it will have a meter coupling ridge.

When you want to use an Ai lens or an AF, AF-D or AF-S lens on your Nikon Df, you will need to lower the meter coupling lever on the camera body, so it can be engaged by the lens.

Easy, right? Now onto Step 2.

Step 2. Entering non-CPU lens data

Because non-Ai lenses don’t have all the electronics built into them that are needed, to communicate with the Df regarding metering and exposure, you’ll need to provide the camera with some lens data, (lens focal length and maximum aperture), so you can shoot with it on the Df. This will allow you to gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non-CPU lens.

The camera can store lens data for up to nine non-CPU lenses.

First, attach the non-Ai lens to the camera, then go into the set-up menu and select Non-CPU lens data. Choose a lens # (one through nine), and enter the focal length and aperture. If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest one that is greater than that of the lens. Specify the exposure meter coupling method, Ai or non-Ai.

Then select either Aperture Priority or Manual exposure modes. These are the only exposure modes that will work with the type of lens attached.

If you want to use a specific aperture, use this order for the next two steps:

Adjust the aperture on the lens itself.

Lastly, use the exposure meter and turning the sub-command dial, set the correct exposure, matching the shutter speed to the aperture that you set on the lens.

If you don’t want a specific aperture, meter first.

Then, set the aperture on the lens itself to match the correct exposure.

Now you’re all set to go shooting!

Using an Ai lens on your Df

Because Ai lenses have the necessary hardware to communicate with the camera, all you need to do here make sure that you lowered the meter coupling lever on the camera body, and then attach the Ai lens to the camera, and you can start shooting.

Using an AF, AF-D or AF-S lens on your Df

Similarly, current AF, AF-D and AF-S lenses just need to have the meter coupling lever lowered. Once that’s done, you can mount the lens and shoot.

A teleconverter or extender (as Canon calls them) is a gadget that fits between the lens and the camera body to magnify the image made by the lens. A teleconverter sounds like the ideal solution for getting closer to a subject with your lens.

In practice, though, teleconverters have disadvantages, including the effect they have on your lens’s maximum aperture and often on the overall optical quality of your photos.

And you need to choose wisely, as the best teleconverters will not work well with all lenses and cameras. At one time, they were sold as inexpensive gadgets that were widely compatible with different camera systems and lenses, but these days lens and camera designs are more complex, with sophisticated electronic data transfer and, sometimes with protruding rear lens elements. There are few ‘generic’ teleconverters still on the market and these have to be chosen with care to match your lenses.

But teleconverters have not disappeared. They have taken on a new role, mostly in long-range sports and wildlife photography. A high-quality ‘dedicated’ teleconverter can massively increase the reach of a telephoto lens and saves the expense and weight of carrying bigger, longer telephotos.

• Check out our full guide to the best teleconverters for your camera to see what’s available for your system and the different lenses available.

So what do you need to know when choosing a teleconverter for your DSLR or mirrorless camera system?

1) Teleconverter magnification

Teleconverters come in three strength settings. 1.4x is the most common: it gives a useful increase in magnification without a big penalty in usability or image quality. They increase the focal length of the lens it is used with, so a 300mm becomes a 420mm – and a 70-200mm becomes a 98-280mm zoom

2x converters (also known as doublers) are popular too because they double the focal length, although the image quality may not be as good.

Some makers, such as Nikon, produce intermediate 1.7x teleconverters.

2) Teleconverters affect the maximum aperture

Because the lens’s image is being enlarged, the effective lens aperture is decreased. A 1.4x teleconverter brings a one-stop reduction in maximum aperture; a 2x teleconverter brings a two-stop reduction.

So if you use a 1.4x converter on a 300mm f/4 it becomes a 420mm f/5.6. And if you use a 2x teleconverter on a 70-200mm f/2.8 it becomes a 140-400mm f/5.6.

This means that teleconverters work best with lenses that have a wide maximum aperture to start with. You may need to accept either slower shutter speeds or higher ISO settings, and you won’t be able to reproduce the shallow depth of field effects you normally get with that lens.

3) Teleconverters and autofocus compatibility

This reduction in maximum aperture could affect your camera’s autofocus system, since some older systems won’t work with apertures lower than f/8; you may have to resort to manual focus. Many modern autofocus systems, however, especially on the latest mirrorless cameras, now go way beyond that, so it may no longer be an issue.

You should also make sure that your lens’s aperture control and any image stabilisation will still work as normal (you won’t have a problem with teleconverters manufactured by the maker of your lens) and that the lens will still supply correct EXIF (shooting) information to the camera.

4) Teleconverter compatibility

This is an important point. Lenses and lens mounts are far more complicated than they used to be, so you can’t assume any teleconverter will fit any lens. Far from it. In fact, the list of compatible lenses is often quite short.

The main camera and lens makers to list the lenses their teleconverters are compatible with (our guide to the best teleconverters lists compatibility information, where available). However, this information may be harder to check if you buy a cheap, generic third-party teleconverter online, for example.

5) Teleconverters can affect optical quality

Apart from the loss in maximum aperture, the biggest drawback of teleconverters is a potential loss in image quality. This is because you’re effectively magnifying the central part of the image captured by the lens, along with any defects or aberrations.

Dedicated ‘matched’ teleconverters will be designed to optically complement the lens they’re attached to, but cheaper generic teleconverters won’t be.

6) Own-brand teleconverters

Most camera and lens makers offer teleconverters for use with a small selection of their own telephoto or super-telephoto lenses. The teleconverter’s optical layout will be optimised for those lenses. Autofocus, image stabilisation and exposure controls will work as expected too. Canon, Nikon, Olympus, Panasonic, Fujifilm and other camera manufacturers make teleconverters with their cameras and lenses. Lens manufacuturers, notably Sigma, make teleconverters to work with Sigma lenses on a number of different camera body mounts.

7) Dedicated teleconverters

Dedicated, or matched, teleconverters are custom-designed for one specific lens, and offer a good solution for photographers who don’t want to compromise own quality but do need to travel light.

8) Generic third-party teleconverters

Third party teleconverters, such as those made by Kenko, are designed to offer a low-cost option. These are available in a number of different mounts – the mount for the lens it is used with is almost always the same as the camera mount the pair are being fitted onto. You need to check compatibility with your camera and lens carefully before buying.

Rod is the Group Reviews editor for Digital Camera World and across Future’s entire photography portfolio, with decades of experience with cameras of all kinds. Previously he has been technique editor on N-Photo, Head of Testing for the photography division and Camera Channel editor on TechRadar. He has been writing about photography technique, photo editing and digital cameras since they first appeared, and before that began his career writing about film photography. He has used and reviewed practically every interchangeable lens camera launched in the past 20 years, from entry-level DSLRs to medium format cameras, together with lenses, tripods, gimbals, light meters, camera bags and more.

Nikon's mirrorless Z camera system is backed by a growing library of quality lenses. We're here to break down what's available and recommend our favorites.

  • Related Lens Picks:
  • Categories

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Nikon is likely one of the first brands you think of when you think of SLRs. Its F series was the darling of photojournalists and artists in the film era, and the its high-resolution D850 is still one of the best SLRs available today.

But SLRs have had their time in the sun. Today’s best tech is in mirrorless systems. In general, you’ll enjoy quicker, more precise autofocus, better video features, and a real-time preview of your image in the viewfinder by going mirrorless.

A Growing System

Nikon’s mirrorless system uses the Z mount, but is compatible with F-mount SLR lenses using an adapter. That’s important for photographers who have been working with Nikon cameras and lenses for years and don’t want to buy all new lenses.

And it’s important to fill in some gaps. The Z system has many of the basics covered, but a few important lenses aren’t on sale yet. If you’re after a macro, an extreme telephoto prime, or a fish-eye, you’ll need to rely on the adapter, at least for now.

Most of the available lenses are for full-frame format sensors—Nikon refers to this 24-by-36mm format as FX. It’s also released a pair of DX models—Nikon’s branding for the 18-by-24mm APS-C format. If you own a full-frame Z, you should skip shopping for these DX lenses, but you can always use a full-frame lens on a DX Nikon.

S Line

You’ll know a lens is protected from dust and splashes if it has an S designation at the end of its name. The S Line includes the best construction and optics.

It’s not an exclusive club, as all but one of the full-frame lenses for the system are included so far. Nikon promises to change that, though—it has a few non-S primes on its development roadmap, including a pair of compact primes and a macro.

We expect Nikon to fill in missing pieces in the system. It’s certainly been a little slower to build things out when compared with Canon, which launched its EOS R mirrorless system at the same time, though both lag behind Sony and its much longer running mirrorless E system in terms of sheer volume of available lenses.

The major third parties—Sigma and Tamron—haven’t jumped on board yet, either. We’ve seen a spattering of Z glass from 7artisans, Venus Optics, and others, but most are manual focus.

In the meantime, you can supplement native lenses using the FTZ adapter. It works with AF-S Nikkor SLR lenses, the type with internal focus motors, with full functionality. Any lenses that rely on an in-camera motor for focus will work, but without autofocus.

If you’re happy with manual focus, you can reach to other adapters, too. You can use pretty much any vintage, mechanical lens with the right adapter; we have a guide if you’re interested in going down that rabbit hole.

Standard Zoom

The standard zoom is the first lens many will get with a camera. Full-frame editions typically start around 24mm or 28mm, an angle of view that’s considered moderately wide.

Zoom power and aperture vary from lens to lens. Nikon bundles the slim, affordable, but otherwise unremarkable Z 24-50mm F3.5-5.6 with its most basic models. Its zoom power is modest and its aperture is a bit dim, so it’s better suited for use in decent light.

The Nikkor Z 24-70mm F4 S is the step-up option. It’s priced around $1,000 when bought by itself, but gets a hefty discount when bought in a kit. It’s a slim lens, and one with excellent optics, but pros will likely find the Nikkor Z 24-70mm F2.8 S to be a better choice—it’s one of the best standard zooms you can get for any system. If you’re after more value, consider the Z 24-120mm F4 S, a recent release priced around $1,100, or think about the $1,200 28-75mm F2.8.

There’s also an all-in-one zoom for the system, the Nikkor Z 24-200mm F4-6.3 VR ($899.95). It has a relatively small f-stop, so it’s not the best choice for working in dimly lit interiors, but its long zoom power makes it an ideal choice for travel. It’s one of the few Z lenses to not be included in the S Line, but it does include some dust and splash protection.

Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm F2.8 S

The Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm f/2.8 S is a standard zoom with lens outstanding optical performance and a pro-grade build.

Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm F4 S

The Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm f/4 S is a sharp, compact zoom for the Z camera system that’s an especially good value when purchased as part of a bundle.

Nikon Nikkor Z 24-50mm F4-6.3

The Nikkor Z 24-50mm f/4-6.3 is a standard zoom for full-frame Nikon Z cameras, and while its narrow aperture isn’t exactly exciting, a slim design and reasonable pricing make up for it.

Nikon Nikkor Z 24-200mm F4-6.3 VR

The Nikkor Z 24-200mm F4-6.3 VR is built well, covers a wide range of angles, and nets sharp photos. It isn’t a low-light wonder, but it’s still a superzoom lens worth buying.

Wide Angle

Working at a wide angle nets images with a grand scale. You’ll see more of the world in each frame for landscapes, architectural work, and group shots. Many can also focus very near for dramatic close-ups.

Nikon has released two wide zooms, the 14-30mm F4 S and 14-24mm F2.8 S, and the 20mm F1.8 S prime for the Z system to date. Zooms are a bit more convenient, but the 20mm F1.8’s bright aperture makes it an appealing choice for astrophotography, vlogging, and architectural interiors.

It’s not as wide as some others, though. Venus Optics sells a range of wide-angle lenses for the Z system, but they are manual focus only. Its Laowa 15mm F2 Zero-D is a native option for photographers who want to go wide and bright. If you’re looking for a lens with autofocus, reach for the FTZ adapter and the Sigma 14mm F1.8 DG HSM Art for Nikon SLRs.

Wide zoom lenses cover a broader range of views, but don’t gather as much light. That’s not a concern for many landscape photographers, who enjoy using narrow apertures and neutral density filters for long exposure work.

The Nikkor Z 14-24mm F2.8 S balances its coverage range and f-stop. It’s not as suited for night sky photography as an F1.8 or F2.0 prime, but at F2.8 it’s still a solid fit for a good deal of indoor work. The Z 14-30mm F4 zooms a bit further, and costs less—if you don’t need to make images at F2.8, it’s the zoom to get.

Thanks to you, EOSHD.com is growing rapidly and I have some ideas on where to take it in the future I’d like to share with you! But first, I am excited about going to Philip Bloom’s London meet this weekend (14th August). Do come along if you can and talk about DSLRs, and shoot some great footage.

Are you from the UK and attending? Do let me know in the comments below this article, and if you can’t put a face to EOSHD.com, use the photo below and replace the background with a rainy London skyline, or see this video interview!

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

So what are the changes you can expect from EOSHD.com next month?

In September I’ll be at Photokina 2010 which only comes around every 2 years and this year is going to be exciting for a number of reasons. Firstly, it hails the dawn of the DSLR video 2nd generation. EOSHD will have a new section of the site to cover the news in Germany at first hand.

Later this month I am going to launch a project called Isgo.

Isgo.co.uk will be a creative ‘collective’ of skills. Through this a group of people will seek work and pool their talents in the areas of DSLR shooting, illustration, web design, branding and marketing. You can hire Isgo or EOSHD to shoot your project, to design your website or brand your business.

As an example – Video.Isgo will be our brand for creating adverts, music videos or corporate videos for businesses and individuals. The 2nd phase, Creativity.Isgo will allow networking of skills and for many more people throughout the world to join the collective and to seek work together as a team.

I believe the idea is really well suited to filmmaking too. I’d like to create a feature film, or a documentary by banding together lots of talented people with complimentary skills. And as the old Nike ads say – Just do it.

The DSLR revolution is the perfect excuse to do things differently.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Do you guys know that the object reflects the light, whenever it falls on the object, and once the reflected light reaches our eyes, we see it. There are a lot of facts related to light, but two most common ones are an image formed by mirrors and bending of light through lenses. In simple terms, mirror means a smooth and highly polished glass surface, through which images are formed by reflection, as the light falls on it.

On the other extreme, a lens is a part of the transparent refracting medium, (i.e. glass), bounded by two surfaces, of which at least one is spherical. It helps in the formation of images, as the light passes through the medium. In this article excerpt, you will find an in-depth discussion on the difference between mirror and lens, so have a look.

Content: Mirror Vs Lens

Comparison Chart

Basis for Comparison Mirror Lens
Meaning Mirror implies a glass surface with a silvery backing, that produces image through reflection. Lens is a transparent substance of glass or plastic, bound by two surfaces, whose at least one surface is curved.
Nature It can be plane or curved. It is usually curved, with one or both sides.
Working Principle Law of reflection Law of refraction
Equation

Definition of Mirror

The mirror is defined as a shiny glass object, with a silvery coating at its back, which reflects light and results in the formation of an image of the object, which is in front of it. It is used in our homes, to see the reflection of our face or other objects. It is of two types:

  • Plane mirror: A mirror with a flat surface is called a plane mirror. It produces virtual and erect images.
    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera
  • Spherical mirror: A mirror that has a curved surface, which is used to form a diminished or magnified image, is called a spherical mirror. It is of two types convex and concave mirror, as described below:
    • Convex Mirror: A mirror in which the reflection takes place from the curved surface is a convex mirror. In such mirrors, the inner side is painted, and the outer one is polished, which reflects the images. It is a diverging mirror that forms virtual and erect images of the object placed in the front.
      How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera
    • Concave Mirror: The concave mirror is one in which reflecting surface is curved inwards, and its face is towards the centre of the sphere. It is a converging mirror.
      How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    Definition of Lens

    Lens implies a piece of transparent material, i.e. glass or plastic, that has two opposite surfaces, one or both of which are curved. It is most commonly used for correcting the vision. Lenses are either singly used or in a combination of two or more simple lens in an optical device, so as to produce an image by converging the beam of light.

    The working of the lens is based on the principle of refraction, i.e. the light rays bend after they pass through the lens and thus their direction changes and that is why the objects visible from the lens seems larger or smaller than the actual object. There are two types of convex and concave lens, which are discussed as under:

    • Convex Lens: The surface of a convex lens is curved outwards from the centre, which converges the rays of light. Binoculars and telescope, magnifier, etc. use this type of lens.
      How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera
    • Concave Lens: Concave lens has a surface that bulges inward towards the centre, and thus it diverges the light beam. It is mainly used TV projectors.
      How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    Key Differences Between Mirror and Lens

    The points presented below are substantial so far as the difference between mirror and lens is concerned:

    1. By the term ‘mirror’ we mean a shiny piece of glass, that is polished from the back, which reflects a clear image of the object, placed in front of it. On the other hand, Lens is a transparent piece of glass, with a spherical surface, that concentrates or disperses the rays of light falling on it.
    2. A mirror is either plane or spherical. In contrast, a lens has two surfaces, at least one of which is curved inwards or outwards.
    3. As the light ray strikes the mirror, it reflects off the light in a different direction, resulting in the formation of an image. Conversely, in case of lenses, the light ray enters the medium (lens), which refracts (bends) the rays in a different direction, creating a focus, from where the rays seem to originate.
    4. To calculate the nature of images formed by a mirror and a lens, we use their equation, which is given as under:
      Mirror Equation:

      Lens Equation:

      Where v = Distance of image from the pole.
      u = Distance of object from the pole.
      f = focal length of a spherical mirror

    A tükrök nélküli kamerák egyre népszerűbbek. Ahogy az elmúlt években alakultak ki, bizonyos körülmények között nagyon hasznosak lettek.

    A tükör nélküli kamerák egyik igazán érdekes tulajdonsága, hogy a tervezésük miatt a különböző gyártók új és régi lencséit használhatja megfelelő adapterrel. Ez a „perem távolság” miatt van, amely a lencsetartó és a film sík közötti távolság. A legtöbb DSLR-ek és tükörreflexes fényképezőgépek nagyon hasonlóak a perem távolságaival (kb. 45 mm), ami azt jelenti, hogy minden adapternek nem kellően vékonynak kell lennie. A tükörmentes kameráknak a perem távolsága körülbelül 20 mm. Ez sok lehetőséget biztosít a gyártóknak. Tehát nézzük meg, hogyan lehet használni a lencsét a tükör nélküli fényképezőgépen.

    Vásároljon harmadik fél objektíveket a helyes rögzítéssel

    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    A legegyszerűbb módja a különböző objektívek használatának a tükör nélküli fényképezőgéppel valójában nem igényel semmilyen adaptert: csak a megfelelő gyártmányú külső gyártóktól vásároljon lencséket. Például a Sony Alpha sorozatú kamerái az E-mount-ot használják. A Sigma, a Tokina, a Voigtlander és a Zeiss mindegyik E-szerű objektívből áll, amelyek csak a fényképezőgéppel működnek.

    Egy dolog, hogy vigyázzon; egyes lencsék, mint például a Zeiss Loxia 35 mm f / 2, E-mount lesz, de manuális fókusz. Ez azt jelenti, hogy nem tudja használni a fényképezőgép autofókusz funkcióit.

    Sajnos a tükör nélküli kamerákhoz rendelkezésre álló harmadik féllel rendelkező objektívek még mindig nem érik el a DSLR-ek rendelkezésére álló mennyiséget.

    Vásároljon olcsó adaptert a régi kézi fókusz objektívekhez

    A kézi kézi fókuszú objektív manuális apertúrás vezérlőkkel a legegyszerűbb lencsék a tükör nélküli fényképezőgéppel való munkához. Az adapterek valójában csak a fém (vagy műanyag) hülye bitek, amelyek a perem távolságát úgy állítják be, hogy a lencse a tükör nélküli kamera film síkjára fókuszálhasson. Nem lesz autofókusz vagy elektronikus rekesznyílás-vezérlés, de különben jól fognak működni.

    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    Ez azt jelenti, hogy az 1985 előtt elõállított lencse (ezután a kameragyártók valóban elektronikus vezérlõkbe kezdtek) a legjobb ajánlat. Használhatja a Nikon és a Pentax autofókusz objektíveket is, amelyek még mindig rendelkeznek nyílásgyűrűkkel, mint például a Nikon AF FX NIKKOR 50mm f / 1.8D, de ismét autofókusz nélkül kell használni őket.

    Az adapterek, a lencsék és a kamerák kombinációja itt túlságosan széles, hogy szilárd ajánlásokat tegyek. Ehelyett meg kell próbálnod megtalálni egy jól áttekintett, olcsó fém adaptert, amely kompatibilis a lencse-rögzítővel és a fényképezőgép tartójával. Például a Photosiox 14, 95 dolláros adaptere tökéletesen illeszkedik a számlához a korábban említett Nikon objektív csatlakoztatásához a Sony Alpha fényképezőgéphez.

    Vásároljon egy „intelligens” adaptert a modern lencsékhez

    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    Ha modern autofókusz objektíveket szeretnénk használni elektronikus vezérlőkkel a tükör nélküli kamerákkal, akkor egy hülye fémfém nem vágja le. Ehelyett olyan adaptereket kell keresni, amelyek az objektívet és a fényképezőgép testét is összekötik.

    Az intelligens adapterek széles választéka áll rendelkezésre, de a legnépszerűbb kombináció a Canon EF-szerű objektívjeinek a Sony E-mount tükrök nélküli kameráihoz való csatlakoztatása. Ha egy tükrök nélküli rendszert vásárol, és szeretné, hogy a legtöbb opció legyen, akkor ez az út. Az alacsony végponton a Photosiox Pro Fusion Adaptert 99, 95 dollárért kaphatja meg, míg a csúcspontban a Canon EF EF objektívje a Smart E adapterhez (ötödik generáció) 399 dollárért. Mindkét adapter nagyrészt ugyanazt teszi, bár a Metabones adapternek van néhány további szolgáltatása, amely jobban szabályozhatja, hogyan működnek együtt a lencse és a kamera.

    Minden más kombináció esetén javasoljuk, hogy keresse meg a Photosiox adaptert, ha a költségvetés tudatos, vagy a Metabones adapter, ha valamit közelebb akar a felső véghez. Ha nem találja meg az egyiket, akkor a legjobb tanácsot adom, hogy egy kis kutatást végezzek, és megvásárolják a legjobb értékű adaptert a fizetendő áron. Várja, hogy a legtöbb beállított összegért 100 és 500 dollár között fizet.

    Megjegyzés a sebességfokozókról

    Az egyenes felfelé tartó adapterek mellett, ha azt kutatjuk, hogyan kell különböző lencséket csatlakoztatni a tükör nélküli kamerákhoz, akkor „Speed ​​Boosters” lesz. Amellett, hogy a lencsét a fényképezőgéphez csatlakoztatja, növelik a maximális rekesznyílást is. Vannak azonban számos hátrány.

    Először is, a sebességnövelők sokkal drágábbak, mint a hagyományos adapterek. A Metabones Canon EF a Sony E-Mount Speed ​​Booster-hez (ötödik generáció) 649 dollárba kerül, ami teljes 250 dollárral több, mint a hagyományos adapter.

    Másodszor, a sebességnövelők csak a terményérzékelővel (APS-C) és a Micro 4/3 tükör nélküli kamerákkal működnek. Ha van egy teljes képkocka tükör nélküli fényképezőgépe, akkor APS-C kompatibilitási módban kell használnia, amely digitálisan csökkenti az érzékelő rögzítési területének méretét.

    Ha van egy APS-C vagy Micro 4/3 tükör nélküli fényképezőgépe, és nem bánja a többletköltséget, menjen előre, és fontolja meg a sebességnövelő adapter beszerzését egy kevésbé gyenge fényerő érdekében. Másrészt, ha van egy teljes képkocka tükör nélküli fényképezőgépe (vagy azt tervezi, hogy frissíteni szeretne), vagy az ár egy kicsit ostoba, csak kap egy rendszeres adaptert.

    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    I t is so easy to live stream content to a community of like-minded people. Today, more than ever, streaming has proven to be more than just connecting a community for education, an impromptu Q&A session, gaming or entertainment—it’s a vital way that we’re keeping connected with each other.

    Using a compatible Nikon camera—Z series mirrorless or DSLR—gives you the ability to stream high quality video on a global scale. More than just the quality of the optics available in NIKKOR lenses, the features and functionality of Nikon mirrorless and DSLR cameras gives you a range of creative options to utilize in recording a live stream.

    Use a fast aperture lens, such as a 50mm f/1.8 lens for its shallow depth-of-field to separate yourself or your “talent” from the background. It also lets you declutter a busy background by blurring it at such a wide aperture or use a wider lens to capture more of the ambiance of your location.

    Getting Started Live Streaming with your Nikon Camera

    First, you need to decide if you want a quick and easy connection via USB or if you’re looking for a more high quality connection via HDMI. Your choice will depend upon what you’re using the streaming for and how elaborate you want to get with your set-up.

    In addition to your camera and lens, you’ll need a few items.

    A fully charged battery or Nikon AC Adapter. The AC Adapter will allow you to run the stream without interruption, for longer than just the battery could. Remember, if you opt to go with the AC Adapter, you will need both the Power Supply Connector and the AC Adapter. Your camera’s user’s manual will note which ones are compatible with your model.

    To connect using USB, you’ll need plug and play streaming software for your computer’s operating system along with the provided USB cable.

    To connect using HDMI, you’ll need a third party signal capture device and video conferencing software, along with an HDMI cable.

    Whichever route you choose, you may also want a tripod to steady the camera and keep it at eye level and a constant light source for nice, even illumination of your set. If you go with the HDMI route, an optional lavalier mic will provide clean audio, especially if you plan on moving around once you’ve started streaming

    Once you’ve got everything connected, based on the instructions provided with the gear, you can then go live via Facebook Live, Twitch, Zoom, YouTube or WebEx.

    Liucija Adomaite and
    Denis Tymulis

    Perception is reality until proven otherwise. But our perception may change in an instant depending on exactly how much we know. Recently, two Danish photographers have taken this idea to a whole new level.

    In these times of fake news, it’s hard to know what’s real anymore. Media manipulation is rife in some of the largest reporting outlets around the world. How do we know, from the pictures alone, that biased news articles and stories aren’t secretly being fed to us? It turns out, we can’t.

    Photographers Ólafur Steinar Gestsson and Philip Davali conducted an experiment for the photo agency Ritzau Scanpix. The Copenhagen-based artists used their cameras and certain optical illusions to capture the same people chilling out outside on the same day. The trick was to use two different lenses — a wide-angle lens and a telephoto lens — to create certain perspectives. Their photography techniques show a staggering difference in the perceived distance between these people. It makes us wonder if the journalism code of ethics is always being followed by photographers too.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Windows 8 has a feature where you can login to your Windows account using a 4-digit PIN. This PIN can consist of any number and is useful if your normal login password is too complicated to type on the virtual keyboard in a tablet. When using a 4 digit PIN there are a total of 10,000 combinations and it should be noted that using touch can leave fingerprints or smudges that may make it easier for people to determine your PIN. Therefore, this feature should only be used if necessary or for limited periods of time when your tablet is not connected to a keyboard.

To enable a PIN password, type pin at the Windows 8 Start Screen and then click on the Settings category as shown below.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

When the search results appear, click on the Create or change PIN option to open the User Settings screen.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

On the above screen click on the Create a PIN button. You will now be shown a screen asking you to confirm the password for the current account that you are configuring to use a PIN.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Enter the password for the currently logged in account and then press the OK button. You will now be shown a screen where you will need to create the PIN that you would like to use to login to your account.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

A PIN is a 4 digit code that can consist of only numbers. With this said, a valid PIN is 1921. An invalid PIN would be 8a2& as it contains characters and symbols, which are not allowed. When creating the PIN you are also allowed to use the same number twice. To create your PIN, enter the same 4 digit PIN in each of the fields. Once you are done entering your PIN, click on the Finish button. Your PIN will now be activated and ready to use when you login to Windows.

When you next login to your account you will now be presented with a prompt to enter your PIN.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Simply enter your 4 digit PIN and you will be logged into Windows. If you forget your PIN, you can click on the Sign-in options link and click on the key icon. This will bring you back to a normal textual password prompt where you can use your normal password to login.

If at any time you wish to remove the PIN you can go back into the User settings screen and click on the Remove button as shown in the image below.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

If you have any questions regarding this process, please feel free to ask us in the Windows 8 Forum.

Users who read this also read:

How to enable PIN sign-in for domain users in Windows 8

Windows 8 has a feature where you can use a 4 digit PIN to sign-in to your Windows account. If you are a domain user, though, this feature is disabled by default. It is possible, though, for an Administrator to enable a policy that allows this feature to be used by domain users.

How to disable the lock screen after waking in Windows 8

When you wake up Windows 8 after it has gone to sleep, you will be presented with the lock screen. You will then have to enter your password to start using Windows 8 again. For those who feel that their computer is in a secure environment, this feature can be annoying as it requires a few extra steps to get back to what you are doing. This tutorial will explain how you can disable the requirement .

How to use a picture password in Windows 8

Windows 8 includes a feature called picture passwords that allow you to login to your account by using gestures on an image with your finger or your mouse. This is especially useful for tablets where you want to avoid typing if you can. Instead of typing in a password, you select a picture and then create three gestures on it to act as your password. When you create the picture password you can .

How to enable the F8 key to start Safe Mode in Windows 8

Windows 8 introduced a new boot loader that decreased the time that it takes Windows 8 to start. Unfortunately, in order to do this Microsoft needed to remove the ability to access the Advanced Boot Options screen when you press the F8 key when Windows starts. This meant that there was no easy and quick way to access Safe Mode anymore by simply pressing the F8 key while Windows starts. Instead in .

How to disable picture passwords in Windows 8

Windows 8 has has a feature called password pictures where you can login to your Windows account by performing certain gestures on a picture. If you would not like this feature to be available for your users, you can disable it via a group policy.

You can try the following steps to resolve this issue.

  1. Click on the “ sign in options” in the lock screen.
  2. Click on “number pad” icon.
  3. Now the sign in option will change to Pin.

Hope this helps.

Please post back if the issue persists and we will be glad to assist you further.

Report abuse

5 people found this reply helpful

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

I have this problem too. Where would I find the ‘sign in options’

the only options I have are ‘go’ (the arrow you click after typing in your password/pin

ease of access and shut down

thanks in advance

Report abuse

12 people found this reply helpful

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

near the password blank look down

if this works please vote

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

Dear Windows user

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

You can find the signn in option under the password field in the lock screen.

Please post back if you face any issues related to Windows and we will be glad to assist you further.

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

Karthik, thanks for the advice.. What you said is what I generally so, however there isn’t that option this time

any other ideas?

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

If you have a different user account on the computer, I suggest you to create a PIN for that other user account and check if you are getting sign in options in that user account.

Please post back with the status of the issue and we will be glad to assist you further,

Entering your full password on a touch screen device can really become a pain in the neck, luckily for us we can link a short 4 digit PIN to our user account and log in with that instead.

Note: PIN codes are nowhere near as safe as using an alphanumeric password, however, they do still have a purpose when you don’t want to enter your 15 character password on a touch screen device.

Creating a PIN

Press the Win + I keyboard combination to bring up the Settings Charm, then click on the Change PC settings link.

This will open up the Modern UI PC Settings app, where you can click on the Users section.

On the right hand side you will see a Create a PIN button, click on it.

Now you will need to verify that you are the owner of this user account by entering your password.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Then you can choose a PIN, remember that it can only contain digits.

Now when you get to the login screen you will have the option to use a PIN.

It’s impossible there is pin code asked if you don’t set it.

Did you see the logon screen as below?

If yes, click another Sign-in options as below:

input normal password to sign in.

Karen Hu
TechNet Community Support

  • Proposed as answer by ZigZag3143x Friday, May 30, 2014 11:30 AM
  • Marked as answer by Michael_LS Monday, June 9, 2014 1:12 AM

All replies

It’s impossible there is pin code asked if you don’t set it.

Did you see the logon screen as below?

If yes, click another Sign-in options as below:

input normal password to sign in.

Karen Hu
TechNet Community Support

  • Proposed as answer by ZigZag3143x Friday, May 30, 2014 11:30 AM
  • Marked as answer by Michael_LS Monday, June 9, 2014 1:12 AM

After some update last night, Windows asked for my PIN at login, even I never set it up.

And I am on a domain, which means PIN is not even in use!

I had to go to the PIN settings and remove it, and now setting a PIN is grayed out.

So it is possible to get a PIN question even when you have never set it up.

When you buy a new Windows 10 computer, out of the box, it will default to having you enter your Outlook or Microsoft account password every time you sign in. This can be a hassle, especially if you have a long, secure, and complicated password.

Thankfully, Windows has several other ways you can sign in to your laptop that are a little simpler. We’ll walk you through how to adjust your settings and opt into signing in using a PIN, your fingerprint, or picture password. (Facial recognition is also available, but only on specific Windows 10 systems.) We’ll also show you how to remove your password altogether (although, to keep your device secure, we recommend that you go with one of the options above rather than eliminating any kind of sign-in).

Windows 10 also gives you the option to use a physical security key (usually a USB key) to sign in, but you’ll have to purchase that key separately. Here are the methods you can use to sign in without any additional equipment.

To access your sign-in settings:

  • Click on the Windows icon in the bottom-left corner of your screen to open up the Start menu
  • Click the cog icon to open settings
  • Click “Accounts”
  • Click “Sign-in options”
  • Here, you can adjust how to sign in to your device. You can add a sign-on method by clicking on the option and then “Add.” And you can disable any of these options by clicking on the option and then “Remove.” You may be prompted to enter your Microsoft account password in order to remove an option.
  • You can also adjust when your device asks you to sign in again after you’ve been idle. Under “Require sign-in,” you can select a range of options, from every time the system has gone dark to if it’s been dark for 15 minutes. You can also select “Never.”

Using the drop-down options, you can adjust how long your device waits until asking you to sign in again.

To set up a PIN:

  • Click “Windows Hello PIN”
  • Click “Add”
  • A window titled “Create a PIN” will open up. Click “Next.”
  • You’ll then be asked to enter your Microsoft password. Enter it in, and click “Sign in.”
  • Choose a PIN and enter it in both boxes. The default requirement for the PIN is that it only contains numbers. If you want to use letters and symbols as well, you can check the box in the bottom of the window.
  • You can change your PIN later by clicking on “Windows Hello PIN” then “Change.” Enter your old PIN and then your new PIN twice.

You’ll have to enter your old PIN before entering and confirming your new PIN.

To use your fingerprint to sign in:

  • Click “Windows Hello Fingerprint”
  • Click “Set up”
  • Windows Hello will open up. Click “Get started.”
  • If you’ve already set up your PIN, you’ll be prompted to enter it in here
  • Next, you’ll be asked to your raise your finger and place it on the fingerprint scanner repeatedly

You will need to lower and raise your finger on the sensor repeatedly so it can capture your fingerprint.

  • Then, you’ll be asked to do the same, angling your finger differently each time
  • If you haven’t done so already, you’ll then be asked to choose a PIN as a backup. Click “Set up PIN” to continue.

Windows will recommend you set up a PIN as a backup.

To set up a Picture Password:

Microsoft’s picture password option allows you to use a sequence of gestures paired with a picture to sign in. Instead of using a PIN or password, you’ll have to draw on a picture.

  • Click on “Picture Password” in “Sign-in settings”
  • Click “Add”
  • You’ll be taken to the picture password setup page and asked to enter your Microsoft account password into a pop-up window
  • Click “Choose picture”
  • A window will open, and you’ll be able to browse through your photos. Select a picture, and then click “Open.”
  • Click “Use this picture” to proceed or “Choose new picture” to select a different picture
  • You’ll then be asked to draw three gestures — lines, circles, and taps — on the image. To sign in, you’ll have to repeat the gestures in the same order and in the same position on the image.
  • Then you’ll have to confirm your picture password by doing those same three gestures again. If you can’t remember, click “Start over.”
  • Click “Finish” on the next screen to complete setup.

You’ve finished setting up your picture password.

To remove a password altogether:

Typing in your password can be a hassle, which is why there are alternative sign-in methods. If you want to go an extra step further, you can remove your password altogether. (Of course, disabling your password altogether is a security risk — using at least a simple PIN is a better move.)

Please check to see if the guard below would help:

Microsoft Passport guide

Please remember to mark the replies as answers if they help, and unmark the answers if they provide no help. If you have feedback for TechNet Support, contact [email protected]

At the launch of Windows 10, the operating system supported three Hello types: PIN, Facial recognition. AND Fingerprint recognition.

Before you can use Windows Hello to enable biometrics on a device, you must choose a PIN as your initial Hello gesture. After you’ve set a PIN, you can add biometric gestures if you want to. You can always use the PIN gesture to release your credentials, so you can still unlock and use your device even if you can’t use your preferred biometric because of an injury or because the sensor is unavailable or not working properly.

So the answer here is no, there is no way to disable the PIN, instead, we could change it, at least for the current situation.

Please remember to mark the replies as answers if they help, and unmark the answers if they provide no help. If you have feedback for TechNet Support, contact [email protected]

  • Marked as answer by Entegy MVP Monday, October 26, 2015 2:01 PM
  • Proposed as answer by Olivier Martin (omartin) Tuesday, September 20, 2016 12:43 AM
  • Unproposed as answer by Olivier Martin (omartin) Tuesday, September 20, 2016 12:43 AM
  • Proposed as answer by martin.mcz Friday, December 16, 2016 12:54 AM
  • Unproposed as answer by Entegy MVP Tuesday, February 12, 2019 11:56 PM
  • Proposed as answer by martin.mcz Friday, December 16, 2016 12:54 AM

In Windows 10, PIN login is part of the new Microsoft Passport feature (described here) and is more secure than a traditional password. In particular:

Microsoft Passport provides strong 2FA, fully integrated into Windows, that replaces reusable passwords with the combination of a specific device and a Hello or PIN. Microsoft Passport isn’t just a replacement for traditional 2FA systems, though. It’s conceptually similar to smart cards: authentication is performed by using cryptographic primitives instead of string comparisons, and the user’s key material is secure inside tamper-resistant hardware. Microsoft Passport doesn’t require the extra infrastructure components required for smart card deployment, either. In particular, you don’t need a PKI if you don’t currently have one. Microsoft Passport combines the major advantage of smart cards — deployment flexibility for virtual smart cards and robust security for physical smart cards — without any of their drawbacks.

A PIN is not more secure than their domain account password that expires and has enforced complexity. It’s simpler, and just another thing for the user to remember.

I can completely understand a PIN requirement on a phone or a personal computer, but not on a domain-joined computer.

Microsoft Passport for Work offers complexity settings that match password complexity. In the release after RTM it will also include Expiration and History settings.

The term ‘PIN’ is used generally, but it can contain any combination of upper and lower case alphanumeric, special character and/or digits as defined in the complexity settings under Computer Configuration -> Administrative Templates -> Windows Components -> Microsoft Passport for Work.

The PIN in Windows 8.1 was a convenient logon option for consumers that offered little security and has been replaced in Windows 10. The ‘PIN’ in Microsoft Passport is more secure than passwords because there is no shared secret that can be harvested from a stolen server. The PIN is the primary gesture that Windows Hello requires. The PIN allows the system to gain access to the private/public key or certificate that is attested as being bound to the hardware TPM. The private key never leaves the device and all the server has is a copy of the public key on the user account. This is two-factor authentication much like virtual smart card. The user must type the correct ‘PIN’ in order to gain access to the keys in TPM. Having the ‘PIN’ won’t help unless the person also has access to the device.

Here is a good document outlining the benefits of Microsoft Passport.

When you use PIN you can define the length and the PIN is only stored in the very secure Passport on your local machine. If you use TPM you cant even extract it. This is the 2nd factor (machine plus another factor) to avoid Passwords. With passport we get rid of these as they are risky to use especially in areas where you can not make sure that a man in the middle attack would start or even when you are in an internet cafe.

We are now in a world where passwords alone are not anymore sufficient.

Checkout also this blog entry.

Since the private key is in the hardware TPM, each time the PIN is setup on a different machine, the pin can be different. So it is not only remembering the pin but also which pin belongs to which particular logon on a particular machine.

Love to see defenses to PtH, but right now, an employee needs access to this machine to do something productive. There must be some GPO or registry setting to disable for now.

The current state is really bad. Nobody is going to convince me, that a simple PIN is more secure than a complex password. Especially since the PIN can only be a numeric sequence, as Windows 10 won’t let you use anything else than numbers.

I take security very seriously – two factor authentication is the minimum standard for me, I use VPN everywhere, I have TPM chips and full encryption enabled on all my devices. Recently I bought Surface Pro 4 with Hello facial recognition and a fingerprint scanner on the type cover, upgrading from my previous SP3. And I am very disappointed thanks to this enforced policy. The PIN, as it is defined now, is much easier to steal than a full password – for example when a hidden camera is watching you – while you log in with it. Storing the PIN inside the TPM is no argument. You can store the MS Account password there as well. If the only other place where the MS Account password is stored is the MS cloud, then it should be completely safe. Are you trying to tell me it’s not? Because if someone’s able to breach the MS cloud security, then then don’t really need access to my device, as they already have access to all the sensitive info in the cloud.

Please, allow us to use the MS Account password instead of the PIN! The PIN is useless.

Kris Sednek

If you want a startup password then you need to edit the settings in gpedit.msc. then in there you click administrator templates, windows components, bitlocker drive encryption, and then operating system drives. The three policies that i enable are as follows:

require additional authentication at startup

enable use of bitlocker authentication requiring preboot keyboard input on slates

allow enhanced PINs for startup.

this will allow you to have startup authentication with a Password longer that 4 characters.

2 Replies

For Bitlocker, a PIN is more secure than a password, but there’s an option to enable “enhanced PINs” which allow letters, up to 10-20.

Kris Sednek

If you want a startup password then you need to edit the settings in gpedit.msc. then in there you click administrator templates, windows components, bitlocker drive encryption, and then operating system drives. The three policies that i enable are as follows:

require additional authentication at startup

enable use of bitlocker authentication requiring preboot keyboard input on slates

allow enhanced PINs for startup.

this will allow you to have startup authentication with a Password longer that 4 characters.

This topic has been locked by an administrator and is no longer open for commenting.

To continue this discussion, please ask a new question.

Spark! Pro Series – 26 April 2022

Today in History: 26 April 1514 – Copernicus makes his first observations of Saturn 1859 – Dan Sickles is acquitted of murder on grounds of temporary insanity – 1st time this defense used successfully in the US.

Snap! Emotet botnet, Win10 update, hospital hacked, & burger-flipping robots

Your daily dose of tech news, in brief. You need to hear this. The Emotet botnet is back, and it has some new tricks to spread malware Another day, another malware. Although this one is an old one learning new tricks as the Emotet malware phi.

Office 365 & Win XP

OK before all the comments about running XP still, I need help with an issue.I am forced to run a windows XP box to connect to and control some production machines that cost 300K to upgrade and replace, so that’s out of the question currently. It has been.

Windows Server 2019 VMs randomly losing partial network connectivity

Hello, we are seeing an issue which has had us scratching our heads for many months now with regards to some Windows Server 2019 VMs losing connectivity.We have four servers running Windows Server 2019 Standard on top of Hyper-V as gen 2 VMs. They also ea.

Best way to migrate file server

I need to move/upgrade our file server. Currently on 2012 (non R2). Just want to make sure this is still the best/easiest way since it was posted several years ago. Need to keep share/permissions in tact. Can I just. -Build new vm-add reg keys (from .

Walter Glenn
How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8Walter Glenn
Former Editorial Director

Walter Glenn is a former Editorial Director for How-To Geek and its sister sites. He has more than 30 years of experience in the computer industry and over 20 years as a technical writer and editor. He’s written hundreds of articles for How-To Geek and edited thousands. He’s authored or co-authored over 30 computer-related books in more than a dozen languages for publishers like Microsoft Press, O’Reilly, and Osborne/McGraw-Hill. He’s also written hundreds of white papers, articles, user manuals, and courseware over the years. Read more.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

A picture password is an alternative to typing regular passwords when signing into Windows 10. Setting one up is pretty easy, and we’re going to walk you through it.

Windows 8 and Windows 10 each brought in new ways of signing into your account. You now have options like signing in using a PIN or a picture password built into your basic account options. With the right add-on hardware, you can use Windows Hello to sign on with a fingerprint or even your webcam. And that’s all in addition to the unified login across devices you get when you use an online Microsoft account rather than a local user account.

What Is a Picture Password?

The picture password offers a way to sign in that’s easier than remembering and typing a long password, more friendly to touchscreen devices, and honestly a little more fun in general. You sign in by drawing shapes, tapping the right points, or making the right gestures over an image that you choose in advance.

Picture passwords are as secure as PINs, which is pretty secure. The data is stored locally, so someone must have your device to use them. But you must keep in mind that picture passwords and PINs aren’t really intended to provide an extra layer of security. At sign in, you always have the option of using your regular password instead of the picture password or PIN you have set up. All you have to do is click the “Sign-in options” text and then choose which way you want to sign in.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Put more simply: Picture passwords are easier and quicker, and offer an equivalent level of protection—but not any added protections—to passwords.

Keep in mind, though, that tapping and drawing gestures on screen leaves behind oils and other smears. In the right light at the right angle, someone might be able to decode your gestures—but a quick wipe of the screen after drawing your password should alleviate this.

How to Set Up a Picture Password

Setting up a picture password is pretty straightforward. Just hit Windows+I to bring up the Settings window and then click “Accounts.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

On the “Accounts” page, select the “Sign-in options” tab on the left and then, on the right, click the “Add” button in the “Picture Password” section.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Windows will ask you to verify that you’re the owner of the account by entering your password. Type your password and click “OK.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

In the “Picture Password” window, click the “Choose Picture” button. Using the Open/Save As dialog box, locate and select the picture you want to use. It will look best if you use a high resolution, full screen image.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

After choosing the picture, click the “Use this picture” button to continue or click the “Choose new picture” button if you want to try something else.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Next, you’re going to draw three gestures on the picture. You can click and drag to draw a simple shape like a circle or triangle or you can just click to create a tap. As you draw each gesture, you’ll see the numbers move from one to three. In this example, for the first two gestures, I’m drawing circles that match the lenses of the glasses and a final tap on the nose.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

After drawing your three gestures, you’ll be asked to draw them all again to confirm the password. If you mess up at any point while drawing or confirming the gestures, just click the “Start over” button to try again.

After you’ve successfully confirmed the gestures, click “Finish” to implement your new picture password.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Now, when you sign in, your sign-in screen will look something like the example below. Just draw your gestures on the picture and Windows will sign you right in.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

You can also click “Sign-in options” if you prefer to sign in using another method like a PIN or regular password. Windows will remember the last sign-in method you used and present that as the initial option on your next sign-in.

  • › How to Set a Custom Logon Screen Background on Windows 7, 8, or 10
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8 Walter Glenn
Walter Glenn is a former Editorial Director for How-To Geek and its sister sites. He has more than 30 years of experience in the computer industry and over 20 years as a technical writer and editor. He’s written hundreds of articles for How-To Geek and edited thousands. He’s authored or co-authored over 30 computer-related books in more than a dozen languages for publishers like Microsoft Press, O’Reilly, and Osborne/McGraw-Hill. He’s also written hundreds of white papers, articles, user manuals, and courseware over the years.
Read Full Bio »

Unless you disable the password login completely (not recommended) you’re going to have to type in a password every time you start Windows 8.x. But what if you could log into Windows with a four-digit pin number? Maybe it’s not a secure as logging in with a 14-character password, but it’s much better than turning off password log in all together.

If you’d like log into Windows 8x with a four-digit pin, follow the instructions below:

Open the PC Settings Charm from the Charms Bar (Windows Key + C)

Click on Accounts and click Sign-in Options (See below).

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Under PIN click “Add” (I’ve already added a PIN so my option says “Change” instead of Add). When you click Add under PIN you’ll be prompted to verify your Windows Password.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Enter a 4-digit PIN (see image below), verify it, then click Finish. The next time you restart Windows 8.x you’ll be prompted to enter your PIN. If you ever forget your PIN, you will be redirect to the normal password prompt and you can log in by typing in your password.

Pins aren’t to increase the security of your machine, they are to increase the security of your microsoft account.

Pins are for logging into the particular machine/account combination, and passwords CAN be for this, but also can be (and what microsofts wants) be multiplatform/cloud based (microsoft account) wide.

Therefore, using your microsoft account to log into the computer creates a point of vulnerability for something much larger than just that computer. If that password is compromised, a person has access to all of your platforms, and a vast amount of data.

If your pin is compromised, they only have access to that one computer, and perhaps your one drive.

There are also procedure issues. Because people want to log on convienently, they may make easy password. But because microsoft accounts are online and always vulnerable, AND worthwhile targets, it should never have a simple password. Pins relieve this conflict, and so increase security of microsoft accounts this way as well.

EDIT: Reading some posts made me realize that a lot of people missed a basic feature of the PIN. The login PIN is only enterable by someone who is physically present.

The PIN, like biometrics (the other login feature added to win10) requires the operator to be physically in possession of the device, and manually interface with it. So, brute forcing your PIN is a slow and bloody fingers affair, and the PIN can complement other features like a security camera. So, the PIN is highly secure by design.

by that same note if you make it so that only your PIN, and not your microsoft account, worked to logon to the machine, then switching to a PIN would make your machine more secure. But, as it stands, if your microsoft account is compromised, then the attacker can access your machine without knowing your PIN. This, coupled with the PIN being technically (though not meaningfully,) easier to guess manually, is why your PIN does not increase the security of the machine. PINs increase the security of your microsoft account, which, defacto, increases the security of the machine.

If you want no exposure to microsoft account vulnerability, I believe you have to setup the PC with only a locally stored login. That local only login/password would be more secure than a PIN.

IF you hear of someone logging in with a PIN remotely, then PINs become a huge liability until patched, and you should immediately disable it. no human enterable number is going to be secure against a brute force attack.

How to Enable or Disable PIN Expiration in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key to sign in and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately. You can specify the number of days that a PIN can be used before the user will be asked to change it. Here is how it can be done.

How to Enable or Disable PIN History in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key to sign in and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately. You can specify the number of past PINs that can’t be reused for a user account. Here is how it can be done.

Configure Minimum and Maximum PIN Length in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key to sign in and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately. If you need to change your PIN complexity requirements, here is how it can be done in Windows 10.

Change PIN For a User Account in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to even press the Enter key and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately. If you need to change your PIN, here is how it can be done in Windows 10.

Remove PIN For a User Account in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key when logging in and it is a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be immediately signed in to your Windows 10 account.
If you need to remove your PIN, here is it can be done in Windows 10.

Reset PIN For a User Account in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key when logging in and it is a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be immediately signed in to your Windows 10 account.
If you forgot your PIN, here is how to reset the PIN for your account in Windows 10.

Add a PIN to a User Account in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to even press the Enter key and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately.

If you’re tired of having to remember or reset your password, try using Windows Hello or a FIDO 2–compliant security key to sign in to your Microsoft account instead. All you’ll need is a device running Windows 11 and the Microsoft Edge browser. (This functionality is not available yet on Xbox or phones.)

What is Windows Hello?

Windows Hello is a more personal way to sign in, using your face, fingerprint, or a PIN. You can use Windows Hello to sign in to your device on the lock screen and sign in to your account on the web.

What is a security key?

A security key is a physical device that you can use instead of your user name and password to sign in. It may be a USB key that you could keep on your keychain, or an NFC device like a smartphone or access card. Since it’s used in addition to a fingerprint or PIN, even if someone has your security key, they won’t be able to sign in without your PIN or fingerprint.

Security keys are usually available for purchase from retailers that sell computer accessories.

How to sign in with Windows Hello

Follow these steps to set up Windows Hello and then sign in to your Microsoft account in Microsoft Edge:

Select Start > Settings > Accounts > Sign-in options.

Under Ways to sign in, select a Windows Hello item to add.

To add Windows Hello as a sign in method for your Microsoft account:

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > Advanced security options.

Select Add a new way to sign in for verify.

Select Use your Windows PC.

Follow the instructions to set up Windows Hello as a method for signing in.

How to sign in with a security key

There are different types of security keys that you can use, like a USB key that you plug in to your device or an NFC key that you tap on an NFC reader. Make sure to familiarize yourself with the type of security key you have by reading the instruction manual from the manufacturer.

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > More security options.

Select Add a new way to sign in or verify.

Identify what type of key you have (USB or NFC) and select Next.

You will be redirected to the setup experience where you will insert or tap your key.

Create a PIN (or enter an existing PIN if you have already created one).

Take the follow-up action by touching either the button or gold disk if your key has one (or read the instruction manual to figure out what else it might be).

Name your security key so that you can distinguish it from other keys.

Sign out and open Microsoft Edge, select Use Windows Hello or security key instead, and sign in by inserting or tapping your key.

Note: Your security key manufacturer might provide software that can help you manage your key, such as by changing the PIN or creating a fingerprint.

Manage your keys

Follow these steps to delete keys that you have set up for your account:

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > Advanced security options. Manage your security keys under Ways to prove who you are.

If you’re tired of having to remember or reset your password, try using Windows Hello or a FIDO 2–compliant security key to sign in to your Microsoft account instead. All you’ll need is a device running Windows 10 Version 1809 or later and the Microsoft Edge browser. (This functionality is not available yet on Xbox or phones.)

What is Windows Hello?

Windows Hello is a more personal way to sign in, using your face, fingerprint, or a PIN. You can use Windows Hello to sign in to your device on the lock screen and sign in to your account on the web.

What is a security key?

A security key is a physical device that you can use instead of your user name and password to sign in. It may be a USB key that you could keep on your keychain, or an NFC device like a smartphone or access card. Since it’s used in addition to a fingerprint or PIN, even if someone has your security key, they won’t be able to sign in without your PIN or fingerprint.

Security keys are usually available for purchase from retailers that sell computer accessories.

How to sign in with Windows Hello

Follow these steps to set up Windows Hello and then sign in to your Microsoft account in Microsoft Edge:

Go to the Start menu and select Settings .

Go to Accounts > Sign-in options.

Under Manage how you sign in to your device, select a Windows Hello item to add.

To add Windows Hello as a sign in method for your Microsoft account:

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > More security options

Select Add a new way to sign in for verify

Select Use your Windows PC

Follow the dialogs to set up Windows Hello as a method for signing in.

How to sign in with a security key

There are different types of security keys that you can use, like a USB key that you plug in to your device or an NFC key that you tap on an NFC reader. Make sure to familiarize yourself with the type of security key you have by reading the instruction manual from the manufacturer.

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > More security options

Select Add a new way to sign in or verify

Identify what type of key you have (USB or NFC) and select Next.

You will be redirected to the setup experience where you will insert or tap your key.

Create a PIN (or enter an existing PIN if you have already created one).

Take the follow-up action by touching either the button or gold disk if your key has one (or read the instruction manual to figure out what else it might be).

Name your security key so that you can distinguish it from other keys.

Sign out and open Microsoft Edge, select Use Windows Hello or security key instead, and sign in by inserting or tapping your key.

Note: Your security key manufacturer might provide software that can help you manage your key, such as by changing the PIN or creating a fingerprint.

Manage your keys

Follow these steps to delete keys that you have set up for your account:

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > More security options and under Windows Hello and security keys, select Manage your sign-in methods.

  • How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  • Members
  • 1 posts
  • OFFLINE
  • Local time: 03:19 PM

BC AdBot (Login to Remove)

  • BleepingComputer.com

#2 AngryRaisin

  • Members
  • 235 posts
  • OFFLINE
  • Gender: Male
  • Location: Orange County, CA, US
  • Local time: 12:19 PM

there should be a keypad looking button under the password box and if you click that it should allow you to enter in your pin instead of you password.

#3 SomeChuck

  • How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  • Members
  • 1 posts
  • OFFLINE
  • Local time: 04:19 PM

I have the same problem as OMGreally does Above with a Twist. I too, can remember my Windows PIN and not the Password to Login to my Windows 8 Laptop. The problem is, there is NO Keypad or Key Symbol, Icon or Picture under the Box or Line to type the Password In. Is it still possible to change the Sign In Line or Box requiring the Password to Require the PIN instead? I do have a Microsoft Account but, do not use it to Login. Of course this type of thing only happens when you are under the gun to get something done. Any HELP would be Greatly Appreciated ! 

#4 Nyana

  • How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  • Members
  • 5 posts
  • OFFLINE
  • Local time: 10:19 PM

You can set a PIN code here:

– Go to your Charms bar (hover mouse to upper-right corner of screen)

– Go to Settings (cogwheel)

– Go to Change PC Settings (bottom-right most option)

– Go to Accounts

– Go to Login Options (not sure what the English term is as I am using a different language OS)

Windows Hello feature of Windows 11 allows you to use a PIN instead of a password. Using Windows Hello feature, one can set a PIN, facial recognition, or fingerprint to sign in to their account.

Microsoft says PIN is more secure than a password on a Windows 11 PC. However, if you have forgotten your Windows Hello PIN and want to reset it, then this gearupwindows article will guide you. Windows allows you to reset your saved PIN using the Settings app quickly. That means you don’t need a third-party password resetting disk.

Windows allows you to reset the PIN using two methods: from the sign-in screen or after login into your account. However, we will show the steps to reset the PIN from the Windows Settings app after login into your account.

How to Reset a PIN in Windows 11?

If you know the valid local or Microsoft online account password, then use the following steps to reset your account PIN:-

Step 1. First, sign in to your Windows 11 machine using a local or Microsoft online account.

Step 2. Then open the Settings app by hitting Windows + I keys on the keyboard.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Step 3. When the Settings window opens, hit the Accounts category in the left sidebar.

Step 4. After that, click the Sign-in options button on the right sidebar.

Step 5. Next, select the tile PIN (Windows Hello) under the ‘Ways to sign in’ section on the ‘Sign-in options’ settings page.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Step 5. When the “PIN (Windows Hello)” option expands, click the link I forgot my PIN beside “Related links.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Step 6. Now a pop-up window will open. Verify your account by entering the password and hitting the OK button.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Step 7. After verifying your account, a new pop-up window will appear. Here, you can enter your new PIN. Once done, click the OK button.

My password is very long, so I’d rather just use a PIN when locking my computer. However Windows 8 keeps asking me to enter my password instead of PIN.

Do you use the Simulator in VS2012? When it launches, it resets your “last-used” login method to password.

F**k, really? That might just explain why mine seems to randomly change back to password.

Do you use Remote Desktop frequently? On my desktop, Windows always uses the most recently used login method, but when I used Remote Desktop, it always reverts to password until I change it.

Nope. Just lock it.

What’s the point in having a very long password if you just want to use a PIN?

I use a Microsoft account, so I can’t just make it a shorter password.

Remote logon vs being at home.
I don’t mind having a 20+ character password to type in when I’m somewhere else, just makes it that much harder for people see what I’m typing. However, a 4-digit PIN on a numpad is a lot easier to see.

Because when you try to access the computer through the network, you need to use the long password. It’s pretty hard to physically bruteforce the PIN.

I can’t find any official documentation on this, but it appears PIN and picture passwords are only supported in the logon screen. Not in an UAC privilege escalation screens, store account logins or the like.

All of the new enhancements to the accounts in Windows are horribly half-assed attempt by Microsoft in my opinion. The only thing worse is the 16 character password limit for cloud-based account logins.

How to use an alternate password for a Windows 10 Live account

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

If you choose to connect your Microsoft Live account to your Windows 10 user profile, it automatically applies a password lock to your screen. The password you need to enter to unlock your system is the same password you use to log in to your live account. If you don’t like entering your live account password every time you unlock your system, you can set an alternate password for a Windows 10 live account and use it to log in to your desktop.

This alternative password for a Windows 10 real account is actually a built-in feature of Windows 10. In fact, it was also a part of Windows 8/8.1. You can set a PIN or picture password and use it to log in instead of entering your real account password.

Alternative password for Windows 10

To set up a picture PIN or password, open the Settings app and go to the Accounts group of settings

Select the ‘Login Options’ tab and choose one of two alternative password options; Picture PIN or password.

Device-specific passwords

If you have more than one Windows 10 machine, you can set a different picture PIN or password for each one. This particular type of password is not synced between devices. It’s just another bit of added security because the PIN, by default, is only four digits long and can be memorized. If you enter the same one on every machine you have, you will surely notice. Alternatively, you can change it so that the PIN includes alphabets as well. Doing so will extend the length of your PIN beyond the default 4 digits.

The settings screen for setting up the PIN says that you can use it to sign in to apps and services. If you’re concerned, this means your PIN can be used to log into your live account in, say, a browser, don’t be. This PIN will only work on the system it is configured for.

The feature doesn’t say which apps or services you can sign into with the PIN, and apps like Skype and Xbox still ask you to enter your real account password. If you have two-factor authentication enabled, the code will need to be sent to your phone or email to complete the login process.

An added benefit of using a PIN is that once you enter it, you don’t have to hit the Enter key. This applies only to four-digit PINs and not to alphanumeric ones. It’s a small advantage, but you’ll be surprised how quickly you get used to it.

How do you unlock your device if you forgot your password?

Choose Restore. On stock Android and most Android phones, turn off the device, then press and hold the Volume Down and Power (Sleep/Wake) buttons simultaneously to reboot the phone into a special diagnostics mode. Tap Volume Down to highlight Recovery Mode option, then Power to select it.

Can’t open my laptop with my password?

Use the hidden administrator accountStart up (or re-start) your computer and press F8 repeatedly.From the menu that appears, choose Safe Mode.Key in “Administrator” in Username (note the capital A), and leave the password blank.You should be logged in to safe mode.Go to Control Panel, then User Accounts.

How do I unlock my HP computer if I forgot my password Windows 7?

Steps to reset password on HP laptop using Windows Password Reset:Boot the computer and press and hold your BIOS entry key immediately the screen comes on. Use the directional keys to navigate to the “Boot” tab. Highlight the password reset media and using the “+” and “-“ keys, bring it up to the top of the list.

How do I reset my HP computer from lock screen?

Use one of the following methods to open Windows Recovery Environment:Restart your computer and immediately press the F11 key repeatedly. The Choose an option screen opens.Click Start . While holding down the Shift key, click Power, and then select Restart.

How can I wipe my computer without administrator password?

If you are locked out of your laptop and cannot access system, click the Power button on login screen while keep pressing shift button. Then select Troubleshoot > Reset this PC. If you can access your PC, click on the Start button > Settings > Update & Security and Reset this PC.

How do I reset my laptop without a removable battery?

Re: How to perform a power reset from a non removable battery laptop? With that type of laptop you can power reset it by shutting it down, remove all cables and any peripheral devices then hold the power button in for 15 – 20 secs. When you restart it, you may get a Start up menu to select restart normally.

Microsoft’s Windows 10 operating system ships with several means of authentication, including Pin authentication to sign in to the operating system.

Most Windows 10 users are probably using passwords, either for a local or Microsoft account, to sign in to devices running Windows.

Windows 10 ships with several alternative options to sign in to a user account, namely Pin, Windows Hello and Picture Password.

One question that may come to mind is why one would want to use different authentication means, and the answer to that question is convenience, and potentially limiting access if the data falls into the wrong hands as well.

A pin is not really more convenient than a password, apart from not having to tap on the enter-key to sign in after entering the pin if you set it up to be secure.

The main advantage however is that pins are linked to devices which means that they cannot be used to access the Microsoft Account online, or sign in to other devices the user has access to using it. For local accounts, it does not really make a difference unless the password is used elsewhere as well.

A Pin is mostly useful in situations where others may see what you enter when you sign in to the operating system, and not really beneficial at all in terms of security when no one is around and the screen is not recorded.

Setting up a Pin on Windows 10

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

To set up a Pin on Windows 10 which you can use to sign in on the device, do the following:

  1. Use the keyboard shortcut Windows-I to open the Settings application on the system.
  2. Navigate to Accounts > Sign-In options.
  3. Locate the Pin section on the page.
  4. Click or tap on the add button.
  5. Enter the account password for verification.
  6. Type the new pin you want to use, and confirm it. Only numbers can be used to set the Pin of which at least four need to be selected. There is probably an upper limit as well, but the system had no issues with a 32 digit pin

You may use the same configuration screen to change or remove the pin again from the device.

Pin Complexity Policies

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Microsoft added several policies to Windows 10 to change the complexity of the Pin. The Group Policy is only available on Pro and Enterprise versions of Windows 10.

  1. Tap on the Windows-key, type gpedit.msc and hit enter.
  2. Navigate to Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Microsoft Passport for Work > Pin Complexity.

These policies allow you to configure custom Pin complexity rules, for instance that the Pin should contain upper or lowercase characters, special characters, or needs to be of a minimum length.

Require Digits

If you enable or do not configure this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work requires users to include at least one digit in their PIN.

If you disable this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work does not allow users to use digits in their PIN.

Require Lowercase Letters

If you enable or do not configure this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work requires users to include at least one uppercase letter in their PIN.

If you disable this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work does not allow users to use digits in their PIN.

Maximum Pin Length

Maximum PIN length configures the maximum number of characters allowed for the PIN. The largest number you can configure for this policy setting is 127. The lowest number you can configure must be larger than the number configured in the Minimum PIN length policy setting or the number 4, whichever is greater.

Minimum Pin Length

Minimum PIN length configures the minimum number of characters required for the PIN. The lowest number you can configure for this policy setting is 4. The largest number you can configure must be less than the number configured in the Maximum PIN length policy setting or the number 127, whichever is the lowest.

Expiration

This setting specifies the period of time (in days) that a PIN can be used before the system requires the user to change it. The PIN can be set to expire after any number of days between 1 and 730, or PINs can be set to never expire if the policy is set to 0

History

This setting specifies the number of past PINs that can be associated to a user account that can’t be reused. This policy enables administrators to enhance security by ensuring that old PINs are not reused continually. PIN history is not preserved through PIN reset.

The value must be between 0 to 50 PINs. If this policy is set to 0, then storage of previous PINs is not required.

Require special characters

Use this policy setting to configure the use of special characters in the Microsoft Passport for PIN. Allowable special characters are: ! ” # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ `

If you enable this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work requires users to include at least one special character in their PIN.

If you disable or do not configure this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work does not allow users to use special characters in their PIN.

Require uppercase letters

If you enable this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work requires users to include at least one uppercase letter in their PIN.

If you disable or do not configure this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work does not allow users to use uppercase letters in their PIN.

Resources

The following resources offer additional information about the use of PINs on Windows 10.

Hello,
BitLocker provides three different types of character based key protectors for operational system drives. I have assumed that these differ as follows:

PIN: Only numeric characters; no minimum length
GP Element: “Require additional authentication at startup”

Enhanced PIN: Numeric characters, letters, symbols; no minimum length
GP Element: “Allow enhanced PINs for startup”

Password: Numeric characters, letters, symbols; Introduced configurable minimum length of at least 8 character
GP Element: “Configure use of passwords for operating system drives”

Unfortunately, I have now discovered that the length set for the password is not enforced when PIN+Enhanced PIN+Password is enabled.

Can someone please explain what the difference between the three protectors is and what influence the two Group Policy elements “Configure use of passwords for operating system drives” and “Configure minimum PIN length for startup” have?

3 Answers

  • Sort by Created Created
  • Sort by Oldest Oldest
  • Sort by Votes Votes

PIN: A user-entered numeric key protector that can only be used in addition to the TPM.
Enhanced PIN: A user-entered alphanumeric key protector that can only be used in addition to the TPM.
Recovery password: A 48-digit number used to unlock a volume when it is in recovery mode. Numbers can often be typed on a regular keyboard, if the numbers on the normal keyboard are not responding you can always use the function keys (F1-F10) to input the numbers.
Recovery key: An encryption key stored on removable media that can be used for recovering data encrypted on a BitLocker volume.
More detail see BitLocker key protectors and BitLocker authentication methods.

Configure use of passwords for operating system drives:
This policy controls how non-TPM based systems utilize the password protector. Used in conjunction with the Password must meet complexity requirements policy, this policy allows administrators to require password length and complexity for using the password protector. By default, passwords must be eight characters in length. Complexity configuration options determine how important domain connectivity is for the client. For the strongest password security, administrators should choose Require password complexity because it requires domain connectivity, and it requires that the BitLocker password meets the same password complexity requirements as domain sign-in passwords.
More on: Configure use of passwords for operating system drives

Configure minimum PIN length for startup:
This policy setting is used to set a minimum PIN length when you use an unlock method that includes a PIN.
More on: Configure minimum PIN length for startup

While Microsoft recently made an unprecedented change to the way Windows 10 cumulative updates would be rolled out from May 2020, that doesn’t mean version updates are a thing of the past. The next version of Windows 10 is expected to arrive this month, or possibly next, and bring with it some changes to security options that will surprise many. Microsoft wants users to stop using passwords and start using PINs. Yes, you read that right.

On March 10, Microsoft corporate vice-president, Yusuf Mehdi, announced that more than one billion people were using Windows 10. No great surprise there. When, on March 24, Microsoft announced that it was pausing all optional, cumulative, non-security updates to Windows 10 from May 2020, that raised a few eyebrows, but nothing more. Upping the surprise stakes, however, is the realization that the next incarnation of Windows 10, currently known to insiders as 20H1 or 2004, and which might well still reach ordinary users this month, wants you to replace passwords with PINs.

The Windows 10 20H1 update will likely bring with it a whole bunch of feature tweaks impacting everything from Cortana to Bluetooth connectivity and improvements to Notepad. So far, so meh. Where things get a lot more interesting for me are the changes that Microsoft is expected to make to security options. Reading through the latest Windows Insider Program notes for the Windows 10 20H1 build, reveals that Microsoft is continuing with its move towards a passwordless future for all users.

Swapping passwords for PINs

The insider notes for Windows 10 20H1 Build 18936 include details on how Microsoft is pushing for passwordless sign-in to Microsoft accounts on devices. This will be optional, by way of Settings|Accounts|Sign-in options using the new settings app that is slowly but surely replacing the old control panel. There will be an option here to “Make your device passwordless,” that Microsoft promises will improve security and provide a more seamless sign-in experience. “This will strengthen your device sign-in by switching all Microsoft accounts on your device to modern multifactor authentication with Windows Hello Face, Fingerprint, or PIN,” the Microsoft documentation states, “eliminating passwords from Windows.”

Score 5% Back In Your Top Spending Category With New Citi Custom Cash Card

Avoid These 6 Target RedCard Mistakes for Strong Savings

This requirement to use Windows Hello sign-in for Microsoft accounts will be the recommended option.

Meanwhile, Windows 10 20H1 Build 18995 brings with it, the Microsoft insider release notes reveal, another “step forward in our Passwordless journey.” That step is one that adds Windows Hello PIN support to signing-in when using safe mode.

Is a PIN more secure than a password?

All of this could leave you a little confused and wondering how a PIN can be more secure than a password? The key is understanding what the PIN protects here and how a PIN actually works in this context. Forget the idea that a four-digit PIN has to be less secure than a 25-character password, as that is missing the point. A point that Microsoft itself drives home in a 2017 posting: “The PIN is tied to the specific device on which it was set up. That PIN is useless to anyone without that specific hardware.” It’s a second factor, in other words, the first being physical access to the Windows 10 device itself. If someone compromises your Microsoft account password, they can log into your Windows 10 computer from anywhere. If they compromise, guess, steal, your PIN, then they still need access to the machine itself. The PIN itself is never transmitted to the server as it’s local to the Windows 10 device, so it cannot be intercepted during transit or stolen from a compromised remote server. In other words, this move makes your Microsoft account more secure rather than making your Windows 10 device more secure, although the one leads to the other.

A bold step in the right direction

“In my view, the idea of separating physical access authentication and network access authentication is a really good idea,” Ian Thornton-Trump, CISO at Cyjax, says, adding that “users like PINs!” Anything that can harden remote access while making physical access simpler is a good move, according to Thornton-Trump. “This seems like a great way to reduce the remote attack surface,” he says, concluding, “We will need to see how the researchers go after the new feature, but I think this is a bold step in the right direction.”

Benj Edwards
How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8Benj Edwards
Associate Editor

Benj Edwards is an Associate Editor for How-To Geek. For over 15 years, he has written about technology and tech history for sites such as The Atlantic, Fast Company, PCMag, PCWorld, Macworld, Ars Technica, and Wired. In 2005, he created Vintage Computing and Gaming, a blog devoted to tech history. He also created The Culture of Tech podcast and regularly contributes to the Retronauts retrogaming podcast. Read more.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

By default, whenever you set up a “Windows Hello” login method such as a fingerprint reader, facial recognition scan, or PIN, Windows 10 will disable the password login method. If you’d like to log in to your Windows account with a password again, here’s how to get that option back.

First, open Settings. Click the “gear” icon in your Start menu or press Windows+i on your keyboard to open it quickly.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

In Settings, select “Accounts.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

In “Accounts,” look in the sidebar and select “Sign-in options.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

In “Sign-in options,” scroll down until you see “Require Windows Hello sign-in for Microsoft accounts.” Flip the switch beneath it to “Off.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

After that, close Settings. The next time you log out or lock the screen (Press Windows+L to lock the screen quickly if you’d like to test.), you’ll have the password sign-in option available to you again. Best of all, you can still use the Windows Hello sign-in options if you want.

  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8 Benj Edwards
Benj Edwards is an Associate Editor for How-To Geek. For over 15 years, he has written about technology and tech history for sites such as The Atlantic, Fast Company, PCMag, PCWorld, Macworld, Ars Technica, and Wired. In 2005, he created Vintage Computing and Gaming, a blog devoted to tech history. He also created The Culture of Tech podcast and regularly contributes to the Retronauts retrogaming podcast.
Read Full Bio »

During the setup or upgrade of Windows 10, you might be presented with a screen titled ‘Passwords are so yesterday’ after you sign in with a Microsoft account. With it, Microsoft makes the claim

“Using a PIN is faster and more secure than a password – we think you’ll love it.”

This seems contradictory to all that we have learned about passwords like the longer and the more complex, the better.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

This setting has actually been available since Windows 8 but I and many others managed to avoid using a Microsoft account until Windows 10’s tighter integration.

So, how is a short 4-6 number PIN better or stronger to use than a 14 character password? It’s not. Straight-up 4 digits versus 14 characters including mixed case, numbers, and special characters, the PIN doesn’t stand a chance.

However, it’s important to note that Windows 10’s use of a PIN is not a replacement for a password. You establish your PIN after signing in to your Microsoft account with your user name and password. You then create your PIN as a secondary authentication to your Microsoft account but, the trick is that it only works from your device.

You proved you are who you claim to be by entering your password. Now, Microsoft knows you sign into this device. It then uses the PIN as almost a two-factor authentication piece.

With physical access to your device, it is unlikely the malicious person will be able to access your account. PINs are configured for anti-hammering, which means after 5 incorrect attempts, it is locked out. The PIN is also more likely to be adopted than a strong password, so this might be an improvement in security for many people. This also protects your Microsoft account, which has access to more things. If your PIN is compromised, it is to a single device. Using a PIN increases the security of your Microsoft account, not your computer.

If you would like to enable a PIN, you can find it under Settings, Accounts, Sign-in options. You can also take advantage of Windows Hello to use your fingerprint, face, or iris as another means to sign in with an alternative to using a password.

Instead of trying to remember a long and complex password, try switching to passphrases. Learn why they’re important and how they work.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
Image: designer491, Getty Images/iStockphoto

Must-read security coverage

  • Best encryption software 2022
  • The 10 best antivirus products you should consider for your business
  • 8 enterprise password managers and the companies that will love them
  • Security incident response: Critical steps for cyberattack recovery (TechRepublic Premium)

Passwords were invented in the mid 1960s at MIT, and more than half a century later, they have aged about as poorly as expected. Passwords remain a cumbersome bane of IT departments and users alike. It’s frustrating having to remember or rotate them, and if they’re too simple they put users and data at risk by being easily cracked or guessed. If they’re too complex, there’s a higher chance of users forgetting them, fat-fingering them too many times and locking out their accounts or—worst of all—writing them down somewhere and keeping them with the device being used.

Password complexity is a well-meaning requirement; it generally entails requiring passwords to be a specific length and contain three out of four elements:

  • lower case letters
  • UPPER CASE LETTERS
  • Numbers
  • Special characters such as [email protected]#$%^&*()_+

As a result, you’ll likely end up with something like this:

That doesn’t look very fun to type, much less remember.

Enter the passphrase, which can eliminate much of these headaches. A passphrase is a sentence rather than a collection of random characters or mutated words (“[email protected]” for “bar” for instance). It can be something like:

I love B0st0n in the Spring! (note use of zeroes in the word “Boston” to fulfill complexity requirements)

However, you should be cautious about using passphrases based on commonly known things about you. The above ideas aren’t ill-advised, but if your dog’s name is Thunder the passphrase “My dog’s name is Thund3r” definitely would be.

Even better would be the use of a nonsensical word. As I gaze around my office I see an engraved bat from Cooperstown, NY, and a basket my wife uses to store stuff. So, I could create this passphrase:

There is a BatBasket 1n my @ffice

Then, when you envision your passphrase, a picture of a bat in a basket should come to mind, helping mnemonic retention.

You shouldn’t have much trouble remembering passphrases, but another way to ensure you’ll remember is to create a matrix with random words:

The passphrase is listed in this matrix; 2-5-3-1-3-2-5-4 is a key which represents the position of the proper word on each line. Print this matrix out, and you will never forget the passphrase.

Even better, IT departments provisioning accounts or systems for new hires or resetting passphrases or configuring replacement systems for new hires (operations which are often conducted remotely these days due to the pandemic, which has necessitated shipping equipment to offsite workers) can include this matrix and then separately text them the key to determine the passphrase.

This is admittedly a poor man’s two-factor-authentication solution, but far preferable to sending passphrases directly through email, text, or instant messaging apps, all of which can be compromised, especially since users have a tendency not to delete such notifications.

Passphrases don’t have to be mandated by your organization for you to take advantage of them; so long as there is no onerous maximum character limit for passwords you can start using passphrases today. The passphrase I specified above is 33 characters including spaces, so even if there were a character limit of 20, you could still use “BatBasket 1n my [email protected]” for instance.

Finally, you can also store passphrases in a password manager such as Password Safe or KeePass. I wrote an article a while back on how to properly use KeePass, and the same principles apply.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Cybersecurity Insider Newsletter

Strengthen your organization’s IT security defenses by keeping abreast of the latest cybersecurity news, solutions, and best practices.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Want to log into Windows 10 without using a password? Want to skip the login screen altogether? Prefer to boot straight into the desktop rather than have to log in every time you start your computer? This tutorial will show you how.

As Microsoft gradually woke up to the security requirements of businesses and home users, they built password login into Windows. That’s great for enterprise, schools, colleges and families who share a computer but not so much for individual users. Yes it’s a simple step but it stops you booting your computer without having to be there and is something that gets in the way or work, surfing, play or whatever you use your computer for.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Log into Windows 10 without a password

Microsoft doesn’t officially condone automatic login but doesn’t act against it either. It’s your computer, you should be able to use it your way. You can configure Windows 10 to skip the login screen altogether if you’re confident nobody can access your computer who you don’t trust.

Here’s how to do it. You will need to be logged in with an Administrator account to make this work.

  1. Press the Windows key + R to bring up the Run dialog.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  2. Type ‘control userpasswords2’ and hit Enter.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  3. Select your account from the center box.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  4. Uncheck the box above that says ‘Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer’.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  5. Select OK.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  6. Enter your username and password to verify.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  7. Select OK.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

There’s another way to achieve the same goal.

  1. Type ‘netplwiz’ into the Windows Search box and hit Enter.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  2. Select Netplwiz Run Command from the menu.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  3. Select your username and uncheck the box as above.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  4. Confirm your identity and hit OK.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Now when you reboot your computer, it will skip the login screen and load straight into the Windows desktop.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

How to reset a forgotten password in Windows 10

The problem with skipping the login screen in Windows 10 is that you can quickly forget your password. As it is tied to your Microsoft account, that can prevent you accessing Outlook Live and other Microsoft entities. If that happens to you, a reset is what you need.

The same process applies whether it’s your Windows 10 password or Microsoft online password. Unless you’re using a Local User Account on your computer, you’re going to need to reset your password at some point.

    .
  1. Select I forgot my password option and follow the wizard.

Once complete and Microsoft has verified your account, you can use your new password to log into Microsoft websites and your computer. You will need to change it on your computer as well as the two are tied together. You will be prompted to do this though.

When skipping the Windows 10 login screen is not a good idea

If you live alone or trust those who live with you, it should be safe to skip the login screen when you boot into Windows 10. If you share a house, room in a dorm or live with people you’re not sure about, it’s a good idea to eschew convenience for a little more security.

If you use your computer for work, it should always be locked. Even if you’re a freelancer and work from home, if you have business insurance that protects against data theft or loss, disabling the login screen to your computer can be against the terms and conditions of that insurance. Plus, it’s good practice to protect customer data.

The above process enables anyone to load your computer, access all your files and folders, access your Outlook email and any other email accounts you tie to the Mail app and access any apps you have installed on your computer. If you’re at all unsure of how secure your computer will be, it makes sense to leave the login screen in place.

If you don’t want to use a password, you can use a PIN instead. Microsoft recently introduced a PIN feature that can replace a password. If you’re better with numbers than with words or letters, this might work better for you.

  1. Right click the Windows Start button and select Settings.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  2. Select Accounts and Sign-in Options.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  3. Select Add under PIN to set a PIN.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  4. Enter your existing Microsoft password to confirm.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  5. Select Finish.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Now you can use a PIN number instead of a password to access your computer. It will appear at the login screen but could be easier to remember than a password and is definitely better than nothing!

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Spotify is such a useful way to instantly access your music library wherever you are. But what if the albums you want to listen to aren’t on there? PLUS, wouldn’t it be useful if any backing tracks you wanted to play along with could be accessed instantly from your mobile device? Then you could play them through your amp, or jam along with them at a friend’s house … the possibilities are endless.

I have a number of music tuition books with backing track CD’s included. None of these are available in the Spotify library. But I have discovered that you can upload music tracks to Spotify easily. And then you have access to them on all your devices – Android and iOS. If you have the following then you can do it too.

  • Premium Spotify Account (cannot be done with free version)
  • Media files (eg MP3’s already available on your desktop computer – import from CD’s into your music library)
  • All devices logged into the same WiFi network
  • All set? Here is a complete step-by-step guide to how to add any song or music track to your Spotify library

Step-by-Step Video Tutorial

Time needed: 10 minutes.

How To Add Music Tracks To Spotify – Step by Step

    Sign into your Spotify Premium Account

This process is only available to Premium Spotify account holders

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Make sure you have imported CD tracks or any other MP3 files you want to add to your Spotify library – they need to be available locally on your desktop computer

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

For this to work, your computer and mobile devices need to be signed in to the same WiFi network

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Open up the Spotify desktop app on your Mac or PC. You can access the Settings menu on either by clicking the arrow next to your name in the top right hand corner of the screen

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Within the Spotify settings, navigate to Local Files and toggle the switch to show local files

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Click the button to Add a Source, and then navigate to the folder where you have media files on your Mac or PC that you want to upload to your Spotify library

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

When you have located the folder of files, simply click Open to add the new files to Spotify

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Now you have added the desired folders, navigate back to your Spotify library

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Click to ‘Create Playlist’ or navigate to the playlists in your Spotify library and click Add new

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Name the Playlist, and maybe upload a square image too so that it is easily identifiable

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Go to your Spotify library, and then click the local files square (on Mac)

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

On a Windows PC, the link to local files appears in the list on the left hand side of your screen

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Now you have navigated to the local files folder in Spotify, use a search term to display the files you wish to add to your playlist

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Click the first file at the top of the list, then shift-click the file at the bottom of the list to highlight the specific files you want to include in your Spotify playlist. Now right-click and choose ‘Add to Playlist’

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

The playlist is now available to play locally on your Mac or PC

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Open up the Spotify app on your Android mobile device. The playlist will show up in your library. To access the files on your Android device you need to toggle the switch in the playlist to download all the tracks

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

The process is almost identical on your iOS device. You need to navigate to the playlist in your library, then download the files. The button looks different on iOS, but the process is the same

All done! You can now access the files you have added to your Spotify library wherever you are. Either on your desktop mac or PC, or on the go via your mobile device. Enjoy.

I already loved Spotify, this just made me like it a little bit more. It’s a very useful facility. And one I use a lot …

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Do you have a large music library of MP3s on your computer?

Connect via WiFi to your Computer or media Drive and play your music files from your iPhone or iPad using MusicStreamer, rediscover your music today.

Create or import your Playlists, and cast your Music collection to Chromecast, AirPlay and Alexa Devices.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Easy setup

Use our in-app setup wizard to connect to Windows, Mac, network or WiFi drive and browse to your music collection.
Music Streamer will do the rest.

Scan your WiFi network for your home computers or network drives.

Connect and log in. Select your music folder. No third party software is needed.

Start streaming your music and import your playlists. Cast to speakers around the house.

You can also connect to multiple music libraries such as your home collection or a WiFi drive in the car.

Browse by Artist, Album or Song

Browse by artists and their albums or select album view and use pinch to zoom to show your album art.

Import Playlists

Import your existing playlists into MusicStreamer from iTunes.

Create Playlists

Create unlimted new playlists in MusicStreamer.

Export Playlists

You can even export your new playlists back to iTunes.

Powerful Search

Search everything or limit your search to Albums, Songs, Artists or even File names.

Filter by Genre

Picking by Genre is a great way to start playing your music whether you are in the mood for Blues, Jazz, Heavy Metal or Classical especially if you have a large music library.

Offline Mode

Download any Song, Album or Playlist

Take your music with you, download any song, album or even entire playlists to listen to while you are offline.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Cast Music to your Speakers

Don’t want to buy an expensive Sonos system?
Use AirPlay, Bluetooth or Chromecast to stream to your existing speakers.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

AirPlay

Cast your Music to your AirPlay enabled devices or speakers.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Alexa

Stream your Music to your Alexa device via bluetooth.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Chromecast

Cast your Music to Chromecast devices including multi-room.

Multi-room support

If you have more than one Airplay2* or Chromecast device, you can stream your music to multiple devices around the house. Use Chromecast Multi-room to setup speaker groups within your home, or simply select multiple Airplay2 enabled speakers and cast to the living room and the kitchen.

The Echo Dot is Amazon’s inexpensive yet highly functional home automation device. Echo Dot is compatible with nearly every Alexa product and most other automation services, such as your security system, thermostat, and lighting. The device is versatile and compact, and it makes the perfect virtual assistant for anyone.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

One of the most popular uses for the Echo Dot is a music control system. It’s truly empowering to be able to sit in any room of your house, have the urge to hear a particular top 40 song, and just say, “Hey Alexa! Play
Save Your Tears by The Weeknd.”

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

However, while Amazon would like it very much if you would get all your music through its premium services, the fact of the matter is that you can configure your Echo Dot to work with pretty much any music service out there, including Apple Music, Spotify, Google Play Music, and more.

There are a few different ways to get free music from your Echo Dot:

  • Link a free music service to your Dot through the Alexa app.
  • Play music from a linked device through your Dot.
  • Play music in your own personal library through the Dot.

This article shows you how to play free music on your Echo Dot using the three different options above, so you can kick back and enjoy your Top 40 hits or bask in some favorites from the past! Let’s get it started in here!

Use Free Trials & Free Subscriptions in Echo Dot

When you purchase your Echo Dot, you can sign up for Amazon Music Unlimited. While this service offers over 60 million songs for $9.99 per month after a three-month free trial, you can take advantage of the free option with limited listening capabilities. If you’re looking to use the Amazon Unlimited Free Trial, you won’t pay anything until the 90-day trial expires. You can cancel the service before the trial ends, of course.

Most music subscription services offer a free trial for new users. As long as your email account is not already associated with the service, a free trial awaits you!

Link a Third-Party Music Service to Your Echo Dot

As you might expect, your Echo Dot starts with Amazon Music as the default music player. So, if you have a Prime membership, you can leave it there because the music isn’t costing you anything aside from your Prime subscription costs.

However, if you don’t have Prime Music or prefer to use a different streaming service, hook your Dot up to the desired music provider and its source of free music. There are several free services with built-in Alexa integration, including iHeartRadio, Pandora, and TuneIn. You can also link to the free tiers of Spotify and Apple Music as well.

  1. Open the Alexa app on your phone or computer.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  2. Select “Settings,” then “Music & Podcasts” under the “ALEXA PREFERENCES” section.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  3. Choose “Link New Service” under the “SERVICES” section. The items listed underneath are already usable.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  4. Select your music provider from the list of remaining services.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  5. Follow the wizard to add logins or set as default.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

The ‘Link New Service’ feature includes many of the more popular music services, but it does not include all of them. Regardless, setting up your Echo Dot to use a third-party music service is as easy as following the simple steps listed above.

Use a Linked Device to Play Free Music on Your Echo Dot

The other way to play free music on your Echo Dot is through a linked device such as a smartphone. You pair your phone (or another Bluetooth-enabled device) to your Echo Dot via Bluetooth and use your Echo as the speaker for the music you’re streaming from your phone.

Pairing is very straightforward, but it requires the Alexa app installed on the device. Just follow these steps to get started:

  1. Make sure Bluetooth is enabled on your phone.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  2. Open the Alexa app on your phone.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  3. Using your phone, say the words, “Alexa, pair” aloud where Alexa on the Echo Dot hears it.How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  4. Select the “Echo Dot” on the Bluetooth screen of your phone.
  5. Say “Alexa, connect” to link your phone and the Echo Dot.
  6. Play music from any source on your phone to hear it on your newly connected Alexa Dot.

These six simple steps are all it takes to pair your Echo Dot to another Bluetooth-enabled device. For a better audio experience, here’s how to pair your Echo Dot with a Bluetooth speaker.

Play Your Own Music Through Your Echo Dot

If you have an extensive media library on your device, you can use Plex Media Server to organize it and to stream it anywhere in your home, including your Echo Dot. We have a complete walkthrough of setting up Plex with the Amazon Echo if you need more details on the process.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Final Thoughts

The Echo Dot is one of the more useful household tech items. Depending on the devices you already have, you can play music, link to other speakers, set your thermostat, and even start your car.

Free music isn’t as challenging to come by as it once was. There’s no more waiting for hours and risking malware to download your favorite hits from Napster. Instead, most music services give you the option to play free music with ads and limited skips. So if you’re in it to saving money, these free music streaming options are an excellent solution for you!